8 Suggested Answers Pe II Cost Accounting Part I

SUGGESTED ANSWERS
TO
QUESTIONS
SET AT THE
INSTITUTES EXAMINATIONS
MAY, 1981 NOVEMBER, 2008
A COMPILATION
PROFESSIONAL EDUCATION
(COURSE II)
PAPER 4A: COST ACCOUNTING
BOARD OF STUDIES
THE INSTITUTE OF CHARTERED ACCOUNTANTS OF INDIA
NOIDA
2.2
CONTENTS
Page Nos.
CHAPTER 1 Basic Concepts and Product Cost Sheet 1.1 1.52
CHAPTER 2 Materials 2.1 2.89
CHAPTER 3 Labour 3.1 3.70
CHAPTER 4 Overheads 4.1 4.110
CHAPTER 5 Activity Based Costing 5.1 5.40
CHAPTER 6 Non-integrated, Integrated & Reconciliation 6.1 6.77

of Cost and Financial Accounts
CHAPTER 7 Job Costing & Batch Costing 7.1 7.8
CHAPTER 8 Contract Costing 8.1 8.42
CHAPTER 9 Operating Costing 9.1 9.34
CHAPTER 10 Process & Operation Costing 10.1

10.69
CHAPTER 11 Joint Products & By Products 11.1

11.43
CHAPTER 12 Cost Audit 12.1 12.8
CHAPTER 13 Cost Accounting ( Records) Rules 13.1 13.4
CHAPTER 14 Uniform Costing 14.1 14.8
CHAPTER 15 Inter-firm Comparison 15.1 15.4
CHAPTER 16 Cost Reduction & Cost Control 16.1 16.2

2 .3
1
BASIC CONCEPTS & PRODUCT COST SHEET
Question 1
SV Ltd. Is a manufacturing company which has a sound system of financial
accounting. The management of the company therefore feels that there is no
need for the installation of a cost accounting system. Prepare a report to the
management bringing out the distinction between cost and financial accounting
system and the need for the introduction of a sound cost accounting system.
Answer
The Managing Director,
S.V. Ltd.
New Delhi
Subject : Establishment of a Cost Accounting System
Sir,
During the course of our discussion with you last month, you mentioned
that your company did not require a cost accounting system as it had a sound
financial accounting system. After our discussion with you, we had an
opportunity to study the products, processes of manufacture, organisation and
selling and distribution methods of your company-which is a manufacturing
company. We have come to the conclusion that your company certainly requires
a cost accounting system. To strengthen further our view-point, we give our
report by bringing the distinctions between the two systems as below:
The financial accounting system of a company mainly serves as a useful
source of information to owner/shareholders/creditors and for tax purposes. It
does not provide adequate help to the executives working in the organisation.
The information provided by the financial accounting system serves no useful
purpose from the view-point of planning, control and decision making. The
2.4
absence of required information renders planning, control and decision making

extremely difficult. On the other hand, cost accounting system was evolved as a
supplementary accounting method mainly to serve the needs of management.
Cost accounting system can provide at a regular interval, the needed information
to the concerned executives to perform the functions of planning, control and
decision making.
The financial accounting system shows the trading results of the company as
a whole; it does not answer the question why there is an increase or a decrease
in profit or loss. The principle of matching costs with revenues under a costing
system not only indicates the profit or loss of each product, but would also show
the correct value of closing inventory. Thus costing system helps financial
accounting system too. Under financial accounting system the financial
statements are prepared only at the close of the accounting period. Such
statements do not provide day-to-day co st information for evaluating the
efficiency of the concern. But cost accounting system can supply every possible
cost information to management for managerial control. Under cost accounting
system by using standard costing the variances between predetermined and
actual costs can be determined. These variations and their causes speaks about
the concerns operating efficiency and inefficiency.
In financial accounting system no attempt is generally made to record data
by jobs, processes, products, departments etc. It only provides information in
terms of income, expenses, assets and liabilities for the company as a whole.
Thus the available information is not very useful for the ascertainment of price,
control of costs, ascertainment of product profitability etc. Cost accounting
system records data in the manner that helps the ascertainment of price and
profitability and also the control of costs by using variances.
Government in its efforts to protect consumers, often resorts to statutory
price control. Cost accounting system can help by providing enough cost
information which could be utilised to press upon the government to convince
for price and to arrive at a suitable price before their arbitrary fixation of it.
It is apparent from the above discussion that detailed and analytical
information cannot be had from existing financial accounting system. We
therefore strongly recommend the need for the introduction of a sound cost
accounting system in your concern.
Yours faithfully,
X . Y.& Co.
Chartered Accountants.
2 .5
Question 2
(a) Define the terms cost centre and cost unit.
(b) Given below is a list of ten industries. Give the method of costing and the
unit of cost against each industry.
(i) Nursing Home
(ii) Road Transport
(iii) Steel
(iv) Coal
(v) Bicycles
(vi) Bridge Construction
(vii) Interior Decoration
(viii)Advertising
(ix) Furniture
(x) Sugar company having its own sugarcane fields.
2.6
Answer
(a) Cost Centre
The term cost centre is defined as a location, person or an item of
equipment or a group of these for which costs may be ascertained and used for
the purposes of cost control. Cost centres can be personal cost centres,
impersonal cost centres, operation cost centres and process cost centres.
Cost Unit
The term cost unit is defined as a unit of quantity of product, service or time
(or a combination of these) in re lation to which costs may be ascertained or
expressed. It can be for a job, batch, or product group.
(b)
Industry Method of costing Unit of cost
(i) Nursing Home Operating Per Bed per week or per day
(ii) Road transport Operating Per Tonne Kilometer or per
mile
(iii) Steel Process Per Tonne
(iv) Coal Single Per unit
(v) Bicycles Multiple Each unit
(vi) Bridge construction Contract Each contract
(vii) Interior Decoration Job Each Job
(viii) Advertising Job Each Job
(ix) Furniture Multiple Each unit
(x) Sugar company having Process Per Quintal/Tonne
its own sugar-cane
fields
Question 3
Distinguish between
(i) Cost Unit and Cost Centre
(ii) Cost Centre and Profit Centre
(iii) Bill of material from a material requisition note.
2 .7
Answer
(i) Distinction between Cost Unit and Cost Centre
The term Cost Unit is defined as a unit of quantity of product, service or
time (or a combination of these) in relation to which costs may be ascertained or
expressed. It can be for a job, batch, or product group.
The term Cost Centre is defined as a location, person or an item of
equipment or a group of these for which costs may be ascertained and used for
the purposes of Cost Control. Cost Centres can be personal Cost Centres,
impersonal Cost Centres, operation cost and process Cost Centres.
Thus each sub -unit of an organisation is known as a Cost Centre, if cost can
be ascertained for it. In order to recover the cost incurred by a Cost Centre, it is
necessary to express it as the cost of output. The unit of output in relation to
which cost incurred by a Cost Centre is expressed is called a Cost Unit.
(ii) Cost Centre and Profit Centre
A Cost Centre is the smallest segment of activity or the area of responsibility
for which costs are accumulated. A Profit Centre is that segment of acti vity of a
business which is responsible for both revenue and expenses and discloses the
profit of a particular segment of activity.
Important points of distinction between Cost Centre and Profit Centre are as
below:
(a) Cost Centres are created for accounting convenience of costs and their
control. Whereas a profit centre is created because of decentralisation
of operations.
(b)A Cost Centre does not have target costs but efforts are made to
minimise costs, but each profit centre has a profit target and enjoys
authority to adopt such policies as are necessary to achieve its targets.
(iii) Bill of Material and Material Requisition Note
Bill of Material: It is a comprehensive list of materials with exact description
and specifications, required for a job or other production units. This also
provides information about required quantities so that if there is any deviation
from the standards, it can easily be detected. It is prepared by the Engineering or
Planning Department in a standard form.
Material requisition Note: It is a formal written demand or request, usually
from the production department to store for the supply of specified materials,
2.8
stores etc. It authorises the storekeeper to issue the requisitioned materials and
record the same on bin card.
The purpose of bill of material is to act as a single authorisation for the issue
of all materials and stores items mentioned in it. It provides an advance
intimation to store department about the requirements of materials. It reduces
paper work. It serves as a work order to the production department and a
document for computing the cost of material for a particular job or work order
to the cost department.
The purpose of material requisition note is to draw material from the store
by concerned departments.
Question 4
(a) Match the following
(i) Total fixed cost 1. What cost should be?
(ii) Total variable cost 2. Incurred cost
(iii) Unit variable cost 3. Increase in proportion to output
(iv) Unit fixed cost 4. Cost of conversion
(v) Standard cost 5. What costs are expected to be
(vi) Period cost 6. Decreases with rise in output
(vii) Actual cost 7. Remains constant in total
(viii) Labour and overhead 8. Remains constant per unit
(ix) Incremental cost 9. Cost not assigned to products
(x) Budgeted cost 10. Added value of a new product.
(b) Indicate whether the following statements are True or False:

(i) All costs are controllable.
(ii) Conversion cost is equal to direct wages plus factory overhead.
(iii) Variable cost per unit varies with the increase or decrease in the volume
of output.
(iv) Depreciation is an out of pocket cost.
(v) An item of cost that is direct for one business may be indirect for another
(vi) Fixed cost per unit remains fixed.
2 .9
Answer
(a) Correct matchings are indicated as below:
(i) ----------- (7)
Total fixed cost, remains constant in total.
(ii) -----------(3)
Total variable cost, increases in proportion to output.
(iii) ----------(8)
Unit variable cost, remains constant per unit.
(iv) ----------(6)
Unit fixed cost, decreases with rise in output.
(v) -----------(1)
Standard cost, what cost should be.
(vi) -----------(9)
Period cost, cost not assigned to products.
(vii) -----------(2)
Actual cost, incurred cost.
(viii) -----------(4)
Labour and overhead, cost of conversion.
(ix) ------------(10)
Incremental cost, added value of a newproduct.
(x) -------------(5)
Budgeted cost, what costs are expected to be.
(b) (i) False
(ii) True
(iii) False
(iv) False
(v) True
(vi) False
Question 5
2.10
List down any eight factors that you will consider before installing a costing
system.
Answer
The eight factors which must be considered before installing a Costing
System are listed below:
(i) Nature of business: The system of costing to be introduced should suit the
general nature of business.
(ii) Layout aspects: The size and layout of the organisation should be studied by
the system designers.
(iii) Methods and procedures in vogue: The system designers should also study
various methods and procedures for the purchase, receipts, storage and
issue of material. They should also study the methods of wage payment.
(iv) Managements expectations and policies: The system of costing should be
designed after a careful analysis of the organisational operations,
managements expectation and the policies of the concern.
(v) Technical aspects: The technical aspects of the business should be studied
thoroughly by the designers. They should also make an attempt to seek the
assistance and support of the supervisory staff and workers of the concern
for the system.
(vi) Simplicity of the system: The system of costing to be installed should be easy
to understand and simple to operate. The procedures laid down for
operating the system should be easily understood by operating system.
(vii) Forms standardisation: Various forms to be used by the costing system for
various data/information collection and dissemination should be
standardised as far as possible.
(viii)Accuracy of data: The degree of accuracy of data to be supplied by the
system should be determined.
Question 6
Outline the steps involved in installing a costing system in a manufacturing
unit. What are the essentials of an effective costing system?
Answer
The main steps involved in installing a costing system in a manufacturing
unit may be outlined as below:
2.11
(i) The objectives of installing a costing system in a manufacturing concern and

the expectations of the management from such a system should be
identified first. The system will be a simple one in the case of a single
objective but will be an elaborate one in the case of multiple objectives.
(ii) It is important to ascertain the significant variables of the manufacturing
unit which are amenable to control and affect the concern. For example,
quite often the production costs control may be more important than
control of its marketing cost. Under such a situation, the costing system
should devote greater attention to control production costs.
(iii) A thorough study to know about the nature of business, its technical
aspects; products, methods and stages of production should also be made.
Such a study will facilitate in selecting a proper method of costing for
manufacturing unit.
(iv) A study of the organisation structure, its size and layout etc., is also
necessary. This is useful to management to determine the scope of
responsibilities of various managers.
(v) The costing system should be evolved in consultation with the staff and
should be introduced only after meeting their objections and doubts, if any.
The co -operation of staff is essential for the successful operation of the
system.
(vi) Details of records to be maintained by the costing system should be
carefully worked out. The degree of accuracy of the data to be supplied by
the system should be determined.
(vii) The forms to be used by foreman, workers, etc., should be standardised.
These forms be suitably designed and must ensure minimum clerical work at
all stages.
(viii)Necessary arrangements should be made for the flow of information/data to
all concerned managers, at different levels, regularly and promptly.
(ix) Reconciliation of costs and financial accounts be carried out regularly, if
they are maintained separately.
(x) The costing system to be installed should be easy to understand and simple
to operate.
Essential of an effective costing system: The essential features that an
effective costing system should possess are as follows:
2.12
(a) Costing system should be tailor made, practical, simple and capable of
meeting the requirements of a business concern.
(b) The method of costing should be suitable to the industry.
(c) Necessary co -operation and participation of executives from various
departments of the concern is essential for developing good cost accounting
system.
(d) The cost of installing and operating the system should justify the results.
(e) The system of costing should not sacrifice the utility by introducing
meticulous and unnecessary details.
Question 7
Distinguish between the following?
Controllable costs and uncontrollable costs.
(May, 1997, 4 marks)
Answer
Controllable costs and uncontrollable costs:
Costs which can be influenced by the action of a specified person in an
organisation are known as controllable costs. Costs which remains unaffected by
the action of such person are termed as uncontrollable. In a business
organisation heads of each responsibility centre are responsible to control costs.
Costs which they are able to control are known as controllable and includes
material, labour and direct expenses. Costs which they fail to control includes
fixed costs and all allocated costs.
It may be noted that controllable and uncontrollable cost concepts are
related to the authority of a person in the organisation. An expenditure which
may be uncontrollable by one person may be controllable by another. Moreover,
in the long run all costs might be controllable.
Question 8
(a) Describe briefly the role of the cost accountant in a manufacturing
organisation.
(b) Distinguish between:
(i) Variable cost and direct cost
(ii) Estimated cost and standard cost.
2.13
Answer
(a) Cost accountant in a manufacturing organisation plays several important
roles. He establishes a Cost Accounting department in his concern. He
ascertains the requirement of cost information which may be useful to
organisational mange rs at different levels of the hierarchy. He develops a
manual, which specifies the functions to be performed by the Cost
Accounting department. The manual also contains the format of various
forms which would be utilised by the concern for procuring and providing
information to the concerned officers. It also specifies the frequency at
which the cost information would be supplied to a concerned executive.
Usually, the functions performed by a Cost Accounting department
includes cost ascertainment, cost comparison, cost reduction, cost
control and cost reporting.
Cost ascertainment, requires the classification of costs into direct and
indirect. Further it requires classification of indirect costs (known as
overheads) into three classes viz, factory overheads; administration
overheads and selling and distribution overhead. Cost accountant suggests
the basis which may be used by his subordinates for carrying out the
necessary classifications as suggested above.
Cost comparison is the task carried out by Cost Accountant for controlling
the cost of the products manufactured by the concern. Cost Accountant
of the concern establishes standards for all the elements of cost and thus
a standard cost of the finished product. The standard cost so determined
may be compared with the actual cost to determine the variances. Cost
Accountant ascertains the reasons for the occurrence of these variances
for taking suitable action.
Cost analysis may also be made by Cost Accountant for taking decisions like
make or by and for reviewing the current performance.
Cost Accountant also suggests suitable techniques for the purpose of cost
reduction/cost control, after carrying out a cost benefit analysis.
Cost Accountant also plays a key role in the preparation of Cost reports.
These reports help the executives of a business concern in reviewing their
own performance and in identifying the weak areas, where enough control
measure may be taken in future.
2.14
In brief, one may say that there is hardly any activity in a manufacturing
organisation with which a Cost Accountant is not directly associated in some
form or the other.
(b) (i) Variable and direct cost:
A variable cost is a cost that changes in total in direct proportion to changes
in the related total activity or volume. Cost of ma terial is an example of
variable cost.
Direct cost is a cost which can be identified either with a cost centre or with
a cost unit. An example of direct cost is the allocation of direct materials to a
department and then to the various jobs. All variable costs are direct-but
each direct cost may not be variable.
(ii) Estimated cost and standard cost:
Kohler defines estimated costs as the expected cost of manufacture or
acquisition, often in terms of a unit of product computed on the basis of
information available in advance of actual production or purchase
Estimated cost are prospective costs since they refer to prediction of costs.
Standard Cost means a pre -determined cost. It attempts to show what the
cost should be for clearly defined conditions and circumstances. Standard
costs represent planned cost of a product. They are expected to be
achieved under a particular production process under normal conditions.
Although pre -determination is the essence of both standard costs and
estimated costs, but they differ from each other in the following respects:
(i) Difference in computation
(ii) Difference in emphasis
(iii) Difference in use
(iv) Difference in records
(v) Applicability
Question 9
Enumerate the main objectives of introduction of a Cost Accounting
System in a manufacturing organisation.
(Nov, 2002, 3 marks)
Answer
2.15
The main objectives of introduction of a Cost Accounting System in a

manufacturing organization are as follows:
(i) Ascertainment of cost
(ii) Determination of selling price
(iii) Cost control and cos t reduction
(iv) Ascertainment of profit of each activity
(v) Assisting in managerial decision making
Question 10
Write short notes on any two of the following?
(i) Conversion cost (ii) Sunk cost (iii) Opportunity cost (May,
2003, 4 marks)
Answer
(i) Conversion cost:
It is the cost incurred to convert raw materials into finished goods. It is the
sum of direct wages, direct expenses and manufacturing overheads.
(ii) Sunk cost:
Historical costs or the costs incurred in the past are known as sunk cost.
They play no role in the current decision making process and are termed as
irrelevant costs. For example, in the case of a decision relating to the
replacement of a machine, the written down value of the existing machine is
a sunk cost, and therefore, not considered.
(iii) Opportunity cost:
It refers to the value of sacrifice made or benefit of opportunity foregone in
accepting an alternative course of action. For example, a firm financing its
expansion plan by withdrawing money from its bank deposits. In such a case
the loss of interest on the bank deposit is the opportunity cost for carrying
out the expansion plan.
Question 11
Write short notes on Cost Centre (May 1995, 4 marks)
Answer
2.16
Cost Centre : It is defined as a location, person or an item of equipment or a

group of these for which costs are ascertained and used for cost control. Cost
centres are of two types viz, impersonal and personal.
A cost centre which consists of a location or an item of equipment or a
group of these is called an impersonal cost centre . A cost centre which consists
of a person or a group of person is known as a personal cost centre.
In a manufacturing concern there are two type of cost centres viz.,
production and service. Production cost centres are those where production
activity is actually carried out whereas service cost centres are those sections
which are ancillary and render service to production cost centres.
Question 12
Name the various reports (Elaboration not needed) that may be provided by the
Cost Accounting Department of a big manufacturing company for the use of its
executives.
Answer
Various reports that may be provided by the Cost Accounting Department of a
big manufacturing Company for the use of its executives are as under:
(i) Cost Sheets
(ii) Statements of material consumption
(iii) Statements of labour utilisation
(iv) Overheads incurred compared with budgets
(v) Sales effected compared with budgets
(vi) Reconciliation of actual profit with estimated profit
(vii) The total cost of inventory carried
(viii)The total cost of abnormally spoiled work in factory and abnormal losses in
stores
(ix) Labour turnover statements
(x) Expenses incurred on research and development compared with budgeted
amounts.
Question 13
2.17
State the unit of cost and method of costing generally used for accounting
purpose in the following cases:
(i) Brick-works (ii) Bi-cycle
(iii) Oil refining mill and (iv) Road transport company
Answer
Industry/Product Unit of cost Method of Costing
(i) Brick works 1,000 bricks Single or output
(ii) Bi-cycle Each bicycle Multiple
(iii) Oil refining mill Per-Tonne Process
(iv) Road transport Per-tonne-km Operating
company
Question 14
What is meant by Profit Centre?
(Nov,1997, 4 marks)
Answer
Profit Centre: It is defined as an activity centre of a business organisation.
Chief of such a centre is fully responsible for all costs, revenues and profitability
of its operation. The main objective of profit centre is to maximise the centres
profit. Creation of profit centres facilitates management control and
implementation of the objectives of responsibility accounting. A profit centre
may have a number of cost centres.
Question 15
What is meant by cost centre? (May, 1997,
Nov.,2002, 4 marks)
Answer
Cost Centre
It is the smallest area of responsibility or segment of activity for which costs
are accumulated. It can be defined as a location; person or an item of equipment
2.18
or a group of these for which costs are ascertained and used for the purpose of
cost control. Cost centres are of two types viz.., persona l and impersonal.
Personal cost centre: It is a cost centre which consists of a person or a group
of persons.
Impersonal cost centre: It is a cost centre which consists of a location or an
item of equipment or a group of these.
In a manufacturing concern ht ere are two types of cost centres viz.,
production and service cost centres.
Question 16
How does a production account differ from a cost sheet
Answer
The following are the points of difference between a production account and
a cost sheet.
(i) Production Account is based on double entry system whereas cost sheet is
not based on double entry system.
(ii) Production Account consists of two parts. The first part shows cost of the
component and total production cost. The second part shows the cost of
sales and profit for the period. Cost Sheet presents the elements of costs in
a classified manner and the cost ascertained at different states such as
prime cost; works cost; cost of production; cost of goods sold; cost of sales
and total cost.
(iii) Production Account shows the cost in aggregate and thus facilitates
comparison with other financial accounts. Cost sheet shows the cost in a
detailed and analytical manner which facilitates comparison of cost for the
purpose of cost control.
(iv) Production Account is not useful for preparing tenders or quotations.
Estimated cost sheets can be prepared on the basis of actual cost sheets
and these are useful for preparing tenders or quotations.
Question 17
Discuss cost classification based on variability and controllability. (Nov,
2004, 4 marks)
Answer
2.19
Cost classification based on variability

Fixed cost These are costs, which do not change in total despite changes of a
cost driver. A fixed cost is fixed only in relation to a given relevant range of the
cost driver and a given time span. Rent, insurance, depreciation of factory
building and equipment are examples of fixed costs where the final product
produced is the cost object.
Variable costs These are costs which change in total in proportion to changes
of cost driver. Direct material, direct labour are examples of variable costs, in
cases where the final product produced is the cost object.
Semi-variable costs These are partly fixed and partly variable in relation to
output e.g. telephone and electricity bill.
Cost classification based on controllability
Controllable costs Are incurred in a particular responsibility center and relate
to a defined time span. They can be influenced by the action of the executive
heading the responsibility center e.g. direct costs.
Uncontrollable costs Are costs are influenced by the action of the responsibility
center manager e.g. expenditure incurred by the tool room are controllable by
the foreman in charge of that section, but the share of tool room expenditure
which are apportioned to the machine shop are not controllable by machine
shop foreman.
Question 18
Discuss the essential of a good cost accounting system? (May,
2004, 2 marks)
Answer
Essentials of a good cost accounting system:
It should be tailor-made, practical, simple and capable of meeting the
requirements of a business concern.
The data used by the system should be accurate, otherwise it may distort the
output of system.
Cost of installing & operating the system should justify the results.
Cost accounting system should have the support of top management of the
concern.
2.20
The system should have the necessary support from all the users
departments.
Question 19
Explain:
(i) Sunk Costs
(ii) Pre-production Costs
(iii) Research and Development Costs
(iv) Training Costs
(Nov, 2000, 2 x 4 = 8 marks)
Answer
(i) Sunk Costs: These are historical costs which are incurred in the past. These
costs were incurred for a decision made in the past and cannot be changed
by any decision that will be made in future. In other words, these costs plays
no role in decision making, in the current period. While considering the
replacement of a plant, the depreciated book value of the old plant is
irrelevant, as the amount is a sunk cost which is to be written off at the time
of replacement.
(ii) Pre-production Costs: These costs forms the part of development cost,
incurred in making a trial production run, preliminary to formal production.
These costs are incurred when a new factory is in the process of
establishment or a new project is undertaken or a new product line or
product is taken up, but there is no established or formal production to
which such costs may be charged. These costs are normally treated as
deferred revenue expenditure (except the portion which has been
capitalised) and charged to the costs of future production.
(iii) Research and Development Costs: Research costs are the costs incurred for
the discovery of new ideas or processes by experiment or otherwise and for
using the results of such experimentation on a commercial basis. Research
costs are defined as the costs of searching for new or improved products,
new applications of materials, or improved methods, processes, systems or
services.
Development costs, are the costs of the process which begins with the
implementation of the decision to produce a new or improved product or
2.21
to employ a new or improved method and ends with the commencement

of formal production of that product by that method.
(iv) Training Costs: These costs comprises of wages and salaries of the trainees
or learners, pay and allowances of the training and teaching staff, payment
of fees etc, for training or for attending courses of studies sponsored by
outside agencies and cost of materials, tools and equipments used for
training. Costs incurred for running the training department, the losses
arising due to the initial lower production, extra spoilage etc. occuring while
providing training facilities to the new recruits.
All these costs are booked under separate standing order numbers for the
various functions. Usually there is a service cost centre, known as the
Training Section, to which all the training costs are allocated. The total cost
of training section is thereafter apportioned to production centers.
Question 20
Enumerate the factors which are to be considered before installing a system
of cost accounting in a manufacturing organization.
Answer
Factors which are to be considered before installing a system of cost
accounting in a manufacturing organization are:
(i) The objectives of installing a system of cost accounting should be defined,
that is whether the system is meant for control of cost or for price fixation
(ii) The organization of the company should be studied to understand the
authority and responsibilities of the managers.
(iii) The technical aspects and flow process should be taken into consideration.
(iv) The products to be manufactured should be studied.
(v) The marketing set up to be looked into for devising suitable control reports.
(vi) The possibility of integrating cost accounting system with financial
accounting system should be examined.
(vii) The procedure for collection and verification of reliability of the information
should be studied.
(viii)The degree of details of information required at each level of management
should be examined.
2.22
(ix) The maximum amount of information that would be sufficient and how the
same should be secured without too much clerical labour, especially the
possibility of collection of data on a separate printed form designed for each
process; also the possibility of instruction as regards filling up of the forms in
writing to ensure that these would be faithfully carried out.
(x) How the accuracy of the data collected can be verified? Who should be
made responsible for making such verification with regard to each
operation and the form of certification that should be given indicate
verification that he has carried out.
(xi) The manner in which the benefits of introducing Cost Accounting could be
explained to various persons in the concern, specially those incharge of
production department and an awareness created for the necessity of
promptitude, frequency and regularity in collection of costing data.
Question 21
You have been asked to install a costing system in a manufacturing
company. What practical difficulties will you expect and how will you propose to
overcome the same?
Answer
The practical difficulties with which a Cost Accountant is usually confronted
with while installing a costing system in a manufacturing company are as follows:
(i) Lack of top management support: Installation of a costing system do not
receive the support of top management. They consider it as an interference
in their work. They believe that such, a system will involve additional
paperwork. They also have a misconcept in their minds that the system is
meant for keeping a check on their activities.
(ii) Resistance from cost accounting departmental staff: The staff resists
because of fear of loosing their jobs and importance after the
implementation of the new system.
(iii) Non cooperation from user departments: The foremen, supervisor and other
staff members may not cooperate in providing requisite data, as this would
not only add to their responsibilities but will also increase paper work of the
entire team as well.
2.23
(iv) Shortage of trained staff: Since cost accounting systems installation involves
specialised work, there may be a shortage of trained staff.
To overcome these practical difficulties, necessary steps required are:
n To sell the idea to top management To convince them of the utility of the
system.
n Resistance and non cooperation can be overcome by behavioral approach.
To deal with the staff concerned effectively.
n Proper training should be given to the staff at each level
n Regular meetings should be held with the cost accounting staff, user
departments, staff and top management to clarify their doubts / misgivings.
Question 22
Distinguish between controllable & uncontrollable costs? (Nov,
2001, 2 marks)
Answer
Controllable costs and Uncontrollable costs:
Controllable costs are the costs which can be influenced by the action of a
specified member of the undertaking. Controllable costs incurred in a particular
responsibility centre can be influenced by the action of the executive heading
that responsibility centre.
Uncontrollable costs are the costs which cannot be influenced by the action
of a specified member of an undertaking.
Question 23
Define Explicit costs. How is it different from implicit costs? (May,
2001, 2 marks)
Answer
Explicit costs: These costs are also known as out of pocket costs. They refer
to those costs which involves immediate payment of cash. Salaries, wages,
postage and telegram, interest on loan etc. are some examples of explicit costs
because they involve immediate cash payment. These payments are recorded in
the books of account and can be easily measured.
Main points of difference: The following are the main points of difference
between explicit and implicit costs.
2.24
(i) Implicit costs do not involve any immediate cash payment. As such they are
also known as imputed costs or economic costs.
(ii) Implicit costs are not recorded in the books of account but yet, they are
important for certain types of managerial decisions such as equipment
replacement and relative profitability of two alternative courses of action.
Question 24
(a) What are the essentials of a Cost Accounting System? (May,
1996, (6 marks)
(b) Narrate the essential factors to be considered while designing and installing
a Cost Accounting System.
(May, 1996, 10 marks)
Answer
(a) Essentials of a Good Cost Accounting System
The essential features of a good Cost Accounting system are as follows:
(i) The Cost Accounting System should be tailor made, practical, simple and
capable of meeting the requirements of a business concern.
(ii) The method of costing should be suitable to the industry and serve its
objectives.
(iii) The Costing System should receive co-operation and participation of
executives from various departments.
(iv) The cost of installing and operating the system should justify the results.
(v) The system of costing should not sacrifice the utility by introducing
meticulous and unnecessary details.
(vi) The system should consider the organisational structure of the
business and it should be designed as a sub-system of the overall
organisation.
(vii) There should be a harmonious relationship between costing and
financial accounts departments. Unnecessary duplication should be
avoided. A single integrated accounting system may be designed.
(viii)The system should provide adequate checks on ordering, receipts,
stocking, issuing and recording of materials. The pricing method and the
issue of materials should be efficient.
(ix) The costing system should ensure proper recording of workers time
and their wages. Wages should be determined from wage analysis
sheets. Proper attention should be paid in preparing payrolls and in
2.25
the pa yment of wages. The treatment of idle time, over-time and

holiday-pay should not be overlooked.
(x) The cost accounting system should ensure that overheads are collected,
accumulated, allocated and apportioned suitably.
(b) Essential factors for designing a cost accounting system
The essential factors to be considered while designing a Cost Accounting
System are as follows:
(i) A thorough understanding of Organisational structure; manufacturing
procedure, and process; selling and distribution procedure; and type of
cost information required.
(ii) Selection of a suitable costing technique (Standard or actual, marginal or
absorption)
(iii) Pricing method suitable, for the material, to be issued to production.
(iv) Method suitable for booking labour cost on jobs.
(v) A sound plan should be devised for the collection, allocation,
apportionment and absorption of overheads.
(vi) Deciding on ways of treating waste, scrap and idle time.
(vii) Designing of suitable forms to be used for collecting and dissemination
of Cost data/information.
(viii)Introduction of budgetary control technique so that actual performance
may be compared with budgetary figures, for measuring efficiency or
performance.
Essential factors for installing a Cost Accounting System.
The essential factors for installing a Cost Accounting Sys tem are listed as below:
(i) The objectives of installing a Costing System and the expectations of the
management from the system should be identified first. The system will be a
simple one in the case of a single objective but will be an elaborate one in
the case of multiple objectives.
(ii) It is important to ascertain the significant variables of the manufacturing
unit which are amenable to control and affect the concern. For example,
quite often the production costs control may be more important than
control of its marketing cost. Under such a situation, the costing system
should devote greater attention to control production cost.
2.26
(iii) A thorough study of the nature of business, its technical aspects, products,
methods and stages of production should be made. This will help in
selecting a proper method of costing.
(iv) A Study of the organisation structure, its size and layout etc., is also
necessary. This is useful to management to determine the scope of
responsibilities of various managers.
(v) The costing system should be evolved in consultation with the staff and
should be introduced only after meeting their objections and doubts, if any.
The co -operation of staff is essential for the successful operation of the
system.
(vi) Details of the records to be maintained by the costing system should be
carefully worked out. The degree of accuracy of the data to be supplied
by the system should be determined.
(vii) The forms to be used by foreman, workers etc., should be standardised.
These forms be suitably designed and must ensure minimum clerical work at
all stages.
(viii)Necessary arrangements should be made for the flow of information/data to
all concerned managers, at different levels, regularly and promptly.
(ix) Reconciliation of costs and financial accounts be carried out regularly, if they
are maintained separately.
(x) The costing system to be installed should be easy to understand and simple
to operate.
Question 25
What are the main objectives of Cost Accounting?
Answer
The main objectives of Cost Accounting are as follows:
(i) Ascertainment of cost.
(ii) Determination of selling price.
(iii) Cost control and cost reduction.
(iv) Ascertainment of profit of each activity.
(v) Assisting management in decision making.
2.27
Question 26
Explain controllable and non-controllable costs with illustrations. (May,
2001,2 marks)
Answer
Controllable and non-Controllable costs
Controllable costs: These are the costs which can be influenced by the action of a
specified person in an organisation. In every organisation, there are a number of
departments which are ca lled responsibility centres, each under the charge of a
specified level of management. Costs incurred in these responsibility centres are
influenced by he action of the incharge of the responsibility centre. Thus any
cost that an organisational unit has the authority to incur may be identified as
controllable cost.
Non-controllable costs: These are the costs which cannot be influenced by the
action of a specified member of an undertaking. For example, expenditure
incurred by the Tool Room is controllable by the Tool Room Manager but the
share of Tool Room expenditure, which is apportioned to the Machine Shop
cannot be controlled by the manager of the Machine Shop.
However, the distinction between controllable and non-controllable costs is not
very sharp and is sometimes left to individual judgment to specify a cost as
controllable or non-controllable in relation to a particular individual manager.
Question 27
Discuss the four different methods of costing alongwith their applicability to
concerned industry?
Answer
Four different methods of costing along with their applicability to concerned
industry have been discussed as below:
1. Job Costing: The objective under this method of costing is to ascertain the
cost of each job ord er. A job card is prepared for each job to accumulate
costs. The cost of the job is determined by adding all costs against the job it
is incurred. This method of costing is used in printing press, foundries and
general engineering workshops, advertising etc.
2. Batch Costing: This system of costing is used where small components/parts
of the same kind are required to be manufactured in large quantities. Here
2.28
batch of similar products is treated as a job and cost of such a job is

ascertained as discussed under 1, above. If in a cycle manufacturing unit,
rims are produced in batches of 2,500 units each, then the cost will be
determined in relation to a batch of 2,500 units.
3. Contract Costing: If a job is very big and takes a long time for its completion,
then method used for costing is known as Contract Costing. Here the cost of
each contract is ascertained separately. It is suitable for firms engaged in the
construction of bridges, roads, buildings etc.
4. Operating Costing: The method of Costing used in service re ndering
undertakings is known as operating costing. This method of costing is used
in undertakings like transport, supply of water, telephone services,
hospitals, nursing homes etc.
Question 28
Distinguish between:
Marginal Costing and Differential Costing
Answer
Marginal Costing and Differential Costing
Marginal Costing is defined as the Ascertainment of marginal costs and of
the effect on profit of changes in volume or type of output by differentiating
between fixed costs and variable costs.
Differential Costing is defined as the technique of costing which uses
differential costs and/or differential revenues for ascertaining the acceptability
of an alternative. The technique may be termed as incremental costing when the
difference is increase in costs and decremental costing when the difference is
decrease in costs. The main points of distinction between marginal costing and
differential costing are as below:
(a) The technique of marginal costing requires a clear distinction between
variable costs and fixed costs whereas no such distinction is made in the
case of differential costing.
(b) In marginal costing, margin of contribution and contribution ratio are the
main yard sticks for performance evaluation and for decision making
whereas under differential costs analysis, differential costs are compared
with the incremental or decremental revenue (as the case may be) for
arriving at a decision.
2.29
(c) Differential cost analysis is possible in both absorption costing and marginal
costing, where as marginal costing in itself is a distinct technique.
(d) Marginal cost may be incorporated in the cost accounting system whereas
differential costs are worked out separately.
Question 29
Specify the methods of costing and cost units applicable to the following
industries:
(i) Toy making
(ii) Cement
(iii) Radio
(iv) Bicycle
(v) Ship building
(vi) Hospital
Answer
Industry Method of costing Unit of cost
(i) Toy making Batch Per batch
(ii) Cement Unit Per tonne or per bag
(iii) Radio Multiple Per Radio or per batch
(iv) Bicycle Multiple Per Bicycle
(v) Ship building Contract Per Ship
(vi) Hospital Operating Per Bed per day or
Per patient per day
Question 30
How does a Production Account differ from a Cost Sheet (Nov,
1998, 3 marks)
Answer
The following are the points of diffe rence between a Production Account and a
Cost Sheet.
2.30
(i) Production Account is based on double entry system whereas cost sheet is
not based on double entry system.
(ii) Production Account consists of two parts. The first part shows cost of the
components and total production cost. The second part shows the cost of
sales and profit for the period. Cost sheet presents the elements of costs in
a classified manner and the cost is ascertained at different stages such as
prime cost; works cost of production; cost of goods sold; cost of sales and
total cost.
(iii) Production account shows the cost in aggregate and thus facilitates
comparison with other financial accounts. Cost sheet shows the cost in
detail and analytical manner which facilitates comparison of cost for the
purpose of cost control.
(iv) Production accounts is not useful for preparing tenders or quotations.
Estimated cost sheets can be prepared on the basis of actual costs sheets
and these are useful for preparing tenders or quotations.
Question 31
A factory uses a job costing system. The following cost data are available
from the books for the year ended 31 st March, 1989:
Rs.
Direct Material 9,00,000
Direct Wages 7,50,000
Profit 6,09,000
Selling and Distribution Overhead 5,25,000
Administrative Overhead 4,20,000
Factory Overhead 4,50,000
Required
(a) Prepare a Cost Sheet indicating the prime cost, works cost, production cost,
cost of sales and sales value.
(b) In 1989-90, the factory has received an order for a number of jobs. It is
estimated that the direct materials is would be Rs. 12,00,000 and direct
labour would cost Rs. 7,50,000. What would be the price for these jobs if the
factory intends to earn the same rate of profit on sales, assuming that the
selling and distribution overhead has gone up by 15%. The factory recovers
factory overhead as a percentage of direct wages and administrative and
2.31
selling and distribution overheads as a percentage of works cost, based on

the cost rates prevalent in the previous year.
Answer
(a) COST SHEET
For the jobs carried out by the concern for the year ending on 31st March, 89
Rs.
Direct Wages 7,50,000
PRIME COST 16,50,000
WORKS COST 21,00,000
PRODUCTION COST 25,20,000
COST OF SALES 30,45,000
Profit 6,09,000
SALES VALUE 36,54,000
(b) COST SHEET

For the Jobs carried out during the year 1989-90
Rs.
Direct Labour 7,50,000
PRIME COST 19,50,000
(Refer to Working Note-1)
WORKS COST 24,00,000
2.32
PRODUCTION COST 1 28,80,000

COSTS OF SALES 35,70,000
Profit 7,14,000
SALES VALUE 42,84,000
Working Notes
1. Factory Overhead = Percentage of
direct wages
(to be charged during 1989-90)
=
Factory overhead of 1988 89
100
Direct wages
Rs.4,50,000
=
Rs. 7,50,000
100
= 60% of
Direct Wages of 1989-90.
= 60% of Rs.
7,50,000
= Rs. 4,50,000.
2. Administrative Overhead = Percentage of Works Cost
=
Ad ministrativeoverheadof 1988 89
Works cos t of 1988 89
1
Production Cost here is a misnomer, infact Works Cost itself is the Production Cost.
2.33
Rs. 4,20,000
=
Rs. 21,00,000
x 100
= 20% of
works cost of 1989-90
= 20% of Rs.
24,00,000
= Rs. 4,80,000
3. Selling and Distribution Overhead = Percentage of Works Cost
Selling and
Distribution
Overhead of 1988 89
= x 100
Works cos t of 1988 89
Rs. 5,25,000
= x 100
Rs.21,00,000
= 25% of Works Cost of 1989-90
= 25% of Rs. 24,00,000
= Rs. 6,00,000
Total Selling and Distribution Overhead including 15% increase =Rs.
6,00,000+15% of
Rs. 6,00,000 = Rs. 6,90,000.
4. Profit (for 1989-90)
At the rate of profit of 1988-89
Pr ofit
= x 100
Sales value
Rs. 6,09,000
= x 100
Rs .36,54,000
2.34
Rs. 36,54,000
= 16.67% of Sales Value
= 20% of Cost of Sales
= 20% of Rs. 35,70,000 = Rs. 7,14,000
Question 32
The books of Adarsh Manufacturing Company present the following data for
the month of April, 1992.
Direct labour cost Rs. 17,500 being 175% of works overheads.
Cost of goods sold excluding administrative expenses Rs. 56,000.
Inventory accounts showed the following opening and closing balance:
April 1 April 30
Rs. Rs.
Raw materials 8,000 10,600
Works in progress 10,500 14,500
Finished goods 17,600 19,000
Other data are : Rs.

Selling expenses 3,500
General and administration expenses 2,500
Sales for the month 75,000
You are required to
(i) Compute the value of materials purchased
(ii) Prepare a cost statement showing the various elements of cost and also
the profit earned.
Answer
(i) Computation of the value of materials purchased
Rs.
Cost of goods sold 56,000
Add: Closing stock of finished goods 19,000
75,000
2.35
Less: Opening stock of finished goods 17,600

Cost of goods manufactured 57,400
Add: Closing stock of works-in-progress 14,500
71,900
Less: Opening stock of work -in-progress 10,500
Works Cost 61,400
100 10,000
Less: Factory Overhead: of Direct Labour Cost
175
Prime Cost 51,400
Less: Direct Labour 17,500
Raw materials consumed 33,900
Add: Closing stock of raw materials 10,600
Raw materials available 44,500
Less: Opening stock of raw materials 8,000
Value of materials purchased 36,500
(ii) Cost Statement Showing the various elements of Cost and Profit Earned
Rs.
Raw material consumed 33,900
(Refer to Statement (I) above)
Direct labour cost 17,500
Prime Cost 51,400
Add: Factory Overheads 10,000
Works Cost 61,400
Add: Opening Work-in-progress 10,500
71,900
Less: Closing Work -in-progress 14,500
Cost of goods manufactured 57,400
Add: Opening stock -of finished goods 17,600
75,000
2.36
Less: Closing stock of finished goods 19,000

Cost of Goods Sold 56,000
Add: General and administration expenses 2,500
Add: Selling expenses 3,500
Cost of Sales 62,000
Profit (Balance figure Rs. 75,000 Rs. 62,000) 13,000
Sales 75,000
Question 33
Popeye Company is a metal and wood cutting manufacture, selling products
to the home construction market. Consider the following data for the month of
October, 2004.
Rs.
Sandpaper 5,000
Material-handling costs 1,75,000
Lubricants and Coolants 12,500
Miscellaneous indirect manufacturing 1,00,000
labour
Direct manufacturing labour 7,50,000
Direct materials, October 1, 2004 1,00,000
Direct materials, October 31, 2004 1,25,000
Finished goods, October 1, 2004 2,50,000
Finished goods, October 31, 2004 3,75,000
Work in-process, October 1, 2004 25,000
Work-in-process, October 31, 2004 35,000
Plant-leasing costs 1,35,000
Depreciation-plant equipment 90,000
Property taxes on plant equipment 10,000
Fire insurance on plant equipment 7,500
Direct materials purchased 11,50,000
Sales revenues 34,00,000
2.37
Marketing promotions 1,50,000

Marketing salaries 2,50,000
Distribution costs 1,75,000
Customer-service costs 2,50,000
Required
(i) Prepare an income statement with a separate supporting schedule of cost of
goods manufactured.
(ii) For all manufacturing items, indicate by V or F whether each is basically a
variable cost or a fixed cost (where the cost object is a product unit).
(Nov, 2004, 6+2=8 marks)
Answer
(i) Popeye company Schedule for cost of goods manufactured
for the month ending Oct 2004
Rs. Rs.
Direct materials
Beginning Inventory 1,00,000
Purchase of Direct Materials 11,50,000
Cost of direct materials available for use 12,50,000
Ending inventory 1,25,000
Direct materials used 11,25,000(V)
Direct manufacturing labour 7,50,000(V)
Indirect manufacturing costs
Sand Paper 5,000(V)
Material-handling cost 1,75,000(V)
Lubricants and coolants 12,500(V)
Misc. indirect mfg labour 1,00,000(V)
Plant leasing cost 1,35,000(F)
Depreciation-plant & equipment 90,000 (F)
Property tax-plant & equipment 10,000 (F)
2.38
Fire insurance -plant & equipment 7,500 (F) 5,35,000

Manufacturing cost incurred during the month 24,10,000
of October, 2004
Add: Op. work -in-progress 25,000
24,35,000
Less: Cl. Work -in-pro gress 35,000
Cost of goods manufactured (to income 24,00,000
statement)
(ii) Popeye Company : Income Statement for the month ending Oct 31,2004
Rs. Rs.
Revenues 34,00,000
Cost of goods sold:
Beginning finished goods 2,50,000
Cost of goods ma nufactured 24,00,000
Cost of goods available for sale 26,50,000
Ending finished goods 3,75,000 22,75,000
Gross Margin 11,25,000
Marketing, Distribution and Customer Service
Costs:
Marketing promotions 1,50,000
Marketing salaries 2,50,000
Customer service cost 2,50,000 8,25,000
Operating Income 3,00,000
Question 34
A fire occurred in the factory premises on October 31, 2003. The accounting
records have been destroyed. Certain accounting records were kept in another
2.39
building. They reveal the following for the period September 1, 2003 to October
31, 2003.
(i) Direct materials purchased Rs. 2,50,000
(ii) Work in process inventory, 1.9.2003 Rs. 40,000
(iii) Direct materials inventory, 1.9.2003 Rs. 20,000
(iv) Finished goods inventory, 1.9.2003 Rs. 37,750
(v) Indirect manufacturing costs 40% of conversion cost
(vi) Sales revenues Rs. 7,50,000
(vii) Direct manufacturing labour Rs. 2,22,250
(viii) Prime costs Rs. 3,97,750
(ix) Gross margin percentage based on revenues 30%
(x) Cost of Goods available for sale Rs. 5,55,775
The loss is fully covered by insurance company. The insurance company

wants to know the historical cost of the inventories as a basis for negotiating a
settlement, although the settlement is actually to be based on replacement
cost, not historical cost.
Required
(i) Finished goods inventory, 31,10,2003
(ii) Work-in-process inventory, 31.10.2003
(iii) Direct materials inventory, 31.10.2003 (November, 2003,
3+3+2 = 8 marks)
Answer
Working notes
1. Direct material inventory cost (used during the month):
= Prime cost Direct manufacturing labour cost
= Rs. 3,97,750 Rs. 2,22,250 = Rs. 1,75,500
2. Conversion and indirect manufacturing cost:
Conversion cost = (Direct manufacturing cost + Indirect
manufacturing cost)
But Indirect manufacturing = 40% of conversion cost
2.40
cost
Or Conversion cost = Direct manufacturing cost + 40% of conversion
cost
Or 0.60 conversion cost = Direct manufacturing cost
Or Conversion cost Direct manufacturing cos t
=
0. 60
Rs. 2,22,250
=
0. 60
= Rs. 3,70,417
Or Indirect manufacturing = 40% x Rs. 3,70,417
cost = Rs. 1,48,167
3. Cost of goods manufactured
Rs.
Cost of goods available for sale 5,55,775
Less: Finished goods 1.9.2003 37,750
Cost of goods manufactured 5,18,025
(i) Finished goods inventory, 31.10.2003

Rs.
Sales revenue 7,50,000
Less: Gross margin 2,25,000
(30% of revenue)
Cost of goods sold: (a) 5,25,000
Cost of goods available for sale: (b) 5,55,775
Finished goods inventory, 31.10.2003: {(b) (a)} 30,775
(ii) Work-in-process inventory, 31.10.2003:

Rs.
Prime cost 3,97,750
2.41
Add: Indirect manufacturing cost 1,48,167

(Refer to working note 2)
Add: Opening work-in-process, 1.9.2003 40,000
Manufacturing cost to account for 5,85,917
Less: Cost of goods manufactured 5,18,025
Work-in-process inventory, 31.10.2003 67,892
(iii) Direct material inventory, 31.10.2003

Rs.
Direct materials inventory, 1.9.2003 20,000
Add: Direct materials purchased 2,50,000
2,70,000
Less: Direct material inventory (used during the month) 1,75,500
Direct material inventory, 31.10.2003 94,500
Question 35
A Company manufactures radios, which are sold at Rs. 1,600 per unit. The
total cost is composed of 30% for direct materials, 40% for direct wages and 30%
for overheads. An increase in material price by 30% and in wage rates by 10% is
expected in the forthcoming year, as a result of which the profit at current selling
price may decrease by 40% of the present profit per unit. You are required to
prepare a statement showing current and future profit at present selling price.
How much Selling Price should be increased to maintain the present rate of
profit?
Answer
Let X be the cost, Y be the profit and Rs. 1,600 selling price per unit of radio
manufactured by a company. Hence
X + Y = 1,600 ------- (I)
Statement of present and future Cost of a radio

Present cost Increase in Anticipated
2.42
Particulars cost future cost

Rs. (Rs.) (Rs.)
(a) (b) (c) = (a) + (b)
Direct material 0.3 X 0.09 X 0.39 X
Direct labour 0.4 X 0.04 X 0.44 X
Overheads 0.3 X -- 0.30 X
Total X 0.13 X 1.13 X
An increase in material price and wage rates resulted into a decrease in current
profit by 40 percent at present selling price; therefore we have:
1.13 X + 0.6 Y = 1,600 -----------------(ii)
On solving (I) and (ii) we get:
X = Rs. 1,207.55
Y = Rs. 392.45
Current profit Rs. 392.45 or 32.5% of cost
Future profit Rs. 235.47
Statement of revised selling price to maintain
the present rate of profit
Rs.
Direct material cost 470.94
(0.39 x Rs. 1,207.55)
Direct labour cost 531.32
(0.44 x Rs. 1207.55)
Overheads 362.27
(0.30 x Rs. 1.207.55) _______
Total cost 1,364.53
Profit 443.47
(32.5% of total cost) _______
Re vised selling price 1,808.00
Question 36
2.43
In an engineering company, the factory overheads are recovered on a fixed

percentage basis on direct wages and the administration overheads are absorbed
on a fixed percentage basis on factory cost.
The company has furnished the following data relating to two jobs
undertaken by it in a period:
Job 101 Job 102
Rs. Rs.
Direct Materials 54,000 37,500
Direct Wages 42,000 30,000
Selling Price 1,66,650 1,28,250
Profit Percentage on total cost 10% 20%
Required:
(i) Com putation of percentage recovery rates of factory overheads and
administrative overheads.
(ii) Calculation of the amount of factory overheads, administrative overheads
and profit for each of the two jobs.
(iii) Using the above recovery rates fix the selling price of job 103. The
additional data being.
Direct Materials Rs. 24,000
Direct Wages Rs. 20,000
Profit Percentage on Selling Price 12-1/2%
(May, 1995, 16 marks)
Answer
(i) Let factory overhead recovery rate, as percentage of direct wages be F
and administrative overheads recovery rate, as percentage of factory cost
be A.
(ii) Factory Cost of Jobs:
Job 101 = Rs. 96,000 + Rs. 42,000F
Job 102 = Rs. 67,500 + Rs. 30,000F
Total Cost of Production of Jobs:
2.44
Job 101 = (Rs.96,000 + Rs.42,000F) + (Rs.96,000 + Rs.42,000F)A=

Rs.1,51,500
Job 102 = (Rs.67,500+ Rs.30,000F) + (Rs.67,500 + Rs.30,000F)A =
Rs.1,06,875
(Refer to Working Note)
On solving above relations:
F = 0.60 and A = 0.25
Hence percentage recovery rates of factory overheads and administrative
overheads are 60% and 25% respectively.
Working Note:
Job 101 Job 102
Total cost of production (Rs.) 1,51,300 1,06,875
Selling price (Rs. 1,66,650/110%) (Rs. 1,28,250/120%)
(100% + Percentage of profit)
(iii) Statement of jobs, showing amount of factory

Overheads, administrative ov erheads and profit
Job 101 Job 102
Rs. Rs.
Direct Wage 42,000 30,000
Prime Cost 96,000 67,500
Factory Overheads
60% of Direct Wages 25,200 18,000
Factory Cost 1,21,200 85,500
Administrative Overheads
25% of Factory Cost 30,300 21,375
Total Cost 1,51,500 1,06,857
Profit (difference figure) 15,150 21,375
Selling Price 1,66,650 1,28,250
2.45
(iv) Selling price of Job

103
Rs.
Direct Materials 24,000
Direct Wages 20,000
Prime Cost 44,000
Factory overheads (60% of Direct Wages) 12,000
Factory Cost 56,000
Administrative Overheads (25% of Factory Cost) 14,000
Total Cost 70,000
Profit Margin (difference figure) 10,000
Total cos t 80,000
Selling Price
87.5%
Question 37
Distinguish between Controllable and Uncontrollable costs. (May,
2003, 2 marks)
Answer
Controllable costs and Uncontrollable costs: Direct costs comprising of direct
labour, direct material, direct expenses and some of the overheads are generally
controllable by shop floor management.
Uncontrollable costs are those costs which cannot be influenced by the
action of a specified member of an undertaking e.g. share to tool room
expenditure which is apportioned to machine shop is not to be controlled by the
machine shop foreman.
Question 38
A manufacturing company has an installed capacity of 1,20,000 units per
annum. The cost structure of the product manufactured is as under:
Rs.
(i) Variable cost per unit -
Materials 8
2.46
Labour (Subject to a minimum of Rs. 56,010 per month) 8

Overheads 3
2.47
(ii) Fixed overheads Rs. 1,68,750 per annum

(iii) Semi-variable overheads Rs. 48,000 per annum at 60% capacity, which
increase by Rs. 6,000 per annum for increase of every 10% of the capacity
utilisation or any part thereof, for the year as a whole.
The capacity utilisation for the next year is estimated at 60% for two months,
75% for six months and 80% for the remaining part of the year. If the
company is planning to have a profit of 25% on the selling price, calculate
the selling price per unit. Assume that there are no opening and closing
stocks. (Nov, 1997, 12 marks)
Answer
Statement of Selling Price and Profit
Rs.
Material 7,12,000
89,000 units x Rs. 8 p.u.
Labour cost 7,28,000
Variable overheads 2,67,000
(89,000 units x Rs. 3)
Semi-variable overheads 60,000
Fixed overheads 1,68,750
Total cost 19,35,750
Add: Profit @ 25% of selling price or
33-1/3% on cost 6,45,250
Total sales va lue 25,81,000
Selling price per unit 29.00
(Rs. 25.81.000/89,000 units)
Working notes
1. Capacity utilisation (for the next year)
2.48
60% of capacity for first two months = 2 months6,000

units = 12,000 units
75% capacity for next six months = 6 months 7,500
units = 45,000 units
80% of capacity for the remaining four months = 4 months 8,000 units =
32,000 units
Total capacity utilisation
89,000 units
89, 000 units
Capacity utilisation = 100 = 74-1/6 %
1, 20,000 units
2. Calculation of labour cost (subject to a minimum of Rs. 56,000 p.m.)
Rs.
Labour cost of first two months
12,000 units x Rs. 8 = Rs. 96,000
But minimum here is 1,12,000
Labour cost of next six months
45,000 units x Rs. 8 = Rs. 3,60,000 3,60,000
Labour cost of last four months
32,000 units x Rs. 8 2,56,000
Total labour cost 7,28,000
3. Calculation of semi-variable overheads (per annum):

Rs.
Semi-variable overheads 48,000
at 60% capacity
Semi-variable overheads for additional
14-1/6% capacity are the same as that for
20% of the capacity utilisation for the whole 12,000
year
60,000
Question 39
2.49
The following figures are extracted from the Trial Balance of Gogetter Co. on 30 th
September, 1986:
Rs. Rs.
Inventories :
Finished Stock 80,000
Raw Materials 1,40,000
Work-in-Process 2,00,000
Office Appliances 17,400
Plant & Machinery 4,60,500
Buildings 2,00,000
Sales 7,68,000
Sales Return and Rebates 14,000
Materials Purchased 3,20,000
Freight incurred on Materials 16,000
Purchase Returns 4,800
Indirect Labour 18,000
Factory Supervision 10,000
Repairs and Upkeep Factory 14,000
Heat, Light and Power 65,000
Rates and Taxes 6,300
Miscellaneous factory expenses 18,700
Sales commission 33,600
Sales Travelling 11,000
Sales Promotion 22,500
Distribution DepttSalaries and Expenses 18,000

Office Salaries and Expenses 8,600
Interest on Borrowed Funds 2,000
2.50
Further details are available as follows:

(i) Closing Inventories :
Finished Goods 1,15,000
Raw Materials 1,80,000
Work-in-Process 1,92,000
(ii) Accrued expenses on
Direct Labour 8,000
Interest on Borrowed Funds 2,000
(iii) Depreciation to be provided on:
Office Appliances 5%
Plant and Machinery 10%
Buildings 4%
(iv) Distribution of the following costs:

Hear, Light and Power to Factory, Office and Distribution in the ratio 8:1:1.
Rates and Taxes two-thirds to Factory and one-third to Office.
Depreciation on Buildings to Factory, Office and Selling in the ratio 8:1:1.
With the help of the above information, you are required to prepare a
condensed profit and loss statement of Gogetter Co. for the year ended 30 th
September, 1986 along with supporting schedules of:
(i) Costs of Sales.
(ii) Selling and Distribution Expenses,
(iii) Administration Expenses.
Answer
Profit and Loss Statement of Gogetter Company
for the year ended 30th September, 1986
Rs. Rs.
Gross Sales 7,68,000
Less : Returns 14,000 7,54,000
2.51
Less: Cost of Sales 7,14,020

Refer to Schedule (i)
Net Operating Profit: 39,980
Less: Interest on Borrowed Funds, 4,000
Net Profit. 35,980
(i) Schedule of Cost of Sales

Rs. Rs.
Raw Material 1,40,000
(Inventory op. Balance)
Add: Material Purchased 3,20,000

Freight on Material 16,000
Less: Purchase Returns 4,800 3,31,200
Less: Closing Raw Material
Inventories 1,80,000
Material used in production 2,91,200
Factory Overheads
Factory Supervision 10,000
Repairs and Factory Upkeep 14,000
Miscellaneous Factory Expenses 18,700
Depreciation of Plant 46,050
Depreciation of Buildings 6,400 1,70,550
Gross Works Cost 6,29,750
Add: Opening work-in-process Inventory 2,00,000
8,29,750
Less: Closing work -in-process Inventory 1,92,000
Works Cost 6,37,750
Add: Administration Expenses 18,870
[See Schedule (iii)]
Total Cost of output 6,56,620
2.52
Add: Opening Finished Goods Inventory 80,000

7,36,620
Less: Closing finished goods inventory 1,15,000
Cost of production of goods sold 6,21,620
Add: Selling and Distribution Expenses 92,400
[See Schedule (ii)]
Cost of Sales 7,14,020
(ii) Schedule of Selling and Distribution Expenses

Rs.
Sales Commission 33,600
Sales Travelling 11,000
Sales Promotion 22,500
Distribution Deptt.- Salaries and Expenses 18,000
Depreciation of Buildings 800
92,400
(iii) Schedule of Administration Expenses
Rs.
Office Salaries and Expenses 8,600
Depreciation of Office Appliances 870
Depreciation of Buildings 800
Heat, Light and power 6,500
18,870
Question 40
The cost structure of an article the selling price of which is Rs. 45,000 is as
follows:
Direct Materials 50%
Direct Labour 20%
Overheads 30%
2.53
An increase of 15% in the case of materials and of 25% in the cost of labour is
anticipated. These increased costs in relation to the present selling price would
cause a 25% decrease in the amount of profit per article.
Your are required
(1) To prepare a statement of profit per article at present, and
(2) The revised selling price to produce the same percentage of profit to sales as
before.
Answer
Working Notes
1. Let x be the total cost and y be the profit for an article whose selling price
is Rs. 45,000
Hence x + y =Rs. 45,000 (A)
2. Statement Showing Present and anticipated cost per article
Item Present Cost Increase Anticipated
cost
Rs. % Rs. Rs.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)=(2) + (4)
Direct Material 0.5x 15 0.075x 0.575x
Cost
Direct Labour 0.2x 25 0.050x 0.250x
Overheads 0.3x -- -- 0.300x
x 0.125x 1.125x
3. The increase in the cost of direct material and direct labour has reduced the
profit by 25 per cent (as selling price remained unchanged). The increase is
cost and reduction in profit can be represented by the following relation:
1.125x + 0.75y = Rs. 45,000 (B)
4. On solvi ng relations (A) and (B) as obtained under working notes 1 and 3
above we get.
We get
x = Rs. 30,000
y = Rs. 15,000
2.54
(a) Present Statement of Profit Per Article

Rs. Rs.
Direct Material Cost 0.5x 15,000
Direct Labour Cost 0.2x 6,000
Overheads 0.3x 9,000
Total Cost 30,000
Profit 15,000
Selling Price 45,000
Note: Profit as a percentage of Cost Price = 50%

(Rs. 15,000/Rs. 30,000) x 100
Profit as a percentage of Selling Price = 33-1/3%
(Rs. 15,000/Rs. 45,000) x 100
(b) Statement of Revised Selling Price

Rs. Rs.
Direct Material Cost 0.575x 17,250
Direct Labour Cost 0.250x 7,500
Overheads 0.300x 9,000
Total Anticipated Cost 33,750
Profit (33-1/3% of selling price) 16,875
Selling Price 50,625
(Rs. 33,750 x 100) 66.66
Question 41
Two workmen, Vishnu and Shiva, produce the same product using the same
material. Their normal wage rate is also the same. Vishnu is paid bonus
according to the Rowan system, while Shiva is paid bonus according to the Halsey
system. The time allowed to make the product is 100 hours. Vishnu takes 60
hours while Shiva takes 80 hours to complete the product. The factory overhead
rate is Rs. 10 per man-hour actually worked. The factory cost for the product for
Vishnu is Rs. 7,280 and for Shiva it is Rs. 7,600.
You are required:
(a) to find the normal rate of wages;
2.55
(b) to find the cost of materials ;

(c) to prepare a statement comparing the factory cost of the products as made
by the two workmen.
Answer
Working Notes
1. Let X be the Cost of material and Y be the normal rate of wages per hour.
Factory Cost of Workman Vishnu
Rs.
Material Cost X
Wages 60Y
Bonus 24Y
40 x 60
100 Y

Overheads 600
i.e. X + 60Y + 24Y + Rs. 600 = Rs. 7,280
Or X + 84Y = Rs. 6,680 (i)
Factory Cost of Workman Shiva

Rs.
Material Cost X
Wages 80Y
Bonus 10Y
20 x 50 Y
100

Overheads 800
i.e. X+ 80Y + 10Y + Rs. 800=Rs. 7,600
Or X + 90Y = Rs. 6,800
(ii)
2. On solving the above relations (i) and (ii), the value of X and Y comes to Rs.
500/- and Rs.20 per hour.
3. Bonus paid to Vishnu = 24Y = Rs. 480
Bonus paid to Shiva = 10Y = Rs. 200
2.56
(a) The normal rate of wages comes to Rs. 20/- per hour (Refer to Working
Notes (i) and (ii)
(b) The cost of material comes to Rs. 5,000 on substituting the value of Y in
either of the above relations (i) or (ii).
(c) Comparative Statement of the Factory Cost of the
product made by the two workmen.
Vishnu Shiva
Rs. Rs.
Material cost 5,000 5,000
Direct Wages 1200 1,600
(60 x Rs. 20) (80 x Rs. 20)
Bonus 480 200
(Refer to Working Note (3)
Factory overhead 600 800
Factory cost 7,280 7,600
Question 42
A Ltd. Co. has capacity to produce 1,00,000 units of a product every
month Its works cost at varying levels of production is as under:
Level Works cost

per unit
Rs.
10% 400
20% 390
30% 380
40% 370
50% 360
60% 350
70% 340
80% 330
90% 320
100% 310
Its fixed administration expenses amount to Rs. 1,50,000 and fixed
marketing expenses amount to Rs. 2,50,000 per month respectively. The variable
distribution cost amounts to Rs. 30 per unit.
2.57
It can market 100% of its output at Rs. 500 per unit provided it incurs the
following further expenditure:
(a) It gives gift items costing, Rs. 30 per unit of sale;
(b) It has lucky draws every month giving the first prize of Rs. 50,000; 2nd prize of
rd
Rs. 25,000 3 prize of Rs. 10,000 and three consolation prizes of Rs, 5,000
each to customers buying the product.
(c) It spends Rs. 1,00,000 on refreshments served every month to its customers;
(d) It sponsors a television programme every week at a cost of Rs. 20,00,000 per
month.
It can market 30% of its output at Rs. 550 per unit without incurring any of the
expenses referred to in (a) to (d) above.
Advise the company on its course of action. Show the supporting cost sheets.
(Nov, 1998, 12 marks)
Answer
Cost Sheet (for the month)
Level of capacity 30% 100%
Level of output Produce (Units) 30,000 1,00,000
Per Unit Total Per Unit Total (Rs.)
(Rs.) (Rs.) (Rs.)
Works cost 380.00 1,14,00.00 310,00 3,10,00,00
0 0
Add: Fixed administration 5.00 1,50,000 1.50 1,50,000
expenses
Cost of production 385.00 1,15,50,00 311,50 3,11,50,00
0 0
Add: Fixed marketing expenses 8.33 2,50,000 2.50 2,50,000
Add: Variable distribution cost 30.00 9,00,000 30.00 30,00,000
Add: Special cost
Gift items cost 30.00 30,00,000
Customers prizes 1.00 1,00,000
Refreshments 1.00 1,00,000

Television programme sponsorship 20.00 20,00,000
cost
Cost of sales 423.33 1,27,00,00 396.00 3,96,00,00
2.58
0 0
Profit 126.67 23,00,000 104.00 1,04,00,00
0
Sale revenue 550.00 1,50,00,00 500.00 5,00,00,00
0 0
Advise to the company about the course of action to be taken.
The profit of A Ltd. Co. is more by Rs. 81 lacs (Rs. 104 lacs Rs. 23 lacs), if
uses its capacity to produce 1,00,000 units of a product per month. Hence, it is
advisable to the Company to produce 1,00,000 units and incur the special costs
for the marketing of its 100% output.
Question 43
Conversion Cost and Added Value.
Answer
Conversion cost is the production cost excluding the cost of direct material
(but including the cost resulting fro variations in direct material, weight or
volume) of producing partly or fully finished products. In other words,
conversion cost of finished product or work in-progress is comprised of direct
labour and the manufacturing overhead.
Added value means the charge in market value resulting from an alteration
in the form, location or availability of a product of service, excluding the cost of
bought out materials or services. Unlike conversion cost, it includes profit.
Question 44
A re-roller produced 400 metric tons of M.S. bars spending Rs. 36,00,000
towards materials and Rs. 6,20,000 towards rolling charges. Ten percent of the
output was found to be defective, which had to be sold at 10% less than the price
for good production. If the sales realization should give the firm an Overall profit
of 12.5% on cost, find the selling price per metric ton of both the categories of
bars. The scrap arising during the rolling process fetched a realization of Rs.
60,000.
(6 Marks)
Answer
Computation of Selling Price
Rs.
Cost of Materials 36,00,000
Less: Scrap 60,000 Rs. 35,40,000
2.59
Rolling charges 6,20,000

Add Profit (12.5% on cost) 5,20,000
Sales value Rs. 46,80,000
Output (effective)
9
360 tons + 40 tons = 396 tons
10
Selling price per MT of good output
= Rs. 46,80,000/396
= Rs. 11,818.18
Selling price of defective per MT
= 0.9 Rs. 11,818.18 = Rs. 10,636.36
Question 45
XYZ Auto Ltd. is in the business of selling cars. It also sells insurance and
finance as part of its overall business strategy. The following information is
available for the company.
Physical Sales Value
Units
Sales of Cars 10,000 Cars Rs. 30,000 lacs
Sales of Insurance 6,000 Rs. 1,500 lacs
Policies
Sales of Finance 8,000 Loans Rs. 19,200 lacs
The Revenue earnings from each line of business before expenses are as
follows:
Sale of Cars 3% of Sales value
Sale of Insurance 20% of Sales value
Sale of Finance 2% of Sales value
2.60
The expenses of the company are as follows:

Salesman salaries Rs. 200 lacs
Rent Rs. 100 lacs
Electricity Rs. 100 lacs
Advertising Rs. 200 lacs
Documentation cost per insurance policy Rs. 100

Documentation cost for each loan Rs. 200
Direct sales expenses per car Rs. 5,000
Indirect costs have to be allocated in the ratio of physical units sold.
Required:
(i) Make a cost sheet for each product allocating the direct and indirect
costs and also showing the product wise profit and total profit.
(ii) Calculate the percentage of profit to revenue earned from each line
of business.
(6 + 8 = 14 marks)
Answer
Product Cost Sheet

Total Cars Insurance Finance
Sales units 10,000 6,000 8,000
Sales value (Rs in lakhs) 30,000 1,500 19,200
Revenue earnings 3% 20% 2%
Revenue earned (Rs in 1584 900 300 384
lakhs)
Direct costs (Rs in lakhs) 522 500(5000 6(100 16 (200
10000) 6000) 8000)
Indirect costs (allocated
in th e ratio of physical
units sold)
0.4167:0.25:0.3333
2.61
Salesman salaries (Rs in 200

lakhs)
Rent (Rs in lakhs) 100
Electricity (Rs in lakhs) 100
Advertising (Rs in lakhs) 200
600 250 150 200
Total costs 1122 750 156 216
Profits (Revenue Total 462 150 144 168
cost)
% of Profits to revenue 29.17% 16.67% 48% 43.75%
earned
Question 46
A Manufacturing Company has an installed capacity of 1,50,000 units per
annum. Its cost structure is given below:
Rs.
(i) Variable cost per unit
Materials 10
Labour (subject to a minimum of Rs. 1,00,000 per month) 10
Overheads 4
(ii) Fixed overheads per annum 1,92,300
(iii) Semi-variable overheads per annum at 75% capacity (It will
increase by Rs. 4,000 per annum for increase of every 5% of
the capacity utilisation or any part thereof) 60,000
The capacity utilisation for the next year is budgeted at 75% for first three
months, 80% for the next six months and 90% for the remaining three
months.
Required:
If the company is planning to have a profit of 20% on the selling price,
calculate the selling price per unit for the next year.
Answer
2.62
Working Notes:
1,50,000
(i) Installed capacity per month =12,500 units
12
(ii) Capacity utilisation 75% 80%
90%
Production per month 9,375 10,000 11,250
(units)
Total production 3 9,375 = 10,000 6 = 11,250 3 =
(units) 28,125 60,000 33,750
Total 1,21,875 units

(iii) Calculation of labour cost:
Capacity 75% 80% 90%
Production per 9,375 10,000 11,250
month (units)
Labour @ 10 93,750 i.e. minimum 1,00,000 1,12,500
(subject to minimum 1,00,000
1,00,000)
Total labour cost 31,00,000 6 1,00,000 3
= 3,00,000 = 6,00,000 1,12,500
= 3,37,500
Total Rs 12,37,500
(iv) Calculation of semi variable overheads:

75% 80% 90%
Semi 60,000 60,000+4,000 60,000+12,000
=5,000 =5333.66 =6,000
variable 12 12 12
Overhead
per month
Total Semi- 35,000 6 5333.66 3 6,000
variable = 15,000 = 32,000 = 18,000
Overhead
2.63
Total Rs. 65,000

Calculation of selling price per unit:
Rs.
Material costs 1,21,875 @ 10 12,18,750
Labour cost 12,37,500
Overheads 1,21,875 @ 4 4,87,500
Semi-variable Overheads 65,000
Fixed Overheads 1,92,300
Profit 20% on selling price i.e., 25% on cost 8,00,262.50
Sales 40,01,312.50
40,01,312. 50
Selling price/unit =
1,21,875 Rs. 32.83
Question 47
Answer any the following:
(i) Explicit and Implicit Costs (May 2007, 2 marks)
(ii) Period Costs and Discretionary Costs (May, Nov, 2007, 2 marks)
Answer
(i) Explicit and Implicit cost:
Explicit costs, which are also known as out of pocket costs, refer to costs
involving immediate payment of cash. Salaries, wages, interest on loan
etc. are examples of explicit costs. They can be easily measured.
The main points of difference between explicit and implicit costs are:
Implicit costs do not involve immediate cash payment.
They are not recorded in the books of account.
They are also known as economic costs.
(ii) Period and Discretionary costs
There are the costs, which are not assigned to the products but are
charged as expenses against the revenue of the period in which they are
2.64
incurred. All non -manufacturing costs such as general and administrative

expenses, selling and distribution expenses are period costs.
Such costs are not tied to a clear cause and effect relationship between
inputs and outputs. They arise from periodic decisions regarding the
maximum outlay to be incurred. Examples are advertising, public
relations, training etc.
Question 48
Explain Profit centres and investment centres. (Nov, 2008, 2 Marks)
Answer
Profit Centres and Investment Centres:
Centres which have the responsibility of generating and maximizing profits are
called profit centres.
Those centres which are concerned with earning an adequate return on
investment are known as Investment centres.
2
Materials
Question 1
List five types of
inefficiency in the use of materials that may be discovered as the result of
investigating material quantity variances. What measures may be taken in each
such situation to prevent their recurrence?
Answer
The five types of
inefficiency in the use of materials that may be discovered as a result of
investigating materials quantity variances are as follows:
1. Purchase of inferior quality of materials.
2. Inefficient labour force leading to excessive utilisation of materials.
3. Defective machines, tools and equipments and bad or improper
maintenance leading to breakdowns resulting in excessive usage of
materials.
2.65
4. Inaccurate technical specifications and slackness in inspection may cause

more rejections, resulting in greater requirement of materials for
rectification of defects.
5. Faulty material processing.
The measures which may be taken in each of the above situations to
prevent their recurrence in future are as below:
1. To ensure the purchase of proper quality of material, each lot of material
purchased should be inspected in accordance with the terms and conditions
of purchase before they are accepted and issued for production. The extent
of inspection may depend on the circumstances. For instance, when
materials are of small value or where the quality of raw materials does not
appreciably affect the final product, the inspection may not be very rigid. In
such a case, inspection may be carried out by taking random samples.
However, for materials of vital importance like raw materials for explosive
factories or for pharmaceutical concerns where material cost is high, a rigid
or strict inspection will be necessary.
2. Labour inefficiency can be reduced by adopting following measures:
(a) Imparting on-the-job training to workers.
(b) Supervising the workers while performing the jobs.
(c) Evaluating workers performance.
(d) Incorporating incentive schemes for workers.
(e) Reducing labour turnover ratio.
3. The wastage of material can also be reduced by properly maintaining
machines, tools and other equipment. The concern should adopt a policy of
preventive maintenance. The use of such a policy will reduce machine down
time and over-consumption of materials. Besides this, workers must be
educated to realise fully the importance of tools and equipment in their day-
to -day work.
4. A reduction in the number of defective units, in this case may automatically
bring down the excessive consumption of material required for rectification
of defects. Reduction in the number of defectives can be achieved by laying
down accurate technical specifications, standards for materials and tactfully
handling the problem of slackness.
5. Faulty material processing also results in excess consumption of material.
The supervisors at the shop floor level should educate and guide the
workers properly so that they make use of the correct procedure laid down
for processing raw materials.
Question 2
2.66
Many businesses have an unnecessarily large amount of capital locked up

in the raw materials and work-in-progress. Indicate methods of correcting this
position.
Answer
The problem of unnecessary locking up of the funds in raw materials and
work -in-progress can be solved by adopting the following methods:-
1. Budgeting materials requirements: To control investment in raw materials it
is necessary to know in advance about the materials requirement during a
specific period, usually a year. The exact quantity of materials and the time
when they would be required can be known by studying carefully
production plans and production schedules. Based on this, materials
requirement budget can be prepared. Such a budget will discourage the
unnecessary investment in raw materials . This budget may also be used as a
basis to assess the performance of executives with regard to investment in
raw materials.
2. ABC Analysis : The technique of ABC analysis also helps in a big way in
overcoming the problem of unnecessary locking up of the funds in raw
materials. Under this method all the raw materials are generally classified
into three categories A, B & C on the basis of their use value. The costliest
items are placed under A Category. These items are controlled by top
executives whereas B and C category of items may be controlled by middle
level and lower level executives respectively. This classification helps in
ensuring that unnecessary funds are not blocked in raw materials
particularly in A category items because of their high value. In fact, ABC
analysis is a method which clearly indicates the items of raw materials to be
controlled by managers at different levels. These managers also ensure a
proper decision with regard to investment in raw materials in respect of the
items falling in their domain.
3. Fixation of raw material levels:To avoid unnecessary locking up of funds in
raw materials, it is desirable to fix up various levels like re-order level,
maximum level, minimum level, safety stock, economic order quantity etc.
Such levels may be fixed up after taking into account the factors like rate of
consumption, lead time, ordering cost, handling cost etc. This method of
stock control, besides avoiding unnecessary locking up of capital in raw
materials, reduces total inventory costs which include inventory carrying
costs and ordering costs.
4. Control over slow-moving and non-moving items: Sometimes, due to high
value of slow moving and non-moving raw materials, it appears that the
2.67
concern has blocked huge sum of money unnecessarily in raw materials. To

overcome this problem, it is necessary to dispose -off as early as possible the
non-moving items or make arrangements for their exchange with the raw
materials required by the concern . Besides this, no new requisition should
be made for the purchase of slow moving items, till the existing stock is
exhausted. Computation of inventory turnover ratio may help in identifying
slow moving items.
5. Variety reduction: Huge investments are sometime made for the purchase of
the same raw material under different brand names to cater to the needs of
different user departments. Significant reduction in investment can be
brought about by selecting a particular brand/variety of raw material
suitable for all the user departments. Under this method instead of
purchasing a number of brands, say ten brands of the same material, the
decision may be taken to purchase less number of brands, say one or two.
Such a decision would minimise unnecessary locking up of funds in raw
materials.
6. Codification of materials: It has been observed that the same material used
by different departments is also named differently by them. Due to this, for
the same material, the purchase department places different orders and the
stores department stores it at different places. Even the accounts for these
materials are maintained separately. Such a practice results in the
unnecessary locking up of funds. Here the excessive investment in raw
materials can be reduced by resorting to the technique known as
"Codification of materials". Under codification a code may be assigned to
each material. The assigned code should be used henceforth for
requisitioning the material from stores by different departments instead of
its name.
7. Control of work -in-progress: The investment in work -in-progress depends
upon the number and sequences of the processes and sub-assemblies and
the length of the production cycle. A system of efficient production planning
and scheduling would assist in maintaining an uninterrupted flow of work
and reducing the length of the production cycle. It will ultimately avoid
unnecessary locking up of the funds in WIP inventory.
Question 3
Discuss briefly how the following items are to be treated in costs:-
(i) Carriage inwards raw materials
(ii) Storage losses
(iii) Cash discount received
2.68
(iv) Insurance costs on stocks of raw materials.

Answer
(i) Carriage inwards on raw materials: It represents the expenditure incurred
in bringing raw materials to factory from outside. This expense is directly
allocated to materials and thus forms a part of the .cost of such materials.
When this is not practicable and allocation to specific items of materials is
difficult, the expense is treated as manufacturing overhead and is charged to
cost of production at a predetermined rate. In some of the undertakings the
practice is to charge these expenses as a percentage of cost, weight or some
other physical unit of material.
(ii) Storage losses: The losses arising out of storage of material can be classified
into two categories. The treatment of losses under each category in Cost
Accounts is as under:-
(a) Losses due to reasons like evaporation, shrinkage, absorption and
moisture, etc. are considered as normal losses. Such losses are
absorbed by good production units by inflating the cost of material
issued for production.
(b) Losses due to fire, flood, storm, theft etc. are treated as abnormal
losses. If these losses are heavy and are not recoverable from the
insurance authorities, it is preferred to charge them to Costing Profit
and Loss Account.
(iii) Cash discount received: It is an allowance given by the vendor for prompt
payment of material price. The opinion among accountants about its
treatment differs. Two prevalent approaches for treating the cash discount
received are as follows:-
(a) The cash discount received in the course of materials buying
should be deducted from the invoice price of the materials. This way
the discount received will reduce the purchase pri ce of the materials.
(b) It may be treated as an item of financial nature and therefore be
kept outside the purview of cost accounting. However, it can be dealt in
the following manner.
The full invoice price should be charged to the material account crediting
the suppliers with the net invoice price, and the discount earned account with
the amount of cash discount received. If the prompt payment could not be
made, the discount lost is debited to the discount lost account. Any difference
between the discount earned and discount lost may be treated as an item of
administrative overhead.
2.69
(iv) Insurance costs on stocks of raw materials:The amount paid as insurance

costs (insurance premium) on stocks of raw materials is meant for covering
the risk which may arise due to fire, theft, riot etc. The insurance cost is
apportioned over different materials on the basis of their value. This cost
may be charged directly to the cost of material.
Question 4
Distinguish between spoilage and defectives in a manufacturing
company. Discuss their treatment in cost accounts and suggest a procedure for
their control.
Answer
Spoilage can be defined as the materials which are badly damaged in the
course of manufacturing operations to the extent that they cannot be rectified
economically and hence taken out of process, to be disposed of in some manner
without further processing. Spoilage may be either normal or abnormal.
Defective products are such semi-finished or finished products produced
by a manufacturing unit, which are not in conformity with laid-down standard or
dimensional specifications. Defectives produced can be re-worked or
reconditioned by the application of additional materials, labour and/or
processing and brought to the point of either standard or sub-standard product.
The costs incurred for reconditioning are known as the "Costs of re -operations of
the defectives". Defective production may be the result of various causes such as
sub -standard materials, bad-workmanship, carelessness in planning, laxity in
inspection etc.
The difference between spoilage and defectives is that while spoilage
cannot be repaired or reconditioned, defectives can be rectified and
transformed, either back to standard production or to seconds.
Treatment of spoilage and defectives in Cost Accounting: Under Cost
Accounts normal spoilage costs (i.e., which is inherent in the operation) are
included in cost either by charging the loss due to spoilage to the production
order or charging it to production overhead so that it is spread over all products.
Any value realised from the sale of spoilage is credited to production order or
production overhead account, as the case may be. The cost of abnormal spoilage
(i.e. arising out of causes not inherent in manufacturing process) are charged to
the Costing Profit and Loss Account. When spoiled work is the result of rigid
specifications the cost of spoiled work is absorbed by good production while the
cost of disposal is charged to production overheads.
2.70
The problem of accounting for defective work is the problem of

accounting of the costs of rectification or rework.
The possible ways of treatment are as below:
(i) Defectives that are considered inherent in the process and are identified as
normal can be recovered by using the following methods:
(a) Charged to good products: The loss is absorbed by good units.
This method is used when 'seconds' have a normal value and defectives
rectified into 'seconds' or 'first' are normal.
(b) Charged to general overheads : When the defectives caused in
one department are reflected only on further processing, the rework
costs are charged to general overheads.
(c) Charged to the departments overheads: If the department
responsible for defectives can be identified then the rectification costs
should be charged to that department.
(d) Charged to Costing Profit and Loss Account: If defectives are
abnormal and are due to causes beyond the control of organisation; the
rework cost should be charged to Costing Profit and Loss Accounts.
(ii) Where defectives are easily identifiable with specific jobs the re-work costs
are debited to the job.
Procedure for the control of Spoilage and Defectives : To control spoilage,
allowance for a normal spoilage should be fixed up and actual spoilage should be
compared with standard set. A systematic procedure of reporting would help
control over spoilage. A spoilage report (as below) would highlight the normal
and abnormal spoilage, the department responsible, the causes of spoilage and
the corrective action taken if any.
Spoilage Report
Units/Deptt. No.............. Date...........
Production Order No...........
Units Units Normal Abnormal Cost of Reason Action
Produced spoiled spoilage spoilage abnormal for taken
spoilage spoilage
Qty. % Qty. %
Rs.
2.71
Control of defectives may cover the following two areas :

(a) Control over defectives produced
(b) Control over reworking costs.
For exercising effective control over defectives produced and the cost of
reworking, standards for normal percentage of defectives and reworking costs
should be established.
Actual performance should be compared with the standards set.
Defective Work Report (as shown below:) should be fed back to the respective
centres of control.
Defective Work Report
Dept. ............. Date: .............
Causes of defects .............
Nature of defects .............
Job/ Defective Detail Re-work Costs Unit Net
Process Normal Abnormal of Materials Labour OV Total cost of good
No. work Rs. Rs. Rs. Ts. Re- output
to be working after
done Rs. re-
working
Question 5
What are the conditions that favour the adoption of last-in first-out
system of materials pricing? Explain its working and indicate its advantages and
limitations.
Answer
The conditions that favours the use of last-in first-out method of
materials pricing are the following:
1. During a period of substantial price rise - the use of LIFO method of pricing
would help to ensure that the cost of production determined is
approximately the current one.
2.72
2. When there is a feeling that due to use of FIFO or average methods the
profit shown and tax paid are too high.
LIFO-Last in first out - is a method of pricing the issues of materials. This
method is based on the assumption that the items of the last batch (lot)
purchased are the first to be issued. Therefore, under this method the price of
the last batch (lot) is used for pricing the issues, until it is exhausted and so on. If
however, the quantity of issue is more than the quantity of the latest lot, price of
earlier (lot) will also be taken into consideration. Consider the following example
:
Last-in-First-Out
Date Receipt Issue Balance
Qty. Rate Qty. Rate Qty. Rate
Kg. Rs. Kg. Rs. Kg. Rs.
1.6.82 200 5 - - 200 5
2.6.82 300 6 - - 200 5
3.6.82 400 300 6 300 6
100 5 100 6
The advantages of using LIFO are as follows :

(i) The cost of the materials used is nearer to the current market price. Thus
the cost of goods produced depends u pon the trend of the market price of
materials. This enables the matching of cost of production with current sales
revenues.
(ii) Use of LIFO during the period of rising prices does not depict
unnecessarily high profit in the income statement; compared to the first in
first out or average methods, the profit shown is relatively lower, because
the cost of production takes into account the rising trend of material prices.
(iii) Under the LIFO method when prices of materials fall, no doubt profits tend
to rise due to lower material cost, yet the finished product appears to be
more competitive and at market prices.
(iv) Over a period, the use of LIFO helps to iron out the fluctuations in profits.
(v) In a period of inflation, LIFO will tend to show the correct profit and thus
avoid paying unduly high taxes to some extent.
The limitations of the LIFO system :
(1) Calculations under LIFO system become complicated and cumbersome when
frequent purchases are made at highly fluctuating rates.
(2) Costs of different similar batches of production carried on at the same time
may differ a great deal.
2.73
(3) In times of falling prices, there will be need for writing off stock values
considerably to stick to the principle of stock valuation i.e at cost or the
market price whichever is lower.
(4) This method of valuation is not acceptable to the Income Tax Authorities.
Question 6
Define (i) Replacement Price and (ii) Standard Price. Discuss the objectives
of these methods of pricing of materials and state the circumstances in which
they are used.
Answer
(i) Replacement Price is defined as the price at which it is possible to
purchase an item, identical to that which is*being replaced or revalued.
(ii) A Standard Price may be defined as a predetermined price fixed for a
spe cified period on the basis of all factors which may affect future price.
Under Replacement Price method, materials issued are valued at the
replacement costs of the items. This method pre -supposes the determination of
the replacement cost of the materials at the time of each issue, viz., the cost at
which identical materials could be currently purchased. The product cost under
this method is at current market price which is the main objective of the
replacement price method.
Replacement Price method is used to value material issues in periods of
rising prices because the cost of material considered in cost of production would
be able to replace the materials at the increased price. This method is used to
find the true cost of production
The fixation of Standard Price takes into account the quantity of materials
to be purchased, possibility of price fluctuations, etc. The Standard Price is used
for comparison with actual prices from period to period and to measure the
efficiency of the purchase of materials. This is used in conjunction with Standard
Costing System for control purposes and is a tool to the management if
fluctuations in prices are not violent.
Question 7
Explain the distinction between waste and scrap in the manufacturing
process. Discuss their treatment in cost accounts and suggest a procedure for
control.
Answer:
2.74
Waste : It represents that portion of basic raw materials, which is either

lost or which evaporates or shrinks during a manufacturing process. It may be
visible or invisible. But i t has no recovery value.
Scrap : The incidental residue arising from the manufacturing operations,
small in quantity and .low in value, recoverable without further processing.
From the definitions of waste and scrap stated above it is quite apparent
that waste cannot be realised whereas scrap can be. Scrap is always visible
whereas waste may or may not be.
Waste can be differentiated as normal and abnormal. Normal waste is
absorbed in the cost of net output, whereas abnormal waste is transferred to the
Costing Profit and Loss Account.
For effective control of waste, normal allowances for yield and waste
should be made from past experience, technical factors and special features of
the material process and product. Actual yield and waste should be compared
with anticipated figures and appropriate actions should be taken where
necessary. Responsibility should be fixed on purchasing, storage, maintenance,
production and inspection staff to maintain quality of the materials and other
standards. A systematic p rocedure for feedback of Achievements against
standards laid should be established.
Scrap may be treated in Cost Accounts in the following ways :
(i) Where the value of scrap is negotiable, it may be excluded from costs. In
other words, the cost of scra p is borne by good units and income from scrap
is treated as other income.
(ii) If the scrap value is considerable, the net sale proceeds of scrap (Gross sales
proceeds of scrapthe cost of selling scrap) is deducted from the material
cost or factory overhead. Under this method the material cost or factory
overhead recovery rate are reduced on account of sale proceeds of scrap.
However, no distinction is made between various processes or jobs.
(iii) Where the various jobs or processes give rise in varying amount of scrap, the
scrap from each job or process is recorded separately and the sale proceeds
from the same credited to the particular job or process. This method is
useful where scrap is of considerable value and does not arise uniformly.
However, this would necessitate the scrap being identified with various jobs
or processes. For this purpose detailed records for scrap will be required.
Control of scrap really arises at the maximum effective utilization of the
raw material. Scrap control does not, therefore, start in the production
department; it starts from the stage of product designing. Thus the most suitable
type of materials, the appropriate size, the right type of equipment and
2.75
personnel would help getting maximum quantity of finished product from a

given raw material.
The procedure for control of scrap should start with establishing a
standard of scrap with each department, job or process, taking into
consideration the nature of material, the nature of the manufacturing operation,
the use of p roper equipment, the size of the material, the employment of proper
personnel and defining areas of responsibility. It is also necessary to establish a
scheme of scrap reporting. The actual scrap should be compared with the
predetermined standard, and the reasons for the difference, if any, should be
investigated, corrective action taken, whenever the actual scrap is found to be
more than what is normally allowed. Also, it is to be ensured that proper
supervision is exercised at the scrap generation stage.
Question 8
What is ABC analysis ? Discuss its role in a sound system of material
control.
Answer
ABC analysis is a technique through which selective control can be
exercised over the various items of inventory. These days the manufacturing
units have such a large number of items in their stores that it is often not
possible for the management to pay minute attention to each and every item. A
system is therefore divised by which these items are classified according to their
importance and then selective control exercised. ABC analysis or Selective
Inventory Control is a technique whereby the measure of control over an item of
inventory varies directly with its usage value. In other words, the high value
items are controlled more closely than the items of low value.
To classify the various items according to their usage value, the following
procedure is adopted:
(a) The quantity or the number of parts expected to be used for production in
the given period is estimated.
(b) The quantity as estimated above is multiplied by the unit value of the
item.
(c) All the items are then re -arranged according to their usage value in a
descending order.
(d) It would normally be found that a small number of items add upto a very
high value. Thus 5 to 10 percent of total items may constitute 70 to 85
percent of material cost. Such items are classified as A items. Another 10 to
20 percent of total items may represent 10 to 20 percent of the total
2.76
material cost. These items may be categorised as B items. The rest, i.e. 70 to
85-percent of items, though numerous, will thus form only 5 to 10 percent
of total material cost. These may be called C items.
This classification thus highlights the more significant items. Management
can then exercise a very close control over A items. It may apply occasional
control over B items. As regards C items, it may exercise control only in a general
manner. For example, it may order the quantities of C items annually or once in
six months or so. It is obvious that since C items do not have a high value, the
total investment in such items will not be large.
Regarding A items, the management will have to define the stock levels,
i.e., maximum, minimum, reordering and danger very carefully. Also a close
check on the consumption of these items will have to be kept. The economic
order quantity for each of the items in this category should be worked out.
Similarly other technique of inventory control should also be applied to A items.
It would be appreciated that since A items constitute the bulk of the investment
in the total inventory, it would be worthwhile to bring them under close control
and to apply modern management inventory control techniques.
ABC analysis helps the management in the following ways:
(1) The investment in inventories is optimised through a close and direct control
over A items. This would naturally release funds which can then be
channelised into more profitable areas. This would raise the overall return
on investment earned by the unit.
(2) The ordering and carrying costs are reduced since the management would
attempt to optimise such costs so far as they relate to the bulk of the items.
(3) If the management seeks to exercise direct control over all the items of
inventory, the inventory control system would become very expensive. ABC
analysis therefore cuts down the cost of the system and relates its cost to
the attendant benefits.
(4) The main objectives of inventory control are fulfilled under this system at
the minimum cost. With scientific control of inventories, th e stock turnover
rate can be maintained at comparatively high levels.
The concept of ABC analysis can be used in areas other than inventory
also. This technique basically emphasises that where the items to be controlled
are numerous, one should categorise them according to their importance. Close
control should then be exercised on the most significant category. On the less
important categories, the degree of control maybe related to the benefit from
control.
Thus finally it may be concluded that ABC analysis plays an important role
for a sound system of material control.
2.77
Question 9
Distinguish between
(a) Perpetual Inventory System and continuous stock taking.
(b) Bill of materials and material requisition note
Answer
(a) Distinction between Perpetual Inventory System and Continuous Stock
taking
Perpetual Inventory System: It is a system of stock control followed by the
stores department. Under this system, a continuous record of receipt and
issue of material is maintained by the stores department. In other words, in
this system, stock control cards or bin cards and the stores ledger show
clearly the receipts, issues and balance of all items in stock at all times. This
system facilitates planning of production and ensures that production is not
interrupted for want of materials and stores.
Continuous Stock taking: It means physical verification of stores items on a
continuous basis to reveal the position of actual balances. Such a verification
is conducted round the year, thus covering each item of store twice or
thrice. Any discrepancies, irregularities or shortages brought to the notice,
as a result of continuous stock verification are reported to the appropriate
authorities for initiating necessary rectification measures. This system works
as a moral check as stores staff and acts as a deterrent to dishonesty.
A perpetual inventory system is usually supported by a programme of
continuous stock taking. That is continuous stock taking is complementary
to the perpetual inventory system. Sometimes the two terms are considered
synonymous but it is not so. The success of the perpetual inventory system
depends upon the maintenance and upto date writing up of (i) the stores
ledger and (ii) bincards/stock control cards, Continuous stock taking,
ensures the veracity of figures shown by the above records
(b) Distinction between bill of materials and material requisition note.
Bill of materials: It is a list of material: required either for a particular job or
for a work order. It contains the description; code and quantity of materials
and other stores items required for a particular job or work order. It serves
as an advance intimation to stores department about the requirement of
materials. It acts as an authorisation for the issue of all materials and stores
items mentioned in the bill of materials. Its use reduces paper work and
ensures requisition of the exact quantity of materials to the user
department.
2.78
Material requisition note: It is a formal request, for the supply of specified

materials, stores etc., to the production department for a specific job or
work order. It authorises the issuing department to draw from stores the
requisitioned materials. Such a note contains information about the
description, code and quantity of materials needed. It also has job/work
order number for which the material has been requisitioned. This note is
signed by the Foreman of the concerned department.
Question 10
Distinguish amongst:
Waste
Spoilage
Salvage
Rectification
Scrap.
How are they treated in Cost Accounts.
Answer
Waste : It represents the portion of basic raw materials lost in processing
having no recoverable value. Waste may be visible-remnants of basic raw
materialsor invisible, e.g., disappearance of basic raw materials through
evaporation, smoke etc.
Normal waste is absorbed in the cost of net output, whereas abnormal
waste is transferred to the Costing Profit and Loss Account.
For effective control of waste, normal allowances for yield and waste
should be made from past experience, te chnical factors and special features of
the material process and product. Actual yield and waste should be compared
with anticipated figures and appropriate actions should be taken where
necessary. Responsibility should be fixed on purchasing, storage, maintenance,
production and inspection staff to maintain standards. A systematic procedure
for feedback of achievement against laid down standards should be established.
Spoilage : It is the term used for materials which are badly damaged in
manufacturing operations, and they cannot be rectified economically and hence
taken out of process to be disposed of in some manner without further
processing. Spoilage maybe either normal or abnormal.
Normal spoilage (i.e., which is inherent in the operation) costs are
included in costs either by charging the loss due to spoilage to the production
2.79
order or charging it to production overhead so that it is spread over all products.

Any value realised from spoilage is credited to production order or production
overhead account, as the case may be.
The cost of abnormal spoilage (i.e., arising out of causes not inherent in
manufacturing process) are charged to the Costing Profit and Loss Account.
When spoiled work is the result of rigid specification, the cost of spoiled work is
absorbed by good production while the cost of disposal is charged to production
overead.
To control spoilage, allowance for normal spoilage should be fixed and
actual spoilage should be compared with standard set. A systematic procedure
of reporting would help control over spoilage. A spoilage report should highlight
the normal and abnormal spoilage, the department responsible, the causes of
spoilage and the corrective action taken, if any.
Salvage: Salvaged material refers to the material retrieved from the
spoiled work. Salvage is the process by which salvaged material is retrieved. The
salvaged units of material are usable in the production.
The value of salvaged material may be credited to the account to which
spoilage is charged.
Rectification: It means bringing back the defective units either to
standard units of production or as seconds, by reworking. The work of
rectification in small concern's is usually entrusted to the production shop,
whereas in big concerns, a separate department carries out the task. Before the
start of rectification work an estimate of the cost of rectification is prepared and
compared with the excess value to be obtained after rectification. The concern
only goes ahead with the task of rectification if the aforesaid comparison is
found favourable.
The task of rectification is usually carried out under a 'Rectification Work
Order', and all costs of re-work are collected against this work order for material,
labour and overhead.
If the defective production is inherent in the process of manufacture, and
arises as a normal consequence of productive activities and if it can be identified
with specific jobs, the rectification cost is charged to the jobs as the cost of
manufacturing good units of the product. This will have the effect of adding to
the cost of the jobs. If the expenditure on rectification is considered abnormal, it
is excluded from product costs and charged to Costing Profit and Loss Account.
Scrap: It has been defined as the incidental residue from certain types of
manufacture, usually of small amount and low value, recoverable without
further processing. Scrap may be treated to cost accounts in the following ways:
2.80
(i) Where the value of scrap is negligible, it may be excluded from costs. In
other words, the cost of scrap is borne by good units and income from scrap
is treated as other income.
(ii) The sales value of scrap, net of selling and distribution cost, is deducted
from over-head to reduce the overhead rate. A variation of this method is to
deduct the net realisable value from material cost. This method is followed
when scraps cannot be segregated job or process-wise.
(iii) When scrap is identifiable with a particular job or process and its value is
significant, the scrap account should be charged with full cost. The credit is
given to the job or process concerned. The profit or loss in the scrap
account, on realisation, will be transferred to the Costing Profit and Loss
Account.
Control of scrap really means the maximum effective utilisation of raw
material. Scrap control does not, therefore, start in the production department,
it starts from the stage of product designing. Thus the most suitable type of
materials, the right type of equipment and personnel would help in getting
maximum quantity of finished product from a given raw material.
A standard allowance for scrap should be fixed and actual scrap should
be collected, recorded and reported, indicating the cost centre responsible for it.
A periodical scrap report would serve the purpose where two or more
departments or cost centres are responsible for the scrap; the reports should be
routed through the departments concerned.
Question 11
Draw a proforma of "Bill of Materials". List down the Advantages of using
the same.
Answer
Proforma of
Bill of Materials
Job No. _________ No. ___________
Department authorised ___________ Date __________
S.No. Code Description Qty. Date of Issue and Rate Amount
No. or Qty. issued Rs. Rs.
size Date Qty.
2.81
__________________
Authorised by ___________________ Checked by _________
Store Keeper's Signature __________ Cost Clerk ____________
Advantages of the using Bill of Materials
A bill of materials
serves the purpose of an advance intimation to the concerned department of
the orders to be executed. It is usually prepared in quadruples. A copy of it is
usually sent to each of the following department.
(i) Stores department
(ii) Cost Accounts
department
(iii) Production Control
department
The advantages of
using "Bill of materials" by the above depa rtments may be summed up as
follows:
Stores department
(1) A Bill of materials serves as an important basis of preparing material
purchase requisitions by stores department.
(2) It acts as an authorisation for issuing total material requirement.

(3) The clerical activity is reduced as the stores clerk issues the entire/part of
the material requirement to the users, if the details of material asked are
present in the Bill of materials.
Cost Accounts department
(1) "Bill of materials" is used by Cost accounts department for preparing an
estimate / budget of material cost for the job/process / operation, it is
meant.
(2) It may be used as a device for controlling the excess cost of material used.
This is done after determining material variances and ascertaining the
reasons for their occurrence.
Production Control Department
2.82
(1) "Bill of materials" may be used by this department for controlling usage of
materials.
(2) Its usage saves time which otherwise would have been wasted for preparing
separate requisitions of material.
Question 12
Write notes on Bill of Material
Answer
Bill of material
In most of the manufacturing units a list of
materials required for a particular work or job order is prepared. Such a list is
usually prepared either by the engineering or production planning department.
This list is known as a bill of material.
Bill of materials has code; description and
quantity of materials and other stores items required for carrying out a
particular work or job ord er. It also acts as an authorisation for the issue of
materials and stores items mentioned in it. Use of Bill of materials saves paper
work and also ensures requisition of the exact quantity of materials. It also saves
the botheration of stores people of preparing and issuing a number of material
requisition slips It also acts as an advance intimation to stores and purchase
department about the requirements of materials.
Generally four copies of it are prepared, one
for each of the following departments.
(a) Stores department
(b) Production department
(c) Cost Accounts department
(d) Production planning department.
Question 13
How are normal and abnormal loss of
material arising during storage treated in Cost Accounts?
Answer
Cost Accounts treatment of normal and
abnormal loss of material arising during storage.
The difference between the book balance and
actual physical stock, which may either be gain or loss, should be transferred to
2.83
Inventory Adjustment Account pending scrutiny to ascertain the reason for the
difference.
If on scrutiny, the difference arrived at is
considered as normal, then such a difference should be transferred to overhead
control account and if abnormal, it should be debited to costing profit and loss
account.
In the case of normal losses, an alternative
method may be used. Under this method the price of the material issued to
production may be inflated so as to cover the normal loss.
Question 14
Distinguish clearly Bincards and Sores Ledger
Answer
Both bin cards and stores ledger are
perpetual inventory records. None of them is a substitute for the other. These
two records may be distinguished from the following points of view:
(i) Bin card is maintained by the store keeper, while the stores ledger is
maintained by the cost accounting department.
(ii) Bin card is the stores recording document whereas the stores ledger is an
accounting record.
(iii) Bin card contains information with regard to quantities i.e. their receipt,
issue and balance while the stores ledger contains both quantitative and
value information in respect of their receipts, issue and balance.
(iv) In the bin card entries are made at the time when transaction takes place.
But in the stores ledger entries are made only after the transaction has
taken place.
(v) Inter departmental transfer of materials appear only in stores ledger.
(vi) Bin cards record each transaction but stores ledger records the same
information in a summarized form.
Question 15
What is Just in Time (JIT) purchases? What are the advantages of such
purchases?
(May,1999, 3 marks)
Answer
Just in time (JIT) purchases means the purchase of goods or materials
such that delivery immediately precedes their use.
2.84
Advantages of JIT purchases:

Main advantages of JIT purchases are as follows:
1. The suppliers of goods or materials cooperates with the company and
supply requisite quantity of goods or materials for which order is placed
before the start of production.
2. JIT purchases re sults in cost savings for example, the costs of stock out,
inventory carrying, materials handling and breakage are reduced.
3. Due to frequent purchases of raw materials, its issue price is likely to be very
close to the replacement price. Consequently the method of pricing to be
followed for valuing material issues becomes less important for companies
using JIT purchasing.
4. JIT purchasing are now attempting to extend daily deliveries to as many
areas as possible so that the goods spend less time in warehouses or on
store shelves before they are exhausted.
Question 16
Distinguish between perpetual inventory
and continuous stock trading.
(November, 1996, 4 marks)

Answer
Perpetual Inventory and Continuous Stock Taking:
Perpetual Inventory is a system in which a continuous record of receipt
and issue of materials is maintained by the stores department. In this system the
stock control cards, bin cards and stores ledger show the receipts, issue and
balance of each item at any point of times after each transaction. The stocks as
per dual records namely bin card and stores ledger are reconciled on a
continuous basis. The system facilitates planning and control.
Continuous Stock taking is a system of physical verification of stocks of
each item on continuous basis. The actual quantity in the bincard is compared
with bin balances. Such a verification is conducted round the year such that all
items of stocks are verified 3 to 4 times in a year. Any discrepancies are
investigated and reported for corrective action. It also serves as a moral check on
stores staff and acts as deterrent to dishonesty.
A Perpetual Inventory System is usually supported by Continuous Stock
taking. It calls for upto date .writing up of stores/ledger and bin cards and stock
control-cards. The balances as per bin card and stores ledger are compared
when every receipt or issue is posted. The physical balance on continuous stock
2.85
taking is also compared with the bincard or ledger balances. Thus-monthly

accounts can be prepared with confidence.
Question 17
Discuss the accounting treatment of defectives in cost accounts (May,
2000, 4 marks)
Answer
Accounting treatment of defectives in cost accounts:
Defectives refers to those units or portions of production, which do not
meet the prescribed specifications. Such units can be reworked or re -
conditioned by the use of additional material, labour and /or processing and
brought to the point of either standard or sub-standard units.
The possible way of treating defectives in cost accounts are as below:
1. When defectives are normal and it is not beneficial to identity them job-
wise, then the following methods may be used.
(a) Charged to good products: The cost of rectification of normal
defectives is charged to good units. This method is used when
defectives rectified are normal.
(b) Charged to general overheads. If the department responsible for
defectives cannot be identified, the rework costs are charged to general
overheads.
(c) Charged to departmental overheads: If the department
responsible for defectives can be correctly identified, the rectification
costs should be charged to that department.
2. When normal defectives are easily identifiable with specific job the rework
costs are debited to the identified job.
3. When defectives are abnormal and are due to causes within the control of
the organisation, the rework cost should be charged to the Costing Profit
and Loss Account.
Question 18
Discuss the concept of Economic Batch Quantity (EBQ) (May, 2000, 2 marks)
Answer
Economic batch quantity: Production is usually done in batches and each
batch can have any number of units of a component in it. The optimum quantity
for a batch is that quantity for which the setting up and carrying costs are
2.86
minimum. Such an optimum quantity is known as "Economic batch quantity".

The formula used to determine the economic batch quantity (EBQ) is:
2 DS
EBQ =
C
where, EBQ = Economic batch quantity
D = Demand of the components in a year
S = Setting up cost per batch
C = Carrying cost p.u. per annum
Question 19
Explain the concept of "ABC Analysis" as a technique of inventory control

Answer
ABC Analysis: It is a system of selective inventory control whereby the
measure of control over an item of inventory varies with its usage value. It
exercises discriminatory control over different items of stores grouped on the
basis of the investment involved,. Usually the items of material are grouped into
three categories viz; A, B and C according to their use value during a period. In
other words, the high use value items are controlled more closely than the items
of low use value.
(i) 'A' Category of items consists of only a small percentage i.e., about 10 % of
the total items of material handled by the stores but require heavy
investment i.e., about 70% of inventory value, because of their high prices
and heavy requirement.
(ii) 'B' Category of items comprises of about 20% of the total items of material
handled by stores. The percentage of investment required is about 20% of
the total investment in inventories.
(iii) 'C category of items does not require much investment. It may be about 10%
of total inventory value but they are nearly 70% of the total items handled
by stores.
'A' category of items can be controlled effectively by using a regular
system, which ensures neither over- stocking nor shortage of materials for
production. Such a system plans its total material requirements by making
budgets. The stocks of materials are controlled by fixing certain levels like
maximum level, minimum level and re -order level. A reduction in inventory
management costs is achieved by determining economic order quantities after
taking into account ordering cost and carrying cost. To avoid shortages and to
2.87
minimize heavy investment of funds in inventories, the techniques of value

analysis, variety reduction, standardization etc. are used along with aforesaid
techniques.
In the case of 'B' category of items, as the sum involved is moderate,
therefore, the same degree of control as applied in 'A' category of items is not
warranted. The order for the items, belonging to this category may be placed
after reviewing their situation periodically. This category of items can be
controlled by routine control measures.
For 'C' category of items, there is no need of exercising constant control.
Orders for items in this group may be placed either after six months or once in a
year, after ascertaining consumption requirements.
Question 20
Distinguish between Re-order level and Re-order quantity
Answer
Re-order level & Re-order quantity: Re-order level is defined as that level
of an inventory item where a fresh order for its replenishment is placed.
Mathematically it can be determined by using the following formulas:
Re -order level (ROL) = [Maximum
consumption x Maximum re -order period]
Alternatively: = Minimum level +
Average rate of Average

consumption re order period
Re -order quantity (ROQ) is defined as that quantity of an inventory item
for which order is placed again and again. Economic order quantity is a re-order
quantity but not vice -a-versa. It can be determined by using the following
mathematical expression:
2 Annual requirement of inventory item in units Ordering cos t per order
EOQ = ROQ =
Annual carrying cos t per unit per annum
Question 21
Describe perpetual inventory records and continuous stock verification.
Answer
Perpetual inventory records and continuous stock verification:
Perpetual inventory records represents a system of records maintained
by the stores department. It in fact comprises of (i) Bin cards, and (ii) Stores
Ledger.
2.88
Bin cards maintains a quantitative record of receipts, issues and closing

balances of each item of stores. Separate bin cards are maintained for each item.
Each card is filled up with the physical movement of goods i.e. on its receipt and
issue.
Like bin cards the stores ledger is maintained to record all receipts and
issues in respect of materials. Entries in it are made with the help of goods
received notes and material issue requisitions.
A perpetual inventory record is usually checked by a programme of
continuous stock verification. Continuous stock verification means the physical
checking of those inventory records (which are maintained under perpetual
inventory) with actual stock.
Perpetual inventory records helps in proper material control as
discrepancies in physical stock and book figures are regularly reconciled through
continuous stock verification.
Question 22
"To be able to calculate a
basic EOQ certain assumptions are necessary. "List down these assumptions
. (November, 1995, 2
marks)
Answer
The computation of
economic order quantity is subject to the following assumptions:
(i) Ordering cost (per order)
and carrying cost (per unit/annum) are known and constant.
(ii) Anticipated usage (in units)
of material for a period is uniform and known.
(iii) Cost per unit of the
material (to be purchased) is known and it is constant.
Question 23
Draw specimen draft of a 'Purchase Order'. (May, 1997, 4 marks)
Answer
(a) Specimen draft of a 'Purchase Order'
ABC Limited
___________
Purchase Order
2.89
No. ____________
Dated:__________
To
__________________
__________________
__________________
Dear Sirs,
With reference to your quotation No. ____ dated _____, has been accepted by
our office. Please supply the following item of stores on the terms and
conditions listed on the reverse of this order; latest by _______
S.No. Description Quantity Rate Amount
Rs. Rs.
Terms of delivery: _________

Terms of Payment : _________
Packing and dispatch instructions: __________________
Bill to be sent to: Yours faithfully,
Purchase Officer
Question 24
How is slow moving and non-moving item of
stores detected and what steps are necessary to reduce such stocks?
Answer
Detection of slow moving and non-moving item of stores:
The existence of slow moving and non-moving item of stores can be
detected in the following ways.
(i) By preparing and scanning periodic reports showing the status of different
items or stores.
(ii) By calculating the stock holding of various items in terms of number of days/
months of consumption.
(iii) By computing ratios periodically, relating to the issues as a percentage of
average stock held.
(iv) By implementing the use of a well designed information system.
2.90
Necessary steps to reduce stoc k of slow moving and non-moving item of

stores:
(i) Proper procedure and guidelines should be laid down for the disposal of
non-moving items, before they further deteriorates in value.
(ii) Diversify production to use up such materials.
(iii) Use these materials as substitute, in place of other materials.
Question 25
Distinguish between Bin Card and Stores Ledger. (May, 2002, 2 marks)
Answer
Bin Card Stores Ledger

Bincards are maintained in the stores Stores ledger is maintained in the cost
and are serving the purpose of stock accounts department.
register. Here entries are posted by the stores
Entries in it are posted by the issue ledger clerk. He records the quantities
clerk. He records the quantity about and value about receipts, issues and
receipts, issues and closing balance closing balance along with code
along with code number of material, number of material, maximum,
maximum, minimum and reorder minimum and reorder levels.
levels. Here transactions can be posted
Here transactions are posted periodically.
individually. Posting . is done after the issue of
Posting is done at the time of issue of materials.
material.
Question 26
Explain the advantages that would accrue in
Using the LIFO method of pricing for the valuation of raw material stock
Answer
(a) LIFO- Last-in-first-out: A method of pricing for the valuation of raw material
stock. It is based on the assumption that the items of the last batch(lot)
purchased are the first to be issued. Therefore, under this method, the price
of the last batch(lot) of raw material is used for pricing raw material issues
until it is exhausted. If, however, the quantity of raw material issued is more
than the quantity of the latest lot, the price of the last but one lot and so on
will be taken for pricing the raw material issues.
2.91
The advantages that would accrue from the use of LIFO method of pricing
the valuation of raw materials, are as follows:-
(i) The cost of materials used is nearer to the current market price. Thus the
cost of goods produced depends upon the trend of the market price of
materials. This enables the matching of cost of production with current sales
revenues.
(ii) Use of LIFO during the period of rising prices does not depict unnecessarily
high profit in the income statement; compared to the first-in-first-out or
average methods. The profit shown by the use of LIFO is relatively lower,
because the cost of production takes into account the rising trend of
material prices.
(iii) When price of materials fall, the use of LIFO method accounts for rising the
profits due to lower material cost. Inspite of this finished product appears to
be more competitive and at market prices.
(iv) Over a period, the use of LIFO will iron out the fluctuations in profit.
(v) During inflationary period, the u se of LIFO will show the correct profit and
thus avoid paying unduly high taxes to some extent.
Question 27
What is a purchase requisition? Give a specimen form of a purchase
requisition.
Answer
A Purchase requisition is a form used for making a formal request to the
purchasing department to purchase materials. Purchase requisitions are usually
initiated by
(i) A store department for regular and standard items held in the stock.
(ii) The production control department for special material required for
specific jobs.
(iii) The maintenance department for maintenance
equipment and items of capital expenditure.
(iv) The heads of departments for office equipments.
The aforesaid arrangement is only a matter of convenience. In some
concerns distinction is made between regular indents and special indents,
depending upon whether the items are needed for replacing stocks or for special
orders. But both types of indents are initiated by the stores department.
Irrespective of the differences regarding the procedure for initiating purchase
2.92
requisition, the purchase manager should have with him a list of the persons
authorised to requisition materials.
Each purchase requisition should clearly state the quantity, quality and
other specifications in the appropriate column of the given specimen form along
with the purpose for which materials are required. It should also indicate the
date by which such materials are needed.
Depending upon the procedure to be followed appropriate number of
copies of the purchase requisitions may be prepared and used accordingly. A
specimen form of purchase requisition is given below:-
A specimen form of purchase requisition
Date ____________ For Stock Date of requirement
________
Req. No._________ Dept. or work order No.______
Sl. No. Code No. Description Quantity Grade Remarks
Requisitioned by _________ Checked by __________ Approved by

____________
For Purchase Department use
Purchase Order No. _____________ Date of Purchase
___________________
Name of supplier ________________ Expected date of delivery
____________
Question 28
What do you understand by ABC analysis of inventory control ? A factory
uses 4,000 varieties of inventory. In terms of inventory holding and inventory
usage, the following information is compiled:
No. of % % value of inventory % of inventory
varieties of holding (average) usage (in end-
inventory product)
3,875 96.875 20 5
110 2.750 30 10
15 0.375 50 85
4,000 100.000 100 100
Classify the items of inventory as per ABC analysis with reasons. (November,
1998, 6 marks)
2.93
Answer
ABC Analysis: It is a system of selective inventory control whereby the
measure of control over an item of inventory varies with its usage value. It
exercises discriminatory control over different items of stores grouped on the
basis of the investment involved. Usually the items of material are grouped into
three categories viz; A, B and C according to their use value during a period. In
other words, the high use value items are controlled more closely than the items
of low use value.
(i) 'A' Category of items consists of only a small percentage i.e., about 10% of
the total items of material handled by the stores but require heavy
investment i.e., about 70% of inventory value, because of their high prices
and heavy requirement.
(ii) 'B' Category of items comprises of about 20% of the total items of material
handled. by stores. The percentage of investment required is about 20% of
the total investment in inventories.
'
(iii) C' category of items do not require much investment. It may be about
10% of total inventory value but they are nearly 70% of the total items
handled by stores.
'A' category of items can be controlled effectively by using a regular system
which ensures neither over-stocking nor shortage of materials for
production: Such a system plans its total material requirements by making
management costs is achieved by determining economic order quantities
after taking into account ordering cost and carrying cost. To avoid shortages
and to minimize heavy investment of funds in inventories, the techniques of
value analysis, variety reduction, standardisation etc. are used along with
aforesaid techniques.
In the case of 'B' category of items, as the sum involved is moderate,
therefore the same degree of control as applied in 'A' category of items is
not warranted. The orders for the items, belonging to this category may be
placed after reviewing their situation periodically. This category of items can
be controlled by routine control measures.
Orders for items in this group, may be placed either after six months 0r once
in a year, after ascertaining consumption requirements.
Classification of the items of inventory as per ABC analysis
2.94
1. 15 number of varieties of inventory items, should be classified as 'A'

category i tems because of the following reasons:
(i) Constitute 0.375% of total number of varieties of inventory items
handled by stores of factory, which is minimum as per given
classification in the table.
(ii) 50% of total use value of inventory holding (average) which is
maximum according to the given table.
(iii) Highest consumption of about 85% of inventory usage (in end-
product).
2. 110 number of varieties of inventory items, should be classified as 'B'
category items because of the following reasons:
(i) Constitute 2.750% of total number of varieties of inventory items
handled by stores of factory.
(ii) Requires moderate investment of about 30% of total use value of
inventory holding (average).
(iii) Moderate consumption of about 10% of inven tory usage (in end-
product).
3. 3,875 number of varieties of inventory items, should be classified as 'C'
category items because of the following reasons:
(i) Constitute 96.875% of total varieties of inventory items handled
by stores of factory.
(ii) Requires investment of 20% of total use value of inventory
holding (average).
(iii) Minimum consumption i.e. about 5% of inventory usage (in end-
product).
Question 29
The following information is extracted from the Stores Ledger:
Material X
Opening Stock
Nil
Purchases :
Jan.1 100 @ Re. 1 per unit
Jan. 20 100 @ Rs. 2 per unit
Issues:
Jan. 22 60 for Job W
16
Jan 23 60 for Job W
17
2.95
Complete the receipts

and issues valuation by adopting the First-in First-Out, Last-in First Out and the
Weighted Average Method. Tabulate the values allocated to Job W 16, Job W 17
and the closing stock under the methods aforesaid and discuss from the different
points of view which method you would prefer.
Answer
See next pages for
Statements.
From the point of view
of cost of material charged to each job, it is minimum under FIFO and maximum
under LIFO. During the period of rising prices, the use of FIFO gives rise to high
profits and that of LIFO low profits. In the case of weighted average there is no
significant adverse or favourable effect on the cost of material as well as on
profits.
From the point of view
of valuation of closing stock it is apparent from the above statement that it is
maximum under FIFO, moderate under weighted average a nd minimum under
LIFO.
It is clear from the
above that the use of weighted average evens out the fluctuations in the prices.
Under this method, the cost of materials issued to the jobs and the cost of
material in hand reflects greater uniformity than under FIFO and LIFO. Thus from
different points of view, weighted average method is preferred over LIFO and
FIFO.
Answer
Statement of Receipts and Issues by adopting First-in-First-Out
Method
Date Particu Receipts Issues Ba lance
lars Uni Rate Val Unit Rate Valu Unit Rate Value
ts Rs. ue s Rs. e s Rs. Rs.
No. Rs. No. Rs. No.
Jan Purcha 10 1 10 100 1 100
1 se 0 0
Jan Purcha 10 2 20 100 1 100
20 se 0 0
100 2 200
2.96
Jan. Issue 60 1 60 40 1 40
22 to Job 100 2 200
W 16
Jan. Issue 40 1 40
23 to
Job W 20 2 40 80 2 160
17
Statement of Receipts and Issues by adopting Last-In-First-Out
method
Date Particulars Receipts Issues Balance
Units Rate Value Units Rate Value Units Rate Value
No. Rs. Rs. No. Rs. Rs. No. Rs. Rs.
Jan Purchase 100 1 100 100 1 100
1
Jan Purchase 100 2 200 100 1 100
20
100 2 200
Jan. Issue to 60 2 120 100 1 100
22
Job W 16 40 2 80
Jan. Issue to 40 2 80 80 1 80
23
Job W 17 20 1 20
Statement of Receipt and Issues by adopting Weighted Average method

Date Particulars Receipts Issues Balance
Uni Rat Val Uni Rate Val Unit Rate Valu
ts e ue ts Rs. ue s Rs. e
No. Rs. Rs. No. Rs. No. Rs.
Jan Purchase 10 1 100 100 1 100
1 0
Jan Purchase 10 2 200 200 1.50 300
20 0
Jan. Issue to 60 1.50 90 140 1.50 210

22 Job W 16
2.97
Jan. Issue to 60 1.50 90 80 1.50 120

23
Job W 17
Statement of Material values allocated to Job W 16, Job W 17

and Closing Stock, under aforesaid methods
FIFO LIFO Weighted
Average
Rs. Rs. Rs.
Material for Job W 60 120 90
16
Material for Job W 80 100 90
17
Closing Stock 160 80 120
300 300 300
Question 30
AT Ltd. furnishes the following stores transactions for September, 1982
1-9-82 Opening balance 25 Units value Rs. 162.50
4-9-82 Issues Req. No. 85 8 Units
6-9-82 Receipts from B & Co. GRN NO. 26 50 Units @ Rs. 5.75 per
unit
10-9-82 Returns to B & Co. 10 Units
13-9-82 Issues Req. No.110 20 Units
15-9-82 Receipts from M & Co. GRN NO. 33 25 Units @ Rs. 6.10 per
unit
17-9-82 Issues Reg. No. 121 10 Units
19-9-82 Received replacement from B & Co. GRN 10 Units
No. 38
20-9-82 Returned from department material of
M & Co. MRR No.4 5 Units
22-9-82 Transfer from Job 182 to Job 187 in the 5 Units
dept. MTR 6
2.98
26-9-92 Issues Req. No. 146 10 units

29-9-82 Transfer from Dept. "A" to Dept. "B" MTR 5 Units
10
30-9-82 Shortage in stock taking 2 Units
Write up the priced stores ledger on FIFO method and discuss how
would you treat the shortage in stock taking.
2.99
Answer
Stores Ledger of AT Ltd. for the month of
September, 1982 (FIFO method)
Date Receipt Issue Balance
GR Q Rat Amo Requis Qty. Rate Amo Qty. Rate Amo
N ty e unt ition Unit Rs. unt Unit Rs. P. unt
No . Rs. Rs. No. s P. Rs. s Rs.
. U P. P. P. P.
M ni
RR ts
No
.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1.9.8 25 6.50 162.
2 50
4.9.. 85 8 6.50 52 17 6.50 110.
82 50
6.9.8 26 5 5.7 287. 17 6.50
2 0 5 50 50 5.75 398.
00
7.9.8 97 12 6.50 78 5 6.50
2 50 5.75 320.
00
10.9. Nil 10 5.75 57.5 5 6.50
82 0 40 5.75 262.
00
12.9. 108 5 6.50
82 10 5.75 90 30 5.75 172.
50
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 109 11 12
13.9.82 110 20 5.75 115
10 5.75 57.50
15.9.82 33 25 6.10 152.50 10 5.75
25 6.10 210.00
17.9.82 121 10 5.75 57.50 25 6.10 152.50
2.100
19.9.82 38 10 5.75 57.50 25 6.10

10 5.75 210.00
20.9.82 4 5 5.75 28.75 5 5.75
25 6.10
10 5.75 238.75
26.9.82 146 5 5.75 20 6.10
5 6.10 59.29 10 5.75 179.50
30.9.82 Shortage 2 6.10 12.20 18 6.10
10 5.75 167.30
Working Notes
1. The material received as replacement from vendor is treated as fresh
supply.
2. In the absence of information the price of the material received from within
on 20.9.82 has been taken as the price of the earlier issue made on 17.9.82.
In FIFO method physical flow of the material is irrelevant for pricing the
issues.
3. The issue of material on 26.9.82 is made out of the material received
from within.
4. The entries for transfer of material from one job and department to other
on 22.9.82 and 29.9.82 are book entries for adjusting the cost of respective
jobs and as such they have not been shown in the stores ledger account.
5. The material found short as a result of stock taking has been written off.
Treatment of shortages in stock taking:
At the time of stock taking generally discrepancies are found between
physical stock shown in the bin card and stores ledger. These discrepancies are in
the form of shortages or losses. The ; causes for these discrepancies may be
classified as unavoidable or avoidable.
Losses arising from unavoidable causes should be taken care of by setting
up a standard percentage of loss based on the study of the past data. The issue
prices may be inflated to cover the standard loss percentage. Alternatively,
issues may be made at the purchase price but the cost of the loss or shortage
may be treated as overheads.
Actual losses should be compared with the standard and excess losses
should be analysed to see whether they are due to normal or abnormal reasons.
If they are attributable to normal causes, an additional charge to overheads
should be made on the basis of the value of materials consumed. If they arise
2.101
from abnormal causes, they should be charged to the Costing Profit and Loss
Account.
Avoidable losses are generally treated as abnormal losses. These losses
should be debited to the Costing Profit and Loss Account.
Losses or surpluses arising from errors in documentation, posting etc.
should be corrected through adjustment entries.
Question 31
A manufacturer of
Surat purchased three Chemicals A, B and C from Bombay. The invoice gave the
following information:
Rs.
Chemical A : 12,600
Chemical B: 19,000
Chemical C: 9,500
Sales Tax 2,055
Railway Freight 1,000
Total Cost 44,155
A shortage of 200 kg in
Chemical A, of 280 kg. in Chemical B and of 100 kg. in Chemical C was noticed
due to breakages. At Surat, the manufacturer paid Octroi duty @ Re 0.10 per kg.
He also paid Cartage Rs. 22 for Chemical A, Rs. 63.12 for Chemical B and Rs.
31.80 for Chemical C. Calculate the stock rate that you would suggest for pricing
issue of chemicals assuming a provision of 5% towards further deterioration.
Answer
Statement showing the Issue Rate of Chemicals
Chemicals
A B C
Rs. Rs. Rs.
Purchase Price 12,600 19,000 9,500
Add: Sales Tax @ 5% of purchase 630 950 475
price
(Refer to Working Note 2)
Add: Railway Freight in the ratio of 300 500 200
3:5:2
2.102

Add: Octroi @ Re. 1.10 p.per kg.
On the quantity of material received 280 472 190
Add: Cartage 22 6312 31.80
Total Price 13,832 20,985.12 10,396.80
Total price Rs.13,832 Rs.20,985.12 Rs.10,396.80

Rate of issue per Kg = =
Qty. available for issue 2,660kg. 4,484Kg. 1,805kg.
(Refer to Working Note 1) = Rs.5.20 = Rs. 4.68 = Rs. 5.76
Working Notes:
1. Statement showing the quantity of
chemicals available for issue
Chemicals
A B C
Kg. Kg. Kg.
Quantity purchased 3,000 5,000 2,000
Less: Shortage (Assumed to be normal 200 280 100
Quantity received at the store 2,800 4,720 1,900
Less: Provision for further 140 236 95
deterioration 5%
Quantity available for issue 2,660 4,484 1,805
2. Rate of sales Tax =

Sales Tax Rs. 2,055
100 = 100 = 5%
Total Purchase price of Chemical Rs.41,100
3. Railway Freight: It has been charged on the basis of quantity purchased i.e.
A:3000 kg; B: 5000 kg; C: 2000 kg in the ratio of 3:5:2.
Question 32
Shriram Enterprises manufactures a
special product "ZED". The following particulars were collected for the year
1986:
(a) Monthly demand of ZED-1,000 units.
(b) Cost of placing an order Rs. 100.
(c) Annual carrying cost per unit Rs. 15.
2.103
(d) Normal usage 50 units per week

(e) Minimum usage 25 units per week.
(f) Maximum range 75 units per week
(g) Re-order period 4 to 6 weeks.
Compute from the above
(1) Re-order Quantity
(2) Re-order level
(3) Minimum Level
(4) Maximum Level
(5). Average Stock Level
Answer
1. R e-order Quantity of units used =
2AS
C
(Refer to note)
Where
A = Annual demand of input units
S=
Cost of placing an order
C=
Annual carrying cost per unit
=
2 2600 Rs. 100
Rs. 15
= 186
units (approximately)
2. Re-order Level = Maximum

re-order period maximum usage
=6
weeks 75 units = 450 units
3. Minimum Level = Re -order Level Normal
usage average re-order period)
2.104
= 450
units 50 units 5 weeks.
= 450
units 250 units = 200 units
4. Maximum Level = Re -order level + Re order
quantity (Minimum
usage Minimum re -order period)

= 450
unit + 186 units 25 units 4 weeks
= 536
units
1
5. Average Stock Level = (Minimum Stock Level
2
+ Maximum Stock Level)
1
=
2
(200 units + 536 units)
= 368
units
Note : A = Annual
demand of input units for 12,000 units of "ZED"
= 52
weeks Normal usage of input per week
= 52
weeks 50 units of input per week
=
2,600 units
Question 33
(a) What is Economic Order Quantity?
(b) The Purchase Department of your organisation has received an offer of
quantity discounts on its order of materials as under:
Price per tonne
Tonnes
Rs.
1,400 Less than 500
1,380 500 and less than 1,000
2.105
1,360 1,000 and less than 2,000

1,340 2,000 and less than 3,000
1,320 3,000 and above
The annual requirement of the material is 5,000 tonnes. The
delivery cost per order is Rs. 1,200 and the annual stock holding cost is estimated
at 20 per cent of the average inventory.
The Purchase Department wants you to consider the
following purchase options and advise which among them will be the most
economical ordering quantity, presenting the relevant information in a tabular
form.
The purchase quantity options to be considered are 400
tonnes, 500 tonnes, 1,000 tonnes, 2,000 tonnes and 3,000 tonnes
Answer
(a) Economic Order Quantity: Economic order quantity represents the size of
the order for which both ordering and carrying costs together are minimum.
If purchases are made in large quantities, inventory carrying cost will be
high. If the order size is small, ordering cost will be high. Hence, it is
necessary to determine the order quantity for which ordering and carrying
costs are minimum. The formula used for determining economic order
quantity is as follows:
2AO
EOQ =
C
Where:
A is the annual consumption of material in units
O is the cost of placing an order (ordering cost per order)
C is cost of interest and storing one unit of ma terial for one
year (carrying cost per unit per annum)
(b)
Total Order Price No. of Cost of Ordering Carrying Total cost
Annual size (Q) per orders inventory Cost S/Q Cost per
Require- (tonnes) tonne S/Q S price Rs.1,200 tonne p.a
ment(s) per tonne 1 Q20%
2
(tonnes)
of price
per tonne
Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
2.106
=(1)/(2) =(1)(3) =(4)Rs.1,200 =(5)+(6)+(7)

5000 400 1400 12.5 70,00,000 15,000 56,000 70,71,000
500 1380 10 69,00,000 12,000 69,000 69,81,000
1,000 1360 5 68,00,000 6,000 1,36,000 69,42,000
2,000 1340 2.5 67,00000 3,000 2,68,000 69,71,000
3,000 1320 1.67 66,00,000 2,000 3,96,000 69,98,000
Advice to Purchase Department: From the above table, it is clear that the
most economical order size among the given options is 1,000 tonnes, as at this
order size, the total cost is minimum.
Question 34
Component 'Pee' is made entirely in cost centre 100. Material cost is 6
paise per component and each component takes 10 minutes to produce. The
machine operator is paid 72 paise per hour, and the machine hour rate is Rs.
1.50. The setting up of the machine to produce the component 'Pee' takes 2
hours 20 minutes.
On the basis of this information, prepare a cost sheet showing the
production and setting up cost, both in total and per component, assuming that a
batch of:
(a) 10 components,
(b) 100 components, and
(c) 1,000 components is produced
Answer
Cost Sheet of Component 'PEE'
Batch Size 10 Per 100 Per 1000 Per
Total compone Total Compone Total Component
Rs. nt Rs. Rs. nt Rs. Rs. Rs.
Setting up
Cost: (A)
Machine 1.6 0.168 1.68 0.0168 1.68 0.00168
Operators 8
Wages
(2 hours 20
minutes @ 72
p.p.h.)
Overheads 3.5 0.350 3.50 0.035 3.50 0.0035
2.107
0
(2 hours 20
minutes @ Rs.
1.50 p.h.)
Production
Cost : (B)
Material Cost 0.6 0.06 6.00 0.06 60.0 0.06
@ 6 p. per 0 0
component
Machine 1.2 0.12 12.0 0.12 120. 0.12
Operators 0 0 00
Wages
[Refer to
Working Note
(i)]
Overheads 2.5 0.25 25.0 0.25 250. 0.12
0 0 00
[Refer to
Working Note
(ii)]
Total Cost (A + 9.4 0.948 48.1 0.4818 435. 0.43518
B): 8 8 18
Working Notes
Components 10 100 1000
(i) Operators
Wages
Time taken in
minutes by
machine
Operators and
machine @ 10
minutes
per component 100 100 1000
0 0
Operators 1.20 12.00 120.00
Wages @ 72 p.
per hour (Rs.)
100 1000 10000
0 .72P 0.72P 0 .72P
60 60 60
2.108
(ii)
Overhe
ad expenses
Total
overhead
expenses in
(Rs.)
@ Rs. 2.50 25.00 250.00
1.50 per
machine hour
100 Rs.1.50 1000 Rs.1.50 10000 Rs.1.50

60 60 60
Question 35
X Ltd. is committed to supply 24,000 bearings per annum to Y Ltd. on a
steady basis. It is estimated that it costs 10 paise as inventory holding cost per
bearing per month and that the set-up cost per run of bearing manufacture is Rs.
324.
(a) What would be the optimum run size for bearing manufacture?
(b) Assuming that the company has a policy of manufacturing 6,000 bearing per
run, how much extra costs the company would be incurring as compared to
the optimum run suggested in (a) above?
(c) What is the minimum inventory holding cost?
Answer
2 UP
(a) Optimum production run (O) = where
I
U = No. of units to be produced within on year.
P = Set-up cost per production run.
I = Carrying cost per unit per annum.
2 24,000 Rs.324
=
0.10 12
= 3,600 bearings.
(b) Total Cost (of maintaining the inventories) when production run sizes (Q)
are 3,600 and 6,000 bearing respectively.
Total Cost = Total set-up cost + Total carrying cost.
(Total set up cost) Q=3,600 = (No. of
production runs ordered) Set up cost per
production run)
2.109
24,000
= Rs. 324 = Rs.
3,600
2,160 (1)
(Total set up cost) Q=6,000 =
24,000
Rs. 324 = Rs. 1,296 (2)
6,000
(Total carrying cost) Q=3,600 = 1 QI
2
= 1 3,600 0.10P
2
Rs. 12 = Rs. 2,160 (3)
(Total carrying cost) Q=6,000 = 1
2
6,000 0.10P Rs. 12 = Rs. 3,600 (4)
(Total Cost) Q=3,600 = (1) + (3) = Rs.
2,160 + Rs. 2,160 = Rs. 4,320(5)
(Total Cost) Q=6,000 = (2)+(4) = Rs.
1,296 + Rs. 3,600 = Rs. 4,896(6)
Extra Cost incurred = (6) (5) = Rs.
4,896 Rs. 4,320 = Rs. 576
(c) Minimum inventory holding cost =
1 QI
2
(When Q = 3,600 bearings)
= 1 3,600 0.10 P
2
Rs. 12
= Rs. 2,160
Question 36
The following transactions in respect of
material Y occurred during the six months ended 30th June, 1988
Month Purchase (Units) Price per Unit Issued
Rs. units
January 200 25 Nil
February 300 24 250
March 425 26 300
April 475 23 550
May 500 25 800
June 600 20 400
2.110
(a) The chief accountant argues that the values of closing stock remains the
same no matter which method of pricing of material issues is used. Do you
agree? Why or why not? Detailed stores ledgers are not required.
(b) When and why would you recommend the LIFO method of pricing material
issues?
Answer
(a) The Closing Stock at th e end of six months period i.e. on 30 June, 1988 will
be 200 units, whereas upto the end of May 1988, total purchases coincide
with the total issues i.e. 2,300 units. It means at the end of May 1988, there
was no closing stock. In the month of June 1988, 600 units were purchased
out of which 400 units were issued. Since there was only one purchase and
one issue in the month of June 1988 and there was no opening stock on 1 st
June 1988, the Closing Stock of 200 units is to be valued at Rs. 20/- per unit.
In view of this, the argument of the Chief Accountant appears to be correct.
Where there is only one purchase and one issue in a month with no opening
stock, the method of pricing of material issues becomes irrelevant.
Therefore, in the given case one should agree with the argument of the
Chief Accountant that the value of Closing Stock remains the same no
matter which method of pricing the issue is used.
It may, however, be noted that the argument of Chief Accountant would not
stand if one finds the value of the Closing Stock at the end of each month.
(b) LIFO method has an edge over FIFO or any other method of pricing material
issues due to the following advantages:
(i) The cost of the materials issued will be either nearer or will reflect the
current market price. Thus, the cost of goods produced will be related
to the trend of the market price of materials. Such a trend in price of
materials enables the matching of cost of production with current sales
revenues.
(ii) The use of the method during the period of rising prices does not reflect
undue high profit in the income statement, as it was under the first-in-
first out or average method. In fact, the profit shown here is relatively
lower because the cost of production takes into account the rising trend
of mate rial prices.
(iii) In the case of falling prices, profit tends to rise due to lower material
cost, yet the finished products appear to be more competitive and are
at market price.
2.111
(iv) During the period of inflation, LIFO will tend to show the correct profit
and thus, avoid paying undue taxes to some extent.
Question 37
The following information is provided by SUNRISE INDUSTRIES for the
fortnight of April, 1988:
Material Exe :
Stock on 1.4.1988 100 units at Rs. 5 per unit.
Purchases
5-4-88 300 units at Rs. 6
8-4-88 500 units at Rs. 7
12-4-88 600 units at Rs. 8
Issues
6-4-88 250 units
10-4-88 400 units
14-4-88 500 units
Required
(A) Calculate using FIFO and LIFO methods of pricing issues:
(a) the value of materials consumed during the period
(b) the value of stock of materials on 15-4-88.
(B) Explain why the figures in (a) and (b) in part A of this question are
different under the two methods of pricing of material issues used. You
NEED NOT draw up the Stores Ledgers.
Answer : (A)
(a) Value of Material Exe consumed during the period 1-4-88 to 15-4-88 by
using FIFO method.
Date Description Qty. Rate Amount
Units Rs. Rs.
1.4.88 Opening balance 100 5 500
5.4.88 Purchased 300 6 1,800
6.4.88 Issued 100 5 1,400
150 6
8.4.88 Purchased 500 7 3,500
10.4.88 Issued 150 6 2,650
250 7
12.4.88 Purchased 600 8 4,800
2.112
14.4.88 Issued 250 7 3,750

250 8
15.4.88 Balance 350 8 2,800
Total value of material Exe consumed during the period under FIFO
method comes to (Rs. 1,400 + Rs. 2,650 Rs. 3,750) Rs. 7,800 and
balance on 15.04.88 is of Rs. 2,800.
Value of Material Exe consumed during the period 1.4.88 to 15.4.88
by using LIFO method
Date Description Qty. Rate Amount
Units Rs. Rs.
1.4.88 Opening balance 100 5 500
5.4.88 Purchased 300 6 1.800
6.4.88 Issued 250 6 1.500
8.4.88 Purchased 500 7 3,500
10.4.88 Issued 400 7 2,800
12.4.88 Purchased 600 8 4,800
14.4.88 Issued 500 8 4,000
15.4.88 Balance 350 2,300
Total value of material Exe issued under LIFO method comes to
(Rs. 1,500 + Rs. 2,800 + Rs. 4,000) Rs. 8,300
*The balance 350 units on 15.4.88; relates to opening balance on 1.4.88
and purchases made on 5.4.88; 8.4.88 and 12.4.88. (100 units @ Rs. 5; 50 units
@ Rs. 6 ; 100 units @ Rs. 7 and 100 units @ Rs. 8).
(b) As shown in (a) above, the value of stock of material on 15.4.88;
Under FIFO method Rs.
2,800
Under LIFO method Rs.
2,300
(B) Total value of material Exe issued to
production under FIFO and LIFO methods comes to Rs.7,800 and Rs. 8,300
respectively. The value of Closing Stock of material Exe on 15.4.88 under FIFO
and LIFO methods comes to Rs. 2,800 and Rs. 2,300 respectively.
The reasons for the difference of Rs.
500 (Rs. 8,300 Rs. 7,800) as shown by the following table in the value of
material Exe. issued to production under FIFO & LIFO are as follows:
2.113
Date Quantity Value Total Value Total

Issued FIFO LIFO
(Units) Rs. Rs. Rs.
6.4.88 250 1,400 1,500
10.4.88 400 2,650 2,800
14.4.88 500 3,750 7800 4,000 8,300
1. One 6.4.88 ; 250 units were issued to production. Under FIFO their value
comes to Rs. 1,400 (100 units Rs. 5 + 150 units Rs. 6) and under LIFO Rs.
1,500 (250 Rs.6). Hence Rs. 100 was more charged to production under
LIFO.
2. On 10.4.88 ; 400 units were issued to production. Under FIFO their value
comes to Rs.2,650 (150 Rs. 6 + Rs. 250 Rs.7) and under LIFO Rs. 2,800
(400 Rs. 7). Hence Rs. 150 was more charged to production under LIFO.
3. On 14.4.88 ; 500 units were issued to production Under FIFO their value
comes to Rs.3,750 (250 Rs. 7 + 250 Rs. 8) and under LIFO Rs. 4,000
(500Rs.8). Thus Rs. 250 was more charged to production under LIFO.
Thus the total excess amount charged to production under LIFO comes to
Rs.500.
The reasons for the diffe rence of Rs. 500 (Rs. 2,800 Rs. 2,300) in the
value of 350 units of Closing Stock of material Exe under FIFO and LIFO are as
follows:
1. In the case of FIFO, all the 350 units of the closing stock belongs to the
purchase of material made on 12.4.88; whereas under LIFO these units were
from Opening Balance and purchases made on 5.4.88; 8.4.88 and 12.4.88.
2. Due to different purchase price paid by the concern on different days of
purchase, the value of Closing Stock differed under FIFO and LIFO. Under
FIFO 350 units of closing stock were valued @ Rs. 8 p.u. Whereas under LIFO
first 100 units were valued @ Rs. 5 p.u.; next 50 units @ Rs. 6 p.u.; next 100
units @ Rs. 7 p.u. and last 100 units @ Rs. 8 p.u.
Thus under FIFO, the value of closing stock increased by Rs. 500.
Question 38
(a) Discuss briefly the considerations governing the fixation of the maximum and
minimum levels of inventory.
(b) A company uses three raw materials A, B and C for a particular product for
which the following data apply :
2.114
Raw Usage Re-order Price Delivery period Re- Minimum

Material per Quantity per (in weeks) order level
unit of (Kgs) Kg. Minimum Average Maximum level (Kgs)
product Rs. (Kgs)
(Kgs)
A 10 10,000 0.10 1 2 3 8,000
B 4 5,000 0.30 3 4 5 4,750
C 6 10,000 0.15 2 3 4 2.000
Weekly production varies from 175 to 225 units, averaging 200 units of
the said product. What would be the following quantities:
(i) Minimum Stock of A?
(ii) Maximum Stock of B?
2.115
(iii) Re-order level of C?

(iv) Average stock level of A?
Answer
(a) Considerations for the fixation of maximum level of inventory.
Maximum level of an inventory item is its maximum quantity held in stock at
any time. The mathematical formula used for its determination is as follows:
Maximum level = Re-orderlevel (Minimum Consumption Minimum
Re -order period) +
Re-order quantity.
The important considerations which should govern the fixation of maximum
level for various inventory items are as follows:
(1) The fixation of maximum level of an inventory item requires
information about re -order level. The re-order level itself depends upon
its maximum rate of consumption and maximum delivery period. It in
fact is the product of maximum consumption of inventory item and its
maximum delivery period.
(2) Knowledge about minimum consumption and minimum delivery
period for each inventory item should also be known.
(3) The determination of maximum level also requires the figure of
economic order quantity. Economic order quantity means the quantity
of inventory to be ordered so that total ordering and storage cost is
minimum.
(4) Availability of funds, storage capacity, nature of items and their
price also are important for the fixation of minimum level.
(5) In the case of important materials due to their irregular supply,
the maximum level should be high.
Considerations for the fixation of minimum level of inventory
Minimum level indicates the lowest figures of inventory balance, which must
be maintained in hand at all times, so that there is no stoppage of
production due to non-availability of inventory. The formula used for its
calculation is as follows:
Minimum level of inventory = Re -order level (Average rate of consumption
Average
time of inventory delivery).
The main considerations for the fixation of minimum level of inventory are
as follows:
1. Information about maximum consumption and maximum delivery
period in respect of each item to determine its re -order level.
2.116
2. Average rate of consumption for each inventory item.

3. Average delivery period for each item. The period can be
calculated by averaging the maximum and minimum period.
(b) (i) Minimum stock of A
Re -order level (Average rate of consumption Average time
required to obtain
fresh delivery)
= 8,000 (2,000 2) = 4,000 kgs.
(ii) Maximum stock of B
Re -order level (Minimum Consumption Minimum Re-order
period) + Re-order quantity
= 4,750 (4 175 3) + 5,000
= 9,750 2,100 = 7,650 kgs.
OR
(iii) Re-order level of C
Maximum re-order period Maximum Usage
= 4 1,350 = 5,400 kgs.
OR
Re-order level of C
= Minimum stock of C+(Average rate of
consumption Average time re quired to obtain fresh delivery)
= 2,000 + [(2006)3] kgs.
= 5,600 kgs.
(iv) Average stock level of A
= Minimum stock level of A + 12 Re-order
quantity
= 4,000 + 1 10,000 = 4,000 + 5,000 = 9,000
2
kgs.
OR
Average Stock level of A
Minimum stock + Maximum stock
= (Refer to
2
working note)
4,000 + 16,250
= = 10,125 kgs.
2
Working note
Maximum stock of A = ROL + ROQ
(Minimum consumption Minimum
2.117
re-order
period)
= 8,000 kgs + 10,000 [(17510)1]
= 16,250 kgs.
Question 39
(a) EXE Limited has received an offer of quantity discounts on his order
of materials as under:
Price per tonne Tonnes
Rs. Nos.
1,200 Less than 500
1,180 500 and less than 1,000
1,160 1,000 and less than 2,000
1,140 2,000 and less than 3,000
1,120 3,000 and above.
The annual requirement for the material is 5,000 tonnes. The ordering cost
per order is Rs. 1,200 and the stock holding cost is estimated at 20% of
material cost per annum. You are required to complete the most economical
purchase level.
(b) What will be your answer to the above question if there are no discount
offered and the price per tonne is Rs. 1,500?
Answer (a)
Total Order No. Cost of Ordering Carrying Cost Total
Annual Size of Inventory S Cost p.u. p.a. Cost
Require (units Orde Per unit
ment ) rs cost
(S) q S S Rs. 1 q20% of per (4+5+6
q q 2
)
1200 unit cost
Rs. Rs.
Rs. Rs.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
5000 400 12.5 60,00,000 15,000 48,000 60,63,
units (5,000 (200 Rs. 240) 000
Rs.1200)
500 10 59,00,000 12,000 59,000 59,71,
(5,000 (250 Rs. 236) 000
2.118
Rs.1180)
1,000 5 58,00,000 6,000 1,16,000 59,22,
(5,000 (500 Rs. 232) 000
Rs.1160)
2,000 2.5 57,00,000 3,000 2,28,000 59,31,
(5,000 (1,000 Rs. 228) 000
Rs.1140)
3,000 1.66 56,00,000 2,000 3,36,000 59,38,
6 (5,000 (1500 Rs. 224) 000
Rs.1120)
The above table shows that the total cost of
5000 units including orderi ng and carrying cost is minimum (Rs. 59,22,000) when
the order size is 1000 units. Hence the most economical purchase level is 1000
units.
2SCo
(b) EOQ = Where S is the
iC i
annual inventory requirement, Co, is the ordering cost per order and iC1 is the
carrying cost per unit per annum.
2 5000 Rs.1200
= = 200 tonnes
20% Rs. 1500
Question 40
About 50 items are required every day for a
machine. A fixed cost of Rs. 50 per order is incurred for placing an order. The
inventory carrying cost per item amounts to Rs. 0.02 per day. The lead period is
32 days compute.
(i) Economic Order Quantity
(ii) Re-order level (November,1996, 2
marks)
Answer
Annual consumption (S) = 50
items 365 days
= 18,250 items
Fixed cost per order (Co) = Rs. 50
(or ordering cost)
2.119
Inventory carrying cost per item =

Rs. 0.02 365 = Rs. 7.30
per annum (iC1)
(i) Economic Order Quantity =
2SC 0
iC 1
2 18,250 Rs. 50
=
Rs.7.30
= 500 items
(ii) Re-order level = Maximum usage per
day Maximum lead time
= 50 items per day 32
days.
= 1,600 items
Question 41
A company has the option to procure a
particular material from two sources:
Source I assures that defectives will not be
more than 2% of supplied quantity.
Sourc e II does not give any assurance, but on
the basis of past experience of supplies received from it, it is observed that
defective percentage is 2.8%.
The material is supplied in lots of 1,000 units.
Source II supplies the lot at a price, which is lower by Rs. 100 as compared to
Source I. The defective units of material can be rectified for use at a cost of Rs. 5
per unit.
You are required to find out which of the two
sources is more economical
(May, 2001, 8
marks)
Answer
Comparative Statement of procuring material from two sources
Material source Material source
I II
Defective (in %) 2 2.8
(Future estimate) (Past experience)
2.120
Units supplied (in one lot) 1,000 1,000

Total defective units in a lot 20 28
(1,000 units2%) (1,000 units
2.8%)
Additional price paid per lot (Rs.) (A) 100
Rectification cost of defect (Rs.) (B) 100 140
(20 units Rs. 5) (28 units Rs. 5)
Total additional cost per lot (Rs.): 200 140
[(A)+(B)]
Decision: On comparing the total additional cost incurred per lot of 1,000
units, we observe that it is more economical, if the required
material units are procured from material source II.
Question 42
What is material handling cost? How will you
deal it in cost account?
Answer
Material handling cost: It refers to the
expenses involved in receiving, storing, issuing and handling materials. To deal
with this cost in cost accounts there are two prevalent approaches as under:
First approach suggests the inclusion of these
costs as part of the cost of materials by establishing a separate material handling
rate e.g., at the rate of percentage of the cost of material issued or by using a
separate material handling rate which may be established on the basis of weight
of materials issued.
Under another approach these costs may be
included along with those of manufacturing overhead and be charged over the
products on the basis of direct labour or machine hours.
Question 43
The following data are available in respect of
material X for the year ended 31st March 1997.
Rs.
Opening stock 90,000
Purchases during the year 2,70,000
2.121
Closing stock 1,10,000

Calculate
(i) Inventory turnover ratio; and
(ii) the number of days for which the average inventory is held
Answer
(i) Inventory turnover ratio Cost of stock of raw material consumed
=
(Refer to working note) Average stock of raw material
Rs.2,50,000
= = 2.5
Rs. 1,00,000
(ii) Average number of days 365 days 365 days
= =
for which the average Inventory turnover ratio 2. 5
inventory is held
= 146 days
Working note:
Rs.
Opening stock of raw material on = 90,000
1.4.1996
Add: Material purchases during the = 2,70,000
year
Less: Closing stock of raw material = 1,00,000
Cost of stock of raw material 2,50,000
consumed
1

Average stock of raw material = Opening stock of + Closingstockof
2 raw material raw material
= 1
{Rs. 90,000+Rs.1,10,000} =
2
Rs.1,00,000
Question 44
2.122
M/s Tubes Ltd. are the manufacturers of

picture tubes for T.V. The following are the details of their operation during 1997:
Average monthly market demand
2,000 Tubes
Ordering cost Rs. 100 per order
Inventory carrying cost 20% per annum
Cost of tubes Rs. 500 per tube
Normal usage 100 tubes per week
Minimum usage 50 tubes per week
Maximum usage 200 tubes per week
Lead time to supply 6-8 weeks
Compute from the above:
(1) Economic Order Quantity. If the supplier is willing to supply quarterly 1,500
units at a discount of 5%, is it worth accepting?
(2) Maximum level of stock
(3) Minimum level of stock
(4) Reorder level (May, 1998,
5+2+2+1 marks)
Answer
(1) S = Annual usage of tubes =
Normal usage per week 52 weeks
= 100 tubes 52 weeks =
5,200 tubes
Co = Ordering cost per order = Rs.
100/- per order
C1 = Cost per tube = Rs. 500/-
iC1 = Inventory carrying cost per
unit per annum
= 20% Rs. 500 = Rs. 100/- per
unit, per annum
Economic order quantity:
2SCO
E.O.Q = =
iC1
2 5,200 units Rs. 100

= 102 tubes (approx.)
Rs. 100
2.123
The supplier is willing to supply 1500

units at a discount of 5%, is it worth accepting
Total cost (when order size is 1500
units) = Cost of 5,200 units + Ordering cost
+ Carrying cost.
5,200units
= 5,200 units Rs. 475 +
1,500 units
1
Rs.100+ 1,500 units 20% Rs. 475
2
= Rs. 24,70,000 + Rs. 346.67 + Rs.
71,250
= Rs. 25,41,596.67
Total cost (when order size is 102 units)
5,200 units
= 5,200 units Rs. 500 + Rs.
102 units
1
100 + 102 units 20% Rs. 500
2
= Rs. 26,00,000 + Rs. 5,098.03 + Rs.
5,100
= Rs. 26, 10,198.03
Since, the total cost under quarterly
supply of 1,500 unit with 5% discount is lower than that when order size is 102
units, therefore the offer should be accepted. While accepting this offer
consideration of capital blocked on order size of 1,500 units per quarter has
been ignored.
= Re -order level + Reorder quantity
Min. usage Min. reorder period
= 1,600 units + 102 units 50 units 6
weeks
= 1,402 units.
= Re -order level Normal usage
Average reorder period
= 1,600 units 100 units 7 weeks =
900 units.
(4) Reorder level
= Maximum consumption Maximum
re-order period
2.124
= 200 units 8 weeks

= 1,600 units
2.125
Question 45
At the time of physical stock taking, it was found that actual stock level was
different from the clerical or computer records. What can be possible reasons for
such differences? How will you deal with such differences? (May, 1999, 5
marks)
Answer
Possible reasons for differences arising at the time of physical stock
taking may be as follows when it was found that actual stock level was different
from that of the clerical or computer records:
(i) Wrong entry might have been made in stores ledger account or bin card,
(ii) The items of materials might have been placed in the wrong physical
location in the store,
(iii) Arithmetical errors might have been made while calculating the stores
balances on the bin cards or store -ledger when a manual system is
operated,
(iv) Theft of sto ck.
When a discrepancy is found at the time of stock taking, the individual
stores ledger account and the bin card must be adjusted so that they are in
agreement with the actual stock. For example, if the actual stock is less than the
clerical or computer record the quantity and value of the appropriate store
ledger account and bin card (quantity only) must be reduced and the difference
in cost be charged to a factory overhead account for stores losses.
Question 46
G. Ltd. produces a product which has a monthly demand of 4,000 units.
The product requires a component X which is purchased at Rs. 20. For every
finished product, one unit of component is required. The ordering cost is Rs. 120
per order and the holding cost is 10% p.a.
You are required to calculate:
(i) Economic order quantity
(ii) If the minimum lot size to be supplied is 4,000 units, what is the extra cost,
the company has to incur?
(iii) What is the minimum carrying cost, the company has to incur? (May,
1999, 6 marks)
Answer
(i) Economic order quantity :
2.126
S (Annual requirement = 4,000 units

per month 12 months = 48,000 unit of
Component 'X')
2.127
C1 (Purchase cost p.u.) = Rs.20

Co (Ordering cost per order) = Rs.120
i (Holding cost) = 10% per annum
2SC 0
E.O.Q. = =
iC1
2 48,000 units Rs.120
10% Rs.20
= 2,400 units
(ii) Extra cost incurred by the company
Total cost = Total ordering cost + Total
carrying cost
(when order size is 4,000 units)
S 1
= Co + q (iC1)
q 2
48,000 units 1
= Rs.120 + 4,000
4,000 units 2
units 10% Rs.20
= Rs. 1,440 + Rs. 4,000 = Rs. 5,440
(a)
48,000 units 1
Total cost = Rs.120 + 2,400
2,400 units 2
units 10% Rs.20
(when order size is 2,400 units) = Rs. 2,400 + Rs.
2,400 = Rs. 4,800 (b)
Extra cost (a) (b) = Rs. 5,440 Rs. 4,800 = Rs.
640
(incurred by the company)
(iii) Minimum carrying cost:
Carrying cost depends upon the size of the
order. It will be minimum on the least order size.
(In this part of the question the two order sizes are 2,400 units and 4,000
units. Here 2,400 units is the least of the two order sizes. At this order size
carrying cost will be minimum)
The minimum carrying cost in this case can be computed as under:
1
Minimum carrying cost = 2,400 units 10% Rs. 20 = Rs. 2,400
2
Question 47
2.128
If the minimum stock level and average stock level of raw-material A are
4,000 and 9,000 units respectively, find out its 'Re-order quantity' (May,
1997, 2 marks)
Answer
Minimum stock level of material A =
4,000 units
Average stock level of material A =
9,000 units
Average stock level = Minimum
stock level' + 1/2 Re -order quantity
or 1/2 Reorder quantity = 9,000
units - 4,000 units
5,000 units
or Re -order quantity = 10,000
units.
Question 48
PQR Tubes Ltd. are the manufacturer of picture tubes for T.V. The
following are the details of their operations during 1999-2000.
Inventory carrying cost 20% p.a.
Cost of tubes Rs. 500 per tube
Normal usage 100 tubes per week
Minimum usage 50 tubes per week
Maximum usage 200 tube per week
Lead time to supply 6 8 weeks
Required
(i)Economic order quantity. If the supplier is willing to supply quarterly
1,500 units at a discount of 5%, is it worth accepting?
(ii) Re-order level
(iii) Maximum level of stock
(iv) Minimum level of stock ( May,
2000, 4 marks)
Answer
2.129
2 SC 0
(i) Economic order quantity (EOQ) =
iC 1
Here S is the annual requirement of tubes, q is the order size
C0 is the ordering cost per order.
iC1 is the inventory carrying cost p.u. p.a.
2 (100 tubes 52 weeks) (Rs. 100 per order)

E.O.Q. =
20% Rs. 500
2 5,200 tubes Rs.100
E.O.Q = = 102 tubes (approx.)
Rs.100
(T.C.)q=102 units = Total purchase cost of 5,200+Total ordering cost + Total
carrying cost
5,200 units 1
= 5,200 units Rs.500 + Rs. 100 + 102
102 units 2
units Rs. 100
= Rs. 26,00,000 + Rs. 5,098 + Rs. 5,100
= Rs. 26,10,198
Total cost (when the supplier is willing to give a discount
of 5% on an order size of 1,500 units) will be:
5, 200 units
(TC) q=1,500 units= 5,200 units Rs. 475 + Rs. 100
1, 500 units
1
+ 1,500 units
2
20% Rs.475
= Rs.
24,70,000 + Rs. 346.66 + Rs. 71,250
= Rs.
25,41,596.66 approx.
Decision: Since the total cost of inventory when supplier supplies
quarterly 1,500 units at a discount of 5% is less than that when the
order size is of 102 units. Therefore, it is advisable to accept the offer of
5% discount and save a sum of Rs. 68,601.34 (Rs. 26,10,198
Rs.25,41,596.66)
Note: In the case of E.O.Q. the total ordering cost and the total carrying cost
are always equal, but in the above case it is not so because of the
approximation made in arriving at the figure of E.O.Q.
(ii) Re-order level (ROL)
2.130
=Maximum usage Maximum lead time to supply

= 200 tubes per week 8 weeks
= 1,600 tubes
(iii) Maximum level of stock
=Re -order level + Re -order quantity Minimum usage
Minimum lead time to supply
=1,600 tubes + 102 tubes 50 tubes 6 weeks
= 1,402 tubes
(iv) Minimum level of stock

=Re -order level Normal usage Average lead time to
supply
= 1,600 tubes 100 tubes 7 weeks.
= 900 tubes
Question 49
Distinguish clearly between bincard and stores ledger. (May, 2000, 4
marks)
Answer
Distinction between bin card and store ledger.
Both bin card and stores ledger are perpetual inventory records. None of
them is a substitute for the other. These two records may be distinguished from
the following points of view:
(i) Bin card is maintained by the store-keeper, while the cost accounting
department maintains the stores ledger.
(ii) Bin card is, the stores recording document whereas the stores ledger is an
accounting record.
(iii) Bin card contains information with regard to quantities i.e. their receipt,
issue and balance while the stores ledger contains both quantitative and
value information in respect of their receipts, issue and balance.
(iv) In the bin card entries are made at the time when transaction takes place.
But in the stores ledger entries are made only after the transaction has
taken place.
(v) Inter departmental transfers of materials appear only in stores ledger.
(vi) Bin cards record each transaction but stores ledger records the same
information in a summarized form.
Question 50
2.131
RST Limited has received an offer of quantity discount on its order of

materials as under:
Price per tone Tones number
Rs, 9,600
Less than 50
Rs.9,360
50 and less than 100
Rs. 9,120
Rs. 8,880
Rs. 8,640
300 and above
The annual requirement for the material is 500 tonnes. The ordering cost per
order is Rs.12,500 and the stock holding cost is estimated at 25% of the
material cost per annum.
Required
(i) Compute the most economical purchase level.
(ii)Compute EOQ if there are no quantity discounts and the price per tonne is
Rs.10,500.
(November, 2004, 4+2=6 marks)
Answer
(i)
Order No. of Cost of Carrying cost Carrying cost Total cost
size (Q) orders purchase A Q (3+4+5)
Rs.12500 C25%
(Units) A/Q Ax per unit Q 2
(Units) cost
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
10 12.5 48,00,000 1,56,250 48,000 50,04,250
(5009600) 40
9600 0.25
2
50 10 46,80,000 1,25,000 58,500 48,63,500
(5009360) 50
9360 0. 25
2
2.132
100 5 45,60,000 62,500 1,14,000 47,36,500

(5009120) 100
9120 0.25
2
200 2.5 44,40,000 31,250 2,22,000 46,93,250
(5008880) (2.512500) 200
8880 0. 25
2
300 1.67 43,20,000 20,875 3,24,000 46,64,875
(5008640) (1.6712500) 300
8640 0. 25
2
The above table shows that the total cost of 500 units including ordering and
carrying cost is minimum (Rs. 46,64,875) where the order size is 300 units. Hence
the most economical purchase level is 300 units.
2 AO 2 500 12500
(ii) EOQ = = = 69 tonnes.
c i 10500 25
Question 51
IPL Limited uses a small casting in one of its finished products. The
castings are purchased from a foundry. IPL Limited purchases 54,000 castings per
year at a cost of Rs. 800 per casting.
The castings are used evenly throughout the year in the production
process on a 360-day-per-year basis. The company estimates that it costs
Rs.9,000 to place a single purchase order and about Rs.300 to carry one casting
in inventory for a year. The high carrying costs result from the need to keep the
castings in carefully controlled temperature and humidity conditions, and from
the high cost of insurance.
Delivery from the foundry generally takes 6 days, but it can take as much
as 10 days. The days of delivery time and percentage of their occurrence are
shown in the following tabulation:
Delivery time (days) : 6 7 8 9 10
Percentage of occurrence : 75 10 5 5 5
Required:
(I) Compute the economic order quantity (EOQ).
(ii) Assume the company is willing to assume a 15% risk of being out of stock.
What would be the safety stock? The re-order point?
(iii) Assume the company is willing to assume a 5% risk of being out of stock.
What would be the safety stock? The re-order point?
2.133
(iv) Assume 5% stock-out risk. What would be the total cost of ordering and
carrying inventory for one year?
(v) Refer to the original data. Assume that using process re-engineering the
company reduces its cost of placing a purchase order to only Rs.600. In
addition company estimates that when the waste and inefficiency caused by
inventories are considered, the true cost of carrying a unit in stock is Rs. 720
per year.
(a) Compute the new EOQ.
(b) How frequently would the company be placing an order, as
compared to the old purchasing policy? (May, 2004, 9 marks)
Answer
(i) Computation of economic order quantity (EOQ)
(A) Annual requirement = 54,000
castings
(C) Cost per casting = Rs. 800
2.134
(O) Ordering cost = Rs. 9,000 /

order
(c i) Carrying cost per casting p.a =
Rs. 300
2AO 2 54000 9000
EOQ = = =
c i 300
1800 casting
(ii) Safety stock
(Assuming a 15% risk of being out of stock)
Safety stock for one day = 54,000/360 days = 150
castings
Re-order point = Minimum stock level + Average lead time

Average consumption
= 150 + 6
150 = 1,050 castings.
(iii) Safety stocks
(Assuming a 5% risk of being out of stock)
Safety stock for three days = 150 3 days = 450
castings
Re -order point = 450 casting + 900 castings = 1,350
castings
(iv) Total cost of ordering = (54,000/1,800) Rs. 9,000 = Rs.
2,70,000
Total cost of carrying = (450 + 1,800) Rs. 300 = Rs.
4,05,000
(v) (a) Computation of new EOQ:
EOQ =
2 54,000 600
= 300 castings
720
(b) Total number of orders to be placed in a
year are 180. Each order is to be placed after 2 days (1 year = 360 days).
Under old purchasing policy each order is placed after 12 days.
Question 52
Write short notes on any three of the following:
(i) Re-order quantity
(ii) Re-order level
2.135
(iii) Maximum stock level

(iv) Minimum stock level (November, 2003, 6 marks)
2.136
Answer
(i) Re-order quantity: It refers to the quantity of stock for which an order is to
be placed at any one point of time. It should be such that it minimises the
combined annual costs of-placing an order and holding stock. Such an
ordering quantity in other words is known as economic order quantity
(EOQ).
2AO
EOQ =
C i
A = Annual raw material usage quantity
O = Ordering cost per order
C = Cost per unit
i = Carrying cost percentage per unit per
annum
(ii) Re-order level: It is the level at which fresh order should be placed for the
replenishment of stock.
= Maximum re -order period Maximum usage
Average Average time to
= Minimum level +
consumption obtain fresh sup plies
(iii) Max stock level: It indicates the maximum figure of stock held at any
time.
Minimum
Minimum
= Re order + Re order re order

quantity consumption
Level
period
(iv) Minimum stock level: It indicates the lowest figure of stock balance, which
must be maintained in hand at all times, so that there is no stoppage of
production due to non-availability of inventory.

= Re order Averagerate of Averagetime of
consumption
level
stock delivery
Question 53
Discuss ABC analysis as a system of Inventory control. (November,
2004, 4 marks)
Answer
ABC Analysis as a system of inventory control
2.137
It exercises discriminating control over different items of stores classified

on the basis of investment involved.
'A category of items consists of only a small %age i.e. approximately 10%
of total items handled by stores but requires heavy investment, about 70% of
inventory value, because of their high prices or heavy requirement or both.
'B category of items are relatively less important. They may be
approximately 20% of the total items of materials handled by stores. The %age
of investment required is approximately 20% of total investment in inventories.
'C' category of items do not require much investment. It may be about
10% of total inventory value but they are nearly 70% of the total items handled
by store.
EOQ, re -order level concepts are usually used in case of 'A' category
items.
Question 54
Distinguish between Bin Card and Stores Ledger (November, 2004, 2
marks)
Answer
Bin card and stores ledger
Bin card is quantitative record of stores receipt, issue and balance.
Control over stock is more effective, in as much as comparison of actual quantity
in hand a t any time with the book balance are possible. Bin cards are kept
attached to the bins or quite near thereto , so as to assist in the identification of
stock.
Stores ledger is quantitative and value record of stores receipts, issue and
balance. It is a subsidiary ledger to the main cost ledger. It is maintained by cost
accounting deptt.
Question 55
Discuss the accounting treatment of spoilage and defectives in Cost
Accounting.
Answer
Accounting treatment of spoilage and defectives in Cost Accounting:
Normal spoilage cost (which is inherent in the operation) are included in
cost either by charging the loss due to spoilage to the production order or
charging it to production overhead so that it is spread over all products. Any
2.138
value realized from the sale of spoilage is credited to production order or

production overhead account, as the case may be.
The cost of abnormal spoilage (i.e. spoilage arising out of causes not
inherent in manufacturing process) is charged to the Costing Profit and Loss
Account. When spoiled work is due to rigid specifications, the cost of spoiled
work is absorbed by good production, while the cost of disposal is charged to
production overheads.
The problem of accounting for defective work is the problemof

accounting of the costs of rectification or rework. The possible ways of
treatment are as below:
(i) Defectives that are considered inherent in the process and are identified as
normal can be recovered by using the following methods:
Charged to good products
Charged to general overheads
Charged to department overheads
Charged to identifiable job.
(ii) If defectives are abnormal and are due to causes beyond the control of
organisation, the rework, cost should be charged to Costing Profi t and Loss
Account.
Question 56
A company manufactures 5000 units of a product per month. The cost of
placing an order is Rs. 100. The purchase price of the raw material is Rs. 10 per
kg. The re-order period is 4 to 8 weeks. The consumption of raw materials varies
from 100 kg to 450 kg per week, the average consumption being 275 kg. The
carrying cost of inventory is 20% per annum.
You are required to calculate
(ii) Re-order level
(iii) Maximum level
(iv) Minimum level
(v) Average stock level (November, 2002, 6 marks)
Answer
(i) Reorder Quantity (ROQ) = 1,196
kgs.
(Refer to working note)
2.139
(ii) Reorder level (ROL) = Maximum

usage Maximum re-order period
450 kgs 8 weeks = 3,600
kgs
(iii) Maximum level = ROL + R OQ
Min. Min.

usage re order period
= 3,600 kgs + 1,196 kgs [100
kgs.4 weeks]
= 4,396 kgs.
(iv) Minimum level = ROL
Normal Normal

usage re order period
= 3,600 kgs. [275 kgs 6
weeks]
= 1,950 kgs.
1 Maximum
(v) Average stock level = +
2 level
Minimum

level
1
= [4,396 kgs. + 1,950 kgs.]
2
= 3,173 kgs.
OR
1
= [Minimum level + ROQ]
2
1
= [1,950 kgs + 1,196 kgs.]
2
= 2,548 kgs.
Working note
Annual consumption of raw material (S) = 14,300 kgs.
(275 kgs. 52 weeks)
Cost of placing an order (C0) = Rs. 100
20
Carrying cost per kg. Per annum (iC1) = Rs. 10 = Rs. 2
100
2SC 0
Economic order quantity (EOQ) =
iC1
2.140
2 14,300 kgs. Rs.100

=
Rs. 2
= 1,196 Kgs.
Question 57
The Complete Gardener is deciding on the economic order quantity for
two brands of lawn fertilizer: Super Grow and Nature's Own. The following
information is collected.
Fertilizer
Super Grow Nature's Own
Annual Demand 2,000 Bags 1,280 Bags
Relevant ordering cost per purchase order Rs. 1,200 Rs. 1,400
Annual relevant carrying cost per bag Rs. 480 Rs. 650
Required:
(i) Compute EOQ for Super Grow and Nature's Own.
(ii) For the EOQ, what is the sum of the total annual relevant ordering costs and
total annual relevant carrying costs for Super Grow and Nature's Own?
(iii) For the EOQ, Compute the number of deliveries per year for Super Grow and
Nature's Own (November, 1999, 8 marks)
Answer
2SC 0 *
(i) EOQ =
iC 1
*Here S = Annual demand of fertilizer bags.
C1 = Cost per bag.
C = Relevant ordering cost per purchase order
i C1 = Annual relevant carryi ng cost per bag
EOQ for Super Grow Fertilizer EOQ for Nature's Own Fertilizer
2 2,000 bags Rs.1,200 2 1,280 bags Rs. 1,400
= 100 bags. = 80 bags.
Rs. 480 Rs.560
(ii) Total annual relevant costs for Super Grow Fertilizer
= Total annual relevant ordering costs + Total annual relevant
carrying costs
S 1
= C 0 + EOQ iC1
EOQ 2
2.141
2,000 bags 1
= Rs. 1,200 + 100 bags Rs. 480
100 bags 2
= Rs. 24,000 + Rs. 24,000 = Rs. 48,000
Total annual relevant costs for Nature's Own Fertilizer
1,280 bags 1
= Rs. 1,400 + 80 bags Rs. 560
80 bags 2
= Rs. 22,400 + Rs. 22,400 = Rs. 44,800
(iii) Number of deliveries for Super Grow Fertilizer per year.
S
= (annual demand of fertiliser bags)
EOQ
2,000 bags
= = 20 orders
100 bags
Numbers of deliveries for Nature's Own fertilizers per year.
1,280 bags
= = 16 orders
80 bags
Question 58
At what price per unit would Part No. A32 be entered in the
Stores Ledger, if the following invoice was received from a supplier:
Invoice Rs.
200 units Part No. A32 @ Rs. 5 1,000.00
Less: 20% discount 200.00
800.00
Add: Excise Duty @ 15% 120.00
920.00
Add Packing charges (5 non-returnable boxes) 50.00
970.00
Notes:
(i) A 2 percent discount will be given for payment in 30 days.
(ii) Documents substantiating payment of excise duty is enclosed for claiming
MODVAT credit. (November, 1995, 4 marks)
Answer
Rs.
200 units net cost after trade discount 800
2.142
Add: Packing charges 50

Total cost for 200 units 850
Rs.850
Cost per unit = = Rs. 4.25
200
Question 59
In a company weekly minimum and maximum consumption of material A
are 25 and 75 units respectively. The re-order quantity as fixed by the company is
300 units. The material is received within 4 to 6 weeks from issue of supply order.
Calculate Minimum level and maximum level of material A. (May, 1995, 6
Marks)
Answer
Minimum level
= Re-order level (Average rate of consumption Average
re-order period)
= 450 units (50 units 5 weeks) (Refer to Working Note)
= 200 units
Maximum level
= ROL+ROQ (Min. rate of consumption Min. re -order
period)
= 450 units + 300 units (25 units 4 weeks)
= 600 units
Working Note:
Re-order level = Maximum usage per period Maximum
reorder period
= 75 units 6 weeks = 450 units
Question 60
A Ltd. is committed to supply 24,000 bearings per annum to B Ltd. on a
steady basis. It is estimated that it costs 10 paise as inventory holding cost per
bearing per month and that the set-up cost per run of bearing manufacture is
Rs.324.
(i) What should be the optimum run size for bearing manufacture?
2.143
(ii) What would be the interval between two consecutive optimum runs?
(iii) Find out the minimum inventory cost per annum. (November,
2000, 10 marks)
Answer
(i) Optimum run size for bearing manufacture
2 Annual supply of bearings Set up cos t per production run
=
Annual holding cos t per bearing
=
2 24,000 bearings Rs. 324

= 3,600 bearings
12 months 0. 10P
(ii) Interval between two

consecutive optimum runs
12 months
=
Annual production

Optimum run size
12 months
= =
24,000 bearings

3,600 bearings
12 months
6. 66
= 1.8 months for 55
days approximately.
(iii) Minimum inventory cost
per annum
= Total production run
cost + Total carrying cost per annum
24,000 bearings
=
3,600 bearings
Rs.324 + (1/2) 3,600 bearings 0.10P 12 months
= Rs. 2,160 + Rs. 2,160
= Rs. 4,320
2.144
Question 61
JP Limited, manufacturers
of a special product, follows the policy of EOQ (Economic Order Quantity) for one
of its components. The component's details are as follows:
Rs.
Purchase Price Per Component 200
Cost of an Order 100
Annual Cost of Carrying one Unit in 10% of Purchase Price
Inventory
Total Cost of Inventory and Ordering Per
Annum 4,000
The company has been
offered a discount of 2% on the price of the component provided the lot size is
2,000 components at a time.
You are required to:
(a) Compute the EOQ
(b) Advise whether the
quantity discount offer can be accepted.
(Assume that the
inventory carrying cost does not vary according to discount policy)
(c) Would your advice
differ if the company is offered 5% discount on a single order?
Answer
(a) Computation of EOQ
(i) Purchase price
per component (C1) Rs. 200
(ii) Cost of an
order (C0) Rs. 100
(iii) Annual cost of
carrying one unit 10% of C1
of inventory is
(i C1) or
Rs. 20
2.145
(iv) Total cost of

(carrying) inventory and ordering per annum Rs. 4,000
(v) Let the total
annual inventory usage be S.
To compute E.O.Q. by
using the above data we require the fi gure of total annual usage of inventory.
This can be determined by making use of the following relation.
2SC 0iC 1 = Rs. 4,000
OR 2S Rs .100 Rs. 20 = Rs.
4,000
Or Rs. 4000S = Rs. 4,000
Or S = 4,000 units
Now
2SC 0
E.O.Q. = =
iC1
2 4000 Rs.100
Rs.20
= 200 units
(b) No. of orders = 2
Total cost = Ordering Cost
+ Carrying Cost
= 2 Rs. 100 +
1/2 2,000 units Rs. 20
= Rs. 200 + Rs.
20,000 = Rs . 20,200
Extra cost = Rs. 20,000 Rs. 4,000 = Rs. 16,200
Quantity discount received = 2% 4,000 units Rs.
200
= Rs. 16,000
Advice to Management: The quantity discount offer should
not be accepted as it results in additional expenditure of Rs. 200 (Rs. 16,200 Rs.
16,000)
(c) No. of orders = 1
Total cost = 1 Rs. 100 + 1/2 4,000 units Rs. 20 = Rs.
40,100
2.146
Extra cost = Rs. 40,100 Rs. 4,000 = Rs. 36,100

Quantity discount received = 5% 4,000 units Rs.
200
= Rs. 40,000
Advice to Management: The quantity discount after should
be accepted as it result in reducing the total cost of carrying and ordering of
inventory to the extent of Rs. 3,900 [Rs. 40,000 Rs. 36,1000].
Note: White solving this problem, total cost of inventory and ordering per
annum, has been considered as total cost of carrying inventory and
ordering per annum.
Question 62
From the details given below, calculate
(i) Re-ordering level
(ii) Maximum level
(iii) Minimum level
(iv) Danger level
Re-ordering quantity is to be calculated on the basis of following information:
Cost of placing a purchase order is Rs. 20
Number of units to be purchased during the year is 5,000.
Purchase price per unit inclusive of transportation cost is Rs. 50.
Annual cost of storage per unit is Rs. 5.
Details of lead time: Average 10 days,
Maximum 15 days, Minimum
6 days. For
emergency purchases 4 days.
Rate of consumption: Average: 15 units per day,
Maximum : 20 units per day.
Answer
Basic data:
Co (Ordering Cost per order) = Rs. 20
S (Number of units to be purchased annually) = 5,000
units
C1 (Purchase price per unit inclusive
of transportation cost) = Rs. 50
iC1 (Annual cost of storage per unit) = Rs. 5
2.147
Computations
(i) Re-ordering level = Maximum usage
Maximum re -order
(ROL) per period period
= 20 units per
day 15 days
= 300 units
(ii) Maximum level = ROL + ROQ
Min. rate Min. reorder

of consumption period
(Refer to working note 1 and 2)
= 300 units +
10 units 6 days
200 units
per day
= 440 units
(iii) Minimum level = ROL Average rate
of consumption
Average reorder

period
= 300 units
(15 units per da y 10 days)
= 150 units
(iv) Danger level = Average consumption Lead time for emergency
purchases
= 15 units per
day 4 days
= 60 units
Working Notes:
2SC 0
1. ROQ = =
iC1
2 5,000 units Rs. 20
Rs. 5
= 200 units
2. Average rate of = Minimum rate of consumption (x)
+ Maximum rate of consumption
2.148
consumption 2
x + 20 units per day
15 units per day =
2
or x = 10 units per
day
Question 63
Write short notes:
ABC Analysis (May, 1996, 4 marks)
Answer
ABC Analysis: It is a system of inventory control. It exercises
discriminating control over different items of stores classified on the basis of the
investment involved. Usually the i tems are divided into three categories
according to their importance, namely, their value and frequency of
replenishment during a period.
(i) 'A' Category of items consists of only a small percentage i.e., about 10% of
the total items handled by the store s but require heavy investment about
70% of inventory value, because of their high prices and heavy requirement.
(ii) 'B' Category of items are relatively less important; they may be 20% of the
total items of material handled by stores. The percentage of investment
required is about 20% of the local investment in inventories.
(iii) C Category of items do not require much investment; it may be about 10%
of total inventory value but they are nearly 70% of the total items handled
by store.
'A' category of items can be controlled effectively by using a regular
system which ensures neither over-stocking nor shortage of materials for
production. Such a system plans its total material requirements by making
management costs is achieved by determining economic order quantities after
taking into account ordering cost and carrying cost. To avoid shortage and to
minimize heavy investment in inventories, the techniques of value analysis,
variety reduction, standardization etc, may be used.
In the case of B category of items, as the sum involved is moderate, the
same degree of control as applied in 'A' category of i tems is not warranted. The
orders for the items, belonging to this category may be placed after reviewing
their situation periodically.
2.149

Orders for items in this group may be placed either after six months or once in a
year, after ascertaining consumption requirements. In this case the objective is
to economise on ordering and handling costs.
The advantages of ABC analysis are the following: -
(i) It ensures that, without there bein g any danger of interruption of
production for want of materials or stores, minimum investment will be
made in inventories of stocks of materials or stocks to be carried.
(ii) The cost of placing orders, receiving goods and maintaining stocks is
minimized specially if the system is coupled with the determination of
proper economic order quantities.
(iii) Management time is saved since attention need be paid only to some of the
items rather than all the items as would be the case if the ABC system was
not in operation.
(iv) With the introduction of the ABC system, much of the work connected with
purchases can be systematized on a routine basis to be handled by sub-
ordinate staff.
Question 64
Distinguish between Bin Card and Stores Ledger. (May, 2003, 2 marks)
Answer
Bin card & Stores ledger: Bin card is a quantitative record of stores,
receipt, issue and balance. It is kept for each & every item of store by the store
keeper. They are kept attached to the bins or receptacles or placed quite near
thereto so that these also assist in the identification of stock. Here, the balance
is taken out after each receipt or issue transaction.
Stores ledger is a collection of cards or loose leaves specially ruled for
maintaining a record of both quantity and cost of s tores items received. It also
maintains record of stores receipt, issue and balance in respect of each item of
inventory. Entries in this ledger are made from goods received notes and
material requisitions.
Question 65
Discuss the accounting treatment of spoilage and defectives in cost
accounting
Answer
Accounting treatment of spoilage & defectives in cost accounts:
2.150
Normal spoilage (i.e. which is inherent in the operation) costs are

included in cost either by charging the loss due to spoilage to the production
order or by charging it to production overhead so that it is spread over all the
products. Any value realized from the sale of spoilage is credited to production
order or production overhead account, as the case may be. The cos t of abnormal
spoilage are charged to Costing Profit & Loss Account.
Defectives that are considered inherent in the process and are identified
as normal can be recovered by using any one of the following method.
Charged to good products
Charged to general overheads
Charged to departmental overheads
If defectives are abnormal, they are to be debited to Costing Profit & Loss
Account.
Question 66
A company manufactures a product from a raw material, which is
purchased at Rs.60 per kg. The company incurs a handling cost of Rs. 360 plus
freight of Rs. 390 per order. The incremental carrying cost of inventory of raw
material is Re. 0.50 per kg. per month. In addition, the cost of working capital
finance on the investment in inventory of raw material is Rs. 9 per kg. per annum.
The annual production of the product is 1,00,000 units and 2.5 units are obtained
from one kg of raw material.
Required
(i) Calculate the economic order quantity of raw materials.
(ii) Advise, how frequently should orders for procurement be placed.
(iii) If the company proposes to rationalize placement of orders on quarterly
basis, what percentage of discount in the price of raw materials should be
negotiated?
Answer
S (Annual requirement of raw material in kgs.) = 1 kg. 1,00,000 units / 2.5
units = 40,000 kgs.
C0 (Handling & freight cost per order) = Rs. 360 + Rs. 390 = Rs. 750
iC1 (Carrying cost per unit per annum + Investment cost per Kg. per annum)
= (0.5 12 months) + Rs. 9 (investment in inventory per kg. per annum)
= Rs. 15 per unit
2 40,000 kgs. Rs. 750
(i) E.O.Q. = = 2,000 Kgs.
Rs. 15
2.151
(ii) Frequency of orders for procurement:

S (Annual consumption) = 40,000 kgs.
Quantity per order = 2,000 kgs.
No. of orders per annum = 20 (40,000 kgs / 2,000 kgs.)
Frequency of placing orders 0.6 months or 18 days (approx.)
(12 months / 20 orders) or 365 days / 20 orders
(iii) Percentage of discount in the price of raw materials to be negotiated:
Quarterly orders = 10,000 kgs. Per order
(40,000 kgs / 4 orders)
No. of orders =4
2.152
Total cost
Order placing cost Rs.3,000
(4 orders Rs.750)
Carrying cost Rs.75,000
(10,000/2Rs.15) Rs.78,000
Total Cost
(When order size is equal to EOQ)
No. of orders 20
Order placing cost (20 orders Rs. 750) Rs. 15,000
Carrying cost (2,000/2 Rs. 15) Rs. 15,000
Rs.30,000
Increase in cost to be compensated by discount: Rs.48,000
(Rs. 78,000 Rs. 30,000)
Reduction per kg. In the purchase p rice of raw material: Rs. 1.20 per unit
(Rs. 48,000/40,000 Kgs.)
Percentage of discount in the price of raw material to be negotiated : 2%
discount
(Rs. 20/60) 100
Question 67
The quarterly production of a company's
product which has a steady market is 20,000 units. Each unit of a product
requires 0.5 Kg. of raw material. The cost of placing one order for raw material is
Rs. 100 and the inventory carrying cost is Rs.2 per annum. The lead time for
procurement of raw material is 36 days and a safety stock of 1,000 kg. of raw
materials is maintained by the company. The company has been able to
negotiate the following discount structure with the raw material supplier.
Order quantity Discount
Kgs. Rs.
Upto 6,000 NIL
6,000 8,000 400
8,000 16,000 2,000
16,000 30,000 3,200
30,000 45,000 4,000
You are required to

2.153
(i) Calculate the re-order point taking 30 days in a month.

(ii) Prepare a statement showing the total cost of procurement and storage of
raw material after considering the discount of the company elects to place
one, two, four or six orders in the year.
(iii) State the number of orders which the company should place to minimize the
costs after taking EOQ also into consideration (May, 2002, 8 marks)
Answer
Working notes
1. Annual production (units) 80,000
(20,000 units per quarter 4 quarters)
2. Raw material required for 80,000 units in kgs. 40,000
(80,000 units 0.5 kgs.)
2 40,000 kgs. Rs.100
3. EOQ = = 2,000 kgs.
Rs. 2
4. Total cost of procurement and storage when

the order size is equal to EOQ or 2,000 kgs.
No. of orders 20
(40,000 kgs. / 2,000 kgs.)
Ordering cost (Rs.) 2,000
(20 orders Rs. 100)
Carrying cost (Rs.) 2,000
( 2,000 kgs. Rs. 2) _____
Total cost 4,000
(i) Reorder point = Lead time consumption + Safety stock

= 4,000 kgs. + 1,000 kgs. = 5,000 kgs.
(40,000 kgs. / 360 days) 36 days.
(ii) Statement showing the total cost of
procurement and storage of raw materials
(after considering the discount)
Order No. of Total cost of Average Total cost Discou Total cost
size orders procurement stock of storage nt
of raw
materials
Kgs. Rs. Kgs. Rs. Rs. Rs.
(1) (2) (3)=(2)Rs.1 (4)=(1 (5)=(4)Rs. (6) (7)=[(3)+(5)
2.154
00 ) 2 (6)
40,000 1 100 20,000 40,000 4,000 36,100
20,000 2 200 10,000 20,000 3,200 17,000
10,000 4 400 5,000 10,000 2,000 8,400
6666.66 6 600 3,333 6,666 400 6,866
(iii) Number of orders which the company should place to minimize the costs
after taking EOQ also into consideration is 20 orders each of size 2,000 kgs.
The total cost of procurement and storage in this case comes to Rs. 4,000,
which is minimum.
(Refer to working notes 3 and 4)
Question 68
Write short note on perpetual inventory control.
Answer
Perpetual Inventory: It represents a system of records maintained by the
stores in department. It in fact comprises of:
(i) Bin Cards, and
(ii) Stores Ledger
Bin Card maintains a quantitative record of receipts, issues and closing
balances of each item of stores. Separate bin cards are ma intained for each item.
Each card is filled up with the physical movement of goods i.e. on its receipt and
issue.
Like bin cards, the Stores Ledger is maintained to record all receipt and
issue transactions in respect of materials. It is filled up with th e help of goods
received note and material requisitions.
A perpetual inventory is usually checked by a programme of continuous
stock taking. Continuous stock taking means the physical checking of those
records (which are maintained under perpetual invento ry) with actual stock.
Perpetual inventory is essentially necessary for material control. It incidentally
helps continuous stock taking.
The success of perpetual inventory depends upon the following: -

(a) The Stores Ledger-(showing quantities and amount of each item)
(b) Stock Control Cards (or Bin Cards)
(c) Reconciling the quantity balances shown by (a) & (b) above'
(d) Checking the physical balances of a number of items every day
systematically and by rotation
2.155
(e) Explaining promptly the causes of discrepancies, if any, between physical

balances and book figures
(f) Making corrective entries were called for after step (e) and
(g) Removing the causes of the discrepancies referred to step (e).
The main advantages of perpetual inventory are as follo ws :
(1) Physical stocks can be counted and book balances adjusted as and when
desired without waiting for the entire stock-taking to be done.
(2) Quick compilation of Profit and Loss Accounts (for interim period) due to
prompt availability of stock figu res.
(3) Discrepancies are easily located and thus corrective action can be promptly
taken to avoid their recurrence.
(4) A systematic review of the perpetual inventory reveals the existence of
surplus, dormant, obsolete and slow-moving materials, so that remedial
measures may be taken in time.
(5) Fixation of the various levels and check of actual balances in hand with these
levels assist the Storekeeper in maintaining stocks within limits and in
initiating purchase requisitions for correct quantity at the proper time.
Question 69
Raw materials 'X' costing Rs. 100 per kilogram and 'Y costing Rs. 60 per
kilogram are mixed in equal proportions for making product 'A'. The loss of
material in processing works out to 25% of the output. The production expens es
are allocated at 50% of direct material cost. The end product is priced with a
margin of 33 1 % over the total cost. Material 'Y' is not easily available and
3
substitute raw material 'Z' has been found for 'Y costing Rs. 50 per kilogram. It is
required to keep the proportion of this substitute material in the mixture as low
at possible and at the same time maintain the selling price of the end product at
existing levels and ensure the same quantum of profit as at present.
You are required:
To compute what should be the ratio of mix of the raw materials X and Z.
Answer
Working Note:
(i) Percentage of loss on output: 25
2.156
Let 1 kg. be the output of product A,

then, 1.25 kg. will be the input of material X and Y.
Proportion of material X and Y in the output 1 kg. of product A is:
X: 1.25 kg./2 = 0.625 kg.
Y:1.25kg./2 = 0.625kg.
(ii) Cost structure and price:
(for 1 kg. of product A) Rs.
Material X: 62.50
(0.625 kg. x Rs. 100)
Material Y: 37.50
(0.625 kg. x Rs. 60)
Total Material Cost 100.00
Add: Production expenses
(50% of material cost) 50.00
Total cost
150.00
Add: Profit 33 1 % of total cost 50.00
3
Selling price 200.00
Proportion of Materials X and Z in the Product A
Assume the minimum quantity of material Z in the product A as S kg. It
means that (1.25-S) kg, of material X is required to be used for producing 1 kg. of
Product A.
[Refer to Working Note (i)]
To maintain the level of profit and the selling price has shown by the
Working Note (ii) it is necessary that the total cost of material in 1 kg. of product
A should not exceed Rs. 100; i.e., S kg. x Rs. 50 + (1.250 - S) kg. x Rs. 100 = Rs. 100
or S = 0.5
Hence the quantity of X material = 1.25 kg. - 0.50 kg. = 0.75 kg.
Proportion of materials X and Z is: 0.75: 0.50 = 3:2.
Question 70
SK Enterprise manufactures a special product ZE. The following
2.157
particulars were collected for the year 2004:
Annual consumption 12,000 units (360 days)

Cost per unit Re. 1
Inventory carrying cost 24%
Normal lead time 15 days
Safety stock 30 days consumption
Required:
(ii) Re-order level
(iii) What should be the inventory level (ideally) immediately before the
material order is received?
(2+1+1 = 4 marks)
Answer
(i) How much should be ordered each time i.e., Economic Order Quantity
(EOQ)
2 AB
EOQ =
CS
Where A is the annual consumption

B is the ordering cost per order
CS is the carrying cost per unit per annum
2 12,000 12
= = 12,00,000
1 ( 24 /100)
= 1095.4 units or say 1,100 units.

(ii) When should the order be placed i.e., reordering level
Reordering level = *Safety stock +normal lead time consumption
12000 12,000
Reordering level = 30 + 15
360 360
= 1,000+500 = 1,500 units.
2.158
(iii) What should be the inventory level (ideally) immediately before the
material ordered is received i.e. the Safety Stock.
12,000
*Safety Stock = 30
360
= 1,000 units.
Question 71
PQR Limited produces a product which has a monthly demand of 52,000
units. The product requires a component X which is purchased at Rs. 15 per
unit. For every finished product, 2 units of Component X are required. The
Ordering cost is Rs. 350 per order and the Carrying cost is 12% p.a.
Required:
(i) Calculate the economic order quantity for Component X.
(ii) If the minimum lot size to be supplied is 52,000 units, what is the
extra cost, the company has to incur?
(iii) What is the minimum carrying cost, the Company has to incur?
Answer
2AO
(i) EOQ =
c i
2 (52,00012) 350
=
15 0.12
= 15,578 units of components.
Total cost (when order size is 52,000 units) = Total ordering cost + Total
carrying cost
A Q
= O + C i
Q 2
52,000 12 52,000
= Rs. 350 + 15 12 %
52,000 2
= Rs 4,200 + Rs 46,800
2.159
= Rs 51,000
Total cost when order size is 15,578 units
52,000 12 15,578
= Rs. 350 + 15 12 %
15,578 2
= 14,020 + 14,020 = 28,040
Extra cost incur red = 51,000 28,040 = Rs 22,960
(iii) Minimum carrying cost, the company has to incur

Q
= C i
2
15,578
= Rs. 15 12%
2
= Rs 14,020
Alternative solution
(a) Assuming the annual demand of x is 1,04,000 units (2 52,000 units) as
per in struction that for every finished product , 2 units of component x
are required , the calculation of 2(a)(i),(ii) and (iii) will be as follows:
2AO
(i) EOQ =
c i
2 (2 52,00012) 350
=
15 0.12
= 22,030 units of component x
Total cost (when order size is 52,000 units) = Total ordering cost +
Total carrying cost
A Q
= O + C i
Q 2
2 52,000 12 52,000
= Rs. 350 + 15 12%
52,000 2
2.160
= Rs. 55,200
Total cost (when order size is 20,030 units)
2 52,000 12 22,030
= Rs.350 + 15 12%
22,030 2
Total cost incurred = 19,828 + 19,827 = 39,655.
Extra cost incurred = 55,200 Rs. 39,655 = Rs. 15,545.
(iii) Minimum carrying cost, the company has to incur

Q
= C i
2
22,030
= Rs.15 12%
2
= Rs. 19,827.
Question 72
PQR Ltd., manufactures a special product, which requires ZED. The
following particulars were collected for the year 2005- 06:
(i) Monthly demand of Zed : 7,500 units
(ii) Cost of placing an order : Rs. 500
(iii) Re-order period : 5 to 8 weeks
(iv) Cost per unit : Rs. 60
(v) Carrying cost % p.a. : 10%
(vi) Normal usage : 500 units per week
(vii Minimum usage : 250 units per week
)
(viii Maximum usage : 750 units per week
)
2.161
Required:
(i) Re-order quantity.
(ii) Re-order level.
(iii) Minimum stock level.
(iv) Maximum stock level.
(v) Average stock level. (4 + 10 = 14 Marks)
Answer
2AO
(i) Re-order quantity =
Ci
2 7,500 12 500
=
60 10
= 3,873 units
(ii) Re -order level

= Maximum re-order period Maximum usage
= 8 weeks 750 units per week
= 6,000 units
(iii) Minimum stock level
= Re-order level {Normal usage Average reorder period}
= 6,000 (500 6.5)
= 2,750 units
(iv) Maximum stock level
= Re -order level + Re-order quantity (Minimum usage Minimum re -
order period)
= 6,000 + 3,873 (5 250)
= 8,623 units
(v) Average stock level
= (Minimum stock level + Maximum stock level)
2.162
= (2,750 + 8,623)
= 5,687 units
Question 73
Raw materials AXE costing Rs. 150 per kg. and BXE costing Rs. 90
per kg. are mixed in equal proportions for making product A. The loss of
material in processing works out to 25% of the product. The production
expenses are allocated at 40% of direct material cost. The end product is
priced with a margin of 20% over the total cost.
Material BXE is not easily available and substitute raw material CXE
has been found for BXE costing Rs. 75 per kg. It is required to keep the
proportion of this substitute material in the mixture as low as possible and at
the same time maintain the selling price of the end product at existing level
and ensure the same quantum of profit as at present.
You are required to compute the ratio of the mix of the raw materials
AXE and CXE.
(May 2007, 8 Marks)
Answer
Working Notes:
(i) Computation of material mix ratio:
Let 1 kg. of product A requires 1.25 kg. of input of materials A X E and B X
E
Raw materials are mixed in equal proportions.
1.25
Then raw material A X E = = .625kg.
2
1.25
Then raw material B X E = = .625kg.
2
(ii) Computation of selling price / kg. of product A
Rs.
Raw material A X E .625 kg. 150 = Rs. 93.75
Raw material B X E .625 kg. 90 = Rs. 56.25 150.00
Production expenses (40% of material cost) 60.00
Total cost 210.00
2.163
Add: profit 20% of total cost 42.00

Selling price 252.00
Computation of proportions of materials A X E and C X E in A

Let material C X E required in product A be m kg.
Then for producing 1 kg of product A, material A X E requirement =
(1.25 m) kg.
To maintain same level of profit and selling price as per Working note
(ii), it is required that the total cost of material in 1 kg. of product A
should not exceed Rs. 150,
i.e., m kg. Rs. 75 + (1.25 m) kg. 150 = Rs. 150
or 75 m + 187.5 150 m = 150
or 75 m = 37.5
or m = 0.5 kg.
Raw material A X E requirement in product A = 1.25 .5 = .75 kg.
So, proportion of material A X E and C X E
= .75 : .50
i.e. 3 : 2.
Question 74
Explain Bin Cards and Stock Control Cards. (May 2007, 2 Marks)
2.164
Answer
Bin Cards and Stores control cards:
Bin Cards are quantitative records of the stores receipt, issue and balance. It
is kept for each and every item of stores by the store keeper. Here, the
balance is taken out after each receipt or issue transaction
Stock control cards are also similar to Bin Cards. Stock control cards contain
further informations as regards stock on order. These cards are kept in
cabinets or trays or loose binders.
Question 75
Explain Economic Batch Quantity in Batch Costing. (May 2007, 2 Marks)
Answer
Economic Batch Quantity in Batch Costing
There are two types of costs involved in Batch Costing(i) set up costs(ii)
carrying costs.
If the batch size is increased, set up cost per unit will come down and the
carrying cost will increase. If the batch size is reduced, set up cost per
unit will increase and the carry \ng cost will come down.
Economic Batch quantity will balance both these opponent costs. It is
calculated as follows:
2DS
EBQ =
c
Where,
D = Annual Demand in units
S = Set up cost per batch
C = Carrying cost per unit per annum.
Question 76
A Company manufactures a special product which requires a component
Alpha. The following particulars are collected for the year 2008:
(i) Annual demand of Alpha : 8,000 units
(ii) Cost of placing an order : Rs. 200 per order
(iii) Cost per unit of Alpha : Rs. 400
(iv) Carrying cost % p.a. : 20%
2.165
2.166
The company has been offered a quantity discount of 4% on the purchase

of Alpha, provided the order size is 4,000 components at a time.
Required:
(i) Compute the economic order quantity.
(ii) Advise whether the quantity discount offer can be accepted.
(November 2007, 5
Marks)
Answer
2 AO
(a) EOQ =
C i
2 8,000 200
=
400 20%
= 200 units.
Calculation of total inventory cost p.a. at EOQ.
Rs.
Purchase cost = 8,000 400 32,00,000
A 8,000
Ordering cost O = 200 = 8,000
Q 200
Q 200
Carrying cost c i = 400 20% = 8,000
2 2
32,16,000
Calculation of total inventory cost p.a. with quantity discount

Rs.
Purchase cost = 8,000 (400 4%) 30,72,000
A 8,000 400
Ordering cost O = 200 =
Q 4,000
________
Q 4,000 1,53,600
Carrying cost = c i = 384 20% =
2 2
2.167
32,26,000
(b) Quantity discount offered should not be accepted as it results in increase
in total cost of inventory management by Rs. 10,000.
2.168
Question 77
Discuss the treatment of spoilage and defectives in Cost Accounting.
(November 2007,
4 Marks)
Answer
Treatment of spoilage and defectives in Cost Accounting: The normal
spoilage cost (i.e. which is inherent in the operation) are included in cost
either by charging the loss due to spoilage to production order or charging it
to production overhead so that it is spread over all the products. Any value
realized from sale of spoilage is credited to production order or production
overhead account, as the case may be. The cost of abnormal spoilage (i.e.
arising out of causes not inherent in manufacturing process) are charged to
costing Profit and Loss Account.
The problem of accounting for defective work is that of accounting of the

costs of rectification or rework.
The possible ways of treatment are as under:
For normal defectives:
(i) Charge to good products.
(ii) Charge to general overheads.
(iii) Charge to departmental overheads
(iv) Charge to Costing Profit and Loss Account if defectives are abnormal and
due to causes beyond the control of organization.
Where defectives are easily identifiable with specific jobs, the works cost
are debited to job.
Question 78
The following are the details of receipts and issues of a material of stores
in a manufacturing company for the period of three months ending 30th
June, 2008:
Receipts:
Date Quantity (kgs) Rate per kg.
2.169
(Rs.)
April 10 1,600 5
April 20 2,400 4.90
May 5 1,000 5.10
May 17 1,100 5.20

May 25 800 5.25
June 11 900 5.40
June 24 1,400 5.50
There was 1,500 kgs. in stock at April 1, 2008 which was valued at Rs.
4.80 per kg.
Issues:
Date Quantity (kgs)
April 4 1,100
April 24 1,600
May 10 1,500
May 26 1,700
June 15 1,500
June 21 1,200
Issues are to be priced on the basis of weighted average method. The

stock verifier of the company reported a shortage of 80 kgs. on 31st May,
2008 and 60 kgs. on 30th June, 2008. The shortage is treated as inflating
the price of remaining material on account of shortage.
You are required to prepare a Stores Ledger Account. (November 2008, 7 Marks)
Answer
Stores Ledger Account
th
for the three months ending 30 June, 2008
(Weighted Average Method)
Receipts Issues Balance
Date GRN Qty. Rate Amount Requisit- Qty. Rate Amou Qty. Amou Rate for
No. (Kgs.) s s ion. No. (Kgs.) s nt (Kgs.) nt further Issue
MRR (Rs.)
(Rs.) (Rs.) (Rs.) (Rs.)
No.
2008
April 1 1,500 7,200 4.80
April 4 1,100 4.80 5,280 400 1,920 4.80
April 1,600 5.00 8,000 2,000 9,920 9,920
= 4.96
10 2,000
April 2,400 4.90 11,760 4,400 21,680 21,680
= 4.93
20 4,400
April 1,600 4.93 7,888 2,800 13,792 13,792
= 4.93
24 2,800
May 5 1,000 5.10 5,100 3,800 18,892 18,892
= 4.97
3,800
2.8 9
May 1,500 4.97 7,455 2,300 11,437 11,437
= 4.97
10 2,300
May 1,100 5.20 5,720 3,400 17,157 17,157
= 5.05
17 3,400
May 800 5.25 4,200 4,200 21,357 21,357
= 5.09
25 4,200
May 1,700 5.09 8,653 2,500 12,704 12,704
= 5.09
26 2,500
May Shortag 80 2,420 12,704 12,704
= 5.25
31 e 2,420
June 900 5.40 4,860 3,320 17,564 17,564
= 5.29
11 3,320
June 1,500 5.29 7,935 1,820 9,629 9,629

= 5.29
15 1,820
June 1,200 5.29 6,348 620 3,281 3,281
= 5.29
21 620
June 1,400 5.50 7,700 2,020 10,981 10,981
= 5.40
24 2,020
June Shortag 60 1,960 10,981 10,981
= 5.60
30 e 1,960
2.90
3
Labour
Question 1
Distinguish between Idle Time and Idle Facilities. How are they treated
in Cost Accounts? Develop a system of control for Idle Time in a factory.
Answer
Idle time: It refers to the labour time paid for but not utilised on
production. Idle time thus represents the time for which wages are paid but
no output is obtained. This is the period during which the workers remain
idle. It arises due to various reasons. According to reasons, idle time can be
classified into normal idle time and abnormal idle time. Normal idle time is
the time which cannot be avoided or reduced in the normal course of
business. For example, some labour time is bound to be lost due to the time
taken by workers to cover the distance between the factory gate and the
department or the actual work place where they are working. Some time
also elapses between the finishing of one job and the starting of another
job. Since a worker cannot work continuously for the whole day, sometime
is required during which he attends to this personal needs, such as taking
lunch or rest to avoid normal fatigue. It is thus obvious that normal idle
time is unavoidable. Abnormal idle time may arise because of inefficiency,
mischief and misfortune such as breakdown of machines for a long period,
power failure, non-availability of materials, etc. generally, it is avoidable
and controllable. However, abnormal idle time arising on account of strike,
lockouts, floods, etc. may be uncontrollable. By proper care and caution
abnormal idle time can be reduced or eliminated to a very great extent.
Idle facilities: The terms facilities has a wider connotation. It may
include production capacity as well. Facilities may be provided by the fixed
assets such as building space, plant/equipment capacity etc., or by various
service functions such as material services, production services, personnel
services etc., if a firm is not able to make full use of all these facilities then
5.2 Activi ty Based Costing
the firm may be said to have idle facilities. Thus, idle facilities refer to that
part of total production facilities available which remain unutilized due to
any reason such as non-availability of raw-material, etc. Idle facilities differ
from idle time. A firm may have idle facilities even when it works full time;
e.g., when facilities have been provided on too large a scale.
Treatment of idle time in Cost Accounting: Treatment of idle time in

coast accounting depends upon its nature. The cost of normal idle time is
charged to the cost of production. This may be done by inflating the labour
rate or the normal idle time may be transferred to factory overhead for
absorption through factory overhead absorption rate. In relative terms, the
cost of normal idle time is generally nominal. As against normal idle time
cost, the cost of abnormal idle time sometime may be quite substantial.
Since these costs are beyond the control of the management and being
abnormal in nature, they do not form part of cost of production. Therefore,
payment for them is not included in cost of production and is transferred to
costing profit and loss account.
Treatment of idle facilities in Cost Accounting: Normal idle facilities cost
which arises due to unavoidable reasons, should be included in the works
overhead. On the other hand, abnormal idle facilities cost which arises due
to plants or machines/facilities remaining idle on account of trade
depression or for want of work etc., should be written off to costing profit
and loss account.
System of controlling idle time: The system of idle time control aims at
controlling the time for which a worker has been paid but has not been
utilised for productive purposes. Such a loss of time is know as idle time.
The control of idle time requires the use of a proper system of recording the
idle time, ascertaining its reasons for occurrence and initiating suitable
administrative action to stop its reoccurrence.
To record the duration of idle time and to ascertain the reasons of its
occurrence, the format given as below may be used. This format not only
records the time paid for but also the standard time which a worker should
take to produce a unit of output. The time actually paid on comparison with
standard time may reveal the element of idle time, if any. After this the
reasons for the occurrence of idle time should be ascertained and stated in
the suitable column of the format. In this way a statement of labour time
utilization is usually prepared. Such a statement is quite useful to the
Activi ty Based Costing 5.3
officers who are concerned with the control of idle time. In fact it serve as a
sound basis for their actions to control idle time. Such a statement clearly
points out to persons responsible for the control of idle time the reasons for
the occurrence of idle time.
Finally, the concerned officer may suggest the remedial measures to
minimize the occurrence of idle time in future.
Refer to the format on the next page.
Question 2
What do you understand by Labour Turnover? How is it measured?
What are its causes? What are the remedial steps you would suggest to
minimize its occurrence?
Labour Utilisation Statement
Department....
Week Ending.
Standard Time Causes

Sl. Category Number Output Time Standard Idle Break- Power Lack of Lack of Set Ineffi
No. of of in Per time for Time down Failure Material planning up ciency
Workers hours Units Unit of Output (3-6) time
paid for Output
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Cost Accountant
Action taken .
.
..
Department Supdt.
Answer
The process of workers leaving and coming in business organizations
gives rise to the phenomenon of labour turnover. Labour turnover of an
organization in the rate of change in its labour force during a specified
period. This rate of change is compared with an index which acts as a
thermometer to ascertain its reasonableness. The suitable index of labour
turnover may be the standard or usual labour turnover in the industry or
locality, or the labour turnover rate for a past period. A higher labour
turnover reflects that the workers in the organization are new and
inexperienced, and it is a matter of concern to the organization. Also it
accounts for an increase in cost of production and even disturbs the even
flow of production in the market.
Measurement of Labour Turnover: To measure labour turnover, the
following three methods are available. Each method emphasizes on
different aspects. But it is expected from business concerns that a particular
method be used consistently to facilitate comparison of data from year to
year. Labour turnover may be calculated by using any one of the following
formulae:
Numberof employeesreplaced
Labour turnover = 100
Averagenumberof employeeson roll
Number of employeesleft
= 100
Numberjoining plus numberleaving
= 100
Causes of Labour Turnover: The main causes of labour turnover in an
organization/industry can be broadly classified under the following heads:
(a) Personal Causes
(b) Unavoidable Causes
(c) Avoidable Causes
Personal Causes are those which induce or compel workers to leave
their jobs purely on personal grounds; e.g.
(i) Change of job for betterment.
(ii) Premature retirement due to ill health and old age.
(iii) Domestic problems and family responsibilities.

(iv) Discontentment over the job and working environment.
Unavoidable Causes are those under which it become obligatory on the
part of management to ask some or more of their employees to leave the
organization; such causes may include the following:
(i) Seasonal nature of business.
(ii) Shortage of raw material, power slack market for the products, etc.
(iii) Change in the plant location.
(iv) Disability, Making a worker unfit for work.
(v) Disciplinary measures.
Avoidable Causes are those causes which require the attention of
management on a continuous basis so as to keep the labour turnover ratio
as low as possible. The main causes are as follows:
(i) Dissatisfaction with job, remuneration, hours of work, working
conditions etc.
(ii) Strained relationships with management, supervisors of fellow
colleagues.
(iii) Lack of training facilities and promotional avenues.
(iv) Lack of recreational and medical facilities.
(v) Low wages and allowances.
Remedial steps to minimize labour turnover: The following remedial
steps are useful in minimizing labour turnover.
1. Exist interview: An interview may be arranged with each outgoing
employee, to ascertain the reasons of his leaving the organization.
2. Job analysis and evaluation: Before recruiting workers, job analysis
and evaluation may be carried out to ascertain the requirements of
each job.
3. Scientific system of recruitment, selection, placement and
promotion: The organization should adopt the use of scientific
system of recruitment, selection, placement and promotion of an
employee within the organization.
4. Enli ghtened attitude of management: The management should

introduce the following steps for creating a healthy working
atmosphere.
(i) Service rules should be framed, discussed and approved among
management and workers, before their implementation.
(ii) Provide facilities for education and training of workers.
(iii) Introduce a procedure for settling workers grievance.
5. Use of Committee: Issues like control over workers, handling their
grievances etc. may be dealt by a committee, comprising of members
from management and workers.
Question 3
What do you understand by Overtime Premium?
What is the affect of overtime payment on productivity and cost?
Discuss the treatment of overtime premium in cost accounts and
suggest a procedure for control of overtime w ork .
Answer
Overtime premium: Overtime is the amount of wages paid for working
beyond normal working hours as specified by Factories Act or by a mutual
agreement between the workers union and the management. According to
Factories Act of 1948, a worker is entitled for overtime at double the rate of
his wages (including allowances) if he works beyond 9 hours in a day or 48
hours in a week even where the Act is not applicable, the practice is to pay
for overtime work at higher rates usually in accordance with a standing
agreement between the employer and the workers. Hence, payment of
overtime consists of two elements, the normal wages i.e., the usual
amount, and the extra payment i.e., the premium. This amount of extra
payment paid to a worker under overtime is known as overtime premium.
The overtime payment affects the productivity and cost in many ways
as follows:
(i) During overtime period the efficiency of a worker is low. This causes
reduced productivity, thus during this period the productivity is lesser
than the normal one.
(ii) In their anxiety to earn more, the workers may not concentrate on work
during normal time and thus the output during normal hours may also
fall.
(iii) The practice of resorting to overtime adversely affects workers health
which may lead to increase in accident rate and consequently a
decrease in productivity.
(iv) Due to overtime, it is not possible to carry out necessary maintenance
of plants and machinery. Such a situation results occasionally in a major
breakdown and hence accounts for the stoppage of production cycle.
(v) Reduced output and increased premium are responsible for bringing an
increase in cost of production.
Overtime premium is a part of total wages of overtime period. In cost
accounting the treatment of overtime premium will be as follows:
(i) If the overtime is resorted to at the desire of the customer, then
the entire amount of overtime including overtime premium should
be charged to the job directly.
(ii) If it is due to a general pressure of work to increase the output, the
premium as well as overtime wages may be charged to general
overheads.
(iii) If it is due to the negligence or delay of workers of a particular
department, it may be charged to the concerned department.
(iv) If it is due to circumstances beyond control, it may be charged to
Costing Profit & Loss Account.
As regards the control of overtimes is concerned, it is difficult to
eliminate it completely. But it is not difficult to control it and to keep it
to the barest minimum.
The procedure for control of overtime work involves the following
steps:
1. Entire overtime work should be duly authorized after investigating
the reasons for it.
2. Overtime cost should be shown against the concerned department.
Such a practice should enable proper investigation and planning of
production in future.
3. If overtime is a regular feature, the necessity for recruiting more

men and adding a shift should be considered.
4. If overtime is due to lack of plant and machinery or other resources,
steps may be taken to install more machines, or to resort to sub
contracting .
Question 4
What are piece-rate? What advantage and disadvantages are
attributed to their use? What principles should govern the determination
and revision of piece- rates?
Answer
Piece Rate: It is that rate, which is paid to a worker for producing a
single unit of output. The wages of a worker under piece rate method are
calculated by multiplying the number of units of output produced by a pre-
determined piece rate. For example, if the pre-determined piece rate is Rs.
5 per unit and a worker has produced 200 units, then the total wages to be
paid will be Rs. 1,000.
To be more exact, the above type of piece rate method is known as
straight piece rate. It has another variation also, which is known as
differential piece rate. Under differential piece rate system, different piece
rates are given to workers for different levels of efficiency.
Important advantage and disadvantages which are attributed to the use
of piece rates are as follows:
Advantages of piece rates:
1. The application of piece rate acts as an incentive to workers to produce
more to maximize their earnings.
2. Due to increase in output, the per unit total cost of production reduces.
3. Losses due to mishandling of machines and breakage of tools etc., are
minimized, as the workers understand fully their importance.
4. Workers are constantly on the lookout to develop improved methods of
performing jobs which may result in increased productivity.
5. The piece rate method is easily understood by workers and thus it is
highly appreciated.
6. The use of piece rates reduces supervision costs.
Disadvantages of piece rates:

1. To maximize earnings, sometime sub standard quality of goods are
produced by workers.
2. Workers hardly have any consideration for the resources of the
concern. They may waste material and mishandle tools and machinery.
Such an act on the part of workers reduces the concerns profitability.
3. The use of piece rate has no place for less efficient workers.
4. Due to continuous working for several hours, the health of workers is
adversely affected.
5. The determination of a piece rate acceptable to workers is a difficult
task. In fact, it is a disputable point between employees and employer.
Important principles of piece rate determination and revision :
Important principles which should govern the determination and revision of
piece rates are as follows:
1. Different piece rates should be determined for different types of jobs.
2. The piece rates determination should give due consideration to factors
such as requirement of jobs, conditions under which jobs would be
perform ed, risk involved, efforts involved while working on the job, etc.
3. The wage rate should be such that it guarantees a minimum living wage
to ensure a satisfactory standard of living.
4. It should reduce/stabilize labour turnover on its application.
5. It should act as an incentive to motivate workers in giving a higher
output.
6. The wage rate should be able to reduce absenteeism and late coming.
7. It should be acceptable to trade unions.
8. It should be flexible and capable of being adapted to changed
circumstances.
9. Piece rates should be revised as and when they are revised by other
firms in the industry or there is an increase in the cost of living index.
10. It may be revised at the end of the contract period as settled between
management and workers union.
Question 5
Define job evaluation and distinguish it from merit rating. Explain the
methods and objectives of job evaluation.
Answer
Job evaluation can be defined as the process of analysis and assessment
of jobs to ascertain reliably their relative worth and to provide management
with a reasonably sound basis for determining the basic internal wage and
salary structure for the various job positions. In other words, job evaluation
provides a rationale for differential wages and salaries for different groups
of employees a nd ensures that these differentials are consistent and
equitable.
Merit rating is the quantitative or qualitative assessment of an
employees personality or his performance on the job made by his
supervisor or other persons qualified to judge.
Points of distinction between job evaluation and merit rating: The main
points of distinction between job evaluation and merit rating are as follows:
1. Job evaluation is the assessment of the relative worth of jobs within a
company and merit rating is the assessment of the relative worth of the
man behind a job. In other words, merit rating rates employees on their
job while jobs evaluation rates the jobs.
2. Job evaluation and its accomplishments are meant to set up a rational
wage and salary structure whereas merit rating provide a scientific
basis for determining fair wages for each workers based on his ability
and performance.
3. Job evaluation simplifies wage administration by bringing a uniformity
in wage rates. On the other hand, merit rating is used to determine fair
rate of pay for different workers on the basis of their performance.
Methods of job Evaluation: Methods of job evaluation can be classified
into three major groups as below:
1. The Ranking and Grading Method.
2. The Point Rating Method.
3. The Factor Com parison Method.
1. (i) The Ranking Method: This method is simple, inexpensive and least
formal of all job evaluation methods. This method is primarily
concerned with the task of arranging various jobs in an enterprise
in an order. The ordering of the jobs can be either from the lowest
to the highest or the reverse.
The task of ranking each job is preceded by a careful job analysis
and job description. The job analysis requires a careful enumeration
of the requirements of each job whereas job description inc ludes
recording of the duties to be performed by workers on a job, their
responsibilities, qualifications and conditions of work.
To rank various jobs, rates or experts are selected within the
organization. They arrange each job on the basis of general over-all
impressions, they have about each job. Sometimes the task of
ranking jobs is performed by several individuals. These individuals
work independently on the task and finally sit together to arrive at
a unanimous ranking. This method is useful for small organizations
with well defined jobs, but is not suitable for large enterprise with
complex organizational structure. It can be easily understood and
administrated because of its simplicity.
(ii) Grading Method: This methods is in fact a modification of the
ranking method. Under this method a pre-determined number of
grades or classes are established, on the basis of the knowledge
about existing jobs in the organization, so that all jobs can be
placed suitably under these graded classification. In other words, a
hypothetical scale or yardstick of job values is determined and each
job is compared with reference to this bench mark and graded or
classified accordingly. Generally, a committee composed of persons
in the organization, who have a clear picture of all jobs in the
organization is entrusted with the task of evaluation.
The establishing of grade levels takes into account the complexities
of the duties, requirement of technicians, labour and nature of
supervisory responsibility involved in it. It also makes use of job
description. Jobs requiring the carrying out of simple instructions
and close supervision are graded at lowest level whereas higher
grades are assigned to those jobs which require extensive use of
skill and involves greater responsibility. After establishing grades,
each job in the concern is screened with the purpose of assigning a
suitable grade to it. All jobs within the same grade are treated
alike, for the purpose of basic wage and salary.
The chief merit of this method is that it uses some logical basis for
grading jobs and is widely used for salaried jobs. It is simple,
inexpensive and tends to be more accurate than the ranking
method.
2. The Point Rating Method: Under this method, initially key jobs are
selected and studies. Each job is broken in terms of its job factors. (Job
factors are the specific input elements required to be
possessed/observed for the performance of different jobs by job
holder). The list of job factors common to key jobs selected, may
include factors like still, effort, responsibility, working conditions etc.
selection of specific job factors is to be tailored to the requirements and
peculiarities of particular organization and job. Different job factors are
used to measure the worth of different jobs.
The next stage is to assign weights or points to each factor in a job. For
example, the job factor, skill may be assigned 90 points while
responsibility may carry a weightage of 60 points, in a particular job.
Weightage can be increased along with the degree of particular job
factors. For example, progressively higher points can be assigned to
ascending degree of education- primary, secondary, college, and so on.
The relative importance of the various factors in a job is to be reflected
in the weightage. Points or weightage for all the factors when totaled
gives the evaluation of the job. The task of assigning weightage is
usually performed by a committee of job evaluators.
Lastly, the point total differentials are translated into different base
wage rates. For this purpose, it is necessary to have an idea of the
prevailing wage rates on comparable jobs in the labour market in the
industry on in the region. A wage survey may be necessary for the
purpose. A wage trend line can be plotted on a scatter diagram whose
coordinates represent (a) weightage (along x-axis) (b) rates paid (along
y-axis), for each job.
The wage trend line approximates the prevailing wage rates for all jobs
in the structure. Wage rates for all the other jobs can be interpolated by
reading up from the point values to the wage line.
This method is less subjective in its approach and provides more
consistency of results than any other method. But it is difficulty to
develop. Also it is difficult to explain the concept used viz., of relative
weights and points, relative points to money value etc., to employees.
3. Factor Comparison Method: To evaluate jobs a few key jobs selected

and a limited set of key factors common to all these jobs are identified.
The key jobs are ranked on each of the factors, one factor at a time,
instead of being ranked as whole job. The wage rates on these jobs are
determined in the same way as the point rating method. The wage rate
is divided into the amounts being due for each of the key factors. A
second ranking of jobs is done on the basis of the monetary values of
each factor. These two ranks constitute the framework of the factor
comparison system. All the other jobs are evaluated against the key
jobs in terms of both factor points and monetary values of the factor, to
arrive at the wage rates payable to those jobs.
Objective of job evaluation: The objectives of job evaluation are
explained as below:
(a) To evolve a systematic job structure and wage and salary structure
which mean the positioning of each job in relation to other jobs, as
also the establishment of relationships among different classes of
jobs in terms of their physical and monetary worth.
(b) To simplify, stabilize and rationalize the wage, and salary grades or
levels in the organization for purpose of administrative convenience
and control. A neat and understandable wage and salary system is
likely to improve the credibility of the organisations intentions on
employee remuneration.
(c) To promote reliability, equity and fair- play in the design of wage
structure. To match basic compensation with efforts, skills and
hazards involved in each job so as to inject a sense of satisfaction
among employees in different jobs as to the rational of differential
wage/salary grades.
(d) To ensure consistency between the organisations wage and salary
level and that of the industry or of other organizations in the
geographical area in which the organization is situated. A
systematic job evaluation attempt is likely to result in a more or
less uniform wage structure throughout an industry.
(e) To provide a basis to resolve controversies and conflicts on wage
comparisons among different jobs. Many employees intuitively feel
that their jobs involve more efforts, skills and responsibilities than
the jobs of others in the organization. They also nurse grievances
on the perceived inadequacy of basic compensation attached to
their jobs compared to those of others. A rational job evaluation

has the objective of removing or minimizing the subjective
grievances of employees and workers on what their efforts and
skills are worth.
(f) To remove gross anomalies and distortions in wage structure
accumulated over the years through managerial sins of omission
and commission. In some organizations jobs which do not call for
much skill or eff ort or hazard may carry unduly high basic
compensation. The reverse could also be prevalent-jobs which do
place stringent and strenuous demands on the job holders do not
carry commensurate compensation. Job evaluation at the
minimum, is aimed at removing such indefensible anomalies.
Question 6
What do you understand by time and motion study? Explain how
standard time is set under time study. State how time and motion study is
useful to management.
Answer
Time study is defined as a work measurement technique for recording
the time and rates of working for the elements of a specified job carried out
under specified conditions, and for analyzing the data so as to obtain the
time necessary for carrying out the job at a defined level of performance.
Thus time study attempts to ascertain the time spent on each element of a
job. The sum total of the time taken by all elements of a job is called the
standard time. This standard time is the total time which should be taken by
an average worker to perform a job under standard conditions.
Motion study involves a detailed study and analysis of the basic
operations of a job or process with the object of eliminating unnecessary
ones. Motion Study is closely associated with operations analysis.
Operations analysis is a primary analysis which aims at eliminating major
deficiencies. Motion Study is a secondary analysis which aims at refining the
methods and operations to achieve further improvements and in addition it
attempts to study the movements of human limbs as well as the mechanical
set up and operations.
In brief, the time study aims at determining the standard time for a job
and motion study aims at the elimination of unnecessary motions or the
movements performed by the workers on the job. Time and motion study
are infact complementary to each other.
The main steps involved in setting standard time for a job/operation
under time study are as follows:
(i) Collect and record all the information available about the job, the
operator and the surrounding conditions, which may affect the carrying
out of the work.
(ii) Observe and record a complete description of the method and the
operations necessary for performing the job. Further break down each
of the operations performed for carrying out the job into its
elements/parts.
(iii) Examine each operation and its elements thoroughly to ensure that the
motions used to perform are most effective.
(iv) Measure and record by using a stop watch the time taken by different
operators to perform each element of an operation. Enough such
observations be taken to determine the average time of these
observations. The average time is also known as normal or base time
for each element. Sum the base time of each element to arrive at the
base time of an operation.
(v) Determine the allowance for relaxation etc., to be made over and above
the base time for the operation.
(vi) The standard time of an operation is obtained by adding the base time
with the allowance made.
Time and Motion study is quite useful to management:
(a) It helps the management to assess correctly the labour
requirements.
(b) It helps management in the fixation of wage rates and introduction
of effective incentive schemes.
(c) It helps management in standardizing jobs, equipments and
methods by giving guidance as to the best method of operating in
the time set.
(d) It helps the management to improve on work methods by
comparing time taken to complete the same type of work under
different methods.
(e) It helps management in planning and exercising cost control.
Question 7
List down the factors to be considered before introducing a scheme of
incentive to workers.
Answer
An incentive can be defined as the stimulation of effort and
effectiveness on the part of workers by offering monetary inducement or
enhanced facilities. It means that incentive can be given in monetary or non
monetary form to workers. It is usually linked with the efforts made by
individual workers or by their work group for increasing production. By the
implementation of such a scheme not only the workers but also the
employer is benefited. Due to increased production the overhead cost is
spread over a larger output and thus per unit cost of production of the
product is reduced.
Factors to be considered before introducing a scheme of incentives to
work ers.
1. The impact of the Scheme in motivating workers.
2. The impact of the scheme on workers performing:
(i) Quality job and thus giving a lower output
(ii) Routine job with a potential to give a higher output.
(iii) Job by using an automatic machine, where the possibility of
increasing the output beyond the fixed number does not exist.
3. The reaction of workers and union leaders towards the incentive
scheme.
4. How for it is practicable to measure the performance of each worker, as
it is necessary for the calculation of incentive?
5. The extent of saving in cost of production per unit due to increased
production.
6. The incentive schemes prevailing in other areas and industries or similar
business.
7. The effect of incentive scheme on different sets of workers e.g.,
unskilled and skilled workers.
8. The exactitude with which standards of performance can be laid down.

As it is necessary for the introduction of a scheme of incentives.
9. The cost of operating the scheme.
10. The capacity of the market to absorb the increased production because
of the scheme without reducing the selling price.
Question 8
Distinguish between Casual worker and Outworker
Answer
Casual worker and outworker:
A worker who is appointed for a short duration to carry on normal
business activities in place of a regular but temporarily absent worker. Such
a worker is also know as daily wager or badlies. A casual worker do not
enjoy the facilities available to a regular worker.
A worker who do not work in the factory premises but either he works
in his home or at a site outside the factory is know as an outworker. An
outworker who works in a home is usually compensated on the basis of his
output. He is supplied with raw materials and tools necessary for carrying
out the job. An outworker (outside to factory) is usually engaged on
specialized jobs/contract work.
Question 9
Discuss the three methods of calculating labour turnover (Nov.,
2004, 3 marks)
Answer
Methods of Calculating labour turnover
No. of employeesreplaced 100
(i) Replacement method =
Av. number of employeeson roll
No. of employeesseparatedduring the year
(ii) Separation method = 100
Av. number of employeeson the roll during the year
(No. of employees separated + No. of employeesreplaced)

(iii) Flex method = 100
Av. number of employeeson roll during the period
Question 10
Discuss the Gantt task and bonus system as a system of wage payment
and incentives.
(Nov., 2004, 3 marks)
Answer
Gantt Task and Bonus System
This system is a combination of time and piecework system. According
to this system a high standard or task is set and payment is made at time
rate to a worker for production below the set standard.
Wages payable to workers under the plan are calculated as under:
Output Payment
(i) Output below standard Guaranteed time rate
(ii) Output at standard Time rate plus bonus of 20%
(usually) of time rate
(iii) Output over standard High piece rate on workers output.
(It is so fixed so as to include a bonus
of 20% of time rate)
Question 11
Discuss two types of Costs, which are associated with labour turnover
(Nov., 2003, 3 marks)
Answer
Two types of costs associated with labour turnover are:

(i) Preventive costs:
These costs are incurred to keep the labour turnover rate at a low level.
They include costs of accommodation, transport facilities, medical services,
welfare schemes, pension schemes, environment improvement, lighting,
heating, air-conditioning etc. The rate of labour turnover is usually low, if a
company incurs higher preventive costs.
(ii) Replacement costs:
These costs arise due to high labour turnover, e.g. cost of advertising,
recruitment, selection, training & induction, abnormal breakage and scrap,
extra wages & overheads etc., caused as a result of inefficient and
inexperienced newly recruited workers.
Question 12
Discuss the accounting treatment of Idle time and overtime wages.
Answer
Accounting treatment of idle time wages & overtime wages in cost accounts:
Normal idle time is treated as a part of the cost of production. Thus, in
the case of direct workers, an allowance for normal idle time is built into
the labour cost rates. In the case of indirect workers, normal idle time is
spread over all the products or jobs through the process of absorption of
factory overheads.
Under Cost Accounting, the overtime premium is treated as follows:
If overtime is resorted to at the desire of the customer, then the
overtime premium may be charged to the job directly.
If overtime is required to cope with general producti on programme or
for meeting urgent orders, the overtime premium should be treated as
overhead cost of particular department or cost center which works
overtime.
Overtime worked on account of abnormal conditions should be charged
to costing Profit & Loss Account.
If overtime is worked in a department due to the fault of another

department the overtime premium should be charged to the latter
department.
Question 13
Discuss the effect of overtime payment on productivity
(Nov., 2004, 3 marks)
Answer
Effect of overtime payment on productivity: Overtime work should be
resorted to only when it is extremely essential because it involves extra
cost. The overtime payment increases the cost of production in the
following ways:
1. The overtime premium paid is an extra payment in addition to the
normal rate.
2. The efficiency of operators during overtime work may fall and thus
output may be less than normal output.
3. In order to earn more the workers may not concentrate on work during
normal time and thus the output during normal hours may also fall.
4. Reduced output and increased premium of overtime will bring about an
increase cost of production.
Question 14
State the circumstances in which time rate system of wage payment can
be preferred in a factory.
(Nov., 2004, 3 marks)
Answer
Circumstances in which time rate system of wage payment can be
preferred:
In the following circumstances the time rate system of wage payment is
preferred in a factory.
1. Persons whose services cannot be directly or tangibly measured, e.g.,
general helpers, supervisory and clerical staff etc.
2. Workers engaged on highly skilled jobs or rendering skilled services,
e.g., tool making, inspection and testing.
3. Where the pace of output is independent of the operator, e.g.,

automatic chemical plants.
Question 15
Discuss briefly, how will you deal with casual workers and workers
employed on outdoor work in Cost Accounts.
Answer
Causal and outdoor workers
Casual workers (badli workers) are employed temporarily, for a short
duration to cope with sporadic increase in volume of work. If the
permanent labour force is not sufficient to cope effectively with a rush of
work, additional labour (casual workers) are employed to work for a short
duration. Out door worke rs are those workers who do not carry out their
work in the factory premises. Such workers either carry out the assigned
work in their homes (e.g., knitwear, lamp shades) or at a site outside the
factory.
Casual workers are engaged on a dally basis. Wages are paid to them
either at the end of the days work or after a periodic interval. Wages paid
are charged as direct or indirect labour cost depending on their
identifiability with specific jobs, work orders, or department.
Rigid control should be exercised over the out- workers specially with regard
to following:
1. Reconciliation of materials drawn/issued from the store with the
output.
2. Ensuring the completion of output during the stipulated time so as to
meet comfortably the orders and contracts.
Question 16
It should be managements endeavor to increase inventory turnover but
to reduce labour turnover. Expand and illustrate the idea contained in this
statement.
Answer
Inventory turnover: It is a ratio of the value of materials consumed

during a period to the average value of inventory held during the period. A
high inventory turnover indicates fast movement of stock.
Labour turnover: It is defined as an index denoting change in the labour
force for an organization during a specified period. Labour turnover in
excess of normal rate is termed as high and below it as low turnover.
Effects of high inventory turnover and low labour turnover: High
inventory turnover reduces the investment of funds in inventory and thus
accounts for the effective use of the concerns financial resources. It also
accounts for the increase of profitability of a business concern. As against
high labour turnover the low labour turnover is preferred because high
labour turnover causes-decrease in production targets; increase in the
chances of break down of machines at the shopfloor level; increase in the
number of accidents; loss of customers and their brand loyalty due to either
non-supply of the finished goods or due to sub-standard production of
finished goods; increase in the cost of selection, recruitment and training;
increase in the material wastage and tools breakage.
All the above listed effects of high labour turnover accounts for the
increase in the cost of production/process/service. This increase in the cost
finally accounts for the reduction of concerns profitability. Thus, it is
necessary to keep the labour turnover at a low level.
As such, it is correct that management should endeavour to increase
inventory turnover and reduce labour turnover for optimum and best
utilization of available resources and reduce the cost of production and thus
increase the profitability of the organization.
Question 17
What is the impact of Labour Turnover on a manufacturing
organisations working?
(Nov., 1998, 6 marks)
Answer
Labour turnover refers to the rate of change in the composition of
labour force of a concern during a specified period of time. The impact of
labour turnover on a manufacturing organisations working is many fold.
In fact the labour turnover increases the cost of production in the following
ways:
(i) Even flow of production is disturbed.
(ii) Cost of recruitment and training increases.
(iii) Breakage of tools, wastage of materials increases.
(iv) Overall production decreases due to the time lost between the leaving
and recruitment of new workers.
(v) Reduction in sales accounts for loss of contribution and goodwill

consequently.
Question 18
In a unit, 10 men work as a group. When the production for the group
exceeds the standard output of 200 pieces per hour, each man is paid an
incentive for the excess production in addition to his wages at hourly rates.
The incentive is at half the percentage, the excess production over the
standard bears to the standard production, Each man is paid an incentive at
the rate of this percentage of a wage rate of Rs. 2 per hour. There is no
relation between the individual workmans hourly rate and the bonus rate.
In a week, the hours worked are 500 hours and the total production is
1,20,000 pieces.
(a) Compute the total amount of the bonus for the week.
(b) Calculate the total earnings of two workers A and B of the group:-
A worked 44 hours and his basic rate per hour was Rs. 2.20.
B worked 48 hours and his basic rate per hour was Rs. 1.90.
Answer
Actual production during the week
1,20,000 pieces
Standard production during the week of 500 hours,
@ 200 pieces per hour
1,00,000 pieces
Excess production over standard
20,000 pieces
Percentage of the excess production over the

20,000
Standard bears to the standard production = 100= 20%
1,00,000
Incentive is half of 20% i.e. 10%.
The rate of incentive is at 10% over a wage rate of Rs. 2.00 per hour. Thus
the rate of incentive per hour is 0.20P.
(a) Total amount of bonus for the week: 500 hours Re. 0.20 = Rs. 100.
(b) Total Earnings of two workers A & B of the group.
Amount
Rs.
As Wages for 44 hours @ Rs. 2.20 per hour 96.80
Bonus for 44 hours @ Re. 0.20 per hour 8.80
Total Earning of A 105.60
Bs Wages for 48 hours @ Rs. 1.90 per hour 91.20
Bonus for 48 hours @ 0.20 per hour 9.60
Total Earning of B 100.80
Question 19
What are the main features of Halsey and Rowan method of payment of
remuneration? State how Rowan Scheme is better than Halsey Scheme.
Given time allowed of 30 hours for a job and the wage rate of Re. 1.00 per
hour, illustrate your answer by assuming your own figure for time taken to
do the job.
Answer
F.A. Halsey, an American Engineer, brought out his plan in 1891. the
main features of his plan were as follows:
(ii) Time rate is guaranteed.
(iii) Standard time is fixed for the job or operation.
(iv) In case a worker completes the job or operation in less time than
allowed time (or standard time) he is paid a fixed percentage of saving
in time, which is usually 50%.
(v) Under this plan, the employer is benefited to the extent of remaining
50% of time saved.
(vi) Employer is not protected against overspeeding jobs by workers
resulting in waste, damages etc.
Rowan Scheme was introduced by James Rowan in Glasgow in the year
1898. it is similar to Halsey Scheme but the premium concept here is
different. The main features of Rowan Scheme are:
(i) Time rate is guaranteed.
(ii) Bonus is based on time saved.
(iii) Instead of fixed percentage of time saved, bonus is in proportion of
time saved to time allowed.
(iv) Protects employer against loose rate setting.
(v) Employer shares the benefit of increased output.
The Rowan Scheme is better than Halsey Scheme because of the
following reasons:
(i) In Halsey Scheme, bonus is set at 50% of time saved. It does not
serve as a strong incentive. If workers overspeed, the quality of the
products deteriorates.
(ii) In Rowan Scheme, there is an automatic check on the earnings and
thus overspeeding is arrested. In Halsey Scheme if two third of the
time is saved, the worker can double his earning per hour and in
Rowan Scheme, this is not possible.
(iii) The earning per hour in Rowan Scheme is higher upto 50% of time
saved and falls thereafter whereas in Halsey Scheme the earnings
per hour increases at a slow speed and can be doubled.
Consider the following example in which the time allowed for
performing the job is 30 hours and the wage rate is Re. 1.00 per hour. We
will depict with the help of imaginary figures in the following example, how
the earnings per hour under Halsey and Rowan plan will vary.
Example:
Time Time Wage Bonus Total Wages
Earnings/hr
Allowedtaken Halsey Rowan Halsey Rowan Halsey
Rowan

30 30 30 - - 30.00 30.00 1.00 1.00
20 20 5.00 6.67 25.00 26.67 1.25 1.33
15 15 7.50 7.50 22.50 22.50 1.50 1.50
10 10 10.00 6.67 20.00 16.67 2.00 1.67
5 5 12.50 4.17 17.50 9.17 3.50 1.83
Question 20
Explain the meaning of and the reasons for Idle time and discuss its
treatment in cost accounting.
Answer
Idle time refers to the labour time paid for but not utilized on
production. It, in fact, represents the time for which wages are paid, but
during which no output is given out by the workers. This is the period during
which workers remain idle.
Reasons for idle time: According to reasons, idle time can be classified
into normal idle time and abnormal idle time. Normal idle time is the time
which cannot be avoided or reduced in the normal course of business.
The main reasons for the occurrence of normal idle time are as follows:
1. Time taken by workers to travel the distance between the main gate of
factory and the place of their work.
2. Time lost between the finish of one job and starting of next job.
3. Time spent to overcome fatigue.
4. Time spent to meet their personal needs like taking lunch, tea etc.
The main reasons for the occurrence of abnormal idle time are:
1. Due to machine break downs, power failure, non-availability of raw
materials, tools or waiting for jobs due to defective planning.
2. Due to conscious management policy decision to stop work for some
time.
3. In the case of seasonal goods producing units, it may not be possible for
them to produce evenly throughout the year. Such a factor too results
in the generation of abnormal idle time.
Treatment in Cost Accounting: Idle time may be normal or abnormal.

Normal idle time: It is inherent in any job situation and thus it cannot
be eliminated or reduced. For example:- time gap between the finishing of
one job and the starting of another; time lost due to fatigue etc.
The cost of normal idle time should be charged to the cost of
production. This may be done by inflating the labour rate. It may be
transferred to factory overheads for absorption, by adopting a factory
overhead absorption rate.
Abnormal idle time: It is defined as the idle time which arises on
account of abnormal causes; e.g. strikes; lockouts; floods; major breakdown
of machinery; fire etc. Such an idle time is uncontrollable.
The cost of abnormal idle time due to any reason should be charged to
Question 21
Discuss the objectives of time keeping & time booking.
Answer
Objectives of time keeping and time booki ng: Time keeping has the
following two objectives:
(i) Preparation of Payroll: Wage bills are prepared by the payroll
department on the basis of information provided by the time keeping
department.
(ii) Computation of Cost: Labour cost of different jobs, departments or cost
centers are computed by costing department on the basis of
information provided by the time keeping department.
The objectives of time booking are as follows:
(i) To ascertain the labour time spent on the job and the idle labour hours.
(ii) To ascertain labour cost of various jobs and products.
(iii) To calculate the amount of wages and bonus payable under the wage
incentive scheme.
(iv) To compute and determine overhead rates and absorption of overheads
under the labour and machine hour method.
(v) To evaluate the performance of labour by comparing actual time

booked with standard or budgeted time.
Question 22
Distinguish between Job Evaluation and Merit Rating.
Answer
Distinguish between Job Evaluation and Merit Rating
Job evaluation. It can be defined as the process of analysis and
assessment of jobs to ascertain reliably their relative worth and to provide
management with a reasonably sound basis for determining the basic
internal wage and salary structure for the various job positions. In other
words, job evaluation provides a rationale for differential wages and
salaries for different groups of employees and ensures that these
differentials are consistent and equitable.
Merit Rating. It is a systematic evaluation of the personality and
performance of each employee by his supervisor or some other qualified
persons.
Thus the main points of distinction between job evaluation and merit rating
are as follows:
man behind a job. In other words job evaluation rate the jobs while
merit rating rate employees on their jobs.
2. Job evaluation and its accomplishment are means to set up a rational
wage and salary structure whereas merit rating provides scientific basis
for determining fair wages for each worker based on his ability and
performance.
in wage rates. On the other hand merit rating is used to determine fair
Question 23
Calculate the earnings of A and B from the following particulars for a
month and allocate the labour cost to each job X, Y and Z:
A B
(i) Basic Wages Rs. 100 160

(ii) Dearness Allowance 50% 50%
(iii) Contribution to Provident Fund (on basic wages) 8% 8%
(iv) Contribution to Employees State Insurance (on basic wages) 2%
2%
(v) Overtime Hours 10
The Normal working hours for the month are 200. Overtime is paid at
double the total of normal wages and dearness allowance. Employers
contribution to State Insurance and Provident Fund are at equal rates and
employees contributions. The two workers were employed on jobs X, Y and
Z in the following proportions:
Jobs
X Y Z
Workers A 40% 30% 30%
Worker B 50% 20% 30%
Overtime was done on job Y.
Answer
Statement Showing Earnings of Workers A and B
Workers: A B
Rs. Rs.
Basic Wages 100 160
Dearness Allowance
(50% of Basic Wages) 50 50
Overtime Wages 15 -
Gross Wages earned 165 240
Less: - Provident Fund 8% of Basic wages
- ESI 2% of Basic wage 10 16
Net Wages paid 155 224
Statement of Labour Cost: Rs. Rs.

Gross Wages 150 240

(excluding overtime)
Employers Contribution to P.F. and E.S.I. 10 16
Ordinary wages 160 256
Labour Rate per hour 0.80 1.28
(Rs. 160/200) (Rs. 256/200)
Statement Showing allocation of Wages to Jobs

Jobs
Total Wages: X Y Z
Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs.
Worker A:
Ordinary Wages: 160 64 48 48
(4 : 3 :3)
Overtime 15 15
Workers B:
Ordinary Wages: 256 128 51.20 76.8
(5: 2 : 3)
431 192 114.2 124.8
Working Notes:
1. Normal Wages are considered as basic wages
2 (Basic wage + D.A.)
Overtime = 10 hours
200
= 2 (Rs. 150/200) 10 hours = Rs. 15/- .
Question 24
Wage negotiations are going on with the recognized Labour Union and
the Management wants you as the Cost Accountant of the Company to
formulate an incentive scheme with a view to increase productivity.
The case of three typical workers Achyuta, Ananta and Govinda who
produce respectively 180, 120 and 100 units of the companys product in a
normal day of 8 hours is taken up for study.
Assuming that day wages would be guaranteed at 75 paise per hour
and the piece rate would be based on a standard hourly output of 10 units
calculate the earnings of each of the three workers and the labour cost per
100 pieces under (i) Day wages, (ii) Piece rate, (iii) Halsey, scheme and (iv)
The Rowan scheme.
Also calculate under the above schemes the average cost of labour for
the company to produce 100 pieces.
Answer
Calculation of earnings of each of
the three workers and the labour cost per 100 piece under different wage
schemes
(i) Day wages
Name of workers Day wages Actual output Labour cost per
(units) 100 pieces
R s. Rs.
Achyuta 6.00 180 3.33
Ananta 6.00 120 5.00
Govinda 6.00 100 6.00
Total 18.00 400
Average Cost of Labour for the Company to produce 100 pieces
Total wages paid Rs. 18

= 100 = 100 = Rs.4. 50
Total output 400
(ii) Piece rate
Name of workers Actual Piece Wages Labour cost per
Output rate earned 100 pieces
(units) Rs. Rs. Rs.
Achyuta 180 0.075 13.50 7.50
Ananta 120 0.075 9.00 7.50
Govinda 100 0.075 7.50 7.50
Total 400 30.00
Average Cost of Labour for the Company

Rs. 30
to produce100 pieces = 100 = Rs. 7.50
400
(iii) Halsey Scheme

Name of Actual Std . Time Actual Time Bonus Total Labour
Workers output for actual time saved Hrs. Wages cost per
(units) output for Hrs. (50% of inclu- 100
Hrs. actual time ding pieces
Output saved) Bonus*
Hrs. Hrs. Rs. Rs.
Achyuta 180 18 8 10 5 9.75 5.42
Ananta 120 12 8 4 2 7.50 6.25
Govinda 100 10 8 2 1 6.75 6.75
24.00
Average cost of labour for the
Company to produce 100 pieces = (Rs. 24/400) 100 = Rs. 6.00
*Total wages = (Actual hours worked + Bouus hours) Rate per hour
Hence total wages of Achyuta are : (8 + 5) Rs. 0.75 = Rs. 9.75
Similarly, the total wages of Ananta and Govinda are Rs. 7.50 and Rs. 6.75
respectively.
(iv) Rowan Scheme
Name Actual Std. Actual Time Bonus* Wages Bonus Total Labour
of output Time time saved hours for @ earning cost
workers (units) for taken (hours) actual 0.75 per
actual in hrs. @ per 100
output hours 0.75 P. Bonus pieces
(hours) per hour
hour
Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) 7+8=(9) (10)
Achyuta 180 18 8 10 4.44 6.00 3.33 9.33 5.18
Ananta 120 12 8 4 2.67 6.00 2.00 8.00 6.67
Govinda 100 10 8 2 1.6 6.00 1.20 7.20 7.20
24.53
Average Cost of labour to the Company for 100 pieces =

Rs.24.53
100 = Rs.6.13
400
Timesaved
* Bonushours = Timetaken
Standard time
8 hours 10hours
Bonus hoursof Achyuta= = 4. 44
18 hours
Similarly, bonus hours of Ananta and Govinda are 2.67 hours and 1.6 hours
respectively.
Question 25
(a) Bonus paid under the Halsey Plan with Bonus at 50% for the time saved
equals the bonus paid under the Rowan System. When will this
statement hold good? (Your answer should contain the proof).
(b) The time allowed for a job is 8 hours. The hourly rate is Rs. 8. Prepare a
statement showing:
(i) The bonus earned
(ii) The total earnings of labour and
(iii) Hourly earnings.
Under the Halsey System with 50% bonus for time saved and Rowan
System for each hour saved progressively.
Answer
(a) Bonus under Halsey Plan
50
= Standard wage rate Time saved .. (i)
100
Bonus under Rowan Plan
Time saved
= Standard wage rate Time taken . (ii)
Time allowed
Bonus under Halsey Plan will be equal to the
Bonus under Rowan Plan when the following condition holds good
50
Standard wage rate x Timesaved
100
Timesaved
= S tan dard wagerate xTimetaken
Timeallowed
1 Timetaken
or =
2 Timeallowed
1
or Time taken = of Time allowed
2
Hence, when the time taken is 50% of the time allowed the bonus under
Halsey and Rowan Plans is equal.
(b) Statement of Bonus, Total earnings of Labour and hourly earnings under
Halsey and Rowan Systems
Time Time Time Basic Bonus Bonus Total Total Hourly
allowed taken saved Wages under under earnings earnings earnings earning
B Rs. Halsey Rowan under under under
8 system System Halsey Rowan Halsey Rowa
50 C System System System System
C Rs.8 B Rs.8
100 A
D+E D+F G/B
B C=(A- D E F G H I
hours hours B) Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs.
hours
8 8 - 64 - - 64 64 8.00
8 7 1 56 4 7 60 63 8.57
8 6 2 48 8 12 56 60 9.33
8 5 3 40 12 15 52 55 10.40
8 4 4 32 16 16 48 48 12.00
8 3 5 24 20 15 44 39 14.67
8 2 6 16 24 12 40 28 20.00
8 1 7 8 28 7 36 15 36.00
Question 26
Mr. A is working by employing 10 skilled workers. He is considering the
introduction of some incentive scheme either Halsey Scheme (with 50%
bonus) or Rowan Scheme of wage payment for increasing the labour
productivity to cope with the increased demand for the product by 25%. He
feels that if the proposed incentive scheme could bring about an average
20% increase over the present earnings of the workers, it could act as
sufficient incentive for them to produce more and he has accordingly given
this assurance to the workers.
As a result of the assurance, the increase in productivity has been
observed as revealed by the following figures for the current month:
Hourly rate of wages (guaranteed) Rs. 2.00
Average time for producing 1 piece by one workers at the previous
performance 2 hours
(This may be taken as time allowed)
No. of working days in the month 25
No. of working hours per day for each worker 8
Actual production during the month 1,250 units
Required:
1. Calculate effective rate of earnings per hour under Halsey Scheme and
Rowan Scheme.
2. Calculate the savings to Mr. A in terms of direct labour cost per piece
under the schemes.
3. Advise Mr. A about the selection of the scheme to fulfill his assurance.
Answer
Working Notes:
1. Total time wages of 10 workers per month:
= No. of working days in the month No. of working hours per day of
each
worker Hourly rate of wages No. of workers Rs. 4,000
= 25 days 8 hrs. Rs. 2 10 workers
2. Time saved per month:
Time allowed per piece by a worker 2 hours
No. of units produced during the month by 10 workers 1,250 pieces
Total time allowed to produce 1,250 pieces:
(1,250 2 hours) 2,500 hours
Actual time taken to produce 1,250 pieces: 2,000 hours

Time saved (2,500 hours 2,000 hours) 500 hours
3. Bonus under Halsey scheme to be paid to 10 workers:

Bonus = (50% of time saved) hourly rate of wages
50
= x 500 hours x Rs.2 = Rs. 500
100
Total wages to be paid to 10 workers are (Rs. 4,000 + Rs. 500) Rs. 4,500,
if Mr. A considers the introduction of Halsey Incentive Scheme to increase
the labour productivity.
3. Bonus under Rowan Scheme to be paid to 10 workers:
Timesaved
Bonus = xTimewages
Totaltime allowed
500 hours
= x Rs. 4,000 = Rs.800
2,500 hours
Total wages to be paid to 10 workers are (Rs. 4,000 + Rs. 800) Rs. 4,800,
if Mr. A considers the introduction of Rowan Incentive Scheme to increase
the labour productivity.
1. (i) Effective hourly rate of earnings under Halsey scheme:
(Refer to Working Notes 1, 2 and 3)
Total time wages of 10 wor ker s + Total bonus under Halsey scheme
=
Total hours worked
Rs.4,000 + Rs.500
= = Rs. 2.25
2,000 hours
(ii) Effective hourly rate of earnings under Rowan scheme:

(Refer to Working Notes 1, 2 and 4)
Total time wages of 10 wor ker s + Total honus under Rowan scheme
=
Total hours worked
Rs. 4,000 + Rs. 800
= = Rs. 2. 40
2,000 hours
2. (i) Saving in terms of direct labour cost per piece under Halsey scheme:

Labour cost per piece (under time wage scheme) = 2 hours Rs. 2 =
Rs. 4
Labour cost per piece (under Halsey scheme)
Total wages paid under the scheme
=
Total number of units produced
Rs. 4,500
= = Rs. 3. 60
1,250
Saving per piece : (Rs. 4 Rs. 3.60) = Rs. 0.40.
(ii) Saving in terms of direct labour cost per piece under Rowan scheme:
Rs. 4,800
Labour cost per piece under Rowan scheme = = Rs. 3.84
1,250
Saving per piece = Rs. 4 Rs. 3.84 = Rs. 0.16.
3. From the labour cost per piece under Halsey scheme (Rs. 3.60) and
Rowan scheme (Rs. 3.84), it is quite clear that Halsey scheme brings
about more saving than Rowan scheme to the concern. But Halsey
scheme does not fulfils the assurance given to the workers about 20%
increase in their earnings as it secures only 12.5% 500 100 increase.
4,000

On the other hand, Rowan scheme secures 20% 800
4,000 100

increase in the earnings and it fulfils the assurance. Therefore, Rowan
scheme may be adopted.
Question 27
A factory having the latest sophisticated machines wants to introduce
an incentive scheme for its workers, keeping in view the following:
(i) The entire gains of improved production should not go to the workers.
(ii) In the name of speed, quality should not suffer.
(iii) The rate setting department being newly established are liable to
commit mistakes.
You are required to devise a suitable incentive scheme and demonstrate

by an illustrative numerical example how your scheme answers to all the
requirements of the management.
Answer
Rowan scheme of premium bonus (variable sharing plan) is a suitable
incentive scheme for the workers of the factory. If this scheme is adopted,
the entire gains due to time saved by a worker will not pass to him.
Another feature of this scheme is that a worker cannot increase his
earnings or bonus by merely increasing its work speed. The reason for this is
that the bonus under Rowan Scheme is maximum when the time taken by a
worker on a job is half of the time allowed. As this fact is known to the
workers, therefore they work at such a speed which helps them to maintain
the quality of output too.
Lastly, Rowan System provides a safeguard in case of any loose fixation
of the standards by the rate setting department. It may be observed from
the following illustration that in the Rowan Scheme the bonus paid will be
low due to any loose fixation of standards. Workers cannot take undue
advantage of such a situation. The above three features of Rowan Plan can
be discussed with the help of the following illustration:
Illustration
(i) Time allowed = 4 hours
Time taken = 3 hours
Time Saved = 1 hour
Rate = Rs. 5 per hour.
Time taken
Bonus = Time saved Rate
Time allowed
3 hours
= 1 hour Rs. 5 = Rs. 3.75
4 hours
In the above illustration time saved is 1 hour and therefore total gain is
Rs. 5. Out of Rs. 5/- according to Rowan Plain only Rs. 3.75 is given to the
worker in the form of bonus. In other words a worker is entitled for 75
percent of the time saved in the form of bonus.
(ii) The figures of bonus in the above illustration when the time taken is 2
hours and 1 hours
respectively are as below:

Time taken
Bonus = Time saved Rate
Time allowed
2 hours
= 2 hours Rs. 5 = Rs. 5
4 hours
1 hour
Bonus = 3 hours Rs. 5 = Rs. 3.75
4 hours
The above figures of bonus clearly shows that when time taken is half of the
time allowed, the bonus is maximum. When the time is reduced from 2 to 4
hours, the bonus figures fell by Rs.1.25. Hence, it is quite apparent to
workers that it is of no use to increase speed of work. This features of
Rowan Plan thus protects the quality of output.
(iii) If the rate setting department erroneously sets the time allowed as 10
hours instead of 4 hours, in the above illustration, then the bonus paid
will be as follows:
3 hours
Bonus = 7 hours Rs. 5 = Rs. 10.5
10 hours
The bonus paid for saving 7 hours thus is Rs. 10.50 which is
approximately equal to the wages of 2 hours. In other words the bonus paid
to the workers is low. Hence workers cannot take undue advantage of any
mistake committed by the rate setting department of the concern.
Question 28
The cost accountant of Y Ltd. has computed labour turnover rates for
the quarter ended 31 st March, 1997 as 10%, 5% and 3% respectively under
Flux method, Replacement method and Separation method. If the number
of workers replaced during that quarter is 30, find out the number of (1)
workers recruited and joined and (2) workers left and discharged.
Answer
Working Note:
Average number of workers on roll:
Labour turnover rate (under Replacement method)

No. of replacements
= 100
Average number of worker s on roll
5
Or = =
10
30
Averagenumber of workers on roll
30 100
Average number of workers on roll = = 600
5
(1) Number of workers recruited and joined:
Labour turnover rate (Flux method)=
No. of separations (S) + No. of accessions(A)
100
A v .number of workers on roll
10 18 + A
Or =
100 600
6000
Or A = 18 = 42
100
No. of workers recruited and joined 42.
(2) Number of workers left and discharged:
No. of separations (S)
Labour turnover rate (Separation method) =
Av. number of worker s on roll
100
3 S
=
100 600
Or S = 18
Hence, number of workers left and discharged comes to 18.
Question 29
Distinguish between Job Evaluation and Merit Rating.
(Nov., 1999, 4 marks)
Answer
Job evaluation: It can be defined as the process of analysis and
assessment of jobs to ascertain reliably their relative worth and to provide
management with a reasonably sound basis for determining the basic
internal wage and salary structure for the various job positions. In other
words, job evaluation provides a rationale for differential wages and
salaries for different groups of employees and ensures that these
differentials are consistent and equitable.
Merit rating: It is a systematic evaluation of the personality and
performance of each employee by his supervisor or some other qualified
person.
The main points of distinction between job evaluation and merit rating
are as follows:
man behind a job. In other words, job evaluation rate the jobs while
merit rating rate employees on these jobs.
2. Job evaluation and its accomplishment are means to set up a rational
wage and salary structure whereas merit rating provides scientific basis
for determining fair wages for each worker based on his ability and
performance.
Question 30
What do you mean by time and motions study? Why is it so important
to management?
Answer
Time and motions study: It is the study of time taken and motions
(movements) performed by workers while performing their jobs at the place
of their work. Time and motion study has played a significant role in
controlling and reducing labour cost.
Time Study is concerned wi th the determination of standard time

required by a person of average ability to perform a job. Motion study, on
the other hand, is concerned with determining the proper method of
performing a job so that there are no wasteful movements, hiring the
worker unnecessarily. However, both the studies are conducted
simultaneously. Since materials, tools, equipment and general arrangement
of work, all have vital bearing on the method and time required for its
completion. Therefore, their study would be incomplete and would not
yield its full benefit without a proper consideration of these factors.
Time and motion study is important to management because of the

following features:
1. Improved methods, layout, and design of work ensures effective use of
men, material and resources.
2. Unnecessary and wasteful methods are pin- pointed with a view to
either improving them or eliminating them altogether. This leads to
reduction in the work content of an operation, economy in human
efforts and reduction of fatigue.
3. Highest possible level of efficiency is achieved in all respect.
4. Provides information for setting labour standards - a step towards
labour cost control and cost reduction.
5. Useful for fixing wage rates and introducing effective incentive scheme.
Question 31
What is overtime premium? Explain the treatment of overtime premium
in cost accounting. Suggest steps for controlling overtime.
(Nov., 1995, 8 marks)
Answer
Overtime premium: Overtime is the amount of wages paid for working
beyond normal working hours as specified by Factories Act or by a mutual
agreement between the workers union and the management. According to
Factories Act of 1948, a worker is entitled for overtime at double the rate of
his wages (including allowances) if he works beyond 9 hours in a day or 48
hours in a week, even where the Act is not applicable, the practice is to pay
for overtime work at higher rates usually in accordance with a standing
agreement between the employer and the workers. Hence, payment of

overtime consists of two elements, the normal wages e.g., the usual
amount, and the extra payment i.e., the premium. This amount of extra
payment paid to a worker under overtime is known as overtime premium.
Treatment of Overtime premium is Cost Accounting
In cost accounting the treatment of overtime premium will be as
follows:
(i) If the overtime is resorted to at the desire of the customer, then the
entire amount of overtime including overtime premium should be
charged to the job directly.
(ii) If it is due to a general pressure of work to increase the output, the
premium as well as overtime wages may be charged to general
overheads.
(iii) If it is due to the negligence or delay of workers of a particular
department, it may be charged to the concerned department.
(iv) If it is due to circumstances beyond control, it may be charged to
Steps for Controlling Overtime:
Important steps for controlling overtime work are as follows:
(i) Entire overtime work should be duly authorized after investigating the
reasons for it.
(ii) Overtime cost should be shown against the concerned department.
Such a practice should enable proper investigation and planning of
production in future.
(iii) If overtime is a regular feature, the necessity for recruiting more men
and adding a shift should be considered.
(iv) If overtime is due to lack of plant and machinery or other resources,
steps may be taken to install more machines, or to resort to sub-
contracting.
(v) If possible an upper limit may be fixed for each category of workers in
respect of overtime.
Question 32

(Nov., 1996, 4 marks)
Answer
Job evaluation and merit rating:
The main points of distinction between job evaluation and merit rating are
as follows:
1. Job evaluation is the ascertainment of the relative worth of jobs within
a company and merit rating is the assessment of the relative worth of
the man behind a job. In other words, merit rating rates employees on
their job while job evaluation rates the jobs.
2. Job evaluation and its accomplishments are mea nt to set up a rational
wage and salary structure whereas merit rating provides a scientific
basis for determining fair wages for each worker based on his ability
and performance.
3. Job evaluation simplifies wage administration by brining a uniformity in
wage rates. On the other hand, merit rating is used to determine fair
Question 33
Discuss the treatment of overtime premium in Cost accounting. (Nov.
2004, 3 marks)
Answer
Treatment of Ove rtime Premium in Cost Accounting
If overtime is resorted to at the desire of the customer, then overtime
premium may be charged to the job directly.
If overtime is required to cope with general production programme or
for meeting urgent orders, the overtime premium should be treated as
overhead cost of the particular department or cost center, which works
overtime.
If overtime is worked in a department, due to the fault of another
department, the overtime premium should be charged to the latter
department.
Overtime worked on account of abnormal conditions such as flood,

earthquake etc., should not be charged to cost but to costing P/L A/c.
Question 34
ZED Limited is working by employing 50 skilled workers it is considered
the introduction of incentive scheme-either Halsey scheme (with 50% bonus)
or Rowan scheme of wage payment for increasing the labour productivity to
cope up the increasing demand for the product by 40%. It is believed that
proposed incentive scheme could bring about an average 20% increase over
the present earnings of the workers; it could act as sufficient incentive for
them to produce more.
Because of assurance, the increase in productivity has been observed as
revealed by the figures for the month of April, 2004.
Hourly rate of wages (guaranteed) Rs. 30
Average time for producing one unit by one worker at the previous 1.975
hours
Performance (This may be taken as time allowed)
Number of working days in the month 24
Number of working hours per day of each worker 8
Actual production during the month 6,120 units
Required:
(i) Calculate the effective rate of earnings under the Halsey scheme and
the Rowan scheme.
(ii) Calculate the savings to the ZED Limited in terms of direct labour cost
per piece.
(iii) Advise ZED Limited about the selection of the scheme to fulfill their
assurance.
Answer
Working notes:
1. Computation of time saved (in hours) per month:
= (Standard production time of 6,120 units Actual time taken by the
workers)
= (6,120 units 1.975 hours 24 days 8 hrs per day 50 skilled

workers)
= (12,087 hours 9,600 hours)
= 2,487 hours
2. Computation of bonus for time saved hours under Halsey and Rowan
schemes:
Time saved hours = 2,487 hours
Wage rate per hour = Rs. 30
Bonus under Halsey Scheme = 2,487 hours Rs. 30
(With 50% bonus) = Rs. 37,305
Time saved
Bonus under Rowan Scheme = Time taken Rate per hour
Time allowed
2, 487 hours
= 9,600 hours Rs.30
12,087
= Rs. 59,258.38 P.
(i) Computation of effective rate of earnings under the Halsey and Rowan
schemes:
Total earnings (under Halsey scheme)= Time wages + Bonus
= 24 days 8
hours + 50 skilled
workers Rs.
30+ Rs. 37,305
= Rs. 2,88,000 +
Rs. 37,305 = Rs. 3,25,305
Total earnings (under Rowan scheme) = Time wages + Bonus
= Rs. 2,88,000 +
Rs. 59,258.38
= Rs.
3,47,258.38
Effective rate of earnings per hour (under Halsey Plan = Rs.
33.89
(Rs. 3,25,305/9,600 hrs)
Effective rate of earnings per hour (under Rowan Plan = Rs.
36.17
(Rs. 3,47,258.38/9,600 hrs)
(ii) Savings to the ZED Ltd., in terms of direct labour cost per piece:
Rs.
Direct labour cost (per unit) under time wages system 59.25
(1,975 time per unit Rs. 30)
Direct labour cost (per unit) under Halsey Plan 53.15
(Rs. 3,25,305 / 6,120 units)
Direct labour cost (per unit) under Rowan Plan 56.74
(Rs. 3,47,258.38/6,120 units)
Saving of direct labour cost under:
* Halsey Plan
Rs. 6.10
(Rs. 59.25 53.15)
* Rowan Plan
Rs. 2.51
(Rs. 59.25-56.74)
(iv) Advise to ZED Ltd: (about the selection of the scheme to fulfill
assurance)
Halsey scheme brings more savings to the management of ZED Ltd.,
over the present earnings of Rs. 2,88,000 but the other scheme viz Rowan
fulfils the promise of 20% increase over the present earnings of Rs. 2,88,000
by paying 20.58% in the form of bonus. Hence Rowan Plan may be adopted.
Question 35
A Company is undecided as to what kind of wage scheme should be

introduced. The following particulars have been compiled in respect of three
systems, which are under consideration of the management.
Workers
Actual hours worked in a week 38 40 34
Hourly rate of wages Rs. 6 Rs. 5 Rs. 7.20
Production in units
Product P 21 - 60
Product Q 36 - 135
Product R 46 25 -
Standard time allowed per unit of each product is:
P Q R
Minutes 12 18 30
For the purpose of piece rate, each minute is valued at Rs. 0.10
You are required to calculate the wages of each worker under:
(i) Guaranteed hourly rates basis
(ii) Piece work earnings basis, but guaranteed at 75% of basic pay
(guaranteed hourly rate) if his earnings are less than 50% of basic pay.
(iii) Premium bonus basis where the worker receives bonus based on Rowan
schem e.
(Nov., 2002, 9 marks)
Answer
(i) Computation of wages of each worker under guaranteed hourly rate basis
Workers Actual hours Hourly rate of Wages
worked in a week wages Rs. Rs.
(a) (b) (c) (d) = (b) (c)
A 38 6.00 228.00
B 40 5.00 200.00
C 34 7.20 244.80
(ii) Computation of wages of each worker under piece work earnings basis
Worker A Worker B Worker C
Product Piece rate Units Wages Units Wages Units Wages
per unit
(Refer to working note 1) Rs. Rs.
Rs.
(a) (b) (c) (d) = (b) (c) (e) (f) = (b) (e) (g) (h) = (b)
(g)
P 1.20 21 25.20 - - 60 72
Q 1.80 36 64.80 - - 135 243
R 3.00 46 138.00 25 75 - -
Since each worker has been guaranteed at 75% of basic pay, if his
earnings are less than 50% of basic pay, therefore, workers A and C will be
paid the wages as computed viz., Rs. 228 and Rs. 315 respectively. The
computed wage of worker B is Rs. 75 which is less than 50% of basic pay
viz., Rs. 100 therefore he would be paid 75% Rs. 200 or s. 150.
Working Notes:
1. Piece rate / per unit
Product Standard time Piece rate each Piece rate per
per unit in minute Rs. unit Rs.
minutes
(a) (b) (c) (d) = (b) c
P 12 0.10 1.20
Q 18 0.10 1.80
R 30 0.10 3.00
2. Time allowed to each worker

Worker A = 21 units 12 minutes + 36 units 18 minutes+46 units
30 minutes
= 2,280 minutes = 38 hours
Worker B = 25 units 30 minutes = 750 minutes = 12.5 hours
Worker C = 60 units 12 minutes + 135 units 18 minutes
= 720 minutes + 2.430 minutes = 3,150 minutes = 52.50 hours
(iv) Computation of wages of each worker under Premium bonus basis
(where each worker receives bonus based on Rowan Scheme)
Workers Time Time Time Wage Earnings Bonus Total
allowed taken saved rate/hour of
hours hours hours earning
(Refer Rs. Rs. &
to W. Rs. bonus
Note 2) Rs.
A 38.00 38.00 - 6.00 228.00 - 228.00
B 12.50 40.00 - 5.00 200.00 - 200.00
C 52.50 34.00 18.50 7.20 244.80 86.26 331.06
Question 36
What do you understand by labour turnover? How is it measured?
(May, 2003, 1+4 marks)
Answer
Labour turnover in an organization is the rate of change in the
composition of labour force during a specified period measured against a
suitable index. The standard of usual labour turnover in the industry or
labour turnover rate for a past period may be taken as the index or norm
against which actual turnover rate should be compared.
The methods for measuring labour turnover are:

Number of employeesreplaced during the year
Replacement method = 100
Average number of employeeson roll during the year
Number of employeesseparated during the year

Separation method 100
Average number of employeeson roll during the year
No. of employees replaced + No. of employees separated

Flux method = during the year during the year 100

Averagenumber of employees on roll during the year
Question 37
A skilled worker in XYZ Ltd. Is paid a guaranteed wage rate of Rs. 30 per
hour. The standard time per unit for a particular product is 4 hours. P, a
machineman, has been paid wages under the Rowan Incentive Plan and he
had earned an effective hourly rate of Rs. 37.50 on the manufacture of
that particular product.
What could have been his total earnings and effective hourly rate, had
he been put on Halsey Incentive Scheme (50%)?
(Nov., 1999, 5 marks)
Answer
Working note:
Let T hours be the total time worked in hours by the skilled worker
(machineman P); Rs 30/- is the rate per hour; standard time is 4 hours per
unit and effective hourly earning rate is Rs. 37.50 then
Earning = Hours worked Rate per hour + Time saved Time taken Rate per hour
Time allowed
(Under Rowan incentive plan)
(4 - T)
Rs. 37.5 T = T Rs. 30 + T Rs. 30 = Rs.105
4
Rs. 37.5 = Rs. 30 + (4 T) Rs. 7.5

Or Rs. 7.5 T = Rs. 22.5
Or T = 3 hours
Total earnings and effective hourly rate of skilled worker (machineman P)
under Halsey Incentive Scheme (50%)
Total earnings = Hours worked Rate per hour + Time saved Rate per
hour
(under 50% Halsey Incentive Scheme)
= 3 hours Rs. 30 + 1 hour Rs. 30
Total earnings Rs. 105
Effective hourly rate = = = Rs.35 /
Hours taken 3 hours
Question 38
A worker produced 200 units in a weeks time. The guaranteed weekly
wage payment for 45 hours is Rs. 81. The expected time to produce one unit
is 15 minutes which is raised further by 20% under the incentive scheme.
What will be the earnings per hour of that worker under Halsey (50%
sharing) and Rowan bonus schemes?
(May, 1995, 6 Marks)
Answer
Earning per hour under Halsey (50% sharing) Bonus Scheme
200 units 18 minutes
Time allowed for actual weekly production =
60 minutes
(Refer to Working Note 1) = 60 hours
Time saved = Time allowed - Actual time taken
= 60 hours 45 hours = 15 hours
Earning = (Hours worked Rate per hour) + (Time saved)
Rate per hour
= 45 hours Rs. 1.80 + 15 hour Rs. 1.80
= Rs. 81 + Rs. 13.50 = Rs. 94.50
Rs. 94.50
Earnings (per hour) = =Rs. 2.10 per hour
45 hours
Earnings per hour under Rowan Bonus Scheme
Time saved
Earnings = Hours worked Rate per hour + Time taken Rate per hr
Time allowed
15 hours
= 45 hours Rs. 1.80 + 45 hours Rs. 1.80
60 hours
Rs. 101.25
Earning per hour = = Rs. 2.25 per hour
45 hour
Working Notes:
1. Expected time to produce one unit under incentive scheme = 15 120
minutes
= 18 minutes
2. Wage rate per hour (Rs. 81/45 hours) = Rs. 1.80
Question 39
From the following information, calculate Labour turnover rate and
Labour flux rate:
No. of workers as on 0.01.2000 = 7, 600
No. of workers as on 31.12.2000 = 8,400

During the year, 80 workers left while 320 workers were discharged
1,500 workers were recruited during the year of these, 300 workers were
recruited because of exits and the rest were recruited in accordance with
expansion plans. (May ,2001, 4 marks)
Answer
Labour turnover rate:
It comprises of computation of labour turnover by using following
methods:
(i) Separation Method:
No. of wor ker s left + No. of wor ker s disch arged
= 100
Average number of wor ker s
(80 + 320)
= x100
( 7,600 + 8,400) 2
400
= x100 =5%
8,000
(ii) Replacement Method:
No. of wor ker s replaced
= x100
Average number of wor ker s
300
= x100 = 3.75%
8000
(iii) New Recruitment:

No. of workers newly recruited
= 100
Average number of workers
1,200
= 100 = 15%
8,000
(iv) Flux Method:
No. of separations + No. of accessions
= 100
Average number of workers
(400 +1500)
= 100
(7,600 + 8,400) 2
1,900
= 100 = 23.75%
8,000
Question 40
Discuss the two types of cost associated with labour turnover.
(Nov., 1999, 4 marks)
Answer
Types of cost associated with labour turnover
Two types of costs which are associated with labour turnover are:
(i) Preventive costs: These includes costs incurred to keep the labour
turnover at a low level i.e., cost of medical schemes. If a company
incurs high preventive costs, the rate of labour turnover is usually low.
(ii) Replacement costs: These are the costs which arise due to high labour
turnover. If men leave soon after they acquire the necessary training
and experience of work, additional costs will have to be incurred on
new workers, i.e., cost of advertising, recruitment, selection, training
and induction, extra cost also incurred due to abnormal breakage of
tools and machines, defectives, low output, accidents etc., caused due
to the inefficiency and inexperienced new workers.
It is obvious that a company will incur very high replacement costs if
the rate of labour turnover is high. Similarly, only adequate preventive
costs can keep labour turnover at a low level. Each company must,
therefore, workout the optimum level of labour turnover keeping in
view its personnel policies and the behaviour of replacement costs and
preventive costs at various levels of labour turnover rates.
Question 41
Write short note on Labour Turnover.
(May ,1996, 4 marks)
Answer
Labour Turnover: It is the rate of change in the labour force during a
specified period measured against a suitable index. The standard or usual
labour turnover in the industry or locally or the labour turnover rate for a
past period may be taken as the index or norm against which actual
turnover rate is compared. The methods of calculating labour turnover.
No. of employees replaced
Labour Turnover =
Average number of employees on roll
Or
Number of employees separated during a year
=
Average number of employees on rolls during the year
No. of employees separated + No. of employees replaced
=
Average number of employees on rolls during the period
Causes of labour turnover: The main causes of labour turnover in an
organization/industry can be broadly classified under the following three
heads:
(a) Personal Causes.
(b) Unavoidable Causes, and
Personal causes are those which induce or compel workers to leave
their jobs such causes includes the following:
(i) Change of jobs for betterment.
(ii) Premature retirement due to ill health or old age.
(iii) Domestic problems and family responsibilities.
(iv) Discontentment over the jobs and working environment.
In all the above causes the employee leaves the organization at his will
and, therefore, it is difficult to suggest any possible remedy in the first three
cases. But the last one can be overcome by creating conditions leading to a
healthy working environment. For this, officers should play a positive role
and make sure that their subordinates work under healthy working
environment.
Unavoidable causes are those under which it becomes obligatory on the
part of management to ask some or more of their employees to leave the
organization, such causes are summed up as listed below:
(i) Seasonal nature of the business;
(ii) Shortage of raw material, power, slack market for the product etc;
(iii) Change in the plant location;
(iv) Disability, making a worker unfit for work;

(v) Disciplinary measures;
(vi) Marriage (generally in the case of women).
Avoidable causes are those which require the attention of management
on a continuous basis so as to keep the labour turnover ratio as low as
possible. The main causes under this case are indicated below:
(1) Dissatisfaction with job, remuneration, hours of work, working
conditions, etc.
(2) Strained relationship with management, supervisors or fellow workers;
(3) Lack of training facilities and promotional avenues.
(4) Lack of recreational and medical facilities;
(5) Low wages and allowances.
Proper and timely management action can reduce the labour turnover
appreciably so far as avoidable causes are concerned.
Effects: The effect of labour turnover on cost of production is that high
labour turnover increases the cost of production in the following ways:
(i) Even flow of production is disturbed;
(ii) Efficiency of new workers is low, productivity of new but in experienced
workers is low in the beginning.
(iii) There is increased cost of training and induction;
(iv) New workers cause increased breakage of tools, wastage of materials
etc.
In some companies, the labour turnover rate is as high as 100%; it
means that on the average, all the work is being done by new and
inexperienced workers. This is bound to lower efficiency and production
and increase the cost of production.
Remedial steps to minimize labour turnover:
The following steps are useful for minimizing labour turnover.
1. Exist Interview: An interview may be arranged with each outgoing
employee to ascertain the reasons of his leaving the organization.
2. Job analysis and evaluation: Before recruiting workers, job analysis and
evaluation may be carried out to ascertain the requirements of each
job.
3. Scientific system of recruitment, placement and promotion: The
organization should make use of a scientific system of recruitment
selection, placement and promotion for employees.
4. Enlightened attitude of management: The management should
introduce the following steps for creating a healthy working
atmosphere.
(i) Service rules should be framed, discussed and approved among
management and workers, before their implementation.
(ii) Provide facilities for education and training of workers.
(iii) Introduce a procedure for settling workers grievance.
5. Use of Committee: Issues like control over workers handling their
grievances etc., may be dealt by a committee, comprising of members
from management and workers.
Question 42
A job can be executed either through workman A or B. A takes 32 hours
to complete the job while B finishes it in 30 hours. The standard time to
finish the job is 40 hours.
The hourly wage rate is same for both the workers. In addition
workman A is entitled to receive bonus according to Halsey plan (50%)
sharing while B is paid bonus as per Rowan plan. The works overheads are
absorbed on the job at Rs. 7.50 per labour hour worked. The factory cost of
the job comes to Rs, 2,600 irrespective of the workman engaged.
Find out the hourly wage rate and cost of raw materials input. Also
show cost against each element of cost included in factory cost.
(Nov., 1997,10 marks)
Answer
Working notes:
1. Time saved and wages:
Workmen A B
Standard time (hrs.) 40 40
Actual time taken (hrs.) 32 30

Time saved (hrs.) 08 10
Wages paid @ Rs. x per hr. (Rs.)32x 30x
2. Bonus Plan:
Halsey Rowan
Time saved (hrs.) 8 10
Bonus (Rs.) 4x 7.5x
8 hrs Rs. x 10 hrs
30hrs Rs. x
2 40 hrs
3. Total wages:
Workman A: 32x + 4x = Rs. 36x
Workman B: 30x + 7,5x = Rs. 37.5x
Statement of factory cost of the job
Workmen A B
Rs. Rs.
Material cost y y
Wages 36x 37.5x
Works overhead 240 225
Factory cost 2,600 2,600
The above relations can be written as follows:
36x + y + 240 = 2,600 . (i)
37.5x+ y+ 225 = 2,600 ..(ii)
Subtracting (i) from (ii) we get
1.5x 15 = 0
or 1.5 x = 15
or x = Rs. 10 per hour
On substituting the value of x in (i) we get y = Rs. 2,000
Hence the wage rate per hour is Rs. 10 and the cost of raw material
input is Rs. 2,000 on the job.
Question 43
The management of Sunshine Ltd. wants to have an idea of the profit
lost/foregone as a result of labour turnover last year.
Last year sales accounted to Rs. 66,000,000 and the P/V Ratio was 20%.
The total number of actual hours worked by the direct labour force was 3.45
lakhs. As a result of the delays by the Personnel Department in filling
vacancies due to labour turnover, 75,000 potential productive hours were
lost. The actual direct labour hours included 30,000 hours attributable to
training new recruits, out of which half of the hours were unproductive. The
costs incurred consequent on labour turnover reveled on analysis the
following:
Rs.
Settlement cost due to leaving 27,420
Recruitment costs 18,725
Selection costs
12,750
Training costs
16,105
Assuming that the potential production lost due to labour turnover
could have been sold at prevailing prices, ascertain the profit foregone/lost
last year on account of labour turnover.
Answer
Working notes:
1. Actual productive hours 3,30,000
(Actual hours worked Unproductive training hours)
(3,45,000 hrs. 15,000 hrs.)
2. Sales per productive hour (Rs.) 20
(Total Sales/Actual productive hours)
(Rs. 66,00,000/3,30,000 hrs.)
3. Potential productive hours lost 75,000

4. Sales foregone (Rs.) 15,00,000
(75,000 hours Rs. 20)
5. Contribution foregone (Rs.) 3,00,000
P/V ratio Sales foregone)
(20% Rs. 15,00,000)
Statement of Profit foregone
as a result of labour turnover of M/s. Sunshine Ltd.
Rs.
Contribution foregone 3,00,000
Selection costs 12,750
Training costs 16,105
Total profit foregone 3,75,000
Question 44
Write Short note on Labour Turnover.
(Nov., 1994, 4 marks)
Answer
Labour Turnover: Leaving and coming of workers in business or
organization gives rise to the phenomenon of labour turnover. Labour
turnover of an organization is the rate of change in its labour force during a
specified peri od. This rate of change is compared with an index which acts
as a thermometer to ascertain its reasonableness. The suitable index of
labour turnover may be the standard or usual labour turnover in the
industry locality, or the labour turnover rate for a past period. A higher
labour turnover reflect that the workers in the organization are new and
inexperienced, and it is a matter of concern to the organization. Also it
accounts for an increase in cost of production and even disturbs the even
flow of production in the market.
To measure labour turnover, the following three methods viz., (i)

Separation method; (ii) Replacement method and (iii) Flux method are
available. Each method emphasizes on different aspects. But it is expected
from business concerns that a particular method be used consistently to
facilitate comparison of data from year to year. Labour turnover may be
calculated by using any one of the following formulae:
Number of employeesreplaced
Labour turnover = 100
Average Number of employeeson roll
Number of employeesleft
OR = 100
AverageNumber of employeeson roll
OR =
Number of employeesjoining plus number of their leaving
100
Average Number of employeeson roll
Causes of Labour Turnover: The main causes of labour turnover in an
organization/industry can be broadly classified under the following heads:
(a) Personal Causes
(b) Unavoidable Causes
Remedial steps to minimize labour turnover: The following remedial
steps are useful in minimizing labour turnover.
1. Exit Interview
2. Job analysis and evaluation
3. Scientific system of recruitment, selection, placement and promotion.
4. Enlightened attitude of management
5. Use of committee.
Question 45
Calculate the earnings of workers A, B and C under Straight Piece Rate
System and Merricks Multiple Piece Rate System from the following
particulars:
Normal Rate per Hour Rs. 5.40
Standard Time per Unit 1 Minute
Output per day is as follows:
Worker A 390 Units

Worker B 450 Units
Worker C 600 Units
Working hours per day are 8.
(May 1998, 8 marks)
Answer
Working notes:
1. Normal wage rate per unit
Normal rate per hour Rs. 5.40
Standard output per hour 60 units
Normal wage rate per unit 0.09 P
(Rs. 5.40/60 units)
2. Efficiency level
Workers: A B C
Actual output per day (units) 390 450 600
Standard output per day (units) 480 480 480
Efficiency level achieved 81.25% 93.75% 125%
Actual output units 390 450 600
100 100 100 100
Standard output units 480 480 480
Earnings of Workers Under Straight Piece Rate System

Worker A = 390 units Rs. 0.09 = Rs. 35.10 P
Worker B = 450 units Rs. 0.09 = Rs. 40.50 P
Worker C = 600 units Rs. 0.09 = Rs. 54.00
Earnings of Workers Under Merricks Multiple Piece Rate System

Workers: A B C
Efficiency level 81.25% 93.75% 125%
(Refer to Working note 2)
Applicable wage rate per unit 0.09P 0.099 0.108*P

Earnings (Rs.) 35.10 44.55 64.80
(390 units (450 units + (600 units
0.09P) 0.099P) 0.108)
* Note : Some author suggests an increase of 30% over normal piece rate at
an efficiency level of 120% or more. In such a case the rate per unit
would be 0.117 P and total earnings would come to Rs. 70.20 P.
Question 46
The management of a company are worried about their increasing
labour turnover in factory and before analyzing the causes and taking
remedial steps, they want to have idea of the profit foregone as a result of
labour turnover in the last year.
Last year sales amounted to Rs. 83,03,300 and the profit-volume ratio
was 20 per cent. Total number of actual hours worked by the Direct Labour
Force was 4.45 lakhs. As a result of the delays by the Personnel Department
in filling vacancies due to labour turnover, 1,00,000 potentially productive
hours were lost. The actual direct labour hours includes 30,000 hours
attributable to training new recruits, out of which half of the hours were
unproductive.
The costs incurred consequent on labour turnover revealed on analysis
the following:
Rs.
Settlement costs due to leaving 43,820
Recruitment costs
26,740
Selection costs
12,750
Training costs
30,490
Assuming that the potential production lost as a consequence of labour
turnover could have been sold at prevailing prices, find the profit foregone

(Nov., 2004, 8 marks)
Answer
Working notes:
1. Actual productive hours
Total number of actual hours worked 4,45,000
Less: Unproductive training hours 15,000
Actual productive hours 4,30,000
2. Sales per productive hours (Rs.)
(Total sales / Actual productive hours.) Rs. 19.309
(Rs. 83,03,000 / 4,30,000 hours)
3. Potential productive hours lost 1,00,000
4. Sales foregone (Rs.) 19,31,000
(1,00,000 hours Rs. 19.31)
5. Contribution foregone (Rs.) 3,86,000
Sales foregone P/V Ratio
(Rs. 19,31,000 20%)
Statement of Profit foregone last year
on account of Labour Turnover
Settlement costs due to leaving 43,820
Selection costs
12,750
Training costs
30,490
Total profit foregone 5,00,000
Question 47
State the distinction between Job evaluation and Merit rating.

(Nov., 2001, 3 marks)
Answer
Distinction between Job evaluation and Merit rating:
Job evaluation can be defined as the process of analysis and assessment
of jobs to ascertain reliably their relative worth and to provide management
with a reasonably sound basis for determining the basic internal wage and
salary structure for the various job positions. In other words, job evaluation
provides a rationale for differential wages and salaries for different group of
employees and ensures that these differentials are consistent and
equitable.
Merit rating is the quantitative or qualitative assessment of an
employees personality or his performance on the job made by his
supervisor or other person qualified to judge.
The main points of distinction between job evaluation and merit rating
are as follows:
man behind a job. In other words, merit rating rates employees on their
job while job evaluation rate the jobs.
2. Job evaluation and its accomplishments are meant to set up a rational
wage and salary structure whereas merit rating provides a scientific
basis for determining fair wages for each worker based on his ability
and performance.
Question 48
The finishing shop of a c ompany employs 60 direct workers. Each
worker is paid Rs. 400 as wages per week of 40 hours. When necessary,
overtime is worked upto a maximum of 15 hours per week per worker at
time rate plus one-half as premium. The current output on an average is 6
units per man hour which may be regarded as standard output. If bonus
scheme is introduced, it is expected that the output will increase to 8 units
per man hour. The workers will, if necessary, continue to work Overtime
upto the specified limit although no premium on incentives will be paid.
The company is considering introduction of either Halsey Scheme or
Rowan Scheme of Wage Incentive system. The budgeted weekly output is
19,200 units. The selling price is Rs. 11 per unit and the direct Material Cost
is Rs. 8 per unit. The variable overheads amount to Rs. 0.50 per direct labour
hour and the fixed overhead is Rs, 9,000 per week.
Prepare a Statement to show the effect on the Companys weekly Profit
of the proposal to introduce (a) Halsey Scheme, and (b) Rowan Scheme.
Answer
Working notes:
1. Total available hours per week 2,400
(60 workers 40 hours)
2. Total standard hours required to produce 19,200 units 3,200
(19,200 units/6 units per hour)
3. Total labour hours required after the 2,400
introduction of bonus scheme to produce 19,200 units
(19,200 units / 8 units per man hour)
4. Time saved in hours
800
(3,200 hours 2,400 hours)
5. Wage rate per hour (Rs.) 10
(Rs. 400/40 hours)
6. Bonus:
1
(a) Halsey Scheme = Time saved Wage rate per hour
2
1
= x 800 hours x Rs. 10 = Rs. 4,000
2
(b ) Rowan Scheme = Time saved Time taken Wage rate per hour
Time allowed
800 hours
= 2,400 hours Rs. 10
3,200 hours
= Rs. 6,000
Statement showing the effect on the Companys Weekly
present profit by the introduction of Halsey & Rowan schemes
Present Halsey Rowan
Rs. Rs. Rs.
Sales revenue: (A) 2,11,200 2,11,200 2,11,200
(19,200 units Rs. 11)
Direct material cost 1,53,600 1,53,600 1,53,600
(19,200 units Rs. 8)
Direct wages 32,000 24,000 24,000
(Refer to working notes 2 & 3) (3,200 hrs 2,400 hrs (2,400 hrs.
Rs. 10) Rs. 10) Rs. 10)
Overtime premium 4,000 - -
(800 hrs.
Rs. 5)
Bonus - 4,000 6,000
(Refer to working notes 6 (i) & (ii))
Variable overheads 1,600 1,200 1,200
(3,200 hrs. (2,400 hrs. (2,400 hrs.
0.50 P) 0.50 P) 0.50 P)
Fixed overheads 9,000 9,000 9,000
Total cost : (B) 2,00,200 1,91,800 1,93,800
Profit: {(A)- (B)} 11,000 19,400 17,400
Question 49
The management of In and Out Ltd., are worried about their increasing
labour turnover in the factory and before analyzing the causes and taking
remedial steps, they want to have an idea of the profit foregone as a result
of labour turnover in the last year.
Last year sales amounted to Rs. 83,03,300 and the P/V ratio was 20 per
cent. The total number of actual hours worked by the Direct Labour force
was 4.45 lakhs. As a result of the delays by the Personnel Department in

filling vacancies due to labour turnover, 1,00,000 potentially productive
hours were lost. The actual direct labour hours included 30,000 hours
attributable to training new recruits, out of which half of the hours were
unproductive.
The costs incurred consequent on labour turnover revealed on analysis the
following:
Rs.
Selection costs 12,750
Training costs 30,490
Assuming that the potential production lost as a consequence of Labour
Turnover could have been sold at prevailing prices, find the profit foregone
Answer
Statement of Profit Foregone last year on account of
l a bour turnover of In and Out Ltd.
Rs.
(See Notes 1 to 4)
Recruitment Costs 26,740
Selection Costs 12,750
Training Costs 30,490
5,00,000
Working Notes:
1. Actual hours worked: 4,45,000
Less: 15,000 unproductive training hours: 15,000
Actual productive hours. 4,30,000
2. Sales Rs. 83,03,300

Actual productive hours utilized 4,30,000 hours
83, 03,300
Sales per productive hours = Rs. = Rs.19.30
4,30,000
3. Potential productive hours lost = 1,00,000
Sales foregone = 1,00,000 hours Rs. 19.31
= Rs. 19,31,000
4. Contribution foregone = Sales foregone P/V Ratio.
= Rs. 19,31,000 20%
= Rs. 3,86,200
Question 50
The standard hours of job X is 100 hours. The job has been completed by
Amar in 60 hours, Akbar in 70 hours and Anthony in 95 hours.
The bonus system applicable to the job is as follows:-
Percentage of time saved to time allowed Bonus
Saving upto 10% 10% of time saved
From 11% to 20% 15% of time saved
The rate of pay is Re. 1 per hour, Calculate the total earnings of each worker
and also the rate of earnings per hour.
Statement of total earnings and rate of earning per hour
Workers: Amar Akbar Anthony
Standard hours of Job 100 hours 100 hours 100 hours
Time taken on the Jobs (i) 60 hours 70 hours 95 hours
Time saved 40 hours 30 hours 5 hours
Percentage of time saved to time allowed40% 30% 5%
Bonus hours (ii) (See Note 1) 6.5 hours 4.5 hours 0.5 hours
Total hours to be paid [(i) + (ii)] 66.5 hours 74.5 hours 95.5 hours
Total earning @ Re. 1/- p.h. Rs. 66.5 Rs. 74.5 Rs. 95.5
Rate of earning per hour (See Note 2)Rs. 1.1083 Rs. 1.0642 Rs. 1.005
Note:
1. Bonus hours as percentage of time saved:
Amar : 10 hours 10% + 10 hours 15%
+ 20 hours 20% = 6.5 hours
Akbar : 10 hours 10% + 10 hours 15%
+ 10 hours 20% = 4.5 hours
Anthony : 5 hours 10% = 0.5 hours
2. Rate of Earning per hour:
Total earning
=
Total time taken on the job
Rs. 66.5
Amar : = Rs. 1.1038
60 hours
Rs. 74.5
Akbar : = Rs. 1.0642
70 hours
Rs. 95.50
Anthony : = Rs. 1.005
95 hours
Question 51
Distinguish between Direct and Indirect labour.
Answer
Direct labour cost is the labour costs that is specifically incurred for or can
be readily charged to or identified with a specific job, contract, work -order or
any other unit of cost.
Indirect labour costs are labour costs which cannot be readily identified
with products or services but are generally incurred in carrying out production
activity.
The importance of the distinction lies in the fact that whereas direct
labour cost can be identified with and charged to the job, indirect labour costs
cannot be so charged and are, therefore, to be treated as part of the factory
overheads to be included in the cost of production.
Question 52
What do you understand by overtime premium? What is the effect of
overtime payment on productivity and cost? Discuss the treatment of
overtime premium in cost accounts and suggest a procedure for control of
overtime work.
Answer
Work done beyond normal working hours is known as overtime work.
Overtime payment is the amount of wages paid for working beyond normal
working hours. The rate for overtime work is higher than the normal time
rate; usually it is at double the normal rates. The extra amount so paid over
the normal rate is called overtime premium. Overtime work should be
resorted to only when it is extremely essential because it involves extra
cost. The overtime payment affects to increase the cost of production in the
following ways:
(2) The premium paid is an extra payment in addition to the normal rate.
(3) The efficiency of operators during overtime work may fall and thus the
output may be lesser than normal output.
(4) In order to earn more the workers may not concentrate on work during
normal time and thus the output during normal hours may also fall.
(5) Reduced output and increased premium will bring about an increase in
costs of production.
Under cost accounting the overtime premium is treated as follows:
(i) If overtime is resorted to, at the desire of the customer, then
overtime premium may be charged to the job directly.
(ii) If overtime is due to a general pressure of work to increase the
output, the premium may be charged to general overheads.
(iii) If overtime is due to the negligence or delay, it may be charged to
the department concerned.
(iv) If it is due to circumstances beyond control, e.g. fire, strike etc. it
may be charged to Costing Profit and Loss Account.
It is necessary that proper Control over the overtime work should be
exercised in order to keep it to the minimum. The procedure based on
following steps may be adopted for such control.
(1) Watch on the output during norm al hours should be maintained to

ensure that overtime is not granted when normal output is not
obtained during the normal hours, without any special reasons.
(2) Statement concerning overtime work be prepared along with
justifications, at appropriate places for putting up before
competent authority.
(3) Prior sanction about overtime should be obtained from competent
authority.
(4) Actual rate of output produced during the overtime period should
be compared with normal rate of output.
(5) Periodical reports on overtime wages should be sent to top
management for taking corrective action
(6) If possible an upper limit may be fixed for each category of worker
in respect of overtime.
Question 53
During audit of accounts of G. Company, your assistant found errors in
the calculation of the wages of factory workers and he wants you to verify
his work.
He has extracted the following information:
(i) The contract provides that the minimum wage for a worker is his base
rate. It is also paid for downtimes i.e. the machine is under repair or the
worker is without work. The standard work week is 40 hours. For
overtime production, workers are paid 150 per cent of base rates.
(ii) Straight Piece Work-The worker is paid at the rate of 20 paise per piece.
(iii) Percentage Bonus Plan- Standard quantities of production per hour are
established by the engineering department. The workers average
hourly production, determined from his total hours worked and his
production, is divided by the standard quantity of production to
determine his efficiency ratio. The efficiency ratio is then applied to his
base rate to determine his hourly earnings for the period.
(iv) Emerson Efficiency Plan - A minimum wages is paid for production upto
66-2/3% of standard output or efficiency. When the workers production
exceeds 66-2/3% of the standard output, he is paid bonus as per the
following table:
Efficiency Level Bonus

Upto 66 2 % Nil
3
Above 66 2 % to 79% 10%
3
80% - 99% 20%
100% - 125% 45%
Your assistant has produced the following schedule pertaining to certain
workers of a weekly pay roll:
Worke Wage Total Dow Units Stand Base Gross
rs Incentive Hour n Produc ard Rate Wages
Plan s Tim ed Units as
e Rs. per
Hou Book
rs Rs.
Rajesh Straight piece 40 5 400 - 1.80 85
Mohan work 46 - 455 - 1.80 95
* Straight piece 44 - 425 - 1.80 85
John work 40 4 250 200 2.20 120
Harish Straight piece
work 40 - 240 300 2.10 93
Mahes Percentage 40 - 600 500 2.00 126
h bonus plan
Anil Emerson
Emerson
(40 hours
production)
*Total hours of Mohan include 6 overtime hours.

Prepare a schedule showing whether the above computation of workers
wages are correct or not. Give details.
(May, 1999, 12 marks)
Answer
Schedule showing the correct figure of minimum wages; gross wages and
wages to be paid.
Workers Wage Minimum Gross Gross Wages to

incentive plan wages wages wage be paid are
computed as Maximum
as per per of:
incentive book minimum
plan and gross
computed
wages
(Rs.) (Rs.) (Rs.) (Rs.)
Rajesh Straight piece 72.00 80.00 85 80.00
(Refer to W. work
Note 1) 88.20 91.00 95 91.00
Mohan Straight piece
(Refer to W. work 82.80 85.00 85 85.00
Note 2)
John Straight piece
88.00 110.00 120 110.00
(Refer to W. work
Note 3)
Harish Percentage 84.00 100.80 93 100.80
(Refer to W. bonus
Note 4) plan 80.00 116.00 126 116.00
Mahesh Emerson
(Refer to W.
Note 5) Emerson
Anil
(Refer to W.
Note 6)
Working notes:
1. Minimum wages = Total normal hours rate per hour
= 40 hours Rs. 1.80 = Rs. 72
Gross wages (computed) = No. of units rate per unit
as per incentive plan = 400 units Rs. 0.20 = Rs. 80
2. Minimum wages = Total normal hours rate per hour

+ Overtime hours Overtime rate per
hour
= 40 hours Rs. 1.80 + 6 hours Rs. 2.70
= Rs. 72 + Rs. 16.20 = Rs. 88.20
Gross wages (computed)
as per incentive plan = 455 units Rs. 0.20 = Rs. 91.00
3. Minimum wages = 40 hours Rs. 1.80 + 4 hours Rs. 2.70
= Rs. 72 + Rs. 10.80 = Rs. 82.80
Gross wages (computed) = 425 units Rs. 0.20 = Rs. 85
as per incentive plan
4. Minimum wages = 40 hours Rs. 2.20 = Rs. 88
Actual production per hour
Efficiency of worker = 100
Standard production per hour
(250 units/ 40 hours)
= 100 = 125%
(200 units/40 hours)
Hourly rate = Rate per hour Efficiency of worker
= Rs. 2.20 125% = Rs. 2.75
Gross wages (comput ed)
as per of bonus plan = 40 hours Rs. 2.75 = Rs. 110/-
5. Minimum wages = 40 hours Rs. 2.10 = Rs. 84
(240 units/ 40 hours)
Efficiency of worker = 100 = 80%
(300 units/40 hours)
Bonus (as per Emersons plan) = Total minimum wages Bonus

percentage
= Rs. 84 20% = Rs. 16.80
as per Emersons
Efficiency plan = Minimum wages + Bonus
= Rs. 84 + Rs. 16.80 = Rs. 100.80
6. Minimum wages = 40 hours Rs. 2 = Rs. 80

600
= 100 = 120%
Efficiency of worker 500
Bonus (as per Emersons plan) = Rs. 80 45% = Rs. 36

as per Emersons Efficiency plan = Rs. 80 + Rs. 36 = Rs. 116
Question 54
Calculate the earnings of a worker under (i) Halsey Plan and (ii) Rowan
Plan from the following particulars:
(1) Hourly rate of wages guaranteed 0.50 paise per hour.
(2) Standard time for producing one dozen articles 3 hours.
(3) Actual time taken by the worker to produce 20 dozen articles 48
hours.
(Nov., 1998, 6 marks)
Answer
(1) Earnings of a Worker under Halsey Plan
Earnings = Hrs. worked Rate per hour + Time saved hrs. Rate per
hour
= 48 hrs. 0.50 paise + 12 hrs. 0.50 paise
= Rs. 24 + Rs. 3
= Rs. 27
(2) Earnings of a worker under Rowan Plan
Time saved
Earnings = Hrs. worked Rate per hour + Time taken hrs.
Time allowed
Rate per hour
12
= 48 hrs. 0.50 paise + hrs. 48 hrs. 0.50 paise
60
(Refer to working notes 1 & 2)
= Rs. 24 + Rs. 4.80
= Rs. 28.80
Working notes:
1. Time Allowed to produce 20 dozen articles
Standard time allowed for producing one dozen articles 3 hours
Standard time allowed for producing 20 dozen articles 60 hours
2. Time saved
Standard time to produce 20 dozen articles 60 hours
Actual time taken by the worker to produce 20 dozen articles48 hours
Time saved 12 hours
Question 55
The existing Incentive system of Alpha Limited is as under:
Normal working week 5 days of 8 hours each plus 3 late shifts
of 3 hours each
Rate of Payment Day work: Rs. 160 per hour
Late shift: Rs. 225 per hour
Average output per operator for 49- 120 articles
hours week i.e. including 3 late shifts
In order to increase output and eliminate overtime, it was decided to switch on to
a system of payment by results. The following Information is obtained:
Time-rate (as usual) : Rs. 160 per hour
Basic time allowed for 15 : 5 hours
articles
Piece-work rate : Add 20% to basic piece-
rate
Premium Bonus : Add 50% to time.
Required:
Prepare a Statement showing hours worked, weekly earnings, number of
articles produced and labour cost per article for one operator under the
following systems:
(a) Existing time-rate
(b) Straight piece-work
(c) Rowan system

(d) Halsey premium system
Assume that 135 articles are produced in a 40-hour week under straight piece
work, Rowan Premium system, and Halsey premium system above and worker
earns half the time saved under Halsey premium system.
(24 = 8 Marks)
Answer
Table showing Labour Cost per Article
Method of Payment Hours Weekly Number of labour cost
worked earnings articles per article
produced
Existing time rate 49 Rs. 120 Rs. 70.21
8,425.00
Straight piece rate system 40 Rs. 135 Rs. 64
8,640.00
Rowan Premium System 40 Rs. 135 Rs. 66.72
9,007.41
Halsey Premium System 40 Rs. 135 Rs. 63.70
8,600.00
Working Notes:
(a) Existing time rate
Weekly wages 40 hrs @ Rs160/hr = Rs6,400
9 hrs @ Rs225/hr = Rs2,025
Rs8,425
(b) Piece Rate System
Basic time: 5 hour for 15 articles.
Cost of 15 articles at hourly rate of = Rs800
Rs160/hr = Rs160
Add 20%
Rs960
Rate per article = Rs960 / 15
= Rs64
Earnings for the week = 135 articles Rs64

= Rs8,640.
(c) Rowan Premium System
Basic Time : 5 hours for 15 articles
Add : 50% to time
7.5 hours for 15 articles
Or 30 minutes per a rticle
Time allowed for 135 articles = 67.5 hours
Actual time taken for 135 articles = 40 hours
TA HW
Earnings = (HWRH) + HW RH
TA
67. 5 40
= (40 hrs Rs160) + 40 Rs. 160
67.5
= Rs. 9007.41
(d) Halsey Premium System
50
Earnings = HWRH + (TA HW) RH
100
1
= 40 Rs160 + (67.5 40) Rs160
2
= Rs8,600.
Question 56
Under the Rowan Premium Bonus system, a less efficient worker can obtain
same bonus as a highly efficient worker. Discuss with suitable examples. (May 2007, 4 Marks)
Answer
Timetaken
Bonus under Rowan system = time saved rate per hour
Timeallowed
For example let time allowed for a job = 4 hours and Labour rate = Rs. 5
per hour.
Case I : Less efficient worker
If time taken = 3 hours
Then time sa ved = 4 3 = 1 hour
3 hours
Bonus = 1 hour Rs.5 = Rs. 3.75
4 hours
Case II : Highly efficient worker
If time taken = 1 hour
Then time saved = 4 1 = 3 hours
1hour
Bonus = 3 hours Rs.5 = Rs. 3.75
4 hours
So, it can be concluded that under Rowan System, the less efficient
worker and highly efficient worker can get the same bonus.
Question 57
Two workers A and B produce the same product using the same
material. Their normal wage rate is also the same. A is paid bonus
according to Rowan scheme while B is paid bonus according to Halsey
scheme. The time allowed to make the product is 50 hours. A takes 30
hours while B takes 40 hours to complete the product. The factory
overhead rate is Rs. 5 per person-hour actually worked. The factory cost
of product manufactured by A is Rs. 3,490 and for product manufactured
by B is Rs. 3,600.
Required:
(i) Compute the normal rate of wages.
(ii) Compute the material cost.
(iii) Prepare a statement comparing the factory cost of the product as
made by two workers. (November 2007, 6 Marks)
nswer
Let x be the cost of material and y be the normal rate of wage/hour
Worker A Worker B
Rs. Rs.
Material cost x x
Labour wages 30 y 40 y
Bonus Rowan system Halsey syste m
Timesaved Hours saved 50%
hour worked rate
Timeallowed rate
20 1
= 30 y = 12y = 10 y = 5y
50 2
Overheads 30 5 = 150 40 5 = 200
Factory cost x + 42y + 150 = 3,490 x + 45y + 200 = 3,600
x + 42y = 3,340 (1) x + 45y = 3,400 (2)
Solving (1) and (2) we get
X = 2,500 and y = 20
(i) Normal rate of wages is Rs. 20 per hour.
(ii) Cost of materials = Rs. 2,500.
(iii) Comparative Statement of factory cost
Material cost
Wages
Bonus
Overheads
Factory cost
Question 58
Discuss the three methods of calculating labour turnover. (November 2007, 4 Marks)
Answer
Methods of calculating labour turnover
Number of employees replaced
(i) Replacement method = 100
Averagenumber of employees on roll
Number of employeesseparatedduring the year
(ii) Separation method = 100
Averagenumber of employeeson roll during the year
Number of employeesseparated+ Number of employeesreplaced
(iii) Flux method = 100
Averagenumber of employeeson roll during the year
Workers joining a business concern on account of its expansion do not
account for labour tu rnover.
Question 59
Calculate the total wages earned by a workman for a working day of 8
hours under Halsey and Rowan Plans:
Standard production per hour 20 units
Actual production of the day 200 units
Wages rate per hour Rs. 30
Answer
200
(i) Standard time = = 10 hours
20
(ii) Total wages of workman in Halsey Scheme:
Total Wages = (Actual Time Wages Rate) + 50%
(Standard Time Actual Time)
Wages Rate
50
= 8 30 + (10 8) 30
100
= Rs. 270.
(iii) Total wages in Rowan Plan:
Total Wages = (Actual Time Wages Rate) +
Standard Time ActualTime Actualtime Wages Rate

Standard Time
10 8
= 8 30 + 8 30
10
Question 59
The following information is collected from the personnel department of ST
limited for the year ending 31st March, 2008:
Number of workers at the beginning of the year 8,000
Number of workers at the end of the year 9,600
Number of workers left the company during the 500
year
Number of workers discharged during the year 100
Number of workers replaced due to left and 700
discharges
Additional workers employed for expansion during 1,500
the year
You are required to calculate labour turnover rate by using separation method,
replacement method and flux method (November 2008, 4 Marks)
Answer
Calculation of labour turnover rate:
1. Separation method:
Number of workersseparatedduring the year
Labour turnoverrate = 100
Averagenumber of workerson rolls during the year
600
= 100
8,800
= 6.82%.
Average Number of workers separated during the year = Number
of workers left the
company during the year +
Number of workers
discharged during the year
= 500 + 100 = 600.

8,000+ 9,600
Averagenumber of workerson rolls during the year = = 8,800
2
2. Replacement Method:
Number of workersreplacedduring the year

Averagenumber of workerson rolls during the year
700
= 100
8,800
= 7.95%.
3. Flux Method:
Number of workers separated+ Numberof workers replaced

Averagenumberof workerson rolls duringthe year
600 + 700
= 100
8,800
= 14.77%. = Rs. 288.

4
Overheads
Question 1
(a) Explain with illustrative examples the concept of fixed cost and variable cost.
(b) The following are the Maintenance costs incurred in a machine shop per six
months with corresponding machine hours:
Month Machine Hours Maintenance Costs
Rs.
January 2,000 300
February 2,200 320
March 1,700 270
April 2,400 340
May 1,800 280
June 1,900 290
Total 12,000 1,800
Analyse the Maintenance cost which is semi-variable into fixed and variable
element.
Answer
(a) Fixed cost: it is a cost which accrues in relation to the passage of time and
which within certain output or turnover limits, tends to be unaffected by
fluctuations in volume of output or turnover. Fixed costs, are thus time
based and within certain output limits, they are not affected by changes in
the level of activity. Fixed costs are also known as period costs. Rent is an
example of fixed cost. In the case of factory, its rent is independent of its
volume of production, i.e. whether it produces 1 unit or 1000 units, but its
rent remains the same. Other examples of fixed costs are rates, foremens
salary etc.
Variable cost: it is a cost which in the aggregate tends to vary in direct
proportion to changes in the volume of output or turnover. For example
material cost is a variable cost. If the cost of material for 1 unit of a product
is say Rs.5, then the cost of material for 10 units of the product will be Rs.
50. In this way th e cost of material is a variable one.
(b) Note : This part can be solved by using other methods as well
Workings:
High and low points method
Machine Hours Maintenance Costs
Rs.
High point, April 2,400 340
Low point, March 1,700 270
700 70
Rate of change of variable cost = Rs. 70 700 hrs.
= Rs. 0.10 per machine hour
Total variable cost for 2,400 machine hour will be Rs. 240
2400 x Rs. 0.10
Hence Fixed cost is (Rs. 340 Rs. 240 ) = Rs.100
Analysis of maintenance cost into fixed and variable element
Machine Maintenance Fixed Cost Variable
Hours Cost Cost.
Rs. Rs. Rs.

January 2,000 300 100 200
February 2,200 320 100 220
March 1,700 270 100 170
April 2,400 340 100 240
May 1,800 280 100 180
June 1,900 290 100 190
Question 2
(a) Explain how departmental overhead rates are arrived at.
(b) Selfhelp Ltd. has gensets and produces its own power. Data for power costs
are as follows:-
Horse power Hours Production deptts. Service deptts.
A B X Y
Needed capacity 10,000 20,000 12,000 8,000
production
Used during the month of 8,000 13,000 7,000 6,000
May
During the month of May costs for generating power amounted to Rs. 9,300:
of this
Rs. 2,500 was considered to be fixed cost. Service Deptt. X renders service to A, B
and Y in the ratio 13:6:1, while Y renders service to A and B in the ratio 31:3.
Given that the direct labour hours in Deptts. A and B are 1650 hours and 2175
hours respectively, find the Power Cost per labour hour in each of these two
Deptts.
Answer
(a) To arrive at the department overhead rates it is necessary to have complete
account of overhead expenses. These overhead expenses are either
completely assigned to the production and service departments or are
apportioned by using suitable basis. This process of distributing overhead
expenses between the production and service departments , is known as
primary distribution.
As the service departments in an organization are meant for rendering
service to other production departments, their expenses are apportioned to
the users viz. production departments. This process of apportioning service
department expenses to the production departments by using suitable basis
is known as secondary distribution.
Thus by using primary and secondary distribution processes, the total
overhead expenses are apportioned to the concerned production
departments. These total overhead expenses of each production
department may be absorbed by using a suitable method of overhead
absorption. For example the total overheads of each department may be
divided by labour hour, machine hours etc., to arrive at departmental
overhead recovery rate.
(b) Statement of overhead Distribution of a Selfhelp Ltd.
Particulars Basis Total Production Service Deptts.
A B X Y
Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs.
Fixed Cost H.P. Hours 2,500 500 1,000 600 400
needed at
capacity
production
(5:10:6:4)
Variable Cost H.P. Hours 6,800 1,600 2,600 1,400 1,200
used
(8:13:7:6)
9,300 2,100 3,600 2,00 1,600

Redistribution of Service Departments'
Expenses to Production Departments
Particulars Total Production Deptts. Service Deptts.
A B X Y
Total overheads (Rs.) 9,300 2,100 3,600 2,000 1,600
Deptt. X overhead (Rs.) 1,300 600 2,000 100
apportioned to A,B And Y
in the ratio (13:6:1)
Deptt. Y overhead (Rs.) 1,550 150 1,700
apportioned to A and B
in the ratio (31:3)
Total overheads (Rs.) 4,950 4,350
Labour hours 1,630 2,175
Power Cost per labour 3.00 2.00
labour
Question 3
The level of production activity fluctuates widely in your company from
month to month. Because of this, the incidence of depreciation on unit cost varies
considerably. The management decides that you should find out a suitable
method to correct this.
Answer
Depreciation is usually charged on the basis of time. One simple method
used for the purpose is known as straight line method. Under this method, the
cost of acquisition plus the installation charges minus the scrap value, is spread
over the estimated life of the asset to arrive at the annual depreciation charge.
For example, suppose the cost of a machine used by a concern for
manufacturing its products is Rs.1,20,000. Its life is, say, 10 years. Then the
charge of depreciation per annum would be Rs.12,000 or Rs.1,000 p.m. Suppose
further that the units manufactured by this machine in the months of March and
April are 500 and 1,000 respectively. Then the rate of depreciation to be charged
to each unit manufactured in the month of March and April will be Rs. 2 and Re.
1 respectively. This incidence of depreciation on unit cost, due to wide
fluctuations in the production activity can be overcome by using the method
known as production unit method.
Under production unit method, depreciation is charged at a rate per unit of

production, by dividing the cost of the assets by the estimated number of unit to
be produced during the life of the asset. The formula for calculating depreciation
under this method is :-
Original Cost Residual Value
D=
Estimated output during its life
This method recognises the fact that depreciation should vary according to
the volume of the output. It satisfies the costing requirement that the cost of an
asset should be evenly spread over the work done by it. According to this
method, the incidence of depreciation only arises when the asset is employed in
production and not when it remains idle. It does not recognize the time factor,
but only the usage factor. Consequently, no depreciation is provided only for any
lapse of time. This method is suitable when the units of production are identical
or uniform. To be more clear about this method, consider the following example;
Suppose the cost of a machine used for manufacturing products is
Rs.1,00,000. Its capacity is to manufacture 2,00,0000 units during its entire life
and has no scrap value. On dividing the cost of the machine with estimated
output, we arrive at a figure of Re.0.50 per unit, which is known as depreciation
rate per unit. The use of this method for charging depreciation on output will
overcome the problem created by wide fluctuations, in production activity and
charging depreciation on the time basis.
Question 4
What is an idle capacity? What are the costs associated with it? How are
these treated in product costs?
Answer
Idle Capacity: Idle capacity is that part of the capacity of a plant, machine or
equipment which cannot be effectively utilised in production. In other words, it
is the difference between the practical or normal capacity and capacity of
utilisation based on expected sales. For example, if the practi cal capacity of
production of a machine is to the tune of 10,000 units in a month, but is used
only to produce 8,000 units, because of market demand of the product, then in
such a case, 2,000 units will be treated as the idle capacity of the machine.
The idle capacity may arise due to lack of product demand, non-availability
of raw-material, shortage of skilled labour, absenteeism, shortage of power, fuel
or supplies, seasonal nature of product, etc
Idle Capacity Costs: Costs associated with idle capacity are mostly fixed in
nature. These include depreciation, repairs and maintenance charges, insurance
premium, rent, rates, management and supervisory costs. These costs remain
unabsorbed or unrecovered due to under-utilisation of plant and service
capacity. Idle capacity cost can be calculated as follows:-
Aggregate overhead related to plant
Idle capacity cost = Idle Capacity
Normal plant capacity
Treatment of Idle capacity cost: Idle capacity costs can be treated in product
costing, in the following ways:
(i) If the idle capacity cost is due to unavoidable reasons such as repairs,
maintenance, change over of job, etc, a supplementary overhead rate may
be used to recover the idle capacity cost. In this case, the costs are charged
to the production capacity utilised.
(ii) If the idle capacity cost is due to avoidable reasons such as faulty planning,
power failure etc., the cost should be charged to profit and loss account.
(iii) If the idle capacity cost is due to seasonal factors, then, the cost should be
charged to the cost of production by inflating overhead rates.
Question 5
Explain what is meant by Cost Apportionment and Cost Absorption. Illustrate
each with two examples. Discuss the methods of cost absorption and state which
method do you consider to be the best and why
Answer
Cost apportionment is the process of charging expenses in an equitable
proportion to the various cost centres or departments. This describes the
allotment of proportions of overhead to cost centres or departments. It is
carried out in respect of those items of cost which cannot be allocated to any
specific cost centre or department. For example, the salary of general manager
cannot be allocated wholly to the production department, as he attends in
general to all the departments. Therefore, some logical basis is selected and
adopted for the apportionment of such type of expenses over various
departments. Likewise, factory rent can be apportioned over the production and
service departments on the basis of the area occupied by each.
Cost absorption, is the process of absorbing all overhead costs allocated to
or apportioned over particular cost centre or production department by the
units produced; for example ,the manufacturing cost of lathe centre is absorbed
by a rate per lathe hour. Manufacturing costs of groundnut crushing centre can
be absorbed by using a Kg. of groundnut oil produced as the basis. The purpose
behind the absorption is that expenses should be absorbed in the cost of the
output of the given period. For overhead absorption some suitable basis has to
be adopted.
Methods of Cost Absorption: Various methods of cost absorption can be
grouped under the following three heads:
(i) Production unit method.
(ii) Percentage method e.g.
(a) Percentage of direct material cost.
(b) Percentage of direct wages.
(c) Percentage of prime cost.
(iii) Hourl y rate method e.g.
(a) Direct labour hour rate.
(b) Machine hour rate.
Production unit method: To absorb the overhead costs by this method either
a pre-determined or actual rate of overhead absorption is calculated, by dividing
the cost to be absorbed by the number of units produced or expected to be
produced. This method is the simplest one. But its usefulness is limited normally
to those situations where only one product is produced.
Percentage of direct material cost method: Under this method, overheads
are recovered on the basis of a pre -determined or actual rate, which is
computed as follow:-
Expected (or Actual) Overhead
100
Expected (or Actual) direct material cos t
This method is not used commonly because of the following limitations:
1. Material prices fluctuate quite often and this phenomenon leads to high or
low charges in respect of overhead, even though overheads figures remain
unchanged. This vitiates comparison of cost of production from period to
period
2. Most of the overhead expenses vary with time. Thus, a job requiring cheap
materials butlonger period of processing should bear more for overheads as
compared to a job which necessitates expensive materials but shorter
period of processing. But the use of direct material cost bases totally ignores
the time considerations.
Percentage of direct wage method: This method is similar to the previous
one except that here direct wages are taken for ascertaining the recovery
rate. It is useful where production is uniform, all the workers employed earn
more or less the same hourly rate and labour is p redominant. The main
advantages of this method are:
(1) It is simple to operate and understand.
(2) It given consideration to time element.
(3) Labour rates fluctuate less frequently than the rate of materials.
The application of the direct wage method does not give correct results
under the following conditions:
(a) Where major work is done by machines and the workers merely act as
attendants.
(b) Where same work is done on different jobs by workers with different rate of
pay and also the highly paid workers cannot increase their output/input
ratio. In such a case if, overhead is recovered on the basis of direct wages it
will not only cost more in labour but also involve large share of overhead
expenses as compared to those performed by low paid workers. But in fact
highly paid workers take less time and therefore make use of less resources,
supplies etc., so that share of overhead should be rather less.
Percentage of prime cost method: This method is infact a combination of
direct material and the direct wage cost basis. The rate of absorption here is
calculated by using the following formula:
Total overhead cos t
100
Total prime cos t
This method is very simple and takes into account both material and labour
costs to calculate rate of absorption. The main disadvantage of using this
method is that it givens equal weightage to both material and labour.
Direct labour hour rate: This is the most equitable method of charging the
manufacturing overhead to production where labour hours are the most
important element of cost. Under this method, labour hours are taken as a basis
for the overhead absorption. It can be calculated by dividing the overheads to be
absorbed by the labour hours expended or expected to be expended. To operate
this method successfully additional records of labour must be maintained to get
the number of direct labour hours by departments and product.
The labour hour rate can be adopted under the following circumstances:
(a) Where production is not uniform and, where a percentage method would
not give accurate results.
(b) Where labour is the main factor of production.
Machine hour rate: This is one of the most scientific methods for the
absorption of factory overheads. Machine hour rate means the cost or expenses
incurred in running a machine for one hour. This rate is calculated by dividing the
amount of factory overheads concerning a machine the number of machine
hours.
It is difficult to name a single method which is suitable for the absorption of
overhead costs under different circumstances. However, direct labour hour rate
or machine hour rate are considered as best methods specially in those very
manufacturing units in which labour or machine is a predominant factor.
Question 6
State the objectives of codification of overheads. Enumerate with examples
the different methods of coding and suggest a suitable method for a large
organization.
Answer
Coding is a technique of intelligently describing in number/letters or a
combination of both, the length description of numerous cost accounting heads
for ease of recording and controlling of the cost data generated. This is usually
accomplished by formulating a coding system.
Objective of codification: The important objectives of codification of
overheads are as follows:
(1) To group items of similar nature, which are amenable to apportionment of
overhead expenses on the same basis.
(2) To facilitate the task of allocation and apportionment of overheads over
different departments or cost centres.
(3) To carry out an analysis of overhead expenses for control purposes.
(4) To reduce the task of maintaining a huge number of accounts.
(5) To help the task of machine accounting systems in a large organization.
Methods of codification: The important methods of codification of
overheads are as follows:
1. Straight Numbering Systems: Under this system each type of expenditure is
allotted a fix number; for example:
Standing order number: 10 for indirect material.
Standing order number: 11 for indirect labour.
2. Number blocks: According to this method a block number is generally
earmarked to indicate the major heads of expenditure e.g. 1-50 for service
labour ; 51-100 for maintenance; 100-150 for fringe benefits etc.
3. Combination of symbols and Numbers: Under this method a combination of

symbol/alphabet and a number is used to represent a code. He re alphabet
stands for the main head of the expenditure and the number represents the
concerned department. For example in the code R1 and R2 , R stands for
repair and 1and 2stands for building and machines respectively, in other
words:
R1- Repairs of buildings
R2- Repairs of machines.
4. Field method numerical codes: Under this method each code number consist
of nine digits. The first two digits indicate the nature of expenses viz.
variable or fixed. The next three digits indicate head of expenses ; the next
two digits stand for the analysis for expenses, and last two digits indicate the
cost centre, where expenses have been incurred. For example in code
10/120/01/05; 10 stands for variable cost; 120 for idle time; 01 for waiting
of materials and 05 for lathe shop or;
Code particulars
10/120/01/05 Variable/Idle Time/Waiting for material/Lathe shop
5. The Mnemonic method: Under this method the letters alphabets are used as
codes to help the memory. For example M.S.B. may be used as a code for
Mild Steel Bar.
Out of the five different methods discussed above for the purpose of
codification of overhead expenses; the field method is considered to be
most suitable for a large size business organization. The main plus point of
this method is that a code given to an item of expense represents four of its
characteristics (Ref. to example under method 4). Also large number of
items of overhead expenses can be accommodated under this type of
codification. Lastly this method is easy to operate in case me chanical system
of accounting is in vogue in the concern.
Question 7
Explain what do you understand by the terms stores overheads. Cite three
example of stores overheads. Discuss the methods of treatment of stores
overhead in cost accounts and state the method which you consider to be good.
Answer
Overheads refer to indirect costs i.e., costs which cannot be directly
attributed to any particular cost unit (jobs, work, order, process, product, etc.).
Stores overheads include all those expenditure(excludin g material cost) which
are incurred by stores department to perform its functions such as purchase,
storage and issues. The materials purchased, stored and issued by the stores
department may be used by the production department as well as by the service
departments. Three examples of stores overheads are:
(i) rent of store room,
(ii) salaries and wages of stores staff and workers,
(iii) freight, insurance, carriage etc.
Stores overheads are collected under separate standing order number. They
are treated as a part of factory overheads and are charged to various production
and non - production departments on the basis of the extent of service received
by each departments. The following methods are generally used for recovering
the stores overheads.
(i) Number of stores - requisitions.
(ii) Value of material requisitioned.
(iii) Standard pre -determined rate.
(i) Number of stores requisitions: According to this method the stores
overheads are charged to different departments on the basis of number of
requisitions. For example, if during a given period, A department has issued
two requisitions and B department has issued 3 requisitions and these are
the only two departments using the services of the stores department, the
total stores overheads will be charged to the two departments in the ratio of
2:3.
(ii) Value of material requisitioned: Under this method, stores overheads are
apportioned over different departments by using the basis of the value of
the material issued. Under this method a department is charged a higher
proportion of stores overheads if the value of the material issued is
proportionately higher though the number of requisitions may be less. This
method of charging overheads to different departments is not considered
satisfactory. It does not give due weightage to those factors which affect
overheads e.g., number of requisitions, inward transportation expenses,
weight of different items, etc
(iii) Standard pre-determined rate: Under this method a standard overheads
recovery rate is ascertained for the recovery of stores overheads. In the
ascertainment of standard overheads recovery rate due consideration is
given for the efforts involved in purchasing, storing and issuing different
materials requisitioned by different departments. This method of stores
overhead recovery enables the firm to use the same rate throughout a
financial year.
Out of the three methods discussed above, the pre -determined stores
overheads recovery rate is considered the best because it gives due
weightage to all such factors which affect the stores overhead. Another
reason which accounts for its superiority over the other methods is that it
ensures uniformity in stores overheads recovery rate throughout the year. It
is also free from seasonal fluctuations. If also enable the effective control
over stores overheads by comparing stores overheads recovered and stores
overheads actually incurred.
Question 8
In a manufacturing company where costing is done with a view to fix prices,
state whether and, if so, to what extent the following items are includible in cost .
(i) Interest on borrowing
(ii) Bonus and gratuity
(iii) Depreciation on plant and machinery .
Answer
The Cost Accountant makes no decision on pricing . Pricing is the domain of
top management and sometimes sales management . The cost accountant only
helps management in providing cost data and also determines the financial
effects of fixing prices or the change in prices on the profitability of the
undertaking . Here the cost accountant is required to analyse whether , and if
so the extent to which interest on bo rrowing; bonus and gratuity ; depreciation
on plant and machinery be included as elements of cost.
(i) Interest on borrowings: There is a wide difference of opinion among
accountants about the treatment of interest on borrowing in cost accounts.
Some favour its inclusion in the Cost Accounts, while others hold that
interest, being a financial charge, should not be included in Cost Accounts.
The supporters of interest inclusion give the following argument:
1. Interest is the cost of the borrowed capital as wages are rewards
for the labour. Both are factors of production and as such no distinction
should be made between the remuneration of these two factors.
2. Comparison of cost is rendered difficult if no interest is taken in

business where raw materials in different states of readiness are used.
3. Without inclusion of interest, profits on different jobs requiring
different amounts of capital or requiring different periods for
completion are not comparable.
The other viewpoint, based on interest being a financial charge, is
not an element of cost of production whereas cost accounting is
concerned with determination of true cost of production.
But the proposition for consideration is whether interest on
borrowing should be taken into costing for the purpose of price
determination or not. In price determination effort should be made to
accumulate as much costs as can be attributable to the production
activity, incurred directly or indirectly, to narrow down the risk of wrong
pricing decision. Accordingly, it is advisable that interest on borrowings
attributable to production process should be taken in the cost statement
meant to help the pricing decision. Care should be taken to see that no
interest on borrowings for asset acquisition is included in cost account,
for the purpose.
(ii) Bonus and gratuity: Bonus under the payment of Bonus Act is to be paid
compulsorily to the workers although the amount of bonus may vary with
amount of profit earned. A minimum bonus of 8.33% is, however,
payable irrespective of profit or loss earned by the concern. The amount
of bonus, therefore, may be included in a direct labour cost to the extent
of the minimum bonus, as the same is payable even in a loss situation.
Any amount paid as bonus in excess of the minimum may be considered
as an appropriation of profit. However, bonus linked with productivity is
definitely a part of the overhead cost.
So far as gratuity is concerned, it is indeed directly linked with the wages
and is not by any means related to the profits. Acco rdingly, it should be
treated as an element of cost:
(iii) Depreciation on plant and machinery: Depreciation on fixed assets
represents the consumption of the value of the concerned assets in the
process of operations. This consumption, is therefore an indirect cost of
the production and operations. Without this, true cost of production
cannot be obtained. Hence, depreciation charged in the accounts is
considered as includible as an element of cost.
Question 9
(a) What do you understand by codification of overheads?

(b) What are the objectives of codification?
(c) List down the various methods of codification (you need not elaborate).
Answer
(a) Codification of overheads:
It is a technique of intelligently describing in number/letters or a
combination of both. The lengthy description of numerous Cost
Accounting heads for ease of recording and controlling of the cost data
generated. Codes are developed after accepting/developing a coding
system.
(b) Objectives of codification:
(i) To group items of similar nature which are amenable to
apportionment of overhead expenses on the same basis.
(ii) To facilitate the task of allocation and apportionment of overheads
over different departments or cost centres.
(iii) To carry out an analysis of overhead expenses for control purposes.
(iv) To reduce the task of maintaining a huge number of accounts.
(v) To help the task of machine accounting systems in large organization.
(c) Methods of codification:
(i) Straight numbering system.
(ii) Number blocks.
(iii) Combination of letters and numbers.
(iv) Field method of numerical code.
(v) Mnemonic method.
Question 10
How would you deal the following items in the cost accounts of a
manufacturing concern?
(a) Research and Development cost
(b) Packing Expenses
(c) Fringe Benefits
(d) Expenses on Removal and Re-erection of Machinery.
Answer
(a) Research and Developm ent Cost:
Research and Development Cost is the cost/expense incurred for
searching new or improved products, production method/techniques or
plants/ equipments. Research Cost may be incurred for carrying basic or
applied research. Both basic and applied research relates to original
investigation to gain from new scientific or technical knowledge and
understanding, which is not directed towards any specific practical aim
(under basic research) and is directed towards a specific practical aim or
objective (under applied research).
Treatment in Cost Accounts
Cost of Basic Research (if it is a continuous activity) be charged to the
revenues of the concern. It may be spread over a number of years if
research is not a continuous activity and amount is large.
Cost of applied research, if it relates to all existing products and methods
of production then it should be treated as a manufacturing overhead of
the period during which it has been incurred and absorbed. Such costs
are directly charged to the product, if it is solely incurred for it.
If applied research is conducted for searching new products or methods
of production etc., then the research costs treatment depends upon the
outcome of such research. For example. If research findings are expected
to produce future benefits or if it appears that such findings are going to
result in failure then the costs incurred may be a mortised by charging to
the Costing Profit and Loss Accounts of one or more years depending
upon the size of expenditure. If research proves successful, then such
costs should be charged to the concerned product.
Development Costs, begins with the implementation of the decision to
produce a new or improved product or to employ a new or improved
method. The treatment of development expense s is same as that of
applied research.
(b) Packing Expenses:
It includes the expenses incurred on wrapping, tying, bottles, boxes,
containers or bags etc. In Cost Accounts they are treated as follows:
(i) It is treated as a direct material cost in the case of those products

which cannot be sold without the use of a packing. For example ink-
pot ; Bread; paste etc.
(ii) It may be treated as distribution overhead if packing expenses are
incurred to facilitate the transportation of finished products.
(iii) It may be treated as advertisement cost and included in selling
overheads if it is incurred for advertisement to make the product
attractive.
(c) Fringe Benefits:
Additional Benefits paid to the employees of a concern and are not
related to the direct efforts of the employees, are called fringe benefits.
They include holiday pay; leave pay; employers contribution to provident
fund; gratuity and pension schemes; state insurance; medical benefits;
subsidised facility etc.
Expenditure incurred on fringe benefits in the case of factory workers
should be treated as factory overheads and are apportioned among all
the production and service departments on the basis of the number of
workers in each department.
Fringe benefits to office and selling and distribution staff should be
treated as administration and selling and distribution overheads
respectively and are recovered accordingly.
(d) Expenses on Removal and Re- erection of Machinery:
Expenses are sometime incurred on removal and re -erection of
machinery in factories. Such expenses may be incurred due to factors like
change in the method of production; an addition or alteration in the
factory building, change in the follow of production, etc. All such
expenses are treated as production overheads. When amount of such
expenses is large, it may be spread over a period of time.
If such expenses are incurred due to faulty planning or some other
abnormal factor, then they may be charged to Costing Profit and Loss
Account.
Question 11
What do you understand by the term pre-determined rate of recovery of
overheads? What are the bases that are usually advocated for such pre-
determination? How do over absorption and under-absorption of overheads

arise and how are they disposed off in Cost Accounts?
Answer
The term pre-determined rate of recovery of overheads refers to a rate of
overhead absorption. It is calculated by dividing the budgeted overhead
expenses for the accounting period by the budgeted base for the period. This
rate of overhead absorption is determined prior to th e start of the activity; that
is why it is called a pre -determined rate. The use of the pre-determined rate of
recovery of overheads enables prompt preparation of cost estimates and
quotations and fixation of sales prices. For prompt billing on a provisional basis
before completion of work, as for example in the case of cost plus contracts, pre -
determined overhead rates are particularly useful.
Bases Available: The bases available for computing pre-determined rate of
recovery of overheads are given below:-
1. Rate per unit of output
2. Direct labour cost method
3. Direct labour hours method
4. Machine hour rate method
5. Direct material cost method
6. Prime cost method.
The choice of a suitable method for calculating pre-determined rate of
recovery of overhead, depends upon several factors. Some important ones are -
type of industry, nature of product and processes of manufacture, nature of
overhead expenses, organisational set-up, policy of management etc.
Reason for over/under absorption of overheads:Over-absorption of
overheads arises due to one or more of the following reasons.
(ii) Improper estimation of overhead.
(iii) Error in estimating the level of production.
(iv) Unanticipated changes in the methods or techniques of production.
(v) Under-utilisation of the available capacity.
(vi) Seasonal fluctuations in the overhead expenses from period to period.
Methods for absorbing under/over absorbed overheads: The over-
absorption and under-absorption of overheads can be disposed off in cost
accounting by using any one of the following me thods:
(i) Use of supplementary rates

(ii) Writing off to costing profit & loss Account
(iii) Carrying over to the next years account
(i) Use of supplementary rates: This method is used to adjust the difference
between overheads absorbed and overhead actually incurred by computing
supplementary overhead rates. Such rates may be either positive or
negative. A positive rate is intended to add the unabsorbed overheads to
the cost of production. The negative rate, however corrects the cost of
production by deducting the amount of over-absorbed overheads. The
effect of applying such a rate is to make the actual overhead get completely
absorbed.
(ii) Writing off to costing profit & loss account: When over or under-absorbed
amount is quite negligible and it is not felt worthwhile to abso rb it by using
supplementary rates, then the said amount be transferred to costing profit
& loss Account. In case under-absorption of overheads arises due to factors
like idle capacity, defective planning etc., it may also be transferred to
costing profit & loss Account.
(iii) Carrying over the next years account: Under this method the amount of
over/under absorbed overhead is carried over to the next period. This
method is not considered desirable as it allows costs of one period to affect
costs of another period. Further, comparison between one period and
another is rendered difficult. Therefore, this method is not proper and has
only a limited application. However, this method may be used when the
normal business cycle extends over more than one year, or in th e case of a
new project, the output is low in the initial years.
Question 12
(a) What do you mean by the term under/over absorption of production
overhead? How does it arise? How is it treated in cost account?
(b) In a factory, overhead of a particular department are recovered on the basis
of Rs. 5 per machine hour. The total expenses incurred and the actual
machine hours for the department for the month of August were Rs. 80,000
and 10,000 hours respectively. Of the amount of Rs. 80,000, Rs. 15,000
became payable due to an award of the Labour Court and Rs. 5,000 was in
respect of expenses of the previous year booked in the current month
(August). Actual production was 40,000 units of which 30,000 units were
sold. On analysing the reasons, it was found that 60% of the under absorbed
overhead was due to defective planning and the rest was attributed to
normal cost increase. How would you treat the under absorbed overhead in
the cost accounts?
Answer
(a) Production Overheads are usually applied to production on the basis of
predetermined rates .The pre-determined rates may be based on estimated
costs. The amount of expenses actually incurred and the amount of
overhead applied to production will seldom be the same. Some difference is
inevitable.
If the actual expenses fall short of the amount applied to production, there
is said to be an over absorption of production overheads. If the actual
expenses exceeds the amount applied to production, there is a case of
under absorption.
The under/over absorption of overheads arise due to the following reasons:
(1) Error in estimating overhead expenses.
(2) Error in estimating the level of production.
(3) Unanticipated changes in methods of production.
(4) Seasonal fluctuations in the overhead expenses from period to period.
Treatment of under/over absorption in Cost Accounts
Under/overabsorbed overheads may be treated in Cost Accounts by
adopting the following methods:
(i) Use of supplementary rates : In case, the amount of under or over absorbed
over-heads is la rge the cost of the jobs may be adjusted by means of a
supplementary rates The supplementary rate here is determined by dividing
the amount of under or over absorbed overhead by the actual base. Under
absorption of overheads is set right by increasing the rate of overhead
absorption to the extent of supplementary rate. Whereas in the case of
over- absorption of overheads, the rate of overhead absorption is reduced
to the extent of supplementary rate.
(ii) Write off to Costing Profit and Loss Account: When the amount of under-
or-over absorbed overheads is small the simple method is to write it off to
the Costing Profit and Loss Account.
(iii) Absorption in the accounts of subsequent years: The amount of under or
over absorbed overheads may be carried overas a deferred charge of
deferred credit to the next accounting year. This may be done by
transferring the amount either to a Suspense or Overhead Reserve Account.
(b) Under-absorbed Overhead Expenses during the month of August:
Rs.
Total Expenses incu rred in the month of August 80,000
Less: The amount paid according to labour court

award
(Assumed To be non - recurring) Rs. 15,000
Expenses of previous year Rs. 5,000 20,000
Net overhead expenses incurred for the month 60,000
Overhead recovered for 10,000 hours @ Rs. 5/- per 50,000
hour
Under absorbed overheads 10,000
Treatment of under absorbed overhead in the Cost Accounts
It is given in the question that 40,000 units were produced out of which
30,000 units were sold. It is also given that 60% of the under-absorbed
overhead was due to defective planning and the rest was attributed to
normal cost increase.
Rs.
1. 60 percent of under absorbed overhead is due to 6,000
defective planning. This being abnormal, should
be debited to Profit and Loss A/c (60% of Rs.
10,000)
2. Balance 40 percent of under-absorbed overhead 40,000
should be distributed over, Finished Goods and
Cost of Sales by supplementary rate (40% of Rs. ______
10,000)
10,000
Rs.4,000 may be distributed over Finished Goods and Cost of Sales as follows;
Finished Goods *Rs. 1,000
Cost of Sales *Rs. 3,000
*Working notes
Under absorbed overhead :Rs 4,000
Units produced : 40,000
Rate of Under- absorbed overhead Re. 0.10 per unit
recovery
Amount of underabsorbed overheads Rs. 1,000
charged to
finished goods (10,000 0.10P)
Amount of underabsorbed overheads Rs. 3,000
charged to
Cost of sales (30,000 0.10P)
Question 13
(a) Distinguish between allocation, apportionment and absorption of overheads.
(b) A departmental store has several departments. What bases would you
recommend for apportioning the following items of expense to its
departments
(1) Fire insurance of Building.
(2) Rent
(3) Delivery Expenses.
(4) Purchase Department Expenses.
(5) Credit Department Expenses.
(6) General Administration Expenses.
(7) Advertisement.
(8) Sales Assistants Salaries.
(9) Personal Department expenses.
(10) Sales Commission
Answer
(a) Distinguish between Allocation, Apportionment and Absorption of
Overheads:
Allocation: According to ICMA terminology: the allotment of whole items
of cost to cost centres or cost units, is known as alloca tion.
Apportionment: The allotment to two or more cost centres of a
proportions of common items of cost on the estimated basis of benefit received
is known as apportionment.
Absorption of Overheads : It is defined as the process of absorbing all

overhead costs allocated or apportioned over particular cost centre or
production department by the units produced.
Allocation of cost involves the process of charging total expenditure to cost
centres or cost units while the apportionment of overheads involves the process
of charging expenditures to cost centres or cost units in the specified
proportions.
Absorption of overheads takes place only after the allocation and
apportionment of overhead expenses. In other words , the overhead costs are
either allocated or apportioned over different cost centres r cost units and
afterwards they are absorbed basis by the output of the same cost centres.
(b) Items of expenses Basis For apportioning
(1) Fire Insurance of Building. Floor Area
(2) Rent Floor Area
(3) Delivery Expenses. Volume or Distance or Weight
(4) Purchase department Expenses No. of Purchase order/Value of
Purchases
(5) Credit Department Expenses. Credit Sales Value
(6) General Administration Expenses. Works cost
(7) Advertisement. Actual sales
(8) Sales Assistants Salaries. Actual/Time devoted
(9) Personal Department expenses. No. of Employees
(10) Sales Commission Actual
Question 14
Define administration overheads and state briefly the treatment of such
overheads in Cost Accounts. (Nov. 1996, 4 marks)
Answer
Definition of Administration Overhead: These are costs of formulating the
policy, directing the organisation and controlling the operation of an
undertaking. These are not related directly to production activity or function. In
other words, all expenses, incurred on policy formulation, direction, control,
office administration and business management are included in administration
overheads.
Treatment of Administrative Overheads in Cost Accounting
(i) Charge to Costing Profit and Loss Account: According to this method
administrative overheads should be treated as fixed cost as they are
concerned with the formulation of policy. Hence these overheads

should be transferred to the Costing Profit and Loss Account.
(ii) Apportionment between Production and Selling and Distribution:
According to this method, it is assumed that administrative overheads
are incurred both for production and for selling and distribution.
Therefore these overheads should be divided on some equitable basis
between production and selling and distribution activity.
(iii) Treat as a separate element of total cost: Here administration
overheads are considered as a cost of a distinct and identifiable
operation of the organisation necessary to carry on its activity.
Therefore these overheads are recovered separately on some equitable
basis which may be on cost or sales basis.
Question 15
Enumerate the arguments for the inclusion of interest on capital in cost
accounts.
Answer
Arguments for the inclusion of interest on capital in cost accounts:
1. Interest is the cost of capital as wages are the reward for labour. Both are
factors of production and, therefore should not be treated differently in cost
accounts. While determining the total cost, interest like wages should also
be included in the cost of production.
2. The exclusion of interest from cost accounts, particularly in businesses
where raw material is used in different states of readiness would distort
costs and render their comparison a difficult one.
3. Profi t on different jobs/ operations requiring different periods for
completion may not be comparable if interest on capital is not included in
their total cost,
4. Sometime exclusion of interest cost may lead the management to take
wrong decisions.
5. The significance of time value of money is recognized only when interest is
treated as an element of cost.
Question 16
What is blanket overhead rate? In which situations, blanket rate is to be
used and why?
(May 1999, 3 marks)
Answer
Blanket overhead rate is one single overhead absorption rate for the whole
factory. It may be computed by using the following formulae:
Overhead cos ts for the whole factory
Blanket overhead rate =
* Total units of the selected base
* The selected base can be the total output; total labour hours; machine hours
etc.
Situation for using blanket rate:
The use of blanket rate may be considered appropriate for factories which
produce only one major product on a continuous basis. It may also be used in
those units in which all products utilise same amount of time in each
department. If such conditions do not exist, the use of blanket rate will give
misleading results in the determination of the production cost , specially when
such a cost ascertainment is carried out for giving quotations and tenders.
Question 17
What is Idle Capacity ? How should this be treated in cost accounts?
(May 1997, 6 marks)
Answer
Idle Capacity:
It is that part of the practical capacity which cannot be utilised due to lack of
demand, non availability of materials, skilled labour, shortage of powe r, fuel or
supplies, seasonal nature of product and lower sales expectancy. Idle capacity in
fact is the difference between the practical capacity and the capacity based on
sales expectancy. In brief, idle capacity is unused capacity of a plant, equipment
or department which cannot be used gainfully. It usually arises due to factors
which the management of a business concern considers beyond its control.
Idle capacity is associated with costs which are represented mostly by fixed
charges such as depreciation, repairs and maintenance, insurance premium,
rent, rates, management supervisory costs, which cannot be absorbed or
recovered due to under utilisation of plant capacity.
Treatment of Idle Capacity in cost accounts:
Idle capacity costs may be normal orabnormal. These costs may be treated
in the following ways in cost accounts.
(i) Normal Idle capacity cost due to unavoidable reasons may be included in
works overheads and be absorbed into the cost of production either by
inflating the overhead rate or by means of a supplementary overhead rate.
(ii) Abnormal Idle Capacity cost due to avoidable reasons such as lack of proper
planning and control should be charged to costing profit and loss account.
(iii) Idle Capacity cost due to trade depression is abnormal in nature and thus it
should be charged to costing profit and loss account.
Question 18
Discuss the step method and reciprocal service
method of secondary distribution of overheads.
Answer
Step method and Reciprocal Service method of secondary distribution
of overheads
Step method: This method gives cognisance to the service rendered by
service department to another service dep't, thus sequence of apportionments
has to be selected. The sequence here begins with the dep't that renders service
to the max number of other service dep't. After this, the cost of service dep't
serving the next largest number of dep't is apportioned.
Reciprocal service method: This method recognises the fact that where
there are two or more service dep't, they may render service to each other and,
therefore, these inter dep't services are to be given due weight while re -
distributing the expense of service dep't. The methods available for dealing with
reciprocal servicing are:
Simultaneous equation method
Repeated distribution method
Trial and error method
Question 19
Discuss the treatment of under absorbed and over-absorbed factory
overheads in Cost Accounting. (May, 2004,4 marks)
Answer
Treatment of under absorbed and over absorbed factory overheads in
cost accounting.
Factory overheads are usually applied to production on the basis pre-
determined rate
Estimated normal overheads for the period
=
Budgeted No. of units during the period
The possible options for treating under / over absorbed overheads are
Use supplementary rate in the case of substantial amount of
under / over absorption
Write it off to the costing profit & loss account in the event of
insignificant amount / or abnormal reasons.
Carry toward to accounting period if operating cycle exceeds one
year.
Question 20
Discuss the problems of controlling the selling and distribution overheads

Answer
Problems of controlling the selling & distribution overheads are
(i) The incidence of selling & distribution overheads depends on external
factors such as distance of market, nature of competition etc. which are
beyond the control of management.
(ii) They are dependent upon customers' behaviour, liking etc.
(iii) These expenses are of the nature of policy costs and hence not amenable
to control.
The above problems of controlling selling & distribution overheads can be
tackled by adopting the following steps:
(a) Comparing the figures of selling & distribution overhead with the
figures of previous period.
(b) Selling & distribution overhead bud gets may be used to control
such overhead expenses by making a comparison of budgetary figures
with actual figures of overhead expenses, ascertaining variances and
finally taking suitable actions,
(c) Standards of selling & distribution expenses may be set up for
salesmen, territories, products etc. The laid down standards on
comparison with actual overhead expenses will reveal variances, which
can be controlled by suitable action.
Question 21
Distinguish between cost allocation and cost absorption
Answer
Cost allocation and Cost absorption:
Cost allocation is the allotment of whole item of cost to a cost centre or a
cost unit. In other words, it is the process of identifying, assigning or allowing
cost to a cost centre or a co st, unit.
Cost absorption is the process of absorbing all indirect costs or overhead
costs allocated to apportioned over particular cost center or production
department by the units produced.
Question 22
Discuss in brief three main methods of allocating support departments
costs to operating departments. Out of these three, which method is conceptually
preferable.
Answer
The three main methods of allocating support departments costs to
operating departments are:
(i) Direct re-distribution method: Under this method, support department
costs are directly apportioned to various production departments only. This
method does not consider the service provided by one support department
to another support department.
(ii) Step method: Under this method the cost of the support departments that
serves the maximum numbers of departments is first apportioned to other
support departments and production departments. After this the cost of
support department serving the next largest number of departments is
apportioned. In this manner we finally arrive on the cost of production
departments only.
(iii) Reciprocal service method: This method recognises the fact that where there
are two or more support departments they may render services to each
other and, therefore, these inter-departmental services are to be given due
weight while re-distributing the expenses of the support departments. The
methods available for dealing with reciprocal services are:
(a) Simultaneous equation method
(b)Repeated distribution method
(c) Trial and error method.
The reciprocal service method is conceptually preferable. This method is
widely used even if the number of service departments are more than two
because due to the availability of computer software it is not difficult to
solve sets of simultaneous equations.
Question 23
Write short notes on Chargeable Expenses (November 1994, 4 marks)
Answer
Chargeable Expenses: These are the expenses which can be charged
directly to jobs, products, process, cost centers or cost units. These are also
known as direct expenses. Depending on the situation, the same item of expense
may be treated as a chargeable expense or an indirect cost. For example, the
rent charges of a machine specifically hired to complete a particular job will be a
direct charge on the job. But if the same machine is used for various purposes,
then the rent charges will be treated as an indirect cost and are apportioned to
concerned cost centers on an equitable basis. The following may also be treated
as chargeable expenses in relation to a product or job:
1. Cost of patents.
2. Hire charge in respect of special machinery or plant.
3. Architects, surveyors and other consultant's fees.
4. Travelling expenses to site.
5. Freight inward on special material.
Question 24
Explain Single and Multiple Overhead Rates. (November, 2000, 4
marks)
Answer
Single and Multiple Overhead Rates:
Single overhead rate: It is one single overhead absorption rate for the
whole factory.
It may be computed as follows:
Overhead costs for the entire factory
Single overhead rate =
Total quantity of the base selected
The base can be total output, total labour hours, total machine
hours, etc.
The single overhead rate may be applied in factories which
produces only one major product on a continuous basis. It may also be
used in factories where the work performed in each department is fairly
uniform and standardized.
Multiple overhead rate: It involves computation of separate rates
for each production department, service department, cost center and
each product for both fixed and variable overheads. It may be
computed as follows:
Multiple overhead rate
Overheadallocated/appportioned to each department/cost centre or product
=
Corresponding base
Under multiple overhead rates, jobs or products are charged with
varying amount of factory overheads depending on the type and
number of departments through which they pass. However, the number
of overhead rates which a firm may compute would depend upon two
opposing factors viz. the degree of accuracy desired and the clerical
cost involved.
Question 25
What is notional rent of a factory building? Give one reason why it may
be included in cost accounts. (November, 1995, 2 marks)
Answer
Notional Rent: It is a reasonable charge raised in the cost accounts for
the use of owned premises. One reason for the use of sucha nominal charge is
to enable comparison between the cost of items made in factories which are
owned and in rented factories. However, it may be noted that in the case of
owned factory, cost for the same is accounted for by means of depreciation.
Question 26
How do you deal with the following in cost accounts?
(i) Fringe benefits
(ii) Bad debts. (November, 1999, 4 marks)
Answer
Treatment of Cost Accounts
(i) Fringe benefits: the benefits paid to workers in every organisation in
addition to their normal wage or salary are known as fringe benefits. They
include Housing facility, children education allowance, holiday pay, leave
pay, leave travel concession to home town or any place in India, etc.
Expenditure incurred on fringe benefits in respect of factory workers should
be apportioned among all the production and service departments on the
basis of the number of workers in each department.
(ii) Bad debts: There is no unanimity among various authors about the
treatment of bad debts. Some authors believe that bad debts are financial
losses and therefore should not be included in the cost of a particular
product or job. Another view is that, bad debts are a part of selling and
distribution overhead, especially where they arise in the normal course of
trading. Therefore they should be treated in cost accounts in the same way
as any other selling and distribution expense.
Question 27
How would you treat the following in Cost Accounts?
(i) Employee welfare costs (2 marks)
(ii) Research and development costs (2 marks)
(iii) Depreciation (May, 1996) (2 marks)
Answer
(i) Employee Welfare Costs: It includes those expenses, which are incurred by
the employers on the welfare activities of their employees. The welfare
activities on which these expenses are usually incurred may include canteen,
hospital, play grounds, etc. These expenses should be separately recorded
as Welfare Department Costs. These Costs may be apportioned to
production cost centres on the basis of total wages or the number of men
employed by them,
(ii) Research and development costs: It is the cost/expense incurred for
searching new or improved products, production methods/techniques or
plants/equipments. Re search cost may be incurred-for carrying basic or
applied research. Both basic and applied research relates to original

investigations to gain from new scientific or technical knowledge and
understanding, which is not directed towards any specific practical aim
(under basic research) and is directed towards a specific practical aim or
objective (under applied research).
Treatment in Cost Accounts: Cost of Basic Research (if it is a continuous
activity) be charged to the revenues of the concern. It may be spread over a
number of years if research is not a continuous activity and amount is large.
Cost of applied research, if relates -to all existing products and methods of
production then it should be treated as a manufacturing overhead of the
period during which it has been incurred and absorbed. Such costs are
directly charged to the product, it is solely incurred for it.
If applied research is conducted for searching new products or methods of
production etc. then the research costs treatment depends upon the
outcome of such research. For example, if research findings are expected to
produce future benefits or if it appears that such findings are going to result
in failure then the costs incurred may be amortised by charging to the
Costing Profit and Loss Account of one or more years depending upon the
size of expenditure. If research proves successful, then such costs will be
charged to the concerned product.
Development Costs begins with the implementation of the decision to
produce a new or improved product or to employ a new or improved
method. The treatment of development expenses is same as that of applied
research.
(iii) Depreciation: It represents the fall in the asset value due to its use, wear
and tear and passage of time. Depreciation is an indirect cost of production
and operations. It is an important element of cost and without this true cost
of production cannot be obtained. In costing; depreciation on plant and
machinery is normally treated as part of the factory overheads.
Question 28
Write a note on 'classification', 'allocation' and 'absorption' of overheads.
How does it help in controlling overheads? (May, 1998, 5 marks)
Answer
Classification of overheads:
It, means determination of categories, classes or groups in which
overhead costs may he sub-divided.
Usually, overhead costs are classified under three broad categories viz,
Factory Overheads; Office and administrative Overheads and Selling and
distribution Overheads.
Factory overheads represent all those indirect costs that are incurred in
the manufacturing process. For example, consumable stores, factory rent,
depreciation of plant, factory building, repairs and maintenance.
Office and administrative overheads represent costs which are associated
with the administration and maintenance of the office.
Selling and distribution overheads are the expenses incurred for selling
and distribution of products. It includes salaries of sales staff and commission;
sales -promotion expenses; advertising expenses, warehousing costs etc.
Allocation of overheads:
It refers to the allotment of whole items of overhead cos t to cost centres
or cost units. In other words, allocation of overhead means the allotment of the
whole, undivided items of expense to a particular department or cost centre. For
example, departmental salaries directly related to various departments are
allocated to them.
Absorption of overheads:
It is defined as the process of absorbing all overhead costs allocated or
apportioned over particular cost centre or production department by the units
produced.
Absorption of overheads takes place only after th e allocation and
apportionment of overhead expenses. In other words, the overhead costs are
either allocated or apportioned over different cost centres or cost units and
afterwards they are absorbed on equitable basis by the output of the same cost
centres.
Help rendered in controlling overheads:
The classification, allocation and absorption of overhead costs over
different cost centres helps in two ways. Firstly, the overhead costs assigned to
cost centres are used for cost control and performance evaluation purposes.
These assigned costs are periodically totaled and listed on performance report
which also has the figures of budgeted costs. Differences between budgeted and
actual costs for each item of expenditure are highlighted in the performance
reports and provide feedback information for performance evaluation and cost
control purposes. Secondly, the accumulated production cost centre overhead,
costs are assigned in the second stage of the procedure to products to satisfy
financial accounting requirements for inventory valuation.
Question 29
Distinguish between fixed and variable overheads.

Answer
Fixed and Variable Overheads: Fixed overhead expenses do not vary with
the volume of production within certain limits. In other words, the amount of
fixed overhead tends to remain constant for volumes of production within the
installed capacity of plant. For example, rent of office, salary of works manger,
etc.
Variable overhead cost varies in direct proportion to the volume of
production. It increases or decreases in direct relation to any increase or
decrease in output.
Question 30
How would you treat the idle capacity costs in Cost Accounts? (November,
2001, 4 marks)
Answer
Treatment of idle capacity cost in Cost Accounts:
It is that part of the capa city of a plant, machine or equipment which
cannot be effectively utilised in production. The idle capacity may arise due to
lack of product demand, no availability of raw-material, shortage of skilled
labour, shortage of power, etc. Costs associated with idle capacity are mostly
fixed in nature. These costs remain unabsorbed or unrecovered due to under-
utilisation of plant and service capacity. Idle capacity costs are treated in the
following ways in Cost Accounts.
(i) If the idle capacity cost is due to unavoidable reasons - a supplementary
overhead rate may be used to recover the idle capacity cost. In this case, the
costs are charged to the production capacity utilised.
(ii) If the idle capacity cost is due to avoidable reasons - such as faulty planning,
etc. the cost should be charged to Costing Profit and Loss Account.
(iii) If the idle capacity cost is due to trade depression, etc., - being abnormal in
nature the cost should also be charged to the Costing Profit and Loss
Account.
Question 31
Select a suitable unit of cost to be used in the following:
(i) Hospital
(ii) City Bus Transport
(iii) Hotels providing lodging facilities (May, 2002, 3 marks)
Answer
Industry of Product Unit of cost
(i) Hospital Patient bed / day
(ii) City Bus Transport Passenger km.
(iii) Hotels providing lodging facilities Room / day
Question 32
Discuss the treatment in cost accounts of the cost of small tools of short
effective life.
Answer
Small tools are mechanical appliances used for various operations on a
work place, specially in engineering industries. Such tools include drill bits,
chisels, screw cutter, files etc.
Treatment of cost of small tools of short effective life:
(i) Small tools purchased may be capitalized and depreciated over life if their
life is ascertainable. Revaluation method of depreciation may be used in
respect of very small tools of short effective life. Depreciation of small tools
may be charged to:
Factory overheads
Overheads of the department using the small tool.
(ii) Cost of small tools should be charged fully to the departments to which they
have been issued, if their life is not ascertainable.
Question 33
Ventilators Ltd. wants to stabilize its production throughout the year. The
approaches recommended are:
(a) Maintain production at an even pace throughout the year, and get the off-
season production stored on the premises.
(b) Maintain production at an even pace but offer dealers a special discount for
off-season purchases.
(c) Extend special terms to dealers, but maintain prices at levels that will enable
regular movement of goods throughout the year.
Discuss the relative merits and disadvantages of above proposals.
Answer
The relative merits and disadvantages of the three approaches
recommended by Ventilators Ltd. are discussed below:
Approach (a)
Merits
(1) It will help the concern to make full and effective use of the plant,
manpower and other resources.
(2) It will place the concern in a better position to meet the demand of the
customers during the season.
(3) It will help in reducing costs per unit by avoiding shut down costs and
maintaining production at an even pace and, thus, score over competitors.
(4) It will help the organisation to deal effectively with unforeseen
ci rcumstances such as labour strike or load shedding, etc.
Disadvantages
(1) Storing productions during the off-season will involve extra interest costs
because of the need for higher working capital.
(2) In case of seasonal consumer items, production throughout the year may
involve a high degree of risk. For example, if a concern dealing in ready-
made garments for winter builds up a large inventory, it may suffer heavy
losses due to fashion changes.
(3) The firm may face difficulty in meeting its short-term financial commitments
due to cash outflows even during the off-season.
Approach (b)
Merits
(1) It involves less working capital in comparison with proposal (a).
(2) It will have a higher inventory turnover ratio, which will account for the
increase of profit at a faster rate
(3) It reduces risk of deterioration, obsolescence, etc. Here the risk is, in fact,
passed on to the dealers.
(4) It will reduce the inventory carrying cost.
Disadvantages
(1) It may reduce profitability of the firm, depending on the rate of discount
to be offered.
(2) Dealers may offer the same lower price during the season as well, affecting
sale for the year as a whole.
Approach (c)
Merits
(1) It will ensure a regular product market round the year.
(2) It will provide management ample time to think either of diversifying or
entering into allied products.
These two merits are in addition to those stated under (b).
Disadvantages
(1) It gives a low margin of profit
(2) It is really difficult to maintain regular movement of a product having a
seasonal demand only.
Proposal (b) appears to be more suitable for achieving the objectives of
stabilising the production at an even pace throughout the year but the effect on
profits needs to be very carefully seen.
Question 34
Treatm ent of Interest paid in Cost Account.
Answer
(a) Treatment of Interest Paid in Cost Accounts:There is a wide difference of
opinion among accountants about the treatment of interest paid on capital
in Cost Accounts. Some favour its inclusion in the costs while others say that
interest, being a financial charge should not be included in Cost Accounts.
The following are the arguments given in favour of inclusion of interest in
cost computations:
1. It is argued that interest is the cost of capital as wages are the
reward for labour. Both are factors of production. Therefore if wages
are included in cost of production, why not interest.
2. The exclusion of interest from Cost Accounts would distort cost in
certain industries like wine-making timber-maturi ng, etc., where the
waiting period is long. For example, a timber merchant may buy
standing trees and then season the timber himself, waiting for a
number of years before he can use or sell it. Another merchant may buy
already seasoned timber which is ready for use or sale. The latter will
pay a much higher price per unit. One of the reasons for this higher
price may be on account of interest charges on the investment during
the period when timber was seasoned. Therefore, for proper
comparison of costs, the former timber merchant must add interest on
funds invested for the period he had to wait.
3. Without inclusion of interest on capital, profits on different jobs
or operations may not be comparable.
4. Many times exclusion of interest cost may lead the management
to take wrong decisions, particularly in the case of replacement of
human labour by machines. It would be wrong to accept any capital
expenditure proposal without taking into account the interest on capital
investment along with other costs of operations.
5. The significance of time -value of money is recognised only when
interest is treated as an clement of cost. A person can invest his money
in government or other safe securities and get regular income without
much efforts. If he invests the same money in business, he should
include interest in his costs to arrive at the true profits from the
business which may be considered as his reward for his exertions.
Arguments against the inclusion of interest in Cost Accounts are:
1. Payment of interest by a firm depends purely on its financial
policies. It is argued that interest is a purely financial matter and,
therefore, cannot be treated as an element of cost.
2. It is not easy to calculate the interest cost on capital. Its

calculation may lead to various complications because of different
interpretations of the term capital, e.g., owner's capital, fixed capital,
capital employed, etc.
3. Moreover, determination of a proper rate of interest will also
pose a problem. In the market, there exists a variety of rates which are
affected by a number of factors such as risk period of maturity, bank
rate etc.
4. Where one manufactures a number of products, interest on
capital is difficult to apportion to each product as no specific basis for
apportionment is acceptable.
In conclusion it may be said that atleast on the ground of practical
difficulty, interest need not be recorded in cost accounts. But it should
certainly be taken into account while making cost comparisons and
preparing cost reports formanagement decisions (specially pricing
decisions).
Question 35
Explain, how under absorption and over-absorption of overheads are
treated in Cost Accounts. (November, 1998, 4 marks)
Answer
Production overheads are generally recovered or charged on the goods
on some predetermined basis. Irrespective of the method used for the recovery
of overheads, it has been observed that a difference arises between the amount
of overheads absorbed and the amount of overheads actually incurred. If the
absorbed amount is more than the overheads actually incurred then such a
difference is termed as an over absorption of overheads. If the recovery is less
than the actual overheads incurred then the difference is termed as under
absorption of overheads. The over- absorbed and under-absorbed amount of
overheads can be treated in Cost Accounts by following any one of the methods
explained below:
Cost Accounts treatment of under-absorption and over- absorption of
overheads:
The under-absorption and over-absorption of overheads can be disposed
off in cost accounting by using any one of the following methods.
(i) Use of supplementary rates
(ii) Writing off to Costing Profit & Loss Account
(iii) Carrying over to the next year's account
(i) Use of supplementary rates: This method is used to adjust the

difference between overheads absorbed arid overheads actually
incurred by computing supplementary overhead rates. Such rates may
be either positive or negative. A positive rate is intended to add the
unabsorbed overheads to the cost of production. The negative rate,
however corrects the cost of production by deducting the amount of
over-absorbed overheads. The effect of applying such a rate is to make
the actual overheads get completely absorbed.
(ii) Writing off to Costing Profit & Loss Account: When under or over-
absorbed amount is quite negligible and it is not felt worthwhile to
absorb it by using supplementary rates, then the said amount may be
transferred to Costing Profit & Loss Account. In case under-absorption
of overheads arises due to factors like idle capacity, defective planning
etc., it may also be transferred to Costing Profit & Loss Account.
(iii) Carrying over to the next year's account: Under this method the
amount of under/over-absorbed overhead may be carried over to the
next year's account. This method is not considered appropriate as it
allows costs of one period to affect costs of another period. Further,
comparison between one period and another is rendered difficult.
Therefore, this method is not proper and has only a limited application.
However, this method may be used when the normal business cycle
extends over more than one year, or in the case of a new project where
the output is low in the initial years.
Question 36
How do you deal with the following in Cost Account?
(i) Research and Development Expenses
(ii) Fringe benefits (November, 1998, 4 marks)
Answer
(i) Research and Development Expense: Research and Development expense
is the expense incurred for searching new or improved products, p roduction
methods / techniques or plants / equipments. Research expense may be
incurred for carrying basic or applied research. Both basic and applied
research relates to original investigations to gain from new scientific or
technical knowledge and unders tanding, which is not directed towards any
specific practical aim (under basic research) and is directed towards a
specific practical aim or objective (under applied research).
Treatment in Cost Accounts: Expense of Basic Research (if it is a
continuous a ctivity) be charged to the revenues of the concern. It may be spread
over a number of years if research is not a continuous activity and amount is

large.
Expense of applied research, if relates to all existing products and
methods of production then it should be treated as a manufacturing overhead of
the period during which it has been incurred and absorbed. Such expenses are
directly charged to the product, if it is solely incurred for it.
If applied research is conducted for searching new product or methods of
production etc., then the research expense treatment depends upon the
outcome of such research. For example, if research findings are expected to
produce future benefits or if it appears that such findings are going to result in
failure then the co sts incurred may be a mortised by charging to the Costing
Profit and Loss Account of one or more years depending upon the size of
expenditure. If research proves successful,, then such costs will be charged to
the concerned product.
Development expenses begins with the implementation of the decision
to produce a new or improved product or to employ a new or improved method.
The treatment of development expenses is same as that of applied research.
(ii) Fringe benefits: In every organisation, workers are paid some benefits in
addition to their normal wage or salary. These additional benefits are popularly
called fringe benefits. They include :
(i) Housing
(ii) Children education allowance
(iii) Holiday pay
(iv) Leave pay
(v) Leave travel concession to home town or any place in India etc.
Expenses incurred on fringe benefits in respect of factory workers should
be treated as factory overheads and apportioned among the production and
service departments on the basis of number of workers in each department.
Fringe benefits to office and selling and distribution staff should be
treated as administration overheads and selling and distribution overheads
respectively and recovered accordingly.
Question 37
Soloproducts Ltd. Manufactures and sells a single product and has estimated
a sales revenue of Rs 126 lakhs this year based on a 20% profit on selling price.
Each unit of the product requires 3 lbs of material P and 1 lbs of material Q for
manufacture as well as a processing time of 7 hours in the Machine Shop and 2
hours in the Assembly Section. Overheads are absorbed at a blanket rate of 33-
1/3% on Direct Labour. The factory works 5 days of 8 hours a week in a normal
52 weeks a year. On an average statutory holidays, leave and absenteeism and

idle time amount to 96 hours, 80 hours and 64 hours respectively, in a year.
The other details are as under
Purchase price Material P Rs. 6 per lb
Material Q Rs 4 per lb
Comprehensive
Labour rate Machine shop Rs 4 per hour
Assembly Rs 3.20 per hour
No. of Employees Machine shop 600
Assembly 180
Finished Goods Material P
Material Q
Opening stock 20,000 units 54,000 lbs 33,000
lbs
Closing stock (Estimated) 25,000 units 30,000 lbs 66,000
lbs
You are required to calculate:
(a) The number of units of the product proposed to be sold.
(b) Purchased to be made of materials P and Q during the year in Rupees.
(c) Capacity utilization of machine shop and Assembly section, along with your
comments.
Answer
Working Notes:
1. Statement of selling price per unit of the product
Material cost
Rs
P: 3 lbs x Rs.6 = Rs. 18
Q: 1.5 lbs x Rs.4 = Rs. 6
24
Labour cost
Machine shop 7 hrs x Rs.
4 = Rs. 28
Assembly shop 2.5 hrs x
Rs.3.20 = Rs. 8 36
Overheads
33- 1/ 3% of Direct Labour
Cost 12
Cost (per unit) 72

Add: Profit 20% of selling
price or 25% on cost 18
Selling price (per unit)
90
2. The comprehensive labour rate has been assumed as direct labour.
(a) The number of units of the product proposed to be sold
Selling price (per unit) Rs. 90
Total sales revenue Rs.
1,26,00,000
Number of units of the product proposed to be sold 1,40,000 Units
Rs. 1,26,00,000
Rs. 90
(b) Statement of material P and Q to be purchased during the year in
Rupees
Materials Material Closing Opening Material Purchase Amount
Consumption balance balance to be price
of of purchased
(lbs) material material Rs. Rs.
(lbs) (lbs) (lbs)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (2)+(3)- (6) (5)x(6)=(7)
(4)=(5)
P *1,45,0000 x
3 = 4,35,000 30,000 54,000 4,11,000 6 24,66,000
Q 1,45,000x1.5 66,000 33,000 2,50,500 4 10,02,000
= 2,17,500
Total 34,68,000
Working Note:
Number of units of finished goods to be manufactured during the year
= Sales (units) during the year + Closing balance Opening stock
= 1,40,000 units +25,000 units 20,000 units
= 1,45,000 units
(c) Capacity Utilisation Statement of Machine shop and Assembly Section
Machine shop Assembly Section
Hours available during the 600 persons x 1,840 180 Persons x 1,840 hrs.
year (See working note) hrs. = 3,31,200
Hours required to =11,04,000 1,45,000 x 2.5 hrs.
manufacture 1,45,000 units
1,45,000 x 7 hrs. =3,62,500

=10,15,000
Surplus/(Deficit) hours 89,000 (31,300)
Capacity utilisation 91.94% 109.45%
Working note:
Hours available during the year: 2080 hrs.
5 days x 8 hrs x 52 weeks
Less: Statutory holidays, leave and 240 hrs.
absenteeism & idle time
(96 hrs. +80 hrs. + 64 hrs.)
1,840 hrs .
Comments: From the statement of hours required to manufacture 1,45,000
units of the product, it is apparent that the total hours required in machine shop
and assembly section would be 10,15,000 and 3,62,500 respectively. Whereas
the available hours in machine shop and assembly section are 11,04,000 and
3,31,200 respectively. In this way there are 89,000 surplus hours in the machine
shop and also a deficit of 31,300 hours in the assembly section. To resolve the
problem of deficit in assembly section, following suggestions are made:
1. If the workers can be interchangeable then the assembly section utilize the
services of workers which may be transferred from the machine shop to
meet the production target of 1,45,000 units.
2. If the workers are not interchangeable then the assembly section may either
resort to overtime or increase the strength of workers to catch up the
budgeted production. Under both the ways i.e resorting to overtime or
increasing the strength in assembly section, the profit of the concern will be
reduced.
Question 38
In a factory following the job costing Method, an abstract from the work in
process as at 30th September was prepared as under:
Job No. Material Director Factory overheads
Labour Applied
Rs. Rs. Rs.
115 1,325 400 hours 800 640
118 810 250 hours 500 400
120 765 300 hours 475 380
2,900 1,775 1,420

Material used in October were as follows :
Material Job Cost
requisition
No. No. Rs.
54 118 300
55 118 425
56 118 515
57 120 665
58 121 910
59 124 720
3,535
A summary of Labour Hours deployed during October is as under:
Job no Number of Hours
Shop A Shop B
115 25 25
118 90 30
120 75 10
121 65
124 20 10
275 75
Indirect Labour:
Waiting for material 20 10
Machine Breakdown 10 5
Indle time 5 6
Overtime Premium 6 5
316 101
A shop credit slip was issued in October, that material issued under
Requisition No. 54 was returned back to stores as being not suitable. A material
Transfer Note issued in October indicated that material issued under requisition
No.55 for job 118 was directed to job 124.
The hourly rate in shop A per labour hour is Rs. 3 per hour while at shop B, it
is Rs. 2 per hour. The Factory Overhead is applied at the same rate as in
September. Jobs 115, 118 and 120 were completed in October.
You are asked to compute the factory cost of the completed jobs. It is the
practice of the management to put a 10% on the factory cost to cover
administration and selling overheads and invoice the job to the customer on a
total cost plus 20% basis. What would be the invoice price of these three jobs?
Answer
Factory Cost Statement of Completed Jobs
Month Job No. Materials Direct Factory Factory
labour Overheads cost
(80% of
direct
labour cost)
Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs.
September 115 1,325 800 640 2,765
October 115 125 100 225
Total 1,325 925 740 2,990
September 118 810 500 400 1,710
October 118 515 330 264 1,109
Total 1,325 830 664 2,819
September 120 765 475 380 1,620
October 120 665 245 196 1,106
Total 1,430 720 576 2,726
Invoice price of completed jobs
Job no. 115 118 120
Rs. Rs. Rs.
Factory cost 2,990 2,819 2,726
Administration and Selling
overheads @ 10% of factory
cost 299 281..90 272.6
Total Cost 3,289 3,100.90 2,998.60
Profit 657.80 620.18 599.72
(20% of Total cost)
Invo ice price 3,946.80 3,721.08 3.598.32
Note: In the above solution it has been assumed that indirect labour costs
have been included in the factory overhead and they have been
recovered as 80% of the labour cost.
Question 39
Modern manufacturers Ltd. Have three production department P1, P2 and

P3 and two Service Departments S1 and S2 the details pertaining to which are as
under:-
P1 P2 P3 S1 S2
Direct Wages (Rs.) 3,000 2,000 3,000 1,500 195
Working Hours 3,070 4,475 2,419
Value of Machines 60,000 80,000 1,00,000 5,000 5,000
(Rs.)
HP of Machines 60 30 50 10
Light Points 10 15 20 10 5
Floor space (Sq.Ft.) 2,000 2,500 3,000 2,000 500
The following figures extracted from the Accounting records are relevant:
Rs.
Rent and Rates 5,.000
General Lighting 600
Indirect Wages 1,939
Power 1,500
Depreciation on Machines 10,000
Sundries 9,695
The expenses of the service departments are allocated as under:-
P1 P2 P3 S1 S2
S1 20% 30% 40% 10%
S2 40% 20% 30% 10%
Find out the total cost of product X which is processed for manufacture in
Departments P1, P2 and P3 for 4,5 and 3 hours respectively, given that its Direct
Material cost in Rs. 50 Direct Labour cost Rs.30.
Answer
Statement Showing Distribution of Overheads of Modern Manufacturers Ltd.
Particulars Production Depts. Service Depts.
Basis Total P1 P2 P3 S1 S2
Rent and Area 5,000 1,000 1,250 1,500 1,000 250
Rates
General Light points 600 100 150 200 100 50
Lighting
Indirect Direct 1,939 600 400 600 300 39

Wages Wages
Power H.P. 1,500 600 300 500 100
Depreciation Value of 10,000 2,400 3,200 4,000 200 200
of machines machines
Sundries Direct 9,695 3,000 2,000 3,000 1,500 195
Wages
28,734 7,700 7,300 9,800 3,200 734
Redistribution of Service Departments Expenses Over
Production Departments
Total P1 P2 P3 S1 S2
Total Overheads 28,734 7,700 7,300 9,800 3,200 734
Dept. S1 3,200 640 960 1,280 320
Overheads 3,200
apportioned in the
ratio (20:30:40: :
10)
Dept. S2 1,054 421.60 210.80 316.02 105.40
Overheads 1.054
apportioned in the
ratio
(40:20:30:10:)
Dept. S1 105.40 21.08 31.62 42.16 10.54
Overheads 105.40
apportioned in the
ratio (20:30:40: - :
10)
Dept. S2 10.54 4.22 2.11 3.16 1.05 -10.54
Overheads
apportioned in the
ratio
(40:20:30:10:)
Dept. S1 1.05 0.21 0.32 0.42 -1.05 0.10

Overheads
apportioned in the
ratio (20:30:40:
10)
Dept. S2 0.10 0.05 0.02 0.03 -0.10
Overheads
apportioned in the
ratio
(40:20:30:10:)
Total 8,787.16 8,504.87 11,441.79
Working hours 3,070 4,475 2,419
Overhead rate per 2.86 1.90 4.73
hour
(See working Note.
1)
Cost of the product Rs.
'X'
Direct Material 50
Cost
Direct Labour Cost 30
Overh ead Cost 35.13
(See Working Note ______
2)
115.13
Working Note:
1. Overhead rate per hour for production department
P1 = Rs. 8,787.16 = Rs. 2.86
3,070
Similarly overhead rate for production departments P2 and P3 are Rs. 1.90 and
Rs. 4.73
2. Overhead cost
Rs. 2.86 x 4 + Rs.1.90 x 5 + Rs. 4.73 x 3
= Rs.11.44 + Rs. 9.50 + Rs. 14.19 = Rs.35.13
Note: The service departments have only indirect costs which are to be
absorbed by production departments. However if the direct wages
appearing in the question are assumed to be incurred on the service
department only, which have not been accounted for, by any other
activity carried on in the service departments, then total expenses of the
service departments including the aforesaid direct wages would also be
charged to the respective production departments. If this assumption
holds good the alternative solution can appear as under:
ALTERNATIVE SOLUTION
Statement Showing Distribution of Overheads of Modern Manufacturers Ltd.
Basis Total P1 P2 P3 S1 S2
Direct Wages Actual 1,695 1,500 195
Rent & Rates Area 5,000 1,000 1,250 1,500 1,000 250
General Light Points 600 100 150 200 100 50
Lighting
Indirect Direct 1,939 600 400 600 300 39
Wages Wages
Power H.P. 1,500 600 300 500 100
Depreciation Value of 10,00 2,400 3,200 4,000 200 200
of Machines Machines 0
Sundries Direct 9,695 3,000 2,000 3,000 1,500 195
Wages
30,42 7,700 7,300 9,800 4,700 929
9
Redistribution of Service Departments Expenses

over Production Departments.
Total P1 P2 P3 S1 S2
Total Overheads 30,429 7,700 7,300 9,800 4,700 929
Dept. S1 Overheads 4,700 940 1,410 1,880 -4,700 470
apportioned in the
ratio (20:30:40: :
10)
Dept. S2 Overheads 1,399 559.60 279.8 419.7 139.9
apportioned in the 1.399
ratio
(40:20:30:10:)
Dept. S1 Overheads 139.90 27.98 41.97 55.96 13.99
apportioned in the 139.9
ratio (20:30:40: - :
10)
Dept. S2 Overheads 13.99 5.60 2.80 4.20 1.40 -13.99
apportioned in the
ratio
(40:20:30:10:)
Dept. S1 Overheads 1.40 0.28 0.42 0.56 -1.40 0.14
apportioned in the
ratio (20:30:40:
10)
Dept. S2 Overheads 0.14 0.06 0.03 0.05 - -0.14
apportioned in the
ratio _______ _______ ________
(40:20:30:10:)
Total 9,233.52 9,035.02 12.160.47
Working hours 3,070 4,475 2,419
Overhead rate per 3.00 2.02 5.03
hour
Cost of the Product Rs.
'X'
Direct Material 50
Cost
Direct Labour Cost 30

Overhead Cost 37.25
(See Working Note ______
1)
Total Cost 117.25
Working Note
1. Overhead cost:
= Rs. 3 4+ Rs. 2.02 5 + Rs. 5.03 3
= Rs. 12 + Rs. 10.10 + Rs. 15.15 = 37.25
Question 40
PH Ltd. is a manufacturing company having three production departments,
A B and C and two service departments X and y. The following is the budget
for December 1981:
Total A B C X Y
Rs Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs.
Direct Material 1,000 2,000 4,000 2,000 1,000
Direct Wages 5,000 2,000 8,000 1,000 2,000
Factory rent 4,000
Power 2,500
Depreciation 1,000
Other overheads 9,000
Additional information
Area( Sq.ft.) 500 250 500 250 500
Capital Value (Rs. Lacs) of 20 40 20 10 10
assets
Machine hours 1,000 2,000 4,000 1,000 1,000
Horse power of machines 50 40 20 15 25
A technical assessment or the apportionment of expenses of service departments
is as under:
A B C X Y
% % % %. %
Service Dept. X 45 15 30 - 10
Service Dept. Y 60 35 - 5 -
Required:
(i) A statement showing distribution of overheads to various departments.
(ii) A statement showing re-distribution of service departments expenses to
production departments.
(iii) Machine hours rates of the production departments A, B and C.
Answer
(i) Overhead Distribution Summary
Basis Total A B C X Y
Direct materials Direct - - - - 2,000 1,000
Direct wages ,, 1,000 2,000
Factory rent Area 4,000 1,000 500 1,000 500 1,000
Power H.P X 2,500 500 800 800 150 250
M/c Hrs.
Depreciation Cap. 1,000 200 400 200 100 100
Value
Other
Overheads M/c hrs. 9,000 1,000 2,000 4,000 1,000 1,000
2,700 3,700 6,000 4,750 5,350
(ii) Redistribution of Service Departments expenses:
A B C X Y
Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs.
Total Overheads 2,700 3,700 6,000 4,750 5,350
Dept . X overhead apportioned 2,138 712 1,425 - 4,750 475
in the ratio (45 : 15 : 30 : 10 )
Dept . Y overhead apportioned 3,495 2,039 -- 291 - 5,825
in the ratio ( 60: 35 : -- : 5 )
Dept . X overhead apportioned 131 44 87 -- 291 29
in the ratio (45 : 15 : 30 : 10 )
Dept . Y overhead apportioned 17 10 -- 2 - 29
in the ratio ( 60: 35 : -- : 5 )
Dept . X overhead apportioned 1 -- 1 -- 2 --
in the ratio (45 : 15 : 30 : 10 )
8,482 6,505 7,513

(iii) Machine Hour rate
Machine hours 1,000 2,000 4,000
Machine hour rate (Rs.) 8.48 3.25 1.88
Question 41
Explain how under and over absorption of overheads are treated in cost
accounts.
Answer
Treatment of under and over absorption of overheads in Cost Accounts:
Under and over absorbed overheads can be disposed off in Cost Accounts by
using any one of the following methods:
(ii) Use of supplementary rates.
(iii) Writing off to Costing Profit and Loss Account.
(iv) Carrying over to the next years account.
(i) Use of Supplementary Rates: This method is used to adjust the
difference between overheads absorbed and overheads actually incurred
by computing supplementary overhead rates. Such rates may be either
positive or negative. A positive rate is intended to add the unabsorbed
overheads to the cost of production. The negative rate, however,
corrects the cost of production by deducting the amount of over-
absorbed overheads. The effect of applying such rate is to make the
actual overhead get completely absorbed.
(ii) Writing off to Costing Profit & Loss Account: When under or over
absorbed amount of overheads is quite negligible and it is not felt worth
while to absorb it by using supplementary rates, the said amount is
transferred to Costing Profit & Loss Account. In case under absorption of
overheads arises due to factors like idle capacity, defective planning etc.
Then also it may be transferred to Costing Profit & Loss Account.
(iii) Carrying over to the next years accounts : Under this method,the
amount of over/under absorbed overhead is carri ed over to the next
period this method is not considered desirable as it allows costs of one
period to affect cost of another/period. Further, comparison between
one period and another is rendered difficult. However, this method may
be used when the normal business cycle extends over more than one
year, or in the case of a new project, the output is low in the initial years.
Question 42
A machine shop has 8 identical Drilling Machines manned by 6 operators.
The machines cannot be worked without an operator wholly engaged on it.
The original cost of all these 8 machines works out to Rs. 8 lakhs. These
particulars are furnished for a 6 month period:-
Normal available hours per month 208
Absenteeism (without pay)- hours 18
Leave (with pay)-hours 20
Normal idle time unavoidable-hours 10
Average rate of wages per day of 8 hours Rs.20
Production Bonus estimated 15% on wages
Value of Power consumed Rs.8,050
Supervision and Indirect Labour Rs. 3,300
Lighting and Electricity Rs. 1,200
These particulars are for a year:
Repairs and maintenance including consumables 3% on the value of machines.
Insurance Rs. 40,000.
Depreciation 10% on original cost.
Other Sundry works expenses Rs. 12,000
General Management expenses allocated Rs. 54,530
You are required to work out a comprehensive machine hour rate for the
Machine Shop.
Answer
Computation of Comprehensive Machine Hour Rate of Machine Shop
Rs.
Operators Wages 17,100
(See Note 2)
Production Bonus 2,565
(15% on wages)
Power Consumed 8,050
Supervision 3,300
Lighting and Electricity 1,200
Repairs and Maintenance 12,000
Insurance 20,000
Depreciation 40,000
Sundry Works Expenses 6,000
General Management Expenses 27,265
1,37,480
Total Overheadsof Machine Shop
Machine Hour Rate =
Hours of Machines Operation
Rs. 1,37,480
= (See Note 1)
5,760 hours
= Rs. 23.87
Notes :
Computation of Hours, for which 6 operators are available for 6 months.
Normal available hours p.m. per operator 208
Less: Absenteeism hours 18
Leave Hours 20
Idle Time Hours 10 48
Utilisable Hours p.m. per operator 160
Total utilisable hours for 6
Operators and for 6 months are = 160 X 6 X 6 = 5,760 hours.
As machines cannot be worked without an operator wholly engaged on them
therefore, hours for which 6 operator are available for 6 months are the hours for
which machines can be used. Hence 5,760 hours represent total machine hours.
2. Average rate of wages: Rs. 20 = Rs. 2.50 per hour.
8 hours
Hours per month for which wages are paid to a worker = 190
(208 hours 18 hours)
Total wages paid to 6 operators for 6 months
= 190 hours 6 6 Rs. 2.50 = Rs. 17,100
Question 43
Gemini Enterprises undertakes three different jobs A,B and C.All of them
require, the use of a special machine and also the use of a computer. The
computer is hired and the hire charges work out to Rs. 4,20,000/- per annum. The
expenses regarding the machine are estimated as follows.
Rs.
Rent for the quarter 17,500
Depreciation per annum 2,00,000
Indirect charges per annum 1,50,000
During the first month of operation the following details were taken from the job
register :
Job A B C
Number of hours the machine was used :
(a) Without the use of computer 600 900
(b) With the use of the computer 400 600 1,000
You are required to compute the machine hour rate:-
(a) For the firm as a whole for the month when the computer was used and
when the computer was not used.
(c) For the individual jobs A, B and C.
Answer
Working Notes :
(i) Total machine hours used 3,500
(600 + 900 + 400 + 600 + 1,000)
(ii) Total machine hours without the use of computers 1,500
(600 + 900)
(iii) Total machine hours with the use of computer 2,000
( 400 + 600 + 1,000)
(iv) Total overhead of the machine per month Rs.
Rent (Rs. 17,500 /3) 5,833.33
Depreciation ( Rs. 2,00,000 / 12) 16,666.67
Indirect charges (Rs. !,50,000/12) 12,500.00
Total 35,000.00
(v) Computer hire charges for a month = Rs. 35,000
(Rs. 4,20,000 / 12)
(vi) Overheads for using machines without computer = Rs. 15,000
Rs. 35,000
1,500 hrs.
3,500 hrs.
(vii) Overheads for using machine with computer = Rs. 55,000

Rs. 35,000
3,500 hrs. 2,000 hrs. + Rs. 35,000

(a) Machine Hour Rate of Gemini Enterprises for the firm as a whole, for a
month.
Rs. 55,000
(1) When the computer was used : = Rs27.50 per hour.
2,000 hours
Rs. 35, 000
(2) When the computer was not used : = Rs.10 per hour.
3,500 hours
(b) Machine hour rate for the individual jobs.
Job Rate A B C
per hr.
Rs. Hrs Rs. Hrs Rs. Hrs Rs.
Overheads
Without 10 600 6,000 900 9,000 - -
computer
With 2750 400 11,000 600 16,500 1,000 27,500
computer
1,000 17,000 1,500 25,500 1,000 27,500
Machine hour Rs. 17 Rs. 17 Rs. 27.50
rate
Question 44
Deccan Manufacturing Ltd. have three departments which are regarded as
production departments. Service departments costs are distributed to these
production departments using the Step Ladder Method of distribution .
Estimates of factory overhead costs to be incurred by each department in the
forthcoming year are as follows. Data required for distribution is also shown
against each department:
Department Factory overhead Direct No.of Area in sq.
Labour Employees m.
Rs. Hours
Productions
X 1,93,000 4,000 100 3,000
Y 64,000 3,000 125 1,500
Z 83,000 4,000 85 1,500
Services
P 45,000 1,000 10 500
Q 75,000 5,000 50 1,500
R 1,05,000 6,000 40 1,000
S 30,000 3,000 50 1,000
The overhead costs of the four service departments are distributed in the
same order, viz., P,Q,R and S respectively on the following basis:
Department Basis
P _ Number of Employees
Q _ Direct Labour Hours
R _ Area in square meters
S _ Direct Labour Hours

(a) prepare a schedule showing the distribution of overhead costs of the four
service departments to the three production departments; and
(b) calculate the overhead recovery rate per direct labour hour for each of the
three production departments.
Answer : (a)
DECCAN MANUFACTURING LIMITED
Schedule Showing the Distribution of Overhead Costs among Departments
Service Production
P Q R S X Y Z
Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs.
Overhead cost 45,00 75,000 1,05,00 30,00 1,93,0 64,00 83,00
0 0 0 00 0 0
Distribution of
Overhead
Costs of Dept.`P` (45,0 5,000 4,000 5,000 10,000 12,50 8,500
00) 0
Distribution of
Overhead
Costs of Dept.`Q` _ (80,00 24,000 12,00 16,000 12,00 16,00
0) 0 0 0
Distribution of
Overhead
Costs of Dept.`R` _ _ (1,33,0 19,00 57,000 28,50 28,50
00) 0 0 0
Distribution of
Overhead
Costs of Dept.`S` _ _ _ (66,0 24,000 18,00 24,00
00) 0 0
Total 3,00,0 1,35, 1,60,
00 000 000
.(A)
(b) Direct Labour 4,000 3,000 4,000
hours ..(B)
Overhead Rs. Rs.45 Rs.40
recovery rate per 75/- /- /-
hour:
[(A)/(B)]
Question 45
A Ltd. manufactures two products A and B.The manufacturing division
consists of two production departments P1and P2 and two services S1 and S2.
Budgeted overhead rates are used in the production departments to absorb
factory overheads to the products. The rate of Department P1 is based on direct
machine hours, while the rate of Department P2 is based on direct labour hours.
In applying overheads,the pre-determined rates are multiplied by actual hours.
For allocating the service department costs to production departments, the basis
adopted is as follow:
(i) Cost of Department S1 to Department P1 and P2 equally, and
(ii) Cost of Department S2 to Department P1 and P2 in the ratio 2:1 respectively.
The following budgeted and actual data are available:
Annual profit plan data:
Factory overhead budgeted for the year:
Rs. Rs.
Departments P1 25,50,000 S1 6,00,000
P2 21,75,000 S2 4,50,000
Budgeted output in units:
Product A 50,000; B 30,000.

Budgeted raw material cost per unit:
Product A Rs. 120 ; Product B Rs. 150.
Budgeted time required for production per unit:
Department P1: Product A: 1.5 machine hours
Product B: 1.0 machine hour
Department P2: Product A: 2 Direct labour hours
Product B: 2.5 Direct labour hours
Average wage rates budgeted in Department P2 are: Product A Rs72 per hour
and Product B Rs. 75 per hour.
All materials are used in Department P1 only.
Actual data (for the month of July,1993)
Units actually produced: Product A: 4,000 units
Product B: 3,000 units
Actual direct machine hours worked in Department P1
On product A 6,100 hours, Product B-4,150 hours.
Actual direct labour hours worked in Department P2
On product A 8,200 hours, Product B-7,400 hours.
Cost actually incurred:
Product A Product B
Raw materials: Rs. 4,89,000 Rs. 4,56,000
Wages: Rs. 5,91,900 Rs. 5,52,000
Rs. Rs.
Overheads: Department P1 Rs. 231,000 S1 Rs. 60,000
P2 Rs. 2,04,000 S2 Rs. 48,000
(i) Compute the predetermined overhead rate for each production department.
(ii) Prepare a performance report for July. 1993 that will reflect the budgeted
costs and actual costs.
Answer
(i) Computation of predetermined overhead rate for each production
department from budgeted data
Production Deptts. Service Deptts.
P1 P2 S1 S2
Budgeted factory overheads for 25,50,000 21,75,000 6,00,000 4,50,000
the year in (Rs.)
Allocation of service 3,00,000 3,00,000 - _

department S1s costs to 6,00,000
production departments P1 and
P2 equally in (Rs.)
Allocation of service 3,00,000 1,50,000 _ -
department S2s costs to 4,50,000
production department P1 and
P2 in ratio of 2:1 in (Rs.)
Total (Rs.) 31,50,000 26,25,000 Nil Nil
Budgeted machine hours in 1,05,000
department P1
(Refer to working Note1)
Budgeted machine hours in 1,75,000
department P2
(Refer to working Note 1)
Budgeted machine hour rate Rs. 30
(Rs. 31,50,000/1,05,000)
Budgeted machine hour rate Rs. 15
(Rs. 26,25,000/1,75,000)
(ii) Performance report for July, 1993
(When 4,000 and 3,000 units of products and B
respectively were actually produced)
Budgeted Actual
Rs. Rs.
Raw material used in department P1
A : 4,000 units Rs. 120 4,80,000 4,89,000
A : 3,000 units Rs. 150 4,50,000 4,56,000
Direct Labour
Cost on the basis of labour hours
worked in department P2
4,000 2 hrs. Rs.72 5,76,000 5,91,900
3,000 2.5 hrs. Rs.75 5,62,500 5,52,000
Overhead absorbed
On machine hour basis in
department P1
A: 4,000 1.5 hrs. Rs.30 1,80,000 1,74,400*
B. 3,000 1 hr. Rs.30 90,000 1,18,649

Overhead absorbed
On machine hour basis in
department P2
A: 4,000 2 hrs. Rs.15 1,20,000 1,31,364**
B: 3,000 2.5 hrs. Rs.15 1,12,500 1,18,548
25,71,000 26,31,861
* (Refer to working Note 4)
**(Refer to Working Note 5)
Working Notes:
Product A Product B Total
1. Budgeted output 50,000 30,000
(in units)
Budgeted machine 75,000 30,000 1,05,000
hours (50,000 1.5 (30,000 1 hrs.)
In department P1 hrs.) 75,000 1,75,000
Budgeted labour 1,00,000 (30,000 2.5 hrs.)
hours (50,000 2
In department P2 hrs.)

2. Actual output 4,000 3,000
(in units)
Actual machine
hours 6,100 4,150 10,250
utilised in
department P1 8,200 7,400 15,600
Actual labour hours
utilised in
department P2
3. Computation of actual overhead rate for each production department

from actual data

P1 P2 S1 S2
Actual factory overheads for 2,31,000 2,04,000 60,000 48,000
the month of July, 1993 in
(Rs.)
Allocation of service 30,000 30,000 60,000
department S1s costs in (Rs.)
over production departments
P1 and P2 equally.
Allocation of service 32,000 16,000 48,000
department S2s costs in (Rs.)
over production departments
P1 and P2 in the ratio of 2:1 _______ _______ ___ ___
Total (Rs.) 2,93,000 2,50,000 Nil Nil
Actual machine hours in 10,250
department P1
Actual labour hours in 15,600
department P2
Machine hour rate Rs. 28.59
(Rs. 2,93,000/10,250)
Labour hour/ rate Rs. 16.02
(Rs. 2,50,000/15,600)
4. Actual overheads absorbed (based on machine hours):
A: 6,100 hrs. Rs. 28.59 = Rs. 1,74,400 (say)
B: 4,150 hrs. Rs. 28.59 = Rs. 1,18,649 (say)
5. Actual overheads absorbed (based on labour hours):
A: 8,200 hrs. Rs. 16.02 = Rs. 1,31,364
B: 7,400 hrs. Rs. 16.02 = Rs. 1,18,548
Question 46
In a manufacturing unit, factory overhead was recovered at a pre-
determined rate of Rs. 25 per man day. The total factory overhead expenses
incurred and the man-days actually worked were Rs. 41.50 lakhs and 1.5 lakhs
man-days respectively. Out of the 40,000 units produced during a period, 30,000
were sold .
On analysing the reasons, it was found that 60% of the unabsorbed

overheads were due to defective planning and the rest were attributable to
increase in overhead costs.
How would unabsorbed overheads be treated in Cost Accounts?
Answer
Computation of Unabsorbed Overheads
Man days worked 1,50,000
Rs.
Overhead actually incurred 41,50,000
Less: Overhead absorbed @ Rs. 25%/- per man -
day 37,50,000
(Rs. 25 1,50,000)
Unabsorbed Overheads 4,00,000
Unabsorbed Overheads due to defective 2,40,000
planning _______
(i.e 60% of Rs 4,00,000)
Balance of Unabsorbed Overheads 1,60,000
Treatment of Unabsorbed Overheads in Cost Accounts
(i) The unabsorbed overheads of Rs. 2,40,000 due to defective planning to be
treated as abnormal and therefore be charged to Costing Profit and Loss
Accounts.
(ii) The balance unabsorbed overheads of Rs. 1,60,000 be charged to
production i.e. 40,000 units at the supplementary overhead absorption rate
i.e. Rs. 4/- per unit .
Rs.
Charge to Costing Profit and Loss Account
as part of the cost of units sold 1,20,000
(30,000 units @ Rs. 4/-p.u.)
Add: To Closing stock of finished goods 40,000
(10,000 units @ Rs. 4/- p.u.) _______
Total 1,60,000
Working Note:
Rs. 1,60,000
Supplementary Overhead Absorption Rate =
Rs. 40,000
= Rs. 4/- p.u.

Question 47
A machine shop has 8 identical drilling machines manned by 6 operators. The
machine cannot be worked without an operator wholly engaged on it. The
original cost of all these machines works out to Rs. 8 lakh. These particulars are
furnished for a 6 month period.
Normal available hours per month per worker 208
Absenteeism (without pay ) hours P.M. per worker 18
Leave (with pay) hours per worker P.M. 20
Normal idle time Unavoidable hours per worker P.M. 10
Average rate of wages per worker for 8 hours a day Rs.20
Average rate of production bonus estimated 15% on wages
Value of Power consumed Rs. 8,050
Supervision and indirect Labour Rs. 3,300
Lighting and electricity Rs. 1,200
These particulars are for a year:
Repairs and maintenance including consumables 3% of value of
machines
Insurance Rs. 40,000
Depreciation. 10% of original cost
Other sundry works expenses Rs. 12,000
General management expenses allocated Rs. 54,530
You are required to work out a comprehensive machine hour rate for the
machine shop
(May 2000, 8 marks)
Answer
Computation of comprehensive machine hour rate of machine shop
Rs.
Operators wages 17,100
Production bonus (15% on wages) 2,565
Power consumed 8,050
Supervision and indirect labour 3,300
Lighting and electricity 1,200
Repairs and maintenance 12,000

Insurance 20,000
Depreciation 40,000
Other sundry works expenses 6,000
General management expenses allocated 27,265
Total overhead of machine shop 1,37,480
Total overhead of machine shop

Machine hour rate =
Hours of machines operation
Rs. 1,37,480
= (Refer to working note 1)
5,760 hours
= Rs. 23.87
Working notes:
1. Computation of hours, for which 6 operators are available for 6 months.
Normal available hours p.m. per operator 208
Less: Absenteeism hours 18
Less: Leave hours 20
Less: idle time hours 10 48
Utilizable hours p.m. per operators 160
Total utilizable hour for 6 operators and
for 6 months are = 160 hours 6 operators 6 months = 5,760 hours.
As machines cannot be worked without an operator wholly engaged on
them, therefore hours for which 6 operators are available for 6 months are the
hours for which machines can be used. Hence 5,760 hours represents total
machine hours.
2 Computation of operators wages
Total rate of wages per hour = Rs. 2.50
(Rs. 20/8 hours)
Hours per month for which wages are paid to a worker = 190 hours
Total wages paid to 6 operators for 6 months = Rs. 17,100
(190 hours 6 operators 6 months Rs.2.50)
Question 48
A company has two production departments and two service departments.
The data relating to a period are as under:
Production Department Service Department

PD1 PD2 SD1 SD2

Direct materials (Rs.) 80,000 40,000 10,000 20,000
Direct wages (Rs.) 95,000 50,000 20,000 10,000
Overheads (Rs.) 80,000 50,000 30,000 20,000
Power requirement at (Kwh) 20,000 35,000 12,500 17,500
normal capacity
operations
During Power (Kwh) 13,000 23,000 10,250 10,000
Consumption during the
period
The power requirement of these departments are met by a power generation
plant. The said plant incurred an expenditure, which is not included above of Rs.
1,21,875 out of which a sum of Rs. 84,375 was variable and the rest fixed.
After apportionment of power generation plant costs to the four
departments, the service department overheads are to be redistributed on the
following bases:
PD1 PD2 SD1 SD2
SD1 (Rs.) 50% 40% --- 10%
SD2 (Rs.) 60% 20% 20% ---
(i) Apportion the power generation plant costs to the four departments.
(ii) Re-apportion service department cost to production departments.
(iii) Calculate the overhead rates per direct labour hour of production
departments, given that the direct wage rates of PD1 and PD2 are Rs. 5 and
Rs. 4 per hour respectively.
Answer
(i) Statement of apportionment of
Power generation plant costs to the four departments
Total Basis of Production Service
Costs apportionment of departments departments
Rs. power generation
cost
PD1 PD2 SD1 SD1
Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs.
Fixed 37,500 Normal capacity 8,824 15,441 5,515 7,720
expenditure (kwh)
{ 4:7 :2:3 :3.5 }
Variable 84,375 Actual power 19,500 34,500 15,375 15,000

expenditure consumption
_______ (kwh) ______ ______ ______ ______
{ 13:23 : 10.25 :
10 }
Total 1,21,875 28,324 49,941 20,890 22,720
Overheads summary:
Direct 30,000 -- -- 10,000 20,000
materials
Direct 30,000 -- -- 20,000 10,000
wages
Overheads 1,80,000 80,000 50,000 30,000 20,000
Total 3,61,875 1,08,324 99,941 80,890 72,720
(ii) Statement of Reapportionment of service department cost to production
department by using repeated distribution method
Total Production Service
departments departments
PD1 PD2 SD1 SD2
Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs.
Total overheads 3,61,875 1,08,324 99,941 80,890 72,720
Dept. SD1 overheads 80,890 40,445 32,356 -80,890 8,089
apportioned
In the ratio [ 50: 40 : - : 10]
Dept. SD2 overheads 80,809 48,485 16,162 16,162 -80,809
apportioned
In the ratio [ 60: 20 : 20 : -]
Dept. SD1 overheads 16,162 8,081 6,465 -16162 1,616
apportioned
In the ratio [ 50: 40 : - : 10]
Dept. SD2 overheads 1,616 970 323 323 -1,616

apportioned
In the ratio [ 60: 20 : 20 : -]
Dept. SD1 overheads 323 162 129 -323 32
apportioned
In the ratio [ 50: 40 : - : 10]
Dept. SD2 overheads 32 19.20 6.40 6.40 -32
apportioned
In the ratio [ 60: 20 : 20 : -]
Dept. SD1 overheads 6.40 3.20 2.56 -6.40 0.64
apportioned
In the ratio [ 50: 40 : - : 10]
Dept. SD2 overheads 0.64 0.38 0.13 0.13 - 0.64
apportioned
In the ratio [ 60: 20 : 20 : -]
Total 2,06,489.7 1,55,385.0 0.13 0.0
8 9
(iii) Computation of Overhead rates per direct labour hour of production

departments
Production departments
PD1 PD2
Total direct wages (Rs.) : (A) 95,000 50,000
Direct wage rate per hour (Rs.) : (B) 5/- 4/-
Direct labour hours (A/B) = (C) 19,000 12,500
Overheads (Rs.) : (D) 2,06,489.78 1,55,385.09
Overhead rate per 10.87 12.43
Direct labour hour (Rs.) : (D)/(C)
Question 49
X Ltd. hav ing fifteen different types of automatic machines furnishes
information as under for 1996-97
(i) Overhead expenses: Factory rent Rs. 96,000 (Floor area 80,000 sq.ft.), Heat
and gas Rs. 45,000 and supervision Rs. 1,20,000.
(ii) Wages of the operator are Rs. 48 per day of 8 hours . He attends to one
machine when it is under set up and two machines while they are under
operation.
In respect of machine B (one of the above machines) the following particulars are
furnished:
(i) Cost of machine Rs 45,000, Life of machine- 10 years and scrap value at
the end of its life Rs. 5,000
(ii) Annual expenses on special equipment attached to the machine are
estimated as Rs. 3,000
(iii) Estimated operation time of the machine is 3,600 hours while set up
time is 400 hours per annum
(iv) The machine occupies 5,000 sq.ft. of floor area.
(v) Power costs Rs. 2 per hour while machine is in operation.
Find out the comprehensive machine hour rate of machine B . Also find out
machine costs to be absorbed in respect of use of machine B on the following two
work- orders
Work order 31 Work order 32
Machine set up time (Hours) 10 20
Machine operation time 90 180
(Hours)
nswer
X Ltd.
Statement showing comprehensive machine
Hour rate of Machine B
Standing Charges: Rs.
Factory rent 6,000
(Rs. 96,000/80,000 sq.ft) 5,000 Sq.ft.
Heat and Gas 3,000
(Rs. 45,000/15 machines)
Supervision 8,000
(Rs. 1,20,000/ 15 machines)
Depreciation 4,000
[(Rs. 45,000 Rs. 5,000)/ 10 years]
Annual expenses on special equipment 3,000
______
24,000
Fixed cost per hour 6/-
(Rs. 24,000/ 4,000 hrs.)
Set up rate Operational rate

Per hour Per hour
Rs. Rs.
Fixed cost 6 6
Power -- 2
Wages 6 3
Comprehensive machine 12 11
hour rate per hr.
Statement of B machine costs

to be absorbed on the two work orders
Work order 31 Work order 31
Hours Rate Amount Hours Rate Amount
Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs.
Set up time cost 10 12 120 20 12 240
Operation time cost 90 11 990 180 11 1,980
Total cost 1,110 2,220
Question 50
E-books is an online book retailer. The Company has four departments. The
two sales departments are Corporate Sales and Consumer Sales. The two support
departments are Administrative (Human Resources Accounting) and
Information Systems each of the sales departments conducts merchandising and
marketing operations independently.
The following data are available for October, 2003:
Departments Revenues Number of Processing
Employees Time used
(in minutes)
Corporate Sales Rs. 16,67,750 42 2,400
Consumer Sales Rs. 8,33,875 28 2,000
Administrative -- 14 400
Information -- 21 1,400
system
Cost incurred in each of four departments for October, 2003 are as follow:
Corporate Sales Rs. 12,97,751
Consumer Sales Rs. 6,36,818
Administrative Rs. 94,510
Information systems Rs. 3,04,720
The company uses number of employees as a basis to allocate Administrative

costs and processing time as a basis to allocate Information systems costs.
Required:
(i) Allocate the support department costs to the sales departments using the
direct method.
(ii) Rank the support departments based on percentage of their services
rendered to other support departments. Use this ranking to allocate support
costs based on the step-down allocation method.
(iii) How could you have ranked the support departments differently?
(iv) Allocate the support department costs to two sales departments using the
reciprocal allocation method. (Nov. 2003, 2+2+1+5=10 marks)
Answer
(i)
Statement showing the allocation of support
department costs to the sales departments
(using the direct method)
Sales department Support department
Particulars Basis of Corporate Consumer Administrative Information
allocation sales sales systems
Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs.
Cost incurred 12,97,751 6,36,818 94,510 3,04,720
Re -allocation Number of 56,706 37,804 (94,510)
of cost of employees
administrative (6:4::)
department
Re -allocation Processing 1,66,211 1,38,509 (3,04,720)
of costs of time
information (6:5::) ________ ________
systems
department
Total 15,20,668 8,13,131
(ii)
Ranking of support departments based on
percentage of their services rendered to other
support departments
21100
Administration support department provides 23.077% of its
42 + 28 + 21
services to information systems support department. Thus 23.077% of
Rs. 94,510 = Rs.21,810.
Information system support department provides 8.33%
400
2, 400+ 2,000 + 400 100 of its services to Administration support

department. Thus 8.33% of Rs. 3,04,720 = Rs. 25,383.
Statement showing allocation of support costs
(By using step-down allocation method)
Sales department Support department
Particulars Basis of Corporate Consumer Administrative Information
allocation sales sales systems.
Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs.
Cost incurred 12,97,751 6,36,818 94,510 3,04,720
Re -allocation Number of 43,520 29,080 (94,510) 21,810

of cost of employees 3,26,530
administrative (6:4::3)
department
Re -allocation Processing 1,78,107 1,48,423 (3,26,530)
of costs of time
information (6:5:::) ________ ________
systems
department
Total 15,19,478 8,14,321
(iii) An alternative ranking is based on the rupee amount of services rendered to
other service departments, using the rupee figures obtained under
requirement (ii) This approach would use the following sequence of ra nking.
Allocation of information systems overheads as first (Rs.25,383 provided
to administrative).
Allocated administrative overheads as second (Rs. 21,810 provided to
information systems).
(iv) Working notes:
(1) Percentage of services provided by each service department to
other service department and sales departments.
Service departments Sale departments
Particulars Administrati Informatio Corporate Consumer
ve n system Sales Sales
Administrative 23.07% 46.16% 30.77%
Information 8.33% 50% 41.67%
systems
(2) Total cost of the support department: (By using simultaneous
equation method).
Let AD and IS be the total costs of support departments
Administrative and Information systems respectively. These costs can
be determined by usin g the following simultaneous equations:
AD = 94,510 + 0.0833 IS
IS = 3,04,720 + 0.2307 AD
or AD = 94,510 + 0.0833 {3,04,720 +
0.2307 AD}
o r AD = 94,510 + 25,383 + 0.01922
AD
o r 0.98078AD = 1,19,893
o r AD = Rs. 1,22,243
and IS = Rs. 3,32,922
Statement showing the allocation of support
department costs to the sales departments
(Using reciprocal allocation method)
Sales department
Particulars Corporate sales Consumer sales

Rs. Rs.
Costs incurred 12,97,571 6,36,818
Re -allocation of cost administrative 56,427 37,614
department
(46.16% and 30.77% of Rs. 1,22,243)
Re -allocation of costs of information 1,66,461 1,38,729
systems department
(50% and 41.67% of Rs. 3,32,922) ________ _______
Total 15,20,639 8,13,161
Question 51
Explain what do you mean by Chargeable Expenses and state its
treatment in Cost Accounts. (November, 2002, 3 marks)
Answer
Chargeable expenses: All expenses, other than direct materials and direct
labour cost which are specifically and solely incurred on production, process or
job are treated as chargeable or direct expenses. These expenses in cost
accounting are treated as part of prime cost,
Examples of chargeable expenses include - Rental of a machine or plant
hired for specific job, royalty, cost of making a specific pattern, design, drawing
or making tools for a job.
Question 52
A company manufacturing two products furnishes the following data for a
year.
Product Annual Total Total Total
output Machine number of number of
(Units) hours purchase set-ups
orders
A 5,000 20,000 160 20
B 60,000 1,20,000 384 44
The annual overheads are as under:

Rs.
Volume related activity costs 5,50,000

Set up related costs 8,20,000
Purchase related costs 6,18,000
You are required to calculate the cost per unit of each Product A and B based on :
(i) Traditional method of charging overheads
(ii) Activity based costing method. (November, 2002, 9 marks)
Answer
Working notes:
1. Machine hour rate =
Total annual overheads
Total machine hours
Rs.19,88,000
= = Rs.
1,40,000 hours
14.20 per hour
2. Machine hour rate = Total annual
overhead cost
for volume related activities

Total machine hours
Rs. 5,50,000
= = Rs.
1,40,000 hours
3.93 (approx.)
3. Cost of one set-up =
Total cos ts related to set ups
Total number of set ups
Rs. 8,20,000
= = Rs.
64 set ups
12,812.50
4. Cost of a purchase order =
Total cos ts related to purchases
Total number of purchase order
Rs. 6,18,000
= = Rs.
544 orders
1,136.03
(i)
Statement showing overhead cost per unit
(based on traditional method of charging overheads)
Products Annual Total Overhead cost Overhead cost
output machine component (Refer to per unit
(units) hours W, Note 1) Rs.
Rs.
A 5,000 20,000 2,84,000 56.80
(20,000 hrs. Rs. (Rs. 2,84,000 / 5,000
14.20) units)
B 60,000 1,20,000 17,04,000 28.40
(1,20,000 hrs.Rs. (Rs.17,04,000/60,000
14.20) units)
(ii)
Statement showing overhead cost per unit
(based on activity based costing method)
Products Annual Total Cost Cost Cost Total cost Cost
output Machine related related to related to per
units Hours to purchases set-ups unit
volume
activities
Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs.
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) = [(c) + (d) (g) =
+ (e)] (f)/(a)
A 5,000 20,000 78,600 1,81,764.80 2,56,250 5,16,614.80 103.32
(20,000 (160 orders (20 set
hrs Rs. Rs. ups Rs.
3.93) 1136.03) 12,812.50)
B 60,000 1,20,000 4,71,600 4,36,235.52 5,63,750 14,71,585.52 24.53
(1,20,000 (384 orders (44 set
hrs Rs. Rs. ups Rs.
3.93) 1136.03) 12,812.50)
Note: Refer to working notes 2,3 and 4 for computing costs related to volume
activities, set-ups and purchases respectively.
Question 53
In the current quarter, a company has
undertaken two jobs. The data relating to these jobs are as under:
Job 1102 Job 1108
Selling price Rs. 1,07,325 Rs. 1,57,920
Profit as percentage on cost 8% 12%
Direct Materials Rs. 37,500 Rs. 54,000
Direct Wages Rs. 30,000 Rs. 42,000
It is the policy of the company to charge
Factory overheads as percentage on direct wages and Selling and Administration
overheads as percentage on Factory cost.
The company has received a new order for
manufacturing of a similar job. The estimate of direct materials and direct wages
relating to the new order are Rs. 64,000 and Rs. 50,000 respectively. A profit of
20% on sales is required.
You are required to compute
(i) The rates of Factory overheads and Selling and Administration overheads to
be charged.
(ii) The Selling price of the new order (November, 2002, 9 marks)
Answer
Working notes
1. Computation of total cost of jobs
Total cost of Job 1102 Rs.,1,07,325
= 100
when 8% is the profit on 108
cost = Rs. 99,375
Total cost of job 1108 Rs. 1,57,920
= 100
when 12% is the profit on 112
cost
= Rs. 1,41,000
2. Factory overheads = F% of direct wages
Selling & Administrative overheads = A% of factory cost
(i) Computation of rates of factory overheads and selling and administration
overheads to be charged.
Jobs Cost Sheet
Job 1102 Job 1108

Rs. Rs.
Direct materials 37,500 54,000
Direct wages 30,000 42,000
Prime cost 67,500 96,000
Add: Factory overheads 30,000F 42,000F
Factory cost (67,500 + 30,000 F) (96,000 + 42,000 F)
Add: Selling and (67,500 + 30,000 F) A (96,000 + 42,000 F) A
Administration
Overheads
Total cost (67,500 + 30,000 F)(1 + (96,000 + 42,000
A) F)(1+A)
Since the total cost of jobs 1102 and 1108 are equal to Rs. 99,375 and Rs.
1,41,000 respectively, therefore we have the following equations (Refer to
working note 1)
(67,500 + 30,000 F) (1 + A) = 99,375 (1)
(96,000 + 42,000 F) (1 + A) = 1,41,000 (2)
or 67,500 + = 99,375
30,000 F + 67,500 A + 30,000 FA
96,000 + = 1,41,000
42,000 F + 96,000 A + 42,000 FA
or 30,000 F + = 31,875 (3)
67,500 A + 30,000 FA
42,000 F + = 45,000 (4)
96,000 A + 42,000 FA
On solving = 0.40
(3) and (4) we get : A = 0.25 and F
Hence A =
25% and F = 40%
(ii) Selling price of the new order:

Rs.
Direct materials 64,000
Direct wages 50,000
Prime cost 1,14,000
Factory overheads (40% Rs. 50,000) 20,000
Factory cost 1,34,000

Selling & Admn. Overheads 33,500
(25% Rs. 1,34,000)
Total cost 1,67,500
If selling price of new order is Rs. 100 then
Profit is Rs. 20 and Cost is Rs. 80
Hence selling price of the new order =
Rs.1,67,500
100 = Rs. 2,09,375
80
Question 54
PQR Ltd has its own power plant, which has two users, Cutting
Department and Welding Department. When the plans were prepared for the
power plant, top management decided that its practical capacity should be
1,50.000 machine hours. Annual budgeted practical capacity fixed costs are
Rs.9,00,000 and budgeted variable costs are Rs.4 per machine-hour. The
following data are available:
Cutting Welding Total
Department Department
Actual Usage in 2002-03 60,000 40,000 1,00,000
Machine hours)
Practical capacity for each 90,000 60,000 1,50,000
department (machine hours)
Required
(i) Allocate the power plant's cost to the cutting and the welding department
using a single rate method in which the budgeted rate is calculated using
practical capacity and costs are allocated based on actual usage.
(ii) Allocate the power plant's cost to the cutting and welding departments,
using the dual -rate method in which fixed costs are allocated based on
practical capacity and variable costs are allocated based on actual usage,
(iii) Allocate the power plant's cost to the cutting and welding departments using
the dual-rate method in which the fixed-cost rate is calculated using
practical capacity, but fixed costs are allocated to the cutting and welding
department based on actual usage. Variable costs are allocated based on
actual usage.
(iv) Comment on your results in requirements (i), (ii) and (iii).
(May, 2003) (2+2+2+2=8 marks)
Answer
Working notes:
1. Fixed practical capacity cost per machine hour:
Practical capacity (machine hours) 1,50,000
Practical capacity fixed costs (Rs.) 9,00,000
Fixed practical capacity cost per machine hour Rs. 6
(Rs. 9,00,000 / 1,50,000 hours)
2. Budgeted rate per machine hour (using practical capacity):
= Fixed practical capacity cost per machine hour + Budgeted
variable cost per machine hour
= Rs. 6 + Rs. 4 = Rs. 10
(i) Statement showing Power Plant's cost allocation to the Cutting & Welding
departments by using single rate method on actual usage of machine
hours.
Rs. Rs. Rs.
Power plants cost allocation by 6,00,000 4,00,000 10,00,000
using actual usage (machine (50,000 hours (40,000 hours
hours) Rs. 10) Rs. 10)
(ii) Statement showing Power Plant's cost allocation to the Cutting & Welding
departments by using dual rate method.
Rs. Rs.
Rs.
Fixed Cost 5,40,000 3,60,000 9,00,000
(Allocated on practical Rs. 9,00,000 3 Rs. 9,00,000 2

capacity for each department 5 5
i.e.):
(90,000 hours : 60,000 hours)
Variable cost 2,40,000 1,60,000 4,00,000
(Based on actual usage of (60,000 hours (40,000 hours
machine hours) Rs. 4) Rs.4)
Total cost 7,80,000 5,20,000 13,00,000
(iii) Statement showing Power Plant's cost allocation to the Cutting & Welding
Departments using dual rate method
Rs. Rs. Rs.
Fixed Cost 3,60,000 2,40,000 6,00,000
Allocation of fixed cost on actual (60,000 (40,000 hours
usage basis (Refer to working hours Rs. 6)
note 1) Rs. 6)
Variable cost 2,40,000 1,60,000 4,00,000
(Based on actual usage) (60,000 (40,000 hours
hours Rs. 4)
Rs. 4)
Total cost 6,00,000 4,00,000 10,00,000
(iv) Comments:
Under dual rate method, under (iii) and single rate method under (i), the
allocation of fixed cost of practical capacity of plant over each department
are based on single rate. The major advantage of this approach is that the
user departments are allocated fixed capacity costs only for the capacity
used. The unused capacity cost Rs. 3,00,00 (Rs. 9,00,000 Rs. 6,00,000) will
not be allocated to the user departments. This highlights the cost of unused
capacity.
Under (ii) fixed cost of capacity are allocated to operating departments on

the basis of practical capacity, so all fixed costs are allocated and there is no
unused capacity identified with the power plant.
Question 55
"The more kilometers you travel with your own vehicle, the cheaper it
becomes." Comment briefly on this statement.
(November, 1995,2 marks)
Answer
The cost per kilometre, (if one travels in his own vehicle) will decline
when he travels more kilometers. This is because the majority of costs for
running and maintaining vehicles are of fixed na ture and the component of fixed
cost per kilometre goes on decreasing with an increase in kilometre travel.
Hence, the given statement is true.
Question 56
Define Selling and Distribution Expenses. Discuss the accounting for
selling and distribution expenses. (November, 1999, 4 marks)
Answer
Selling expenses: Expenses incurred for the purpose of promoting,
marketing and sales of different products.
Distribution expenses: Expenses relating to delivery and despatch of
goods/products to customers.
Accounting treatment for selling and distribution expenses
Selling and distribution expenses are usually collected under separate
cost account numbers.
These expenses may be recovered by using any one of following method
of recovery.
1. Percentage on cost of production / cost of goods sold.
2. Percentage on selling price.
3. Rate per unit sold.
Question 57
The total overhead expenses of a factory are Rs. 4,46,380. Taking into
account the normal working of the factory, overhead was recovered in
production at Rs. 1.25 per hour. The actual hours worked were 2,93,104. How
would you proceed to close the books of accounts, assuming that besides 7,800
units produced of which 7,000 were sold, there were 200 equivalent units in
work-in-progress?
On investigation, it was found that 50% of the unabsorbed overhead was
on account of increase in the cost of indirect materials and indirect labour and
the remaining 50% was due to factory inefficiency. Also give the profit
implication of the method suggested.
Answer
Rs.
Actual factory overhead expenses incurred 4,.46,380
Less: Overhead recovered from production 3,66,380
(2,93,104 hours Rs. 1.25) ______
Unabsorbed overheads 80,000
Reasons for unabsorbed overheads
(i) 50% of th e unabsorbed overhead was on 40,000
account of increase in the cost of indirect
materials and indirect labour
(ii) 50% of the unabsorbed overhead was due to 40,000
factory inefficiency.
Treatment of unabsorbed overheads in cost accounting

1. Unabsorbed overhead amount of Rs.40,000, which was due to increase in
the cost of indirect material and labour should be charged to units produced
by using a supplementary rate.
Rs. 40,000
Supplementary rate = = Rs. 5 per unit
( 7,800 + 200) units
The sum of Rs. 40,000 (unabsorbed overhead) should be distributed by using
a supplementary rate among cost of sales, finished goods and work -in-
progress as below:
Rs.
Cost of sales 35,000
(7,000 units Rs. 5)
Finished goods 4,000
(800 units Rs. 5)
Work-in-progress 1,000
(200 units Rs. 5) ______
40,000
The use of cost of sales figures, would reduce the profit for the period by Rs.
35,000 and will increase the value of stock finished goods and work-in-
progress by Rs. 4,000 and Rs. 1,000 respectively.
2. The balance amount of unabsorbed overheads viz. of Rs. 40,000 due to
factory inefficiency should be charged to Costing Profit & Loss Account, as
this is an abnormal loss.
Question 58
A factory has three production departments: The policy of the factory is
to recover the production overheads of the entire factory by adopting a single
blanket rate based on the percentage of total factory overheads to total factory
wages. The relevant data for a month are given below:
Department Direct Direct Factory Director Machine
Materials Wages Overheads Labour Hours
Rs. Rs. Hour
Rs.
Budget
Machining 6,50,000 80,000 3,60,000 20,000 80,000
Assembly 1,70,000 3,50,000 1,40,000 1,00,000 10,000
Packing 1,00,000 70,000 1,25,000 50,000

Actual
Machining 7,80,000 96, 000 3,90,000 24,000 96,000
Assembly 1,36,000 2,70,000 84,000 90,000 11,000
Packing 1,20,000 90,000 1,35,000 60,000
The details of one of the representative jobs produced during the month are as
under:
Job No. CW 7083
Department Direct Direct Director Machine
Materials Wages Labour Hours
Rs. Rs. Hour
Machining 1,200 240 60 180
Assembly 600 360 120 30
Packing 300 60 40
The factory adds 30% on the factory cost to cover administration and
selling overheads and profit.
Required:
(i) Calculate the overhead absorption rate as per the current policy of
the company and determine the selling price of the Job No. CW 7083.
(ii) Suggest any suitable alternative method(s) of absorption of the
factory overheads and calculate the overhead recovery rates based on
the method(s) so recommended by you.
(iii) Determine the selling price of Job CW 7083 based on the overhead
application rates calculated in (ii) above.
(iv) Calculate the departmentwise and total under or over recovery of
overheads based on the company's current policy and the method(s)
recommended by you.
Answer
(i) Computation of overhead absorption rate
(as per the current policy of the company)
Department Budgeted Factory Budged Direct Wages
Overheads
Rs. Rs.
Machinery 3,60,000 80,000
Assembly 1,40,000 3,50,000
Packing 1,25,000 70,000
Total 6,25,000 5,00,000
Budgeted factory overheads
Overhead absorption rate = 100
Budgeted direct wages
Rs. 6,25,000
= 100
Rs. 5,00,000
= 125% of Direct wages
Selling price of the Job No. CW
7083
Rs.
Direct Materials 2,100.00
(Rs. 1,200 + Rs. 600 + Rs. 300
Direct Wages 660.00
(Rs. 240 + Rs. 360 + Rs. 60)
Overheads 825.00
(125% Rs. 660)
Total factory cost 3,585.00
Add: Mark -up 1,075.50
Selling price 4,660.50
(ii) Methods available for absorbing factory overheads and their overhead
recovery rates in different departments.
1. Machining Department
In the Machining department, the use of machine time is
the pre dominant factor of production. Hence machine hour rate should
be used to recover overheads in this department. The overhead
recovery rate based on machine hours has been calculated as under:
Machine hour rate =
Budgeted machine hours
Rs. 3,60,000
=
80,000 hours
= Rs. 4.50 per hour
2. Assembly Department
In this department direct labour hours is the main factor of production.
Hence direct labour hour rate method should be used to recover overheads
in this department. The overheads recovery rate in this case is:
Direct labour hour rate =
Budgeted direct labour hours
Rs. 1,40,000
=
1,00,000 hours
= Rs. 1.40 per hour
3. Packing Department
Labour is the most important factor of production in this department. Hence
direct labour hour rate method should be used to recover overheads in this
department.
The overhead recovery rate is in this case comes to:
Budgeted factory overhead
Direct labour hour rate =
Direct labour hours
Rs. 1,25,000
=
50,000 hours
= Rs. 2.50 per hour
(iii) Selling price of Job CW-7083
[based on the overhead application rates calculated in (ii) above)
Rs.
Direct materials 2,100.00
Direct wages 660.00
Overheads 1,078.00
Factory cost 3,838.00
Add: Mark up 1,151.40
(30% of Rs. 3,838) _______
Selling Price 4,989.40
Working Note
Overhead Summary Statement
Dept. Basis Hours Rate Overheads
Rs. Rs.
Machining* Machine hour 180 4.50 810
Assembly Direct labour 120 1.40 168
hour
Packing Direct labour 40 2.50 100
hour
Total 1,078
(iv) Department-wise statement of total under or over recovery of

overheads
(a) Under current policy
Departments
Machining Assembly Packing Total
Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs.
Direct Wages (Actual) 96,000 2,70,00 90,000
Overheads recovered @ 1,20,000 3,37,500 1,12,500 5,70,000
125% of Direct wages: (A)
Actual overheads: (B) 3,90,000 84,000 1,35,000 6,09,000
(Under)/Over recovery of (2,70,000) 2,53,500 (22,500) (39,000)
overheads: (A B)
(b) As per methods suggested
Basis of overhead recovery
Machine Direct Direct Total
hours Labour labour Rs.
hours hours
Hours worked 96,000 90,000 60,000
Rate/hour (Rs.) 4.50 1.40 2.50
Overhead recovered (Rs.): 4,32,000 1,26,000 1,50,000 7,08,000
(A)
Actual overheads (Rs.): (B) 3,90,000 84,000 1,35,000 6,09,000
(Under)/Over recovery: (A 42,000 42,000 15,000 99,000
B)
Question 59
(a) Why is the use of an overhead absorption rate based on direct labour hours
generally preferable to a direct wages percentage rate for a labour intensive
operation?
(b) B & Co. has recorded the following data in the two most recent periods:
Total cost of production Volume of production
Rs. (Units)
14,600 800
19,400 1,200
What is the best estimate of the firm's fixed costs per period? (November,
1995, 3 marks)
(c) In a manufacturing unit overhead was recovered at a pre-determined rate of

Rs.20 per labour-hour. The total factory overhead incurred and the labour-
hours actually worked were Rs.45,00,000 and 2,00,000 labour-hours
respectively. During this period 30,000 units were sold. At the end of the
period 5,000 units were held in stock while there was no opening stock of
finished goods. Similarly, though there was no stock of uncompleted units at
the beginning of the period, at the end of the period there were 10,000
uncompleted units which may be reckoned at 50% complete.
On analysing the reasons, it was found that 60% of the unabsorbed over-
heads were due to defective planning and rest were attributable to increase
in overhead costs.
How would unabsorbed overheads be treated in cost accounts?
Answer
(a) A method of overhead absorption is considered appropriate if the total
amount of overhead absorbed in a period does not fluctuate materially from
the actual expense incurred in the period. Direct wages percentage rate
method do not possess the aforesaid features In other words, the overhead
charged varies from period to period due to changes in direct wage s.
In fact, overhead expenses are generally a function of time. Therefore, a
time base overhead absorption rate method is always preferred over any
other method. In the case of labour intensive operations, it is advisable to
use labour hour method for overhead absorption.
(b)
Period I Period 2 Difference
Total cost of production 14,600 19,400 4,800
(Rs.)
Volume of production 800 1,200 400
(units)
Difference in total cos t of production
Variable cost per unit =
Difference in volume of production
Rs. 4,800
= = Rs. 12
400 units
Fixed cost = Total cost of production (of a period) Total variable cost
= Rs. 14,600 800 units Rs. 12
= Rs. 14,600 Rs. 9,600 = Rs. 5,000
(c) Computation of un-absorbed overheads
Labour hours actually 2,00,00

worked
Rs.
Overheads actually incurred : (A) 45,00,000
Overheads absorbed at Rs. 20/- per labour hour (B) 40,00,000
(2,00,000 hours Rs. 20)
Unabsorbed overheads: (A B) 5,00,000
Unabsorbed overheads due to 3,00,000
Defective planning (i.e. 60% of Rs. 5,00,000)
Balance of unabsorbed overheads due to increase in 2,00,000
overhead costs.
Disposition of unabsorbed overhead
(i) The unabsorbed overheads of Rs. 3,00,000 due to defective
planning may be treated as abnormal and should therefore be charged
to Costing Profit and Loss Account.
(ii) Balance of unabsorbed overheads of Rs. 2,00,000 may be
treated as normal and therefore should be charged by a supplementary
overhead absorption rate computed as under:
Total production during the year
Units produced 35,000
Add: Equivalent units of work -in-progress 5,000
10,000 units, 50% complete ______
Total (units) 40,000
Supplementary overhead absorption rate is:
Rs. 2,00,000
= = Rs. 5/- per unit
40, 000
Disposition of normal unabsorbed overhead of Rs.
2,00,000
Rs.
Charge to Costing Profit Loss A/c 1,50,000
(as part of cost of unit sold: 30,000 units Rs. 5)
Add: To closing stock of finished goods: 5,000 25,000
finished goods in stock @ Rs. 5 per unit
Add: To work in progress: 10,000 units, 50% complete 25,000
i.e. 5,000 equivalent units @ Rs. 5/- per unit _______
Total 2,00,000
Question 60
A company is making a study of the relative profitability of the two
products A and B. In addition to direct costs, indirect selling and distribution
costs to be allocated between the two products are as under:
Rs.
Insurance charges for inventory (finished) 78,000
Storage costs 1,40,000
Packing and forwarding charges 7,20,000
Salesmen salaries 8,50,000
Invoicing costs 4,50,000
Other details are
Product A Product B
Selling price per unit (Rs.) 500 1,000
Cost per unit (exclusive of indirect (Rs.) 300 600
selling and distribution costs)
Annual sales in units 10,000 8,000
Average inventory (units) 1,000 800
Number of invoices 2,500 2,000
One unit of product A requires a storage space twice as much as product
B. The cost to packing and forwarding one unit is the same for both the products.
Salesmen are paid salary plus commission @ 5% on sales and equal amount of
efforts are put forth on the sales of each of the product.
Required
(i) Set-up a schedule showing the apportionment of the indirect selling and
distribution costs between the two products. (May, 1996, 7 marks)
(ii) Prepare a statement showing the relative profitability of the two products
(3 marks)
Answer
(i) Schedule showing the apportionment of the indirect selling and
distribution
costs between the two products
Products
Items Basis of apportionment Total A B

Rs. Rs. Rs.
Insurance Average inventory value 78,000 30,000 48,000
charges (1000 Rs. 500) : (800
Rs.100)
Storage cost Average Inventory storage 1,40,000 1,00,000 40,000

space
(1000 2) : (800 1)
Packing & Annual sales in units 7,20,000 4,00,000 3,20,000
Forwarding (10000) : (8000)
charges
Salesmen Efforts of Salesmen 8,50,000 4,25,000 4,25,000
salaries (1:1)
Salesmen Annual sales value 6,50,00 2,50,000 2,50,000
Commission (5:8)
Invoicing No. of invoices 4,50,000 2,50,000 2,00,000
Costs (2500 : 2000) ________ ________ ________
28,88,000 14,55,000 14,33,000
(ii) Statement showing the relative profitability of the two products
Products A B
Rs. Rs.
Annual sales value 50,00,000 80,00,000
(10,000 units Rs. (8,888 units Rs.
500) 1000)
Less: Cost of sales 30,00,000 48,00,000
(10,000 units Rs. (8,000 units Rs. 600)
300)
Gross Profit 20,00,00 32,00,000
Less: Indirect selling and 14,55,000 14,33,000
Distribution cost
[Refer to (a)(i)] _______ ________
Profit 5,45,000 17,67,000
Profitability as percentage of 10.9% 22.08%
sales
Rs. 5,45,000 Rs. 17,67,000
100 100
Rs. 50,00,000 Rs. 80,00,000
Question 61
ABC Ltd. manufactures a single product and absorbs the production
overheads at a pre-determined rate of Rs. 10 per machine hour.
At the end of financial year 1998-99, it has been found that actual
production overheads incurred were Rs. 6,00,000. It included Rs. 45,000 on
account of 'written off' obsolete stores and Rs. 30,000 being the wages paid for
the strike period under an award.
The production and sales data for the year 1998-99 is as under:
Production:
Finished goods 20,000 units
Work-in-progress 8,000 units
(50% complete in all respects)
Sales:
The actual machine hours worked during the period were 48,000. It has
been found that one-third of the under absorption of production overheads was
due to lack of production planning and the rest was attributable to normal
increase in costs.
(i) Calculate the amount of under absorption of production overheads during
the year 1998-99; and
(ii) Show the accounting treatment of under absorption of production
overheads.
Answer
(i) Amount of under-absorption of production overheads during the year
1998-99
Rs.
Total production overheads actually incurred during the 6,00,000
year 1998-99
Less: 'Written off' obsolete stores Rs. 45,000
Wages paid for strike period Rs. 30,000 75,000
Net production overheads actually incurred: (A) 5,25,000
Production overheads absorbed by 48,000 machines 4,80,000
hours @ Rs. 10 per hour: (B)
Amount of under-absorption of production overheads: 45,000

[(A)(B)]
(ii) Accounting treatment of under absorption of production overheads
It is given in the statement of the question that 20,000 units were
completely finished and 8,000 units were 50% complete, one third of the
under-absorbed overheads were due to lack of production planning and the
rest were attributable to normal increase in costs.
Rs.
1. (33-1/3% of Rs. 45,000) i.e. Rs. 15,000 of under 15,000
absorbed overheads were due to lack of production
planning. This being abnormal, should be debited to
the Profit and Loss A/c
2. Balance (66-2/3% of Rs. 45,000) i.e. Rs. 30,000 of 30,000
under absorbed overheads should be distributed
over work-in-progress, finished goods and cost of
sales by using supplementary rate ______
Total under-absorbed overheads 45,000
Apportionment of unabsorbed overheads of Rs. 30,000 over, work-in-
progress, finished goods and cost of sales.
Equivalent Rs.
Completed
units
Work-in-progress 4,000 5,000
(4,000 units Rs. 1.25)
Finished goods 2,000 2,500
(2,000 units Rs. 1.25)
Cost of sales 18,000 22,500
(18,000 units Rs. 1.25)
24,000 30,000
Accounting treatment:
Work-in-progress control A/c Dr. Rs. 5,000
Finished goods control A/c Dr. Rs. 2,500
Cost of Sales A/c Dr. Rs. 22,500
Profit & Loss A/c Dr. Rs. 15,000
To 45,000
Overhead control A/c
Working note:
Rs. 30,000
Supplementary overhead absorption rate =
24,000 units
= Rs. 1.25 per unit
Question 62
Sweat Dreams Ltd. uses a historical
cost system and absorbs overheads on the basis of predetermined rate. The
following data are available for the year ended 31st March, 1997.
Rs.
Manufacturing overheads
Amount actually spent 1,70,000
Amount absorbed 1,50,000
Cost of goods sold 3,36,000

Stock of finished goods 96,000
Works -in-progress 48,000
Using two methods of disposal of
under-absorbed overheads show the implication on the profits of the company
under each method. (Nov., 1997, 8 marks)
Answer
Computation of unabsorbed overheads:
According to first method, the total unabsorbed overhead amount of Rs.
20,000 will be written off to Costing Profit & Loss Account. The use of this
method will reduce the profits of the concern by Rs. 20,000 for the period.
According to second method, a supplementary rate may be used to
adjust the overhead cost of each cost unit. The under-absorbed amount in total
may, at the end of accounting period be apportioned on proportionate basis
over cost of goods sold; stock of finished goods and work -in-progress.
Apportionment of under-absorbed overheads may be carried out on the basis of
the value of cost of goods sold, stock of finished goods and work -in-progress.
Prorated figures of under-absorbed overhead over cost of goods sold; stock of
finished goods and work -in-progress in this question, on the basis of values of
the balances in each of these accounts are as follows:
Appointment of overhead under absorbed

Rs. Rs. Rs.
Cost of goods sold 3,36,000 14,000 3,50,000
Stock of finished goods 96,000 4,000 1,00,000
Work-in-progress 48,000 2,000 50,000
4,80,000 20,000 5,00,000
The use of the above method would reduce the profit of the concern by
Rs. 14,000.
Working note:
Under-absorbed overhead to be = Rs. 3,36,000
Rs. 20,000 = Rs. 14,000
absorbed by cost of goods sold Rs. 4,80,000
Under-absorbed overheads to be = Rs. 96,000
Rs. 20,000 = Rs. 4,000
absorbed by stock of finished Rs. 4,80,000
goods
Under-absorbed overhead to be = Rs. 48,000` Rs. 20,000 = Rs. 2,000
absorbed by WIP Rs. 4,80,000
Question 63
In a factory, a machine is considered to work for 208 hours in a month. It
includes maintenance time of 8 hours and set up time of 20 hours.
The expense data relating to the machine are as under:
Cost of the machine is Rs. 5,00,000. Life 10 years. Estimated scrap
value at the end of life is Rs. 20,000.
Rs.
Repairs and maintenance per annum 60,480
Consumable stores per annum 47,520
Rent of building per annum (The machine under 72,000
reference occupies 1/6 of the area)
Supervisor's salary per month (Common to three 6,000
machines)
Wages of operator per month per machine 2,500
General lighting charges per month allocated to the 1,000
machine
Power 25 units per hour at Rs. 2 per unit
Power is required for productive purposes only. Set up time, though
productive, does not require power. The Supervisor and Operator are
permanent. Repairs and maintenance and consumable stores vary with the
running of the machine.
Required
Calculate a two-tier machine hour rate for (a) set up time, and (b) running
time
Answer
Working notes:
1. (i) Effective hours for standing charges 200
(208 hours 8 hours)
(ii) Effective hours for variable costs 180
2. Standing charges per hour
Per month Per hour
Rs. Rs.
Supervisor's salary 2,000
(Rs. 6,000 / 3 machines)
General Lighting 1,000

Rent 1,000
(Rs. 72,000 / 6 12) _____
Total standing charges 4,000
Standing charges per hour 20
(Rs. 4,000 / 200 hours)
3. Machine expenses per
hour
Per month Per hour
Rs. Rs.
Depreciation 4,000 20
(Rs. 5,00,000 Rs. 20,000) / (Rs. 4,000 / 200
(10 years 12 months) hours
Repairs & maintenance 5,040 28
Rs. 60,480 / 12 months) (Rs. 5,040 / 180
hours)
Consumable stores 3,960 22

(Rs. 47,520 / 12 months) (Rs. 3,960 / 180
hours)
Power 9,000 50
(25 units Rs. 2 180 hours) (Rs. 9,000 / 180
hours)
Wages 2,500 12.50
______ (Rs. 2,500 / 200
hours)
Total machine expenses 24,500 132.50
Computation of Two tier machine hour rate
Set up time rate Running time
per machine rate per
hour machine hour
Rs. Rs.
Standing Charges 20.00 20.00
Machine expenses:
Depreciation 20.00 20.00
Repair and maintenance 28.00
Consumable stores 22.00
Power 50.00
Machine hour rate of overheads 40.00 140.00
Wages 12.50 12.50
Comprehensive machine hour rate 52.50 152.50
Question 64
A machine was purchased January 1,1990, for 5 lakhs. The total cost of all
machinery inclusive of the new machine was Rs. 75 lakhs. The following further
particulars are available:
Expected life of the machine 10 years.
Scrap value at the end of ten years Rs. 5,000.
Repairs and maintenance for the machine during the year Rs. 2,000
Expected number of working hours of the machine per year, 4,000 hours
Insurance premium annually for all the machines Rs. 4,500
Electricity consumption for the machine per hour (@ 75 paise per unit) 25
units.
Area occupied by the machine 100 sq.ft.
Area occupied by other machine 1,500 sq.ft.
Rent per month of the department Rs. 800.
Lighting charges for 20 points for the whole department, out of which three
points are for the machine Rs. 120 per month.
Compute the machine hour rate for the new machine on the basis of the
data given above.
Answer
(c) Computation of Machine Hour Rate
Standing charges Rs. Rs.
(p.a.) (per hour)
Depreciation (See Note 1) 49,500
Insurance premium (See Note 2) 300
Repair and Maintenance 2,000
Rent (See Note 3) 600
Light Charges (See Note 4) 216
Total Standing Charges 52,616
Hours rate for Standing Charges 13,154
(Rs. 52,616 / 4,000 hours)
Machine Expenses:
Electricity Consumption: 25 units p.h. 18.75
@ 0.75p p.u. ______
Machine hour rate 31.904
Note:
Rs.
(1) Cost of new machine: 5,00,000
Less: Scra p Value 5,000.00
Net Cost of the machines 4,95,000

Life of the machine 10 years:
Rs. 4,95,000
Depreciation = = Rs. 49,500
10 years
(2) Total cost of all the machines 75,00,000
Total Insurance premium paid for all the 4,500
machines
Total annual insurance premium of the
Rs. 4,500 Rs. 5,00,000
new Machine =
Rs. 75,00,000
= Rs. 300
(3) Rent paid per annum = Rs. 9,600
Toal Area occupied = 1600 Sq.Ft.
Rent for the area occupied by
Rs. 9,600100 sq.ft .
New machine (100 sq.ft.) =
1,600 sq.ft .
= Rs. 600
(4) Total annual light charges of 20
Points for the whole department is Rs. 1,440.
Rs.1,4403 point s
Light charges for the machine p.a. = = Rs. 216.
20 po int s
Question 65
A company has three production departments and two service
departments. Distribution summary of overheads is as follows:
Production Departments
A Rs. 13,600
B Rs. 14,700
C Rs. 12,800
Service Departments
X Rs. 9,000
Y Rs. 3,000
The expenses of service departments are charged on a percentage basis
which is as follows:
A B C X Y
X Deptt. 40% 30% 20% 10%
Y Deptt. 30% 30% 20% 20%
Apportion the cost of Service Departments by using the Repeated

Distribution method.
Answer
Statement showing apportionment of the cost of Service Departments
to Production Departments by using the Repeated Distribution Method.
Production Departments Service
Departments
A B C X Y
Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs.
Total overheads as per
distribution summary 13,600 14,700 12,800 9,000 3,000
Department X
overheads apportioned
in the ratio of
(40:30:20:-:10) 3,600 2,700 1,800 -9,000 900
Department Y
in the ratio of
(30:30:20:20:-) 1,170 1,170 780 780 -3,900
Department X
in the ratio of
(40:30:20:20:-:10) 312 234 156 -780 78
Department Y
in the ratio of
(30:30:20:20:-) 23 23 16 16 -78
Department X
in the ratio of
(40:30:20:-:10) 6 5 3 -16 2
Department Y
in the ratio of
(30:30:20: 20:-) 1 1 -2
18,712 18,833 15,555
Question 66
What is idle time? Explain the causes leading to idle time and its treatment
in cost accounts?
Answer
Idle time : It refer to the labour time paid for but not utilized on production
.In other words it represents the time for which wages are paid, but during which
no output is given out by the workers .This is the period during which workers
remain idle . Idle time may be normal or abnormal . Normal idle time is the time,
which canno t be avoided or reduced, in normal course of business. Abnormal
idle time is the time, which arises on account of abnormal causes. Such idle time
is uncontrollable.
Causes leading to idle time: The major causes, which account for idle time
may be grouped under the following two heads:
Normal causes: The main causes, which lead to the occurrence of normal
idle time, are as follow
1. Time taken by workers to travel the distance between the main gate of
factory and the place pf their work.
2. Time lost between the finish of one job and starting of next job.
3. Time spent to overcome fatigue.
4. Time spent to meet their personal needs like taking lunch, tea etc.
Abnormal causes: The main causes, which account for the occurrence of
abnormal idle time, are:
1. Machine breakdown, power failure, non-availability of raw materials, tools
or waiting for jobs due to defective planning.
2. Conscious management policy decision to stop work for some time.
3. In the case of seasonal goods producing units may not be possible for them
to produce evenly throughout the year. Such a factor too, it result in the
generation of abnormal idle time.
Treatment of Idle time in Cost Accounts:
Normal idle time: The cost of normal idle time should be charged to the cost
of production. This is done by inflating the labour rate. It may be transferred to
factory overheads for absorption, by adopting a factory overhead absorption
rate.
Abnormal Idle time: The cost of abnormal idle time due to any reason should be
charged to Costing Profit & Loss Account.
Question 67
Indicate the base or bases that you would recommend to apportion
overhead costs to production department:
(i) Supplies (ii) Repairs
(iii) Maintenance of building (iv) Executive salaries
(v) Rent (vi) Power and light
(vii) Fire insurance (vii) Indirect labour.
Answer
Item Bases of apportionment
(i) Supplies Actual supplies made to different departments
(ii) Repair Direct labour hours; Machine hours; Direct
labour wages; Plant value.
(iii) Maintenance of building Floor area occupied by each department
(iv) Executive salaries Actual basis; Number of workers.

(v) Rent Floor area
(vi) Power and light K W hours or H P (power)

Number of light points; Floor space; Meter
readings (light)
(vii) Fire insurance Capital cost of plant and building; Value of stock
(viii)Indirect labour Direct labour cost.
Question 68
Your company uses a historical cost system and applies overheads on the basis of
pre-determined rates. The following are the figure from the Trial Balance as at
30-9-83:-
Manufacturing overheads Rs. 4,26,544 Dr.
Manufacturing overheads applied Rs. 3,65,904 Cr.
Work-in-progress Rs. 1,41,480 Dr.
Finished goods stocks Rs. 2,30,732 Dr.
Cost of goods sold Rs.8,40,588 Dr.
Give two methods for the disposal of the unabsorbed overheads and show the
profit implications of each method.
Answer
Actual overheads Rs. 4,26,544
Overhead recovered Rs. 3,65,904
Under absorbed Overhead Rs. 60,640
The two methods for the disposal of the under-absorbed overheads in this
problem may be:-
(1) Write off the under absorbed overhead to Costing Profit & Loss Account.
(2) Use supplementary rate, to recover the under-absorbed overhead.
According to first method, the total unabsorbed overhead amount of Rs.
60,640 will be written off to Costing Profit & Loss Account. The use of this
method will reduce the profits of the concern by Rs. 60,640 for the period.
According to second method, a supplementary rate may be used to adjust
the overhead cost of each cost unit. The under-absorbed amountin total may, at
the end of the accounting period, be apportioned on ratio basis to the three
control accounts, viz, work-in-progress, finished goods stock and cost of goods
sold account. Apportioning of under-absorbed overhead can be carried out by
using direct labour hours/machine hours/the value of the balances in each of
these accounts, as the basis. Prorated figures of under-absorbed overhead over
work -in-progress, finished goods stock and cost of goods sold in this question on
the basis of values, of the balances in each of these accounts are as follows:-
Additional Overhead
(Under-absorbed) Total
Rs. Rs. Rs.
Work-in-progress 1,41,480 7,074* 1,48,554
Finished Goods Stock 2,30,732 11,537** 2,42,269
Cost of Goods Sold 8,40,588 42,029*** 8,82,617
12,12,800 60,640 12,73,440
By using this method, the profit for the period will be reduced by Rs. 42,029
and the value of stock will increase by Rs. 18,611. The latter will affect the profit
of the subsequent period.
Working Notes
The apportionment of under-absorbed overhead over work-in-progress, finished
goods stock and cost of goods sold on the basis of their value in the respective
account is as follows:-
*Overhead to be absorbed by Rs. 60,640
= 1,41,480 = Rs. 7,074
work-in-progress 12,12,800
**Overhead to be absorbed by Rs. 60,640
= 2,30,732 = Rs. 11,537
finished goods 12,12,800
***Overhead to be absorbed by Rs. 60,640
= 8,40,588 = Rs. 42,029
cost of goods sold 12,12,800
Question 69
Distinguish between cost allocation and cost absorption.
Answer
Cost allocation and Cost Absorption: Cost allocation is defined as the
allotment of whole items of cost to cost centers. For example, if a typist works
exclusively for Board of Studies, then the salary paid to him should be charged to
Board of Studies account. This technique of charging the entire overhead
expenses to a cost centre is known as cost allocation.
Cost absorption is defined as the process of absorbing all overhead costs
allocated to or apportioned over parti cular cost centre or production
department by the units produced. For example, the overhead costs of a lathe
centre may be absorbed by a rate per lathe hour.
Cost absorption can take place only after cost allocation. In other words,
the overhead costs are either allocated or apportioned over different cost
centres and afterwards they are absorbed on equitable basis by the output of
the same cost centres.
Question 70
A factory manufactures only one product in one quality and size. The owner
of the factory states that he has a sound system of financial accounting which
can provide him with unit cost information and as such he does not need a cost
accounting system. State your arguments to convince him the need to introduce
a cost accounting system. (Nov, 1996, 4 marks)
Answer
Definition of Administration overhead: These are costs of formulating the
policy, directing the organisation and controlling the operation of an
undertaking. These are not related directly to production activity or function. In
other words, all expenses incurred on policy formulation, direction, control,
office administration and business management are included in administration
overheads.
Treatment of Administrative Overheads in Cost Accounting
(i) Charge to Costing Profit and Loss Account: According to this method
administration overheads should be treated as fixed cost as they are
concerned with the formulation of policy. Hence these overheads should be
transferred to the costing profit and account.
(ii) Apportionment between production and selling and distribution: According
to this method it is assumed that administrative overheads are incurred
both for production and for selling and distribution. Therefore these
overheads should be divided on equitable basis between production and
selling and distribution activity.
(iii) Treat as a separate element of total cost: Here administration overhead
considered as a cost of a distinct and identifiable operation of the
organisation necessary to carry on its activity. Therefore these overheads
are recovered separately on some equitable basis which may be cost or
sales basis.
Question 71
An engine manufacturing company has two production departments: (i)
Snow mobile engine and (ii) Boat engine and two service departments: (i)
Maintenance and (ii) Factory office. Budgeted cost data and relevant cost
drivers are as follows:
Departmental costs: Rs.
Snow mobile engine 6,00,000
Boat engine 17,00,000
Factory office 3,00,000
Maintenance 2,40,000
Cost drivers:
Factory office department: No. of
employees
Snow mobile engine department 1,080
employees
Boat engine department 270 employees
Maintenance department 150 employees
1,500
employees
Maintenance department: No. of work

orders
Snow mobile engine department 570 orders
Boat engine department 190 orders
Factory office department 40 orders
800 orders
Required:
(i) Compute the cost driver allocation percentage and then use these
percentage to allocate the service department costs by using direct
method.
(ii) Compute the cost driver allocation percentage and then use these
percentage to allocate the service department costs by using non -
reciprocal method/step method.
(2+3= 5 marks)
Answer 71
(i) Cost Driver Allocation percentage
Factory office dept. Number of employees Percent used
Snowmobile engine 1,080 80%
Boat engine 270 20%
Total 1,350 100%
Maintenance dept Number of work

orders
Snowmobile engine 570 75%
Boat engine 190 25%
760 100
Service department allocation:

Factory Maintenance Snowmobile Boat
office dept. dept. engine engine
Departmental Rs. 3,00,000 Rs. 2,40,000 Rs. Rs.
Cost 6,00,000 17,00,000
Allocated costs
(Rs):
Factory office (3,00,000) - 2,40,000 60,000
Dept.
Maintenance - (2,40,000) 1,80,000 60,000
Dept.
Total 0 0 10,20,000 18,20,000
(ii) Cost Driver allocation percentage

Factory office dept Number of employees Percent used
Snowmobile engine 1,080 72%
Boat engine 270 18%
Maintenance dept 150 10%

1,500 100%
Maintenance dept Work order Percent used
Snowmobile engine 570 75%
Boat engine 190 25%
760 100%
Service department allocation:
Factory Maintenance Snowmobile Boat
office Dept. Dept. engine engine
Departmental costs Rs. Rs. 2,40,000 Rs. Rs.
3,00,000 6,00,000 17,00,000
Allocated costs (Rs):
Factory office (3,00,000) 30,000 2,16,000 54,000
Maintenance dept - (2,70,000) 20,2500 67,500
Total cost 0 0 10,18,500 18,21,500
Question 72
A manufacturing unit has purchased and installed a new machine of Rs.
12,70,000 to its fleet of 7 existing machines. The new machine has an
estimated life of 12 years and is expected to realise Rs. 70,000 as scrap at the
end of its working life. Other relevant data are as follows:
(i) Budgeted working hours are 2,592 based on 8 hours per day for 324
days. This includes 300 hours for plant maintenance and 92 hours for
setting up of plant.
(ii) Estimated cost of maintenance of the machine is Rs. 25,000 (p.a.).
(iii) `The machine requires a special chemical solution, which is replaced
at the end of each week (6 days in a week) at a cost of Rs. 400 each
time.
(iv) Four operators control operation of 8 machines and the average
wages per person amounts to Rs. 420 per week plus 15% fringe
benefits.
(v) Electricity used by the machine during the production is 16 units per
hour at a cost of Rs. 3 per unit. No current is taken during
maintenance and setting up.
(vi) Departmental and general works overhead allocated to the operation

during last year was Rs. 50,000. During the current year it is
estimated to increase 10% of this amount.
Calculate machine hour rate, if (a) setting up time is unproductive; (b)
setting up time is productive.
(2+3= 5 marks)
Answer 72
Computation of Machine hour Rate
Per year Per hour Per hour
(unproductive) (productive)
Standing charges
Operators wages
4 420 54 90,720
Add: Fringe Benefits 15% 13,608
1,04,328
Departmental and general overhead
(50,000 + 5,000) 55,000
Total Std. Charging for 8 machines 1,59,328
Cost per Machine 1,59,328/8 19,916
Cost per Machine hour 19,916/2,200 9.05
19,916/2,292 8.69
Machine hours:
Setting time unproductive (2,592-300-
92) = 2200
Setting time productive (2,592-300) =
2,292
Machine expenses
Depreciation (12,70,000 -70,000)/(12 45.45
2,200)
(12,70,000-70,000)/(12 2,292) 43.63
Electricity (16 3) 48.00
(1632,200)/2,292) 46.07
Special chemical solution (400
54)/2,200,/ 2,292 9.82 9.42
Maintenance (25,000/2,200) 11.36
(25,000/2,292) 10.91
Machine Hour Rate 123.68 118.72
Question 73
From the details furnished below you are required to compute a
comprehensive machine-hour rate:
Original purchase price of the machine Rs. 3,24,000
(subject to depreciation at 10% per annum
on original cost)
Normal working hours for the month
(The machine works to only 75% of capacity) 200 hours
Rs. 125 per day
(of 8 hours)
Wages for Helper (machine attendant) Rs. 75 per day
(of 8 hours)
Power cost for the month for the time Rs. 15,000
worked
Supervision charges apportioned for the
machine centre for the month Rs. 3,000
Electricity & Lighting for the month Rs. 7,500
Repairs & maintenance (machine) including
Consumable stores per month Rs. 17,500
Insurance of Plant & Building (apportioned)
for the year Rs. 16,250
Other general expense per annum Rs. 27,500
The workers are paid a fixed Dearness allowance of Rs. 1,575 per month.
Production bonus payable to workers in terms of an award is equal to 33.33% of
basic wages and dearness allowance. Add 10% of the basic wage and dearness
allowance against leave wages and holidays with pay to arrive at a
comprehensive labour-wage for debit to production. (14 Marks)
Answer
Computation of Comprehensive Machine Hour Rate
Per Per
month(Rs) hour(Rs)
Fixed cost
Supervision charges 3,000
Electricity and lighting 7,500
Insurance of Plant and building (16,2501/12) 1,354.17
Other General Expenses (27,5001/12) 2,291.67

Depreciation (32,4001/12) 2,700
16,845.84 112.31
Variable Cost
Repairs and maintenance 17,500 116.67
Power 15,000 100.00
Wages of machine man 44.91
Wages of Helper 32.97
Machine Hour rate (Comprehensive) Rs406.86
Effective machine working hours p.m.

200 hrs. 75% = 150 hrs.
Wages per machine hour
Machine Helper
man
Wages for 200 hours
(Rs. 125 25) Rs. 3,125
(Rs. 75 25) Rs.
1,875
D.A. Rs. 1,575 Rs.
1,575
Rs. 4,700 Rs.

3,450
Production bonus (1/3 of above) 1,567 1,150
6,267 4,600
Leave wages (10%) 470 345
6,737 4,945
Effective wage rate per machine hour (150 hrs Rs. 44.91 Rs.
in all) 32.97
Question 74
RST Ltd. has two production departments: Machining and Finishing.
There are three service departments: Human Resource (HR), Maintenance and
Design. The budgeted costs in these service departments are as follows:
HR Maintenance Design
Rs. Rs. Rs.
Variable 1,00,000 1,60,000 1,00,000
Fixed 4,00,000 3,00,000 6,00,000
5,00,000 4,60,000 7,00,000
The usage of these Service Departments output during the year just
completed is as follows:
Provision of Ser vice Output (in hours of service)
Providers of Service
Users of Service HR Maintenance Design
HR
Maintenance 500
Design 500 500
Machining 4,000 3,500 4,500
Finishing 5,000 4,000 1,500
Total 10,000 8,000 6,000
Required:
(i) Use the direct method to re-apportion RST Ltd.s service department
cost to its production departments.
(ii) Determine the proper sequence to use in re-apportioning the firms

service department cost by step-down method.
(iii) Use the step-down method to reapportion the firms service
department cost.
Answer
(i) Apportionment of Service Department Overheads amongst production
departments using Direct Method:
Machining Finishing HR Maintenance Design
Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs.
Overhead as 5,00,000 4,60,000 7,00,000
per primary
distribution
Apportionment 5,25,000 1,75,000
design 4,500 :
1,500
Maintenance 2,14,667 2,45,333
3,500 : 4,000
HR 4,000 : 2,22,222 2,77,778
5,000
9,61,889 6,98,111
(ii) The proper sequence for apportionment of service department
overheads is
First HR
Second Maintenance
Third Design
The sequence has been laid down based on service provided.
(iii) Apportionment of Service Department overheads amongst production
departments using step-down method.
Production Service Department
Department
Machinin Finishi HR Maintenan Design
g ng ce
Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs.
Overhead as per 5,00,000 4,60,000 7,00,000
primary
distribution
Apportionment 2,00,000 2,50,00 ( )5,00,00 25,000 25,000
HRD 4 : 5 : : 0.5 0 0
: 0.5
Maintenance 7 : 2,12,188 2,42,50 ( )4,85,00 30,312
8: : 1 0 0
Design 3 : 1 5,66,484 1,88,82 ( )7,55,31
8 2
9,78,672 6,81,32
8
Question 75
ABC Ltd. has three production departments P 1, P 2 and P3 and two service
departments S1 and S2. The following data are extracted from the records
of the Company for the month of October, 2007:
Rs.
Rent and rates 62,500
General lighting 7,500
Indirect Wages 18,750
Power 25,000
Depreciation on machinery 50,000
Insurance of machinery 20,000
Other Information:
P1 P2 P3 S1 S2
Direct wages 37,500 25,000 37,500 18,750 6,250
(Rs.)
Horse Power of
Machines used 60 30 50 10
Cost of 3,00,000 4,00,000 5,00,000 25,000 25,000
machinery (Rs.)
Floor space (Sq. 2,000 2,500 3,000 2,000 500
ft)
Number of light 10 15 20 10 5
points
Production hours
worked 6,225 4,050 4,100
Expenses of the service departments S1 a n d S2 are reapportioned as
below:
P1 P2 P3 S1 S2
S1 20% 30% 40% 10%
S2 40% 20% 30% 10%
Required:
(i) Compute overhead absorption rate per production hour of each
production department.
(ii) Determine the total cost of product X which is processed for
manufacture in department P1, P2 and P3 for 5 hours, 3 hours and 4
hours respectively, given that its direct material cost is Rs. 625 and
direct labour cost is Rs. 375.
(November 2007, 10
Marks)
Answer
(i) Primary Distribution Summary
Item of cost Basis of Total P1 P2 P3 S1 S2
apportionment (Rs.) (Rs.) (Rs.) (Rs.) (Rs.) (Rs.)
Rent and Floor area 62,500 12,500 15,625 18,750 12,500 3,125
Rates 4:5:6:4:1
General Light points 7,500 1,250 1,875 2,500 1,250 625
lighting 2:3:4:2:1
Indirect Direct wages 18,750 5,625 3,750 5,625 2812.5 937.5
wages 6:4:6:3:1
Power Horse Power 25,000 10,000 5,000 8,333 1,667

of machines
used
6:3:5:1
Depreciation Value of 50,000 12,000 16,000 20,000 1,000 1,000
of machinery
machinery 12 : 16 : 20 : 1
:1
Insurance of Value of 20,000 4,800 6,400 8,000 400 400
machinery machinery
12 : 16 : 20 : 1
:1
_______ ______ ______ ______ ______ _____
1,83,750 46,175 48,650 63,208 19,630 6,088
Overheads of service cost centres Let S1 be the overhead of service cost
centre S1 and S 2 be the overhead of service cost centre S2.
S 1 = 19,630 + 0.10 S2
S 2 = 6,088 + 0.10 S1
Substituting the value of S2 in S1 we get
S 1 = 19,630 + 0.10 (6,088 + 0.10 S1)
S 1 = 19,630 + 608.8 + 0.01 S 1
0.99 S 1 = 20,238.8
S 1 = Rs. 20,443.
S 2 = 6,088 + 0.10 20,443.
= Rs. 8,132.
Secondary Distribution Summary
Particulars Total P1 P2 P3
Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs.
Allocated and Apportioned 1,58,033 46,175 48,650 63,208
over-heads as per primary
distribution
S1 20,443 4,089 6,133 8,177
S2 8,132 3,253 1,626 2,440
53,517 56,409 73,825

Overhead rate per hour
P1 P2 P3
Total overheads cost Rs. 53,517 Rs. 56,409 Rs. 73,825
Production hours worked 6,225 4,050 4,100
Rate per hour (Rs.) Rs. 8.60 Rs. 13.93 Rs. 18.01
(ii) Cost of Product X
Direct material Rs. 625
Direct labour Rs. 375
Prime cost Rs. 1,000
Production on overheads
P1 5 hours Rs. 8.60 = 43
P2 3 hours Rs. 13.93 = 41.79
P3 4 hours Rs. 18.01 = 72.04 Rs. 156.83
Factory cost Rs. 1,157
Question 76
PQR manufacturers a small scale enterprise produces a single product
and has adopted a policy to recover the production overheads of the
factory by adopting a single blanket rate based on machine hours. The
budgeted production overheads of the factory are Rs. 10,08,000 and
budgeted machine hours are 96,000.
For a period of first six months of the financial year 2007 2008, following
information were extracted from the books:
Actual production overheads Rs. 6,79,000
Amount included in the production overheads:
Paid as per courts order Rs. 45,000
Expenses of previous year booked in Rs. 10,000
current year
Paid to workers for strike period under Rs. 42,000
an award
Obsolete stores written off Rs. 18,000

Production and sales data of the concern for the first six months are as
under:
Production:
Works-in-progress
(50% complete in every respect) 16,000 units
Sale:
The actual machine hours worked during the period were 48,000 hours. It
is revealed from the analysis of information that of the under-
absorption was due to defective production policies and the balance was
attributable to increase in costs.
You are required:
(i) to determine the amount of under absorption of production
overheads for the period,
(ii) to show the accounting treatment of under-absorption of production
overheads, and
(iii) to apportion the unabsorbed overheads over the items.(May 2008, 10
Marks)
Answer
(i) Amount of under absorption of production overheads during the period
of first six months of the year 2007-2008:
Amount
(Rs.)
Total production overheads 6,79,000
actually incurred during the
period
Less: Amount paid to worker 45,000
as per court order
Expenses of previous 10,000
year booked in the
current year
Wages paid for the strike 42,000
period under an award
Obsolete material 18,000
written off 1,15,000
5,64,000
Less: Production overheads (48,000 hours *
absorbed as per machine Rs. 10.50) 5,04,000
hour rate*
Amount of under absorbed 60,000
production overheads
Rs.10,08,000
Budgeted Machine hour rate = = Rs.10.50per hour
96,000hours
(ii) Accounting treatment of under absorbed production overheads:

As, one fourth of the under absorbed overheads were due to
defective production policies, this being abnormal, hence should be
debited to Profit and Loss Account.
Amount to be debited to Profit and Loss Account = (60,000 * )
Rs. 15,000.
Balance of under absorbed production overheads should be
distributed over Works in progress, finished goods and cost of sales
by applying supplementary rate*.
Amount to be distributed = (60,000 * ) Rs. 45,000.
Rs. 45,000
Supplementary rate = = Rs. 1.50 per unit
30,000 units
(iii) Apportionment of under absorbed production overheads over WIP,

finished goods and cost of sales:
Equivalent Amount
complete (in Rs.)
d units
Work -in-Progress (16,000 units 8,000 12,000
*50%*1.50)
Finished goods (4,000 units *1.50) 4,000 6,000
Cost of sales (18,000 units *1.50) 18,000 27,000
Total 30,000 45,000
Question 77
In a manufacturing company factory overheads are charged as fixed
percentage basis on direct labour and office overheads are charged on
the basis of percentage of factory cost. The following informations are
available related to the year ending 31st March, 2008 :
Product A Product B
Direct Materials Rs. 19,000 Rs. 15,000
Direct Labour Rs. 15,000 Rs. 25,000
Sales Rs. 60,000 Rs. 80,000
Profit 25% on cost 25% on sales price
You are required to find out:
(i) The percentage of factory overheads on direct labour.
(ii) The percentage of office overheads on factory cost (November 2008,
6 Marks)
Answer
Let, the percentage of factory overheads on direct labour is x and the
percentage of office overheads on factory cost is y, then the total cost
of product A and product B will be as follows:
Product A Product B
(Rs.) (Rs.)
Direct labour 15,000 25,000
Prime Cost 34,000 40,000
Factory overheads (Direct labour 150 x 250 x

x)
Factory cost (i) 34,000 + 40,000 +
150 x 250 x
Office overheads (Factory cost y) 340 y + 400 y +
(ii) 1.5 x y 2.5 x y
Total Cost [(i) + (ii)] 34,000 + 40,000 +
150 x 250 x
+ 340 y + +400 y +
1.5 x y 2.5 x y
Total cost on the basis of sales is:
Product Product B
A
(Rs.) (Rs.)
Sales 60,000 80,000
Less : Profit
Product A 25% on cost or 20% on 12,000
Sales
Product B 25% on sales ______ 20,000
Total Cost 48,000 60,000
Thus,
Total Cost of A is 34,000 + 150x + 340y + 1.5 xy = 48,000
or 150x + 340y + 1.5 xy = 14,000.(i)
Total Cost of B is 40,000 + 250x + 400y + 2.5 xy = 60,000
or 250x + 400y + 2.5 xy = 20,000 .(ii)
Equation (ii) multiplied by 0.6 and after deducting from equation (i), we
get
150x + 340y + 1.5xy = 14,000.(i)
_150x 240y 1.5xy = _12,000.......(ii)
100y = 2,000
or y = 20
Putting value of y in equation (i), we get
150x + 340 20 + 1.5x 20 = 14,000
or 150x + 30x = 14,000 6,800
or 180x = 7,200
or x = 40.
Hence, (i) the percentage of factory overheads on direct labour = 40
and
(ii) the percentage of office overheads on factory cost = 20.
Question 78
Maximum production capacity of JK Ltd. is 5,20,000 units per annum.
Details of estimated cost of production are as follows:
Direct material Rs. 15 per unit.
Direct wages Rs. 9 per unit (subject to a minimum of Rs. 2,50,000 per
month).
Fixed overheads Rs. 9,60,000 per annum.
Variable overheads Rs. 8 per unit.
Semi-variable overheads are Rs. 5,60,000 per annum up to 50 per cent
capacity and additional Rs. 1,50,000 per annum for every 25 per cent
increase in capacity or a part of it.
JK Ltd. worked at 60 per cent capacity for the first three months during the
year 2008, but it is expected to work at 90 per cent capacity for the remaining
nine months.
The selling price per unit was Rs. 44 during the first three months.
You are required, what selling price per unit should be fixed for the remaining
nine months to yield a total profit of Rs. 15,62,500 for the whole year.
(November 2008, 8 Marks)
Answer Statement of Cost and Sales for the year 2008
Maximum production capacity = 5,20,000 units per annum
Particulars First 3 Next 9 Total
months months
Capacity utilized 60% 90%
Production 5,20,000 3 60% 5,20,000 9 90%
12 12
4,29,000
= 78,000 = 3,51,000 units
units units
Rs. Rs. Rs.
Direct materials @ Rs. 11,70,000 52,65,000 64,35,00
15 per unit 0
Direct wages @ 9 per 7,50,000 31,59,000 39,09,00
unit or Rs. 2,50,000 per 0
month which ever is
higher
Prime cost (A) 19,20,000 84,24,000 1,03,44,
000
Overheads
Fixed 2,40,000 7,20,000
9,60,000
Variable @ Rs. 8 per 6,24,000 28,08,000
unit 34,32,00
0
Semi Variable 1,77,500 6,45,000
8,22,500
Total overheads (B) 10,41,500 41,73,000 52,14,50
0
Total Cost (C) [(A + B)] 29,61,500 1,25,97,00 1,55,58,
0 500
Profit during first 3 4,70,500
months
Sales @ Rs. 44 per unit 34,32,000
Desired profit during next 9
months 10,92,000
(Rs. 15,62,500 Rs.
4,70,500) (D)
Sales required for next 9 ________
months __
(E) [(C + D)] 1,36,89,00
0
Total profit
15,62,50
0
Total Sales 1,71,21,
000
Total sales required for last 9 months
Required selling price per unit for last 9 months =
Units produced during last 9 months
1,36,89,000
= Rs. = Rs.39 per unit.
35,10,000
Workings:
(1) Semi-variable overheads:
(a) For first 3 months at 60%
capacity = Rs. (5,60,000 + Rs. 1,50,000)
3/12
= Rs. 7,10,000 3/12
= Rs. 1,77,500.
(b) For remaining 9 months at 90% capacity = Rs. (5,60,000 + Rs.
3,00,000) 9/12
= Rs. 8,60,000 9/12
Question 79
Calculate machine hour rate for recovery of overheads for a machine from
the following information:
Cost of machine is Rs. 25, 00,000 and estimated salvage value is Rs.
1,00,000. Estimated working life of the machine is 10 years. Annual working
hours are 3,000 in the factory. The machine is required 400 hours per annum
for repairs and maintenance. Setting-up time of the machine is 156 hours per
annum to be treated as productive time. Cost of repairs and maintenance for
whole working life of the machine is Rs. 3,50,000. Power used 15 units per
hour at a cost of Rs. 5 per unit. No power is consumed during maintenance
and setting-up time. A chemical required for operating the machine is Rs.
9,880 per annum. Wages of an operator is Rs. 4,000 per month. The operator,
devoted one-third of his time to the machine. Annual insurance charges 2 per
cent of cost of machine.
Light charges for the department is Rs. 2,500 per month, having 48
points in all, out of which only 8 points are used at this machine. Other indirect
expenses are chargeable to the machine are Rs. 6,500 per month.
(November 2008, 6 m arks)
Answer
Computation of Machine Hour Rate
Running Hours (3,000 400) = 2,600 per annum
Particulars Total Rate per
Amount hour
Rs. Rs.
Fixed Charges (Standing Charges):
Rs. 4,00012
Operators wages: 16,000
3
Insurance: 2% of Rs. 25,00,000 50,000
Rs. 2,50012 8
Light charges : 5,000
48
Other indirect expenses: Rs. 6,500 12 78,000
Total Standing charges 1,49,000
Rs.1,49,000
Hourly rate for fixed charges : 57.31
2,600
Variable Expenses (Machine Expenses)
per hour
Rs. 25,00,000 Rs.1,00,000
Depreciation : 92.31
10 2,600
Rs.3,50,000
Repairs and Maintenance : 13.46
10 2,600
Rs. 5 15 2,444
Power: 70.50
2,600
Rs. 9,880
Chemical : 3.80
2,600
Machine Hour Rate 237.38
= Rs. 6,45,000.
5
Activity Based Costing
Question 1
Discuss the different stages in the Activity based Costing. (Nov.,
2003, 4 marks)
Answer
Different stages in activity based costing
(i) Identify the different activities within the organization
(ii) Relate the overheads cost to the identified activities
(iii) Support activities are then spread across the primary activities
(iv) Determine the activity cost drivers
(v) Calculate the activity cost driver rates
(vi) Compute the overhead cost to be charged over the product by using cost
driver rates.
Question 2
Give three examples of Cost Drivers of following business functions in the
value chain:
(i) Research and development
(ii) Design of products, services and processes
(iii) Marketing
(iv) Distribution
(v) Customer service

Answer
A cost driver is any factor whose change causes a change in the total cost of
a related cost object. In other words, a change in the level of cost driver will
cause a change in the level of the total cost of a related cost object.
The cost drivers for business functions viz. Research & Development; Design
of products, servi ces and processes; Marketing; Distribution and Customer
service are as follows:
Business functions Cost

Drivers
(i) Research & Development -
Number of research projects
- Personnel hours on a project
- Technical complexities of the
projects
(ii) Design of products, services and processes- Number of products
in design
- Number of parts per product
- Number of engineering hours
(iii) Marketing -
Number of advertisement run
- Number of sales personnel
- Sales revenue
- Number of products and
volume of s ales (in
quantitative terms)
(iv) Distribution -
Number of items distributed
- Number of customers
- Weight of items distributed
(v) Customer service -
Number of service calls
- Number of products serviced
- Hours spent in servicing of

products
Question 3
MNP suits is a ready-to-wear suit manufacturer. It has four customers:
two wholesale-channel customers and two retail-channel customers.
MNP suits has developed the following activity-based costing system:
Activity Cost driver Rate in 2004
Order processing Number of purchase Rs. 1,225 per order
orders
Sales visits Number of customer Rs. 7,150 per visit
visits
Deliveryregular Number of regular Rs. 1,500 per delivery
deliveries
Delivery-rushed Number of rushed Rs. 4,250 per delivery
deliveries
List selling price per suit is Rs. 1000 and average cost per suit is Rs. 550.
The CEO of MNP suits wants to evaluate the profitability of each of the four
customers in 2003 to explore opportunities for increasing profitability of his
company in 2004. The following data are available for 2003:
Item Wholesale Retail customers
customers
W H R T
Total number of orders 44 62 212 250
Total number of sales visits 8 12 22 20
Regular deliveries 41 48 166 190
Rush deliveries 3 14 46 60
Average number of suits per order 400 200 30 25
Average selling price per suit Rs. 700 Rs. 800 Rs. 850 Rs. 900
Required :
(i) Calculate the customer-level operating income in 2003.
(ii) What do you recommend to CEO of MNP suits to do to increase the
companys operating income in 2004?
(iii) Assume MNP suits distribution channel costs are Rs. 17,50,000 for its
wholesale customers and Rs. 10,50,000 for the retail customers. Also,
assume that its corporate sustaining costs are Rs. 12,50,000. Prepare
Income statement of MNP suits for 2003.
(Nov., 2004, 6+2+2=10
marks)
Answer
(i) Customer Profitability Analysis, Customer cost hierarchy
Item W H R T
Revenue Rs Rs Rs Rs
At list price (Rs)
44x400=17600
62x200=12400
212x30=6360
250x25=6250
17600x1000,12400x1000,6360x1
0006250x
1000
1,76,00,0 1,24,00,0 63,60,0 62,50,0
00 00 00 00
Discount
1000-700=300
1000-800=200
1000-850=150
1000-900=100
17600x300,12400x200,
6360x150,6250x100
52,80,00 24,80,00 9,54,00 6,25,00
0 0 0 0
Revenues at actual prices 1,23,20,0 99,20,00 54,06,0 56,25,0
00 0 00 00
Cost of Goods Sold
17600x550
12400x550
6360x550
6250x550
96,80,00 68,20,00 34,98,0 34,37,5
0 0 00 00
Gross Margin 26,40,00 31,00,00 19,08,0 21,87,5
0 0 00 00
Customer level operating Costs:
Order processing (44,62,212,250) x 53,900 75,950 2,59,70 3,06,25
(Rs1,225) 0 0
Sales visits (8,12,22,20)X(Rs 57,200 85,800 1,57,30 1,43,00
7,150) 0 0
Delivery regular (41,48,166,190) x 61,500 72,000 2,49,00 2,85,00
(Rs 1,500) 0 0
Delivery rushed (3,14,46,60) (Rs 12,750 59,500 1,95,50 2,55,00
4,250) 0 0
Total customer level operating 1,85,350 2,93,250 8,61,50 9,89,25
cost 0 0
Customer level operating income 24,54,65 28,06,75 10,46,5 11,98,2
0 0 00 50
Customer level operating income 19.92 28.29 19.35 21.30
as %age on revenues at actual
prices
(ii) Key Challenges facing CEO are
(i) Reduce level of price discounting, especially by W
(ii) Reduce level of customer-level costs, especially by R & T
The ABC cost system highlights areas where R & T accounts are troublesome
They have
High number of orders
High number of customer visits
High number of rushed deliveries
The CEO needs to consider whether this high level of activity can be
reduced without reducing customer revenues.
(ii) Income Statement of MNP suits for 2003 (in Rs)

Wholesale Retail Total

Customers Customers
Customer level operating Rs Rs 22,44,750 Rs
income 52,61,400 75,06,150
Less: Distribution channel cost 17,50,000 10,50,000 28,00,000
Distribution channel level 35,11,400 11,94,750 47,06,150
operating income
Less: Corporate sustaining costs 12,50,000
Operating Income 34,56,150
Question 4
MST Limited has collected the following data for its two activities. It
calculates activity cost rates based on cost driver capacity.
Activity Cost Driver Capacity Cost
Power Kilowatt hours 50,000 kilowatt Rs. 2,00,000
hours
Quality Number of 10,000 Inspections Rs. 3,00,000
Inspections Inspections
The company makes three products M,S and T. For the year ended March
31, 2004, the following consumption of cost drivers was reported:
Product Kilowatt hours Quality Inspections
M 10,000 3,500
S 20,000 2,500
T 15,000 3,000
Required:
(i) Compute the costs allocated to each product from each activity.
(ii) Calculate the cost of unused capacity for each activity.
(iii) Discuss the factors the management considers in choosing a capacity
level to compute the budgeted fixed overhead cost rate. (May, 2004, 6 marks)
Answer
(i) Statement of cost allocation to each product from each activity
Product
M S T Total
Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs.
Power 40,000 80,000 60,000 1,80,000
(Refer to (10,000 kwh x (20,000 kwh x (15,000 kwh x
working Rs.4) Rs.4) Rs.4)
note)
Quality 1,05,000 75,000 90,000 2,70,000
Inspections (3,500 (2,500 (3,000
(Refer to inspections x inspections x inspections x
working Rs. 30) Rs. 30) Rs. 30)
note)
Working note :
Rate per unit of cost driver:
Power : (Rs. 2,00,000 / 50,000 kwh) = Rs. 4/kwh
Quality Inspection : (Rs. 3,00,000 / 10,000 inspections) = Rs.
30 per inspection
(ii) Computation of cost of unused capacity for each activity:
Rs.
Power 20,000
(Rs. 2,00,000 Rs. 1,80,000)
Quality Inspections 30,000
(Rs. 3,00,000 Rs. 2,70,000)
Total cost of unused capacity 50,000
(iii) Factors management consider in choos ing a capacity level to
compute the budgeted fixed overhead cost rate:
- Effect on product costing & capacity management
- Effect on pricing decisions.
- Effect on performance evaluation
- Effect on financial statements
- Regulatory requirements.
- Difficu lties in forecasting chosen capacity level concepts.
Question 5
RST Limited specializes in the distribution of pharmaceutical products. It
buys from the pharmaceutical companies and resells to each of the three
different markets.
(i) General Supermarket Chains
(ii) Drugstore Chains
(iii) Chemist Shops
The following data for the month of April, 2004 in respect of RST Limited has
been reported:
General Drugstore Chemist Shops

Supermarket Chains
Chains
Average revenue per Rs. 84,975 Rs. 28,875 Rs. 5,445
delivery
Average cost of goods Rs. 82,500 Rs. 27,500 Rs.4,950
sold per delivery
Number of deliveries Rs. 330 Rs. 825 Rs. 2,750
In the past, RST Limited has used gross margin percentage to evaluate the
relative profitability of its distribution channels.
The company plans to use activity based costing for analysing the
profitability of its distribution channels.
The Activity analysis of RST Limited is as under:

Activity Area Cost Driver
Customer purchase order processing Purchase orders by customers
Line-item ordering Line-items per purchase order
Store delivery Store deliveries
Cartons dispatched to stores Cartons dispatched to a store per
delivery
Shelf-stocking at customer store Hours of shelf-stocking
The April, 2004 operating costs (other than cost of goods sold) of RST
Limited are Rs. 8,27,970. These operating costs are assigned to five activity
areas. The cost in each area and the quantity of the cost allocation basis used
in that area for April, 2004 are as follows:
Activity Area Total costs in Total Units of Cost
April, 2004 Allocation Base used in
April, 2004
Customer purchase order Rs. 2,20,000 5,500 orders
processing
Line-item ordering Rs. 1,75,560 58,520 line items
Store delivery Rs. 1,95,250 3,905 store deliveries
Cartons dispatched to store Rs. 2,09,000 2,09,000 cartons
Shelf-stocking at customer Rs. 28,160 1,760 hours
store
Other data for April, 2004 include the following:
General Drugstore Chemist
Supermarket Chains Shops
Chains
Total number of orders 385 990 4,125
Average number of line items per 14 12 10
order
Total number of store deliveries 330 825 2,750
Average number of cartons shipped 300 80 16
per store delivery
Average number of hours of shelf- 3 0.6 0.1
stocking per store delivery
Required:
(i) Compute for April, 2004 gross-margin percentage for each of its three
distribution channels and compute RST Limiteds operating income.
(ii) Compute the April, 2004 rate per unit of the cost-allocation base for each
of the five activity areas.
(iii) Compute the operating income of each distribution channel in April, 2004
using the activity-based costing information. Comment on the results.
What new insights are available with the activity-based cost information?
(iv) Describe four challenges one would face in assigning the total April,2004
operating costs of Rs. 8,27,970 to five activity areas.(May, 2004, 12 marks)
Answer
(i) RST Limiteds
Statement of operating income and gross margin percentage for each of
its three distribution channel
General Drugstore Chemist Total
Super Chains Shops
Market
Chains
Revenues: 2,80,41,750 2,38,21,875 1,49,73,750 6,68,37,375
(Rs.) (330 x Rs. (825 x Rs. (2,750 x Rs.
84,975) 28,875) 5,445)
Less: Cost of 2,72,25,000 2,26,87,500 1,36,12,500 635,25,000
goods sold: (330 x Rs (825 x Rs (2,750 x Rs
(Rs.) 82,500) 27,500) 4,950)
Gross Margin: 8,16,750 11,34,375 13,61,250 33,12,375
(Rs.)
Less: Other
operating
costs: 8,27,970
(Rs)
Operating 24,84,405
income: (Rs.)
Gross Margin 2.91% 4.76 % 9.09% 4.96%
Operating 3.72
income %
(ii) Computation of rate per unit of the cost allocation base for
each of the five activity areas for April 2004
Rs.
Customer purchase order 40/ order
processing
(Rs. 2,20,000/ 5,500 orders)
Line item ordering 3/ line item order
(Rs. 1,75,560/ 58,520 line items)
Store delivery 50/ delivery
(Rs. 1,95,250/ 3,905 store
deliveries)
Cartons dispatched 1/ dispatch
(Rs. 2,09,000/ 2,09,000 dispatches)
Shelf-stocking at customer store 16/ hour
(Rs.)
(Rs. 28,160/ 1,760 hours)
(iii) Operating Income Statement of each distribution channel

in April- 2004 (Using the Activity based Costing information)
General Super Drugstore Chemist
market Chains Chains Shops
Gross margin (Rs.) : (A) 8,16,750 11,34,375 13,61,260
(Refer to (i) part of the
answer)
Operating cost (Rs.) : (B) 1,62,910 1,90,410 4,74,650
Operating income (Rs.) : (A 6,53,840 9,43,965 8,86,600
B)
Operating income (in %) 2.33 3.96 5.96
(Operating income/ Revenue)
x 100
Comments and new insights: The activity -based cost information
highlights, how the Chemist Shops uses a larger amount of RST Ltds
resources per revenue than do the other two distribution channels. Ratio of
operating costs to revenues, across these ma rkets is:
General supermarket chains 0.58%
(Rs. 1,62,910/ Rs. 2,80,00,750) x
100
Drug store chains 0.80%
(Rs. 1,90,410/ Rs. 2,38,21,875) x
100
Chemist shops 3.17%
(Rs. 4,74,650/ Rs. 1,49,73,750) x
100
Working note:
Computation of operating cost of each distribution channel:
General Super Drugstore Chains Chemist Shops
market Chains Rs. Rs. Rs.
Customer 15,400 39,600 1,65,000
purchase order (Rs. 40 x 385 (Rs. 40 x 990 (Rs. 40 x 4125
processing orders) orders)orders)

Line item 16,170 35,640 1,23,750
ordering (Rs. 3 x 14 x 385) (Rs. 3 x 12 x 990)
(Rs. 3 x 10 x
4125)
Store delivery 16,500 41,250 1,37,500
(Rs. 50 x 330 (Rs. 50 x 825 (Rs. 50 x 2750
deliveries) deliveries) deliveries)
Cartons 99,000 66,000 44,000
dispatched (Re. 1 x 300 (Re. 1 x 80 (Re. 1 x 16
cartons x 300 cartons x 825 cartons x 2,750
deliveries) deliveries) deliveries)
Shelf stocking 15,840 7,920 4,400

(Rs. 16 x 330 (Rs. 16 x 825 (Rs. 16 x 2,750
deliveries x 3 Av. deliveries x 0.6 deliveries x 0.1
hrs.) Av. hrs) Av. hrs)
Operating cost 1,62,910 1,90,410 4,74,650
(iv) Challenges faced in assigning total operating cost of Rs. 8,27,970 :
- Choosing an appropriate cost driver for activity area.
- Developing a reliable data base for the chosen cost driver.
- Deciding, how to handle costs that may be common across several
activities.
- Choice of the time period to compute cost rates per cost driver.
- Behavioural factors.
Question 6
Alpha Limited has decided to analyse the profitability of its five new
customers. It buys bottled water at Rs. 90 per case and sells to retail
customers at a list price of Rs. 108 per case. The data pertaining to five
customers are:
Customers
A B C D E
Cases sold 4,680 19,688 1,36,80 71,550 8,775
0
List Selling Price Rs. 108 Rs. 108 Rs. 108 Rs. 108 Rs. 108
Actual Selling Price Rs. 108 Rs. Rs. 99 Rs. Rs.
106.20 104.40 97.20
Number of Purchase 15 25 30 25 30
orders
Number of Customer 2 3 6 2 3
visits
Number of deliveries 10 30 60 40 20
Kilometers travelled per 20 6 5 10 30
delivery
Number of expedited 0 0 0 0 1
deliveries
Its five activities and their cost drivers are:
Activity Cost Driver Rate
Order taking Rs. 750 per purchase order
Customer visits Rs. 600 per customer visit
Deliveries Rs. 5.75 per delivery Km traveled
Product handling Rs. 3.75 per case sold
Expedited deliveries Rs. 2,250 per expedited delivery
Required:
(i) Compute the customer-level operating income of each of five retail
customers now being examined (A, B, C, D and E). Comment on the
results.
(ii) What insights are gained by reporting both the list selling price and the
actual selling price for each customer?
(iii) What factors Alpha Limited should consider in deciding whether to drop
one or more of five customers?
(Nov., 2003, 7+3+2= 12 marks)
Answer
Working note:
Computation of revenues (at listed price), discount, cost of goods
sold
and customer level operating activities costs:

Customers
A B C D E
Cases sold: (a) 4,680 19,688 1,36,800 71,550 8,775
Revenues (at 5,05,440 21,26,304 1,47,74,400 77,27,400 9,47,700
listed price)
(Rs .): (b)
{(a) x Rs. 108)}
Discount (Rs.): - 35,438 12,31,200 2,57,580 94,770
(c)
(19,688 (1,36,800 (71,550 (8,775
{(a) x Discount cases x cases x Rs. cases x Rs. cases x Rs.
per case} Rs. 1.80) 9) 3.60) 10.80)
Cost of goods 4,21,200 17,71,920 1,23,12,000 64,39,500 7,89,750
sold (Rs.) : (d)
{(a) x Rs. 90}
Customer level operating activities costs
Order taking 11,250 18,750 22,500 18,750 22,500
costs (Rs.):
(No. of
purchase
orders x Rs.
750)
Customer visits 1,200 1,800 3,600 1,200 1,800
costs (Rs.)
(No. of
customer visits
x Rs. 600)
Delivery 1,150 1,035 1,725 2,300 3,450

vehicles travel
costs (Rs.)
(Rs. 5.75 per
km)
(Kms traveled
by delivery
vehicles x Rs.
5.75 per km.)
Product 17,550 73,830 5,13,000 2,68,313 32,906
handling costs
(Rs.)
{(a) x Rs. 3.75}
Cost of - - - - 2,250
expediting
deliveries (Rs.)
{No. of
expedited
deliveries x Rs.
2,250}
Total cost of 31,150 95,415 5,40,825 2,90,563 62,906
customer level
operating
activities (Rs.)
(i) Computation of Customer level operating income
Customers
A B C D E
Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs.
Revenues 5,05,440 21,26,304 1,47,74,400 77,27,400 9,47,700
(At list price)
(Refer to working
note)
Less: Discount - 35,438 12,31,200 2,57,580 94,770
(Refer to working ______ _ _______ _______ _______
note)
Revenue 5,05,440 20,90,866 1,35,43,200 74,69,820 8,52,930
(At actual price)
Less: Cost of 4,21,200 17,71,920 1,23,12,000 64,39,500 7,89,750
goods sold
(Refer to working _______ _______ _______ _______ _______

note)
Gross margin 84,240 3,18,946 12,31,200 10,30,320 63,180
Less: Customer 31,150 95,415 5,40,825 2,90,563 62,906
level operating
activities costs
(Refer to working _______ _______ _______ _______ _______
note)
Customer level 53,090 2,23,531 6,90,375 7,39,757 274
operating income
Comment on the results:
Customer D is the most profitable customer, despite having only 52.30% of
the unit volume of customer C. The main reason is that C receives a Rs. 9 per
case discount while customer D receives only a Rs. 3.60 discount per case.
Customer E is less profitable, in comparison with the small customer A being
profitable. Customer E received a discount of Rs. 10.80 per case, makes more
frequent orders, requires more customer visits and requires more delivery
kms. in comparison with customer A.
(ii) Insight gained by reporting both the list selling price and the actual
selling price for each customer:
Separate reporting of both -the listed and actual selling prices enables
Alpha Ltd . to examine which customer has received what discount per case,
whether the discount received has any relationship with the sales volume.
The data given below provides us with the following information;
Sales volume Discount per case (Rs.)
C (1,36,800 ca ses) 9.00
D (71,550 cases) 3.60
B (19,688 cases) 1.80
E (8,775 cases) 10.80
A (4,680 cases) 0
The above data clearly shows that the discount given to customers per case
has a direct relationship with sales volume, except in the case of customer E.
The reasons for Rs. 10.80 discount per case for customer E should be
explored.
(iii) Factors to be considered for dropping one or more customers:

Dropping customers should be the last resort to be taken by Alpha Ltd.
Factors to be considered should include:
What is the expected future profitability of each customer? Are the currently
least profitable (E) or low profitable (A) customers are likely to be highly
profitable in the future?
What costs are avoidable if one or more customers are dropped?
Can the rela tionship with the problem customers be restructured so that
there is at win win situation?
Question 7
Family Store wants information about the profitability of individual
product lines: Soft drinks, Fresh produce and Packaged food. Family store
provides the following data for the year 2002-03 for each product line:
Soft drinks Fresh Packaged

produce food
Revenues Rs. 7,93,500 Rs. 21,00,600 Rs.
12,09,900
Cost of goods sold Rs. 6,00,000 Rs. 15,00,000 Rs. 9,00,000
Cost of bottles returned Rs. 12,000 Rs. 0 Rs. 0
Number of purchase orders 360 840 360
placed
Number of deliveries received 300 2,190 660
Hours of shelf-stocking time 540 5,400 2,700
Items sold 1,26,000 11,04,000 3,06,000
Family store also provides the following information for the year 2002-03:
Activity Description of Total cost Cost-allocation
Activity Base
Bottles returns Returning of Rs. 12,000 Direct tracing to
empty bottles soft drink line
Ordering Placing of orders Rs. 1,56,000 1,560 purchase
for purchases orders
Delivery Phys ical delivery Rs. 2,52,000 3,150 deliveries
and receipt of
goods
Shelf stocking Stocking of goods Rs. 1,72,800 8,640 hours of
on store shelves shelf-stocking
and on-going time
restocking
Customer Support Assistance Rs. 3,07,200 15,36,000 items
provided to sold
customers
including check-
out
Required:
(i) Family store currently allocates support cost (all cost other than cost of
goods sold) to product lines on the basis of cost of goods sold of each
product line. Calculate the operating income and operating income as a %
of revenues for each product line.
(ii) If Family Store allocates support costs (all costs other than cost of goods
sold) to product lines using and activity based costing system, calculate
the operating income and operating income as a% of revenues for each
product line.
(iii) Comment on your answers in requirements (i) and (ii).
(May, 2003, 3+7+2=12
marks)
Answer
(i) Statement of Operating income and Operating income as a
percentage of revenues for each product line
(When support costs are allocated to product lines on the basis of cost of
goods sold of each product)
Soft Fresh Packaged Total Rs.
Drinks Produce Foods Rs.
Rs. Rs.
Revenues: (A) 7,93,500 21,00,600 12,09,900 41,04,000
Cost of Goods sold (COGS): 6,00,000 15,00,000 9,00,000 30,00,000
(B)
Support cost (30% of 1,80,000 4,50,000 2,70,000 9,00,000
COGS): (C)
Total cost: (D) = {(B) + (C)} 7,80,000 19,50,000 11,70,000 39,00,000
Operating income: E= {(A)- 13,500 1,50,600 39,900 2,04,000
(D)}
Operating income as a 1.70% 7.17% 3.30% 4.97%
percentage of revenues:
(E/A) x 100)
Working notes:
1. Total support cost:
Rs.
Bottles returns 12,000
Ordering 1,56,000
Delivery 2,52,000
Shelf stocking 1,72,800
Customer support 3,07,200
Total support cost 9,00,000
2. Percentage of support cost to cost of goods sold (COGS):
Total support cost

= 100
Totalcost of goods sold
Rs.9,00, 000
= 100 = 30%
Rs. 30,00,000
3. Cost for each activity cost driver:

Activity Total cost Rs. Cost allocation Cost driver rate
(1) (2) base (4)=[(2)(3)]
(3)
Ordering 1,56,000 1,560 purchase 100 per purchase
orders order
Delivery 2,52,000 3,150 deliveries 80 per delivery
Shelf-stocking 1,72,800 8,640 hours 20 per stocking
hour
Customer 3,07,200 15,36,000 items 0.20 per item
support sold sold
(ii) Statement of Operating income and Operating income as a percentage
of revenues for each product line
(When support costs are allocated to product lines using an activity-based
costing system)
Soft Fresh Packaged Total
drinks Produce Food
Rs. Rs. Rs.
Rs.
Revenues: (A) 7,93,500 21,00,600 12,09,900 41,04,000
Cost & Goods sold 6,00,000 15,00,000 9,00,000 30,00,000
Bottle return costs 12,000 0 0 12,000
Ordering cost* 36,000 84,000 36,000 1,56,000
(360:840:360)
Delivery cost* 24,000 1,75,200 52,800 2,52,000
(300:2,190:660)
Shelf stocking cost* 10,800 1,08,000 54,000 1,72,800
(540:5,400:2,700)
Customer Support cost* 25,200 2,20,800 61,200 3,07,200
(1,26,000:11,04,000:3,06,000)
Total cost: (B) 7,08,000 20,88,000 11,04,000 39,00,000
Operating income C:{(A)- (B)} 85,500 12,600 1,05,900 2,04,000
Operating income as a % of 10.78% 0.60% 8.75% 4.97%
revenues
* Refer to working note 3

(iii) Comment: Managers believe that activity based costing (ABC)
system is more credible than the traditional costing system. The ABC
system distinguishes wi th different type of activities at family store more
precisely. It also tracks more precisely how individual product lines use
resources.
Soft drinks consume less resources than either fresh produce or packaged
food. Soft drinks have fewer deliveries and require less shelf stocking
time.
Family store managers can use ABC information to guide their decisions,
such as how to allocate a planned increase in floor space.
Pricing decision can also be made in a more informed way with ABC
information.
Question 8
A B C D Co. Ltd. produces and sells four products A, B, C and D. These
products are similar and usually produced in production runs of 10 units and
sold in a batch of 5 units. The production details of these products are as
follows:
Product A B C D
Production (Units) 100 110 120 150
Cost per unit:
Direct material (Rs.) 30 40 35 45
Direct labour (Rs.) 25 30 30 40
Machine hour (per 5 4 3 4
unit)
The production overheads during the period are as follows:
Rs.
Factory works expenses 22,500
Stores receiving costs 8,100
Machine set up costs 12,200
Cost relating to quality control 4,600
Material handling and dispatch 9,600 Rs.
57,000
The cost drivers for these overheads are detailed below:
Cost Cost drivers
Factory works expenses Machine hours
Stores receiving costs Requisitions raised
Machine set up costs No. of production

runs
Cost relating to quality control No. of production
runs
Material handling and dispatch No. of orders
executed
The number of requisitions raised on the stores was 25 for each product
and number of orders executed was 96, each order was in a batch of 05
units.
Required:
(i) Total cost of each product assuming the absorption of overhead on
machine hour basis;
(ii) Total cost of each product assuming the absorption of overhead by
using activity base costing; and
(iii) Show the differences between (i) and (ii) and comment.
(4+4+4=12 marks)
Answer
(i) Statement showing total cost of each product assuming absorption of
overheads on Machine Hour Rate Basis.
Particulars A B C D Total
Output (units) 100 110 120 150 480
Direct material (Rs.) 30 40 35 45 150
Direct Labour (Rs.) 25 30 30 40 125
Direct labour- Machine hrs 5 4 3 4
Overhead @ Rs 30/- per 150 120 90 120 480
Machine hr
Total cost per unit (Rs.) 205 190 155 205 755
Total cost (Rs.) 20,50 20,90 18,60 30,75 90,75
0 0 0 0 0
Total Overhead Cost Rs. 57,000
Overhead Rate = = = Rs. 30 per unit
Total MHrs . 1,900
(ii) Total Overheads Rs
Factory works 22,500 Factory exp per 22,500 / 1,900= Rs.
expenses unit 11.84
Stores receiving 8,100 Stores receiving 8100 / 100 = Rs. 81
cost cost
Machine set up 12,200 Machine set-up 12,200 / 48 = Rs.
costs cost 254.1
Costs relating to 4,600 Cost relating to 4,600/48 =Rs 95.83
quality control QC
Expense relating Material handling

to material & dispatch 9,600 / 96 = Rs. 100/-
handling & 9,600
dispatch
Total 57,000
Statement showing total cost of each product assuming activity based

costing.
Particulars A B C D Total
Output (Units) 100 110 120 150 480
No. of production runs 10 11 12 15 48
No. of stores requisition 25 25 25 25 100
No. of sales orders 20 22 24 30 96
Unit costs - Direct material 30.00 40.00 35.00 45.00
(Rs.)
Unit costs - Direct labour 25.00 30.00 30.00 40.00
(Rs.)
Unit costs - Factory works 59.20 47.36 35.52 47.36
expenses (Rs.)
Unit costs - Stores receiving 20.25 18.41 16.88 13.50
cost (Rs.)
Unit costs - Machine set-up 25.42 25.42 25.42 25.42
cost (Rs.)
Unit costs QC (Rs.) 9.58 9.58 9.58 9.58
Unit costs Material 20.00 20.00 20.00 20.00
Handling (Rs.)
Unit cost (Rs.) 189.45 190.77 172.40 200.86
Total cost (Rs) 18,945 20,984. 20,688.0 30,129
7 0
(iii) Statement showing differences (in Rs)
Particulars A B C D
Unit cost MHR 205 190 155 205
Unit cost ABC 189.45 190.77 172.40 200.86
Unit cos t - difference 15.55 -0.77 -17.40 4.14
Total cost MHR 20,500 20,900 18,600 30,750
Total cost ABC 18,945 20,985 20,688 30,128
The difference is that A consumes comparatively more of Machine hours.
The use of activity based costing gives different product costs than what
were arrived at by utilising traditional costing. It can be argued that

Product costs using ABC are more precise as overheads have been
identified with specific activities.
Question 9
ABC Limited manufactures two radio models, the Nova which has been
produced for five years and sells for Rs. 900, and the Royal, a new model
introduced in early 2004, which sells for Rs. 1,140. Based on the following
Income statement for the year 2004-05, a decision has been made to
concentrate ABC Limiteds marketing resources on the Royal model and to
begin to phase out the Nova model.
ABC Limited
Income Statement for the year ending March 31, 2005
Royal Nova Total
Model Model
Rs. Rs. Rs.
Sales 45,60,00 1,98,00,00 2,43,60,00
0 0 0
Cost of Goods sold 31,92,00 1,25,40,00 1,57,32,00
0 0 0
Gross margin 13,68,00 72,60,000 86,28,000
0
Selling & Administrative 9,78,000 58,30,000 68,08,000
Expenses
Net Income 3,90,000 14,30,000 18,20,000
Unit Produced and sold 4,000 22,000
Net Income per unit sold 97.50 65
The standard unit costs for the Royal and Nova models are as follows:
Royal Nova
Model Model
Rs. Rs.
Direct materials 584 208
Direct Labour
Royal (3.5 hrs x Rs. 12) 42
Nova (1.5 hrs x Rs. 12) 18
Machine usage
Royal (4 hrs x Rs. 18) 72
Nova (8 hrs x Rs. 18) 144
Manufacturing overheads (applied on the
basis of machine hours at a pre-determined
rate of 100 200
Rs. 25 per hour)
Standard Cost 798 570
ABC Ltd.'s Controller is advocating the use of activity-based costing and
activity-based cost management and has gathered the following information
about the company's manufacturing overheads cost for the year ending
March 31, 2005.
Activity centre (Cost driver) Traceable Number of Events
Costs Rs.
Royal Nova Total
Soldering (Number of
solder joints) 9,42,000 3,85,00 11,85,00 15,70,00
0 0 0
Shipments (Number of
shipments) 8,60,000 3,800 16,200 20,000
Quality control (Number of
Shipments) 12,40,000 21,300 56,200 77,500
Purchase orders (Number
of orders) 9,50,400 1,09,98 80,100 1,90,080
0
Machine Power (Machine
hours) 57,600 16,000 1,76,000 1,92,000
Machine setups (Number
of setups) 7,50,000 14,000 16,000 30,000
Total Traceable costs 48,00,000
Required:
(i) Prepare a Statement showing allocation of manufacturing overheads
using the principles of activity -based costing.
(ii) Prepare a Statement showing product cost profitability using activity-
based costing.
(iii) Should ABC Ltd. continue to emphasize the Royal model and phase out
the Nova model ? Discuss.
(4+4+2 = 10 marks)
Answer
(a) (i) Statement Showing Allocation of Manufacturing Overheads Using
Principles of Activity Based Costing.
Cost Allocation
Activity Traceable Cost Royal Nova
Center cost Rs. allocation Rs. R s.
basis
Soldering 9,42,000 385:1185 2,31,000 7,11,000
Shipments 8,60,000 38:162 1,63,400 6,96,600
Quality 12,40,000 213:562 3,40,800 8,99,200
control
Purchase 9,50,400 109980:80100 5,49,900 4,00,500
orders
Machine 57,600 16:176 4,800 52,800
lower
Machine 7,50,000 14:16 3,50,000 4,00,000
set ups
48,00,000 16,39,900 31,60,100
Units produced and sold 4,000 22,000

Manufacturing Rs. Rs.
Overheads Cost per unit 409.98 143.64
(ii) Statement Showing Product Cost and Profitability using Activity

Based Costing
Royal Nova Total
Per Unit Per Unit Rs.
Cost Rs. Cost Rs.
Standard cost other than
manufacturing OHs cost 698 370

Manufacturing OHs using
activity-based costing 409.98 143.64
Cost 1,107.98 513.64
Selling Price/unit 1,140 900
Gross Margin / unit 32.02 386.36
Gross Margin 1,28,080 84,99,920 86,28,000
Selling & Adm. Expenses 9,78,000 58,30,000 68,08,000
Net Income (8,49,920) 26,69,920 18,20,000
(iii) Novo Model should continue to be bread and butter product and
Royal model should not be over-emphasized; rather its pricing is
required to be corrected.
Question 10
ABC Bank is examining the profitability of its Premier Account, a
combined Savings and Cheque account. Depositors receive a 7% annual
interest on their average deposit. ABC Bank earns an interest rate spread of
3% (the difference between the rate at which it lends money and rate it pays
to depositors) by lending money for home loan purpose at 10%.
The Premier Account allows depositors unlimited use of services such as
deposits, withdrawals, cheque facility, and foreign currency drafts. Depositors
with Premier Account balances of Rs. 50,000 or more receive unlimited free
use of services. Depositors with minimum balance of less than Rs. 50,000 pay
Rs. 1,000 -a-month service fee for their Premier Account.
ABC Bank recently conducted an activity-based costing study of its
services. The use of these services in 2005- 06 by three customers is as
follows:
A ctivity- Account Usage

Based
Customer Customer Customer
Cost Per
Transacti X Y Z
on
Deposits/withdrawal
with teller Rs. 125 40 50 5
Deposits/withdrawal
with automatic teller Rs. 40 10 20 16
machine (ATM)
Deposits/withdrawal
on pre-arranged Rs. 25 0 12 60
monthly basis
Bank Cheques written Rs. 400 9 3 2
Foreign Currency Rs. 600 4 1 6
drafts
Inquiries about Rs. 75 10 18 9
Account balance
Average Premier Rs. Rs. 40,000 Rs.
Account balance for 55,000 12,50,000
2005-06
Assume Customer X and Z always maintains a balance above Rs. 50,000,

whereas Customer Y always has a balance below Rs. 50,000.
Required:
(i) Compute the 2005-06 profitability of the customers X, Y and Z
Premier Account at ABC Bank.
(ii) What evidence is there of cross-subsidisation among the three
Premier Accounts? Why might ABC Bank worry about this Cross-
subsidisation, if the Premier Account product offering is Profitable as
a whole?
(iii) What changes would you recommend for ABC Banks Premier
Account?
Answer
(i) Customer Profitability Analysis
ABC Bank Premier Account
Activity Activity Customers
based
cost
X Y Z
Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs.
Deposits/withdr
awal with teller 125 5,000 6,250 625
(40 125) (40 125) (5 125)
Deposits/withdr
awal with ATM 40 400 800 640
(10 40) (20 40) (16 40)
Deposits/withdr
awal on
prearranged 25 0 300 1,500
monthly basis (0 25) (12 25) (60 25)
Bank cheques
written 400 3,600 1,200 800
(9 400) (3 400) (2 400)
Foreign
currency drafts 600 2,400 600 3,600
(4 600) (1 600) (6 600)
Inquiries about
Account 75 750 1,350 675
balance (10 75) (18 75) (9 75)
Customer cost 12,150 10,500 7,840
(A)
Spread on
Average
balance 3% 1,650 1,200 37,500
maintained (3% (3% (3%
55,000) 40,000) 12,50,000)
Service fee Rs. 12,000
1,000
p.m.
Customer benefit 1,650 13,200 37,500
Customers
X Y Z
Customer Profitability
(Benefits Costs) Rs. (10,500) Rs. 2,700 Rs. 29,660
(ii) Customer Z is most profitable and is cross-subsidising the most

demanding customer X. Customer Y is paying for the services used,
because of not being able to maintain minimum balance. No doubt,
Premier Account product offering is profitable as a whole, but the worry
is of not finding customers like customer Z who will maintain a balance
higher than the stipulated minimum. It appears, the minimum balance
stipulated is inadequate considering the services availed by depositors in
Premium Account.
(iii) The changes suggested to ABC Banks Premier Account are as follows:
Increase the requirement of minimum balance from Rs. 50,000 to Rs.
1,00,000.
Charge for value added services like Foreign Currency Drafts.
Do not allow deposits/withdrawal below Rs. 10,000 at the teller. Only
ATM machine withdrawal be allowed.
Inquiries about account balance to be entertained only through Phone
Banking/ATM.
Question 12
ABC Ltd. Manufactures two types of machinery equipments Y and Z and
applies/absorbs overheads on the basis of direct-labour hours. The budgeted
overheads and direct-labour hours for the month of December, 2006 are Rs.
12,42,500 and 20,000 hours respectively. The information about Companys
products is as follows:
Equipment Equipment
Y Z
Budgeted Production volume 2,500 units 3,125 units
Direct material cost Rs. 300 per unit Rs. 450 per
unit
Direct labour cost

Y : 3 hours @ Rs. 150 per hour
X : 4 hours @ Rs. 150 per hour Rs. 450 Rs. 600
ABC Ltd.s overheads of Rs. 12,42,500 can be identified with three major
activities:
Order Processing (Rs. 2,10,000), machine processing (Rs. 8,75,000), and

product inspection (Rs. 1,57,500). These activities are driven by number of
orders processed, machine hours worked, and inspection hours, respectively.
The data relevant to these activities is as follows:
Orders Machine hours Inspection
processed worked hours
Y 350 23,000 4,000
Z 250 27,000 11,000
Total 600 50,000 15,000
Required:
(i) Assuming use of direct-labour hours to absorb/apply overheads to
production, compute the unit manuf acturing cost of the equipments Y
and Z, if the budgeted manufacturing volume is attained.
(ii) Assuming use of activity-based costing, compute the unit
manufacturing costs of the equipments Y and Z, if the budgeted
manufacturing volume is achieved.
(iii) ABC Ltd.s selling prices are based heavily on cost. By using direct-
labour hours as an application base, calculate the amount of cost
distortion (under-costed or over-costed) for each equipment.
(iv) Discuss, how an activity-based costing might benefit ABC Ltd.
Answer
(i) Overheads application base: Direct labour hours
Equipment Equipment
Y Z
Rs. Rs.
Direct material cost 300 450
Direct labour cost 450 600
Overheads* 186.38 248.50
936.38 1,298.50
Budgeted overheads
*Pre-determined rate =
Budgeted direct labour hours
Rs. 12,42,500
= =Rs. 62.125
20,000 hours
(ii) Estimation of Cost-Driver rate

Activity Overhead Cost-driver level Cost driver
cost rate
Rs. Rs.
Order processing 2,10,000 600 350
Orders
processed
Machine processing 8,75,000 50,000 17.50
Machine hours
Inspection 1,57,500 15,000 10.50
Inspection hours
Equipment Equipment
Y Z
Rs. Rs.
Direct material cost 300 450
Direct labour cost 450 600
Prime cost 750 1,050
Overhead cost
Order processing 350 : 250 1,22,500 87,500
Machine processing 23,000 : 27,000 4,02,500 4,72,500
Inspection 4,000 : 11,000 42,000 1,15,500
Total overhead cost 5,67,000 6,75,500
Per unit cost

= 5,67,000/2,500 226.80 Rs. 216.16
= 6,75,500/3,125
Unit manufacturing cost Rs. 976.80 Rs. 1,266.16
(iii)
Equipment Equipment
Y Z
Rs. Rs.
Unit manufacturing costusing direct

labour hours as an application base 936.38 Rs. 1,298.50
Unit manufacturing costusing activity

based costing 976.80 Rs. 1,266.16
Cost distortion ()40.42 (+)32.34
Low volume product Y is under-costed and high volume product Z is over-

costed using direct labour hours as a basis for overheads absorption. It is
due to the limitation of traditional costing system.
(iv) Activity-based costing system is suitable in case of ABC Ltd because it is a
multi -product company and overheads costs are substantial portion of
total cost. The use of activity based costing will avoid cost distortion as
ABC Ltd has a large proportion of non -unit-level activities su ch as orders
processed and inspection hours .
Question 13
Explain briefly each of the following categories in Activity based Costing
by giving at least two examples:
(i) Unit level activities
(ii) Batch level activities
(iii) Product level activities
(iv) Facility level activities.
(May 2007, 8 Marks)
Answer
(i) Unit level activities The cost of some activities (mainly primary
activities) are strongly co -related to the number of units produced.
These activities are known as unit level activities. Examples are:
( a ) The use of indirect materials.
(b) Inspection or testing of every item produced or say every 100th item
produced.
(c) Indirect consumables.
(ii) Batch level activities The cost of some activities (mainly
manufacturing support activities) are driven by the number of
batches of units produced. These activities are known as Batch level
activities. Examples are:
( a ) Material ordering.
(b) Machine set up cost.
(c) Inspection of products - like first item of every batch.
(iii) Product level activities The cost of some activities are driven by
the creation of a new product line and its maintenance. These
activities are known as Product level activities. Examples are:
( a ) Designing the product.
(b) Producing parts to a certain specified limit.
(c) Advertising cost, if advertisement is for individual products.
(iv) Facility level activities The cost of some activities cannot be
related to a particular product line, instead they are related to
maintaining the building and facilities. These activities are known as
Facility level activities. Examples are:
( a ) Maintenance of buildings.
(b) Plant security.
(c) Production managers salary.
(d) Advertising campaigns promoting the company.
Question 14
PQR Ltd. manufactures four products, namely A, B, C and D using the
same plant and process. The following information relates to production
period October, 2007:
Product A B C D
Output in units 1440 1200 960 1008
Cost per unit:
Direct Materials Rs. 42 Rs. 45 Rs. 40 Rs. 48
Direct Labour Rs. 10 Rs. 9 Rs. 7 Rs. 8
Machine hours per unit 4 3 2 1
The four products are similar and are usually produced in production runs
of 48 units per batch and are sold in batches of 24 units. Currently, the
production overheads are absorbed using machine hour rate. The
production overheads incurred by the company for the period October,
2007 are as follows:
Rs.
Machine department costs
(rent, 1,26,000
deprecation and supervision)

Set- up Costs 40,000
Store receiving costs 30,000
Inspection 20,000
Material handling and dispatch 5,184
During the period October, 2007, the following cost drivers are to be used
for allocation of overheads cost:
Cost Cost driver
Set- up Costs Number of production runs (batches)
Stores receiving Requisition raised
Inspection Number of production runs (batches)
Material handling and dispatch Orders executed
It is also determined that:
(i) Machine department costs should be apportioned among set-up,
stores receiving and inspection activities in proportion of 4 : 3 : 2.
(ii) The number of requisitions raised on stores are 50 for each product.
The total number of material handling and dispatch orders executed
during the period are 192 and each order being for a batch size of 24
units of product.
Required:
(i) Calculate the total cost of each product, if all overhead costs are
absorbed on machine-hour rate basis.
(ii) Calculate the total cost of each product using activity-based costing.
(iii) Comment briefly on as to how an activity-based costing might benefit
PQR Ltd.
(November 2007, 11 Marks)
Answer 14
(i) Total Overhead = Rs. 1,26,000 + 40,000 + 30,000 + 20,000 + 5,184 = Rs.
2,21,184
Total machine hours = 1,440 4 + 1,200 3 + 960 2 + 1,008 1
= 5,760 + 3,600 + 1,920 + 1,008 = 12,288.

2,21,184
Overhead recovery rate / M.H. = = Rs. 18
12,288
Cost Statement when overheads are absorbed on machine hours
rate basis
(Traditional Costing)
Product A B C D
Output in units 1,440 1,200 960 1,008
Cost per unit:
Direct material Rs. 42 45 40 48

Direct labour Rs. 10 9 7 8
Overhead (@ Rs.18) 4 18 = 72 3 18 = 2 18 = 36 1 18 = 18
Rs. 54
Total cost per unit 124 108 83 74
Rs. (Material + Laour
+ overhead
Total cost Rs. 1,78,560 1,29,600 79,680 74,592
(Output in units
Total cost per unit)
(ii) (1) Machine department costs of Rs. 1,26,000 to be apportioned to

set-up cost, store receiving and inspection in 4 : 3 : 2 i.e. Rs.
56,000, Rs. 42,000 and Rs. 28,000 respectively.
(2) One production run = 48 units. Hence, the number of production
runs of different products :
1,440 1,200 960 1,008
A = = 30, B = = 25 , C = = 20 , D = = 21 or total 96
48 48 48 48
runs.
(3) One batch order is of 24 units. So the number of batches of different
products :
1,440 1,200 960 1,008

A = = 60 , B = = 50 , C = = 40 , D = = 42 or total 192
24 24 24 24
batches.
(4) Computation of Cost driver rates
Activity Activity Cost driver Quantity Cost driver
Cost (Rs.) rate
S e t-up 40,000 + No. of 96 Rs. 1,000
56,000 production per
= 96,000 run production
run
Store - 30,000 + Requisition 50 4 = Rs. 360 per
receiving 42,000 raised 200 requisition
= 72,000
Inspection 20,000 + No. of 96 Rs. 500 per
28,000 production production
= 48,000 run run
Material 5,184 Orders 192 Rs. 27 per
handling executed batch
(No. of
batches)
(5) Cost statement under Activity Based

Costing:
Product A B C D
Out-put in units 1,440 1,200 960 1,008
Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs.
Material 1,440 42 1,200 45 960 40 1,008 48
= 60,480 = 54,000 = 38,400 = 48,384
Labour 1,440 10 1,200 9 960 7 1,008 8
= 14,400 = 10,800 = 6,720 = 8,064
Overhead cost:
Set up 1,000 30 1,000 25 1,000 20 1,000 21
= 30,000 = 25,000 = 20,000 = 21,000
Store receiving 360 50 360 50 360 50 360 50

= 18,000 = 18,000 = 18,000 = 18,000
Inspection 500 30 500 25 500 20 500 21
= 15,000 = 12,500 = 10,000 = 10,500
Material handling 27 60 27 50 27 40 27 42
= 1,620 = 1,350 = 1,080 = 1,134
Total overhead 64,620 56,850 49,080 50,634
cost
Total cost 1,39,500 1,21,650 94,200 1,07,082
Total cost per 96.875 101.375 98.125 106.232
unit, (Total cost /
Output)
(iii) Comparison of Overhead cost differences

Overhead (Rs. 18 4 (Rs. 18 3 (Rs. 18 2 (Rs. 18
cost per machine machine machine 1
unit under hours) 72.00 hours) 54.00 hours) machine
Traditional 36.00 hour)
Absorption 18.00
Costing
system
Overhead 64,620 56,850 49,080 50,634

= 44.875 = 47.375 = 51.125 = 50.232
cost under 1,440 1,200 960 1,008
Activity
Based
Costing
system
Overhead 27.125 6.625 (15.125) (32.232)

Cost
difference
Overhead 37.68% 12.27% +42.10% +179.07
difference over cost over cost under cost %
due to under
absorption cost
system
Comments:
(i) There is a wide difference between the overhead cost as traced by
the two systems. ABC is a superior method of tracing overhead costs
since it relates the overhead costs with activities and resources
consumed rather than just the machine hours rate.
(ii) Products A and B have been over costed under absorption costing
since machine hours per unit are higher than that of products C and
D.
Question 15
XYZ Ltd. produces and sells sophisticated glass items A and B. In
connection with both the products the following informations are
revealed from the cost records for the month February, 2008:
Product A B
Output (in units) 60,000 15,000
Sales (Rs.) 37,80,000 20,55,000
Cost structure:
Direct material (Rs. per unit) 18.75 45.00

Direct Wages (Rs. per unit) 10.00 13.00
Direct labour hours 30,000 hours 9,750 hours
No. of quantity produced per batch 240 50
Setup time per batch 2 hours 5 hours
The Indirect costs for the month are as under:
Rs.
Cleaning and maintenance wages 2,70,000
Designing Costs 4,50,000
Set up costs 3,00,000
Manufacturing operations costs 6,37,500
Shipment costs 81,000
Factory administration costs 2,55,000
At present the company adopts the policy to absorb indirect costs
applying direct labour hour basis and enjoying a good position in the
market with regard to Product B, but facing a stiff price competition with
regard to Product A. The cost Accountant of the company, after making a
rigorous analysis of the data, decided to shift from the absorption
technique based on direct labour hours to activity cost driver basis and
also to treat cleaning and maintenance wages as direct cost.
The cost accountant identified Rs. 1,20,000 for product A and the balance
of cleaning and maintenance wages for Product B.
The data relevant to activities and products are as follows:
Product Product
Activity Cost driver A B
Designing: Square feet 30 sq. ft. 70 sq. ft.
Manufacturing Moulding machine 9,000 hrs. 3,750 hrs.
operations: hours
Shipment: Number of 100 100
Shipments
Distribution: Cubic feet 45,000 cu. 22,500 cu. ft.
ft.
Setup of moulding Setup hours
machine:
Factory Direct labour hours
administration:
You are required:
(i) to compute the total manufacturing cost and profits of both the
products by applying direct labour basis of absorption, assuming
cleaning and maintenance cost as indirect,
(ii) to compute the total manufacturing cost and profits of both the
products by applying activity based costing, assuming cleaning and
maintenance cost as indirect
(iii) to compare the results obtained from (i) and (ii) and give your opinion
on the decision of cost accountant.
(May 2008, 10 Marks)
Answer15
(a) Working:
Calculation of Direct Labour hours:
Rs.
Total Indirect Costs (Rs.)* 23,85,000
Total Direct labour hours (30,000 + 39,750
9,750)
Rs. 23,85,000
Overhead absorption rate = Rs. 60 per hour
39,750hours
(i) Statement showing total manufacturing costs and profits
(60,000 units) (15,000 units) (Rs.)
Per unit Amount Per unit Amount
(Rs.) (Rs.)
Direct 18.75 11,25,000 45.00 6,75,000 18,00,00
materials 0
Direct 10.00 6,00,000 13.00 1,95,000 7,95,000
labour
Prime cost 28.75 17,25,000 58.00 8,70,000 25,95,00
0
Indirect 30.00 18,00,000 39.00 5,85,000 23,85,00

costs (18,00,0 (30,000 (5,85,00 (9,750 0
(absorbed 00/ hours @ 0/ hours @
on the basis 60,000 Rs. 60 per 15,000 Rs. 60 per
of direct units) hour) units) hour)
labour
hours)
Total cost 58.75 35,25,000 97.00 14,55,000 49,80,00
0
Sales 63.00 37,80,000 137.00 20,55,000 58,35,00
0
Profit
4.25 2,55,000 40.00 6,00,000 8,55,000
(Sales
Total cost)
* Calculation of total Indirect Cost:
Rs.
Cleaning and maintenance wages 2,70,000
Designing costs 4,50,000
Set-up costs 3,00,000
Manufacturing operations cost 6,37,500
Shipment costs 81,000
Factory Administration Costs 2,55,000
23,85,000
Indirect cost allocation to products A and B:
Product A Product B
Direct labour hours 30,000 9,750
Direct labour hour rate: Rs. 60
60
Indirect costs Rs. 5,85,000

18,00,000
Output (units) 60,000 15,000

Cost per unit of output Rs. 39
30
Statement showing the total manufacturing costs and profits using
dire ct labour hour basis of absorption and treating cleaning and
maintenance cost as indirect cost:
Rs./unit Amount Rs./unit Amount
Output (units) 60,000 15,000
Rs. Rs. Rs.
Sales 63.00 37,80,000 137.00 20,55,000 58,35,000
Direct 18.75 11,25,000 45.00 6,75,000 18,00,000
Materials
Direct Labour 10.00 6,00,000 13.00 1,95,000 7,95,000
Prime Cost 28.75 17,25,000 58.00 8,70,000 25,95,000
Indirect costs 30.00 18,00,000 39.00 5,85,000 23,85,000
Total costs 58.75 35,25,000 97.00 14,55,000 49,80,000
Profit 4.25 2,55,000 40.00 6,00,000 8,55,000
(ii) Calculation of Setup hours
Product A Product B
Total Output (in units) 60,000 15,000
No. of quantity produced 240 50
per batch
Setup time per batch 2 hours 5 hours
Setup hours (Total) 60,000 15,000
2 = 500 5 = 1,500
(No. of batches set up 240 50
time per batch)
Calculation of Cost Driver, Rates and summary of indirect cost relating to Product A & B:
Activity and Cost Amount Cost Drivers for Product Activity Cost Indirect Costs
Drivers (Rs.) Rates
A B (Amount / total Product A Product
of cost driver) B
Cleaning & 2,70,000 30,000 9,750 39,750 6.7925 per Direct 2,03,775 66,227
Maintenance (Direct labour hour
Labour hours)
Designing costs (square 4,50,000 30 sq. feet 70 sq. feet 100 4,500 per sq. feet 1,35,000 3,15,000
feet)
Setup costs (setup 3,00,000 500 hours 1,500 2,000 150 per setup 75,000 2,25,000
hours) hours hour
Manufacturing 6,37,500 9,000 3,750 12,750 50 per molding 4,50,000 1,87,500
operations costs hours
(molding machine
hours)
Shipment costs (No. of 81,000 100 100 200 405 per shipment 40,500 40,500
shipments)
Distribution costs (area 3,91,500 45, 22, 67,500 5.80 per cubic 2,61,000 1,30,500
in cubic feet) 000 cubic 500 cubic feet
feet feet
Factory administration 2,55,000 30,000 9,750 39,750 6.4151 per labour 1,92,453 62,547
costs (direct labour hour
Activi ty Based Costing 5.3 8
hours)
Production (units) 13,57,728 10,27,27
4
60,000 15,000
22.63 68.48
5.39 Activity Based Costing
Cost Sheet based on activity based costing system:

Description Product A Product B
Total cost Per unit Total cost Per unit
Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs.
Sales 37,80,000 63.00 20,55,000 137.00
Direct Cost
Direct 11,25,000 18.75 6,75,000 45.00
Materials
Direct 6,00,000 10.00 1,95,000 13.00
Labour
Total 17,25,000 28.75 8,70,000 58.00
Indirect costs 13,57,728 22.63 10,27,274 68.48
Total costs 30,82,728 51.38 18,97,274 126.48
Profit 6,97,272 11.62 1,57,726 10.52
(iii) Comparison of results:

Description Product A Product B
Traditional Activity Traditional Activity
Costi ng Based Costing Based
System System System System
Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs.
Selling Price 63.00 63.00 137.00 137.00
Direct costs 28.75 28.75 58.00 58.00
Indirect costs 30.00 22.63 39.00 68.48
Total cost per 58.75 51.38 97.00 126.48
unit
Profit per 4.25 11.62 40.00 10.52
unit
Opinion:
In the traditional costing system, Product B appears to be more
profitable than Product A whereas under the activity based costing
system, Product A appears to be more profitable than product B. The
Activity Based Costing 5.40
activities like designing, set up, manufacturing operation cost,

shipment and distribution are support service activities and the
consumption of resources relating to these activities are not
dependent on direct labour hours. The quantum of consumption of
resource of each support service activity is different in respect of the
two products manufactured and hence activity based costing
presents a true view of cost of production. Moreover, the suggestion
to treat cleaning and maintenance activity as a direct cost pool is
commendable because costs should be charged direct wherever
possible. The results reveal that the company should concentrate
upon product B.
Alternative Solution:
Cleaning and maintenance activity will not find a place in the
statement of calculation of cost driver rates. However, other cost
driver rates will be unchanged.
Statement showing total cost and profits on the basis of Activity
Based Costing
(Rs.)
Per Amount Per Amount
unit (Rs.) unit (Rs.)
Direct ma terials 18.75 11,25,00 45.00 6,75,000 18,00,00
0 0
Direct labour 10.00 6,00,000 13.00 1,95,000 7,95,000
Cleaning & 2.00 1,20,000 10.00 1,50,000 2,70,000
maintenance * *
expenses
Prime cost 30.75 18,45,00 68.00 10,20,00 28,65,00
0 0 0
Indirect costs:
Designing 2.25 1,35,000 21.00 3,15,000 4,50,000
Setup 1.25 75,000 15.00 2,25,000 3,00,000
Manufacturing 7.50 4,50,000 12.50 1,87,500 6,37,500
operation
5.41 Activity Based Costing
Shipments 0.67 40,500 2.70 40,500 81,000

Distribution 4.35 2,61,000 8.70 1,30,500 3,91,500
Factory 3.21 1,92,453 4.17 62,547 2,55,000
administration
Total indirect costs 19.23 11,53,95 64.07 9,61,047 21,15,00
3 0
Total costs 49.98 29,98,95 132.07 19,81,04 49,80,00
3 7 0
Sales 63.00 37,80,00 137.00 20,55,00 58,35,00
0 0 0
Profits
(Sales total costs) 13.23 7,81,047 4.93 74,953 8,55,000
* The Cost Accountant identified Rs. 1,20,000 for Product A and

balance
Rs. 1,50,000 of cleaning and maintenance wages for Product B.
Activity Based Costing 5.42
(iii) Comparison of results:

Product A Product B
Allocation basis Direct Activity Direct Activity
Labour Based Labour Based
Hour Costing Hour Costing
Selling Price 63 63 137.00 137.00
Prime cost 28.75 30.75 58.00 68.00
Total Indirect costs 30.00 19.23 39.00 64.07
Total costs
(Prime cost + Total
indirect costs) 58.75 49.98 97.00 132.07
Profit per unit 4.25 13.02 40.00 4.93
Comments:
It is evident from the comparison of results that under single cost pool
system the product A is overcost and product B is undercost. This is due
to allocation of indirect cost on the basis of blanket rate based on direct
labour hour and considering one of the significant cost as an indirect
one. Cost Accountants decision for allocation of indirect costs on the
basis of ABC methods and identifying be cleaning and maintenance cost
as direct ele ment of cost appears to be a good decision. Result show
that the firm enjoys competitive advantage with regards to product A.

8 Suggested Answers Pe II Cost Accounting Part I

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

8 Suggested Answers Pe II Cost Accounting Part I

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

8 Suggested Answers Pe II Cost Accounting Part I

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SUGGESTED ANSWERS

MAY, 1981 NOVEMBER, 2008

PAPER 4A: COST ACCOUNTING

CHAPTER 1 Basic Concepts and Product Cost Sheet 1.1 1.52

CHAPTER 2 Materials 2.1 2.89

CHAPTER 3 Labour 3.1 3.70

CHAPTER 4 Overheads 4.1 4.110

CHAPTER 5 Activity Based Costing 5.1 5.40

CHAPTER 6 Non-integrated, Integrated & Reconciliation 6.1 6.77

CHAPTER 7 Job Costing & Batch Costing 7.1 7.8

CHAPTER 8 Contract Costing 8.1 8.42

CHAPTER 9 Operating Costing 9.1 9.34

CHAPTER 10 Process & Operation Costing 10.1

CHAPTER 11 Joint Products & By Products 11.1

CHAPTER 12 Cost Audit 12.1 12.8

CHAPTER 13 Cost Accounting ( Records) Rules 13.1 13.4

CHAPTER 14 Uniform Costing 14.1 14.8

CHAPTER 15 Inter-firm Comparison 15.1 15.4

CHAPTER 16 Cost Reduction & Cost Control 16.1 16.2

absence of required information renders planning, control and decision making

(b) Indicate whether the following statements are True or False:

(i) The objectives of installing a costing system in a manufacturing concern and

The main objectives of introduction of a Cost Accounting System in a

Cost Centre : It is defined as a location, person or an item of equipment or a

(Nov, 1997, 2 marks)

Cost classification based on variability

to employ a new or improved method and ends with the commencement

the pa yment of wages. The treatment of idle time, over-time and

batch of similar products is treated as a job and cost of such a job is

selling and distribution overheads as a percentage of works cost, based on

(b) COST SHEET

PRODUCTION COST 1 28,80,000

Other data are : Rs.

Less: Opening stock of finished goods 17,600

Less: Closing stock of finished goods 19,000

Marketing promotions 1,50,000

Fire insurance -plant & equipment 7,500 (F) 5,35,000

The loss is fully covered by insurance company. The insurance company

3. Cost of goods manufactured

(i) Finished goods inventory, 31.10.2003

(ii) Work-in-process inventory, 31.10.2003:

Add: Indirect manufacturing cost 1,48,167

(iii) Direct material inventory, 31.10.2003

Statement of present and future Cost of a radio

Particulars cost future cost

In an engineering company, the factory overheads are recovered on a fixed

(May, 1995, 16 marks)

Job 101 = (Rs.96,000 + Rs.42,000F) + (Rs.96,000 + Rs.42,000F)A=

(iii) Statement of jobs, showing amount of factory

(iv) Selling price of Job

Labour (Subject to a minimum of Rs. 56,010 per month) 8

(ii) Fixed overheads Rs. 1,68,750 per annum

60% of capacity for first two months = 2 months6,000

3. Calculation of semi-variable overheads (per annum):

Distribution DepttSalaries and Expenses 18,000

Further details are available as follows:

(iv) Distribution of the following costs:

Less: Cost of Sales 7,14,020

Requisitioned by _ Checked by __ Approved by